加载中...
共找到 38,868 条相关资讯
Ulrika Hallengren: Welcome to the presentation of Wihlborgs' 9-Month Report 2025. There's an old saying when you think you can see the light at the end of the tunnel, beware, it could be an oncoming train. We never know what will happen ahead, and we try to be prepared for whatever we can think of. But let us be clear, we see some glimmer here and there, maybe not the full ray of light yet, but nice glitters in the horizon. It's a very busy report week for all of you, so I will try to be short and precise. That means standard procedure about the last results of our continued growth and some new records, but also some figures regarding loyalty among our customers, how we can calculate retention rates and not at least our view on future occupancy. We start with a summary of the quarter, July to September. Rental income up 6%, a new record at SEK 1.101 billion; income from property management, plus 11%; net letting positive at SEK 6 million; net EBIT to EBITDA at 10.3x, good access to financing. And as said many times before, but this still stands, demand remains for good quality in good location, and we are proud to be able to continue with the project investment that gives continued good potential for growth. Looking at the whole period, first 9 months, rental income up to SEK 3.243 billion, plus 4%. The operating surplus increased to SEK 2.334 billion and income from property management increased by 12% to SEK 1.482 billion. The result for the period amounts to SEK 1.370 billion, corresponding to SEK 4.46 per share and EPRA NRV has increased by 10% to SEK 96.23 per share adjusted for paid dividend. A comparison of the rental income first 9 months '24 and first 9 months '25. Indexation gives plus SEK 30 million; acquisition, plus SEK 90 million; currency effect, minus SEK 21 million; additional charges, plus SEK 21 million; and completed projects, new leases and renegotiation plus SEK 8 million. And here is also a new higher property tax of approximately SEK 15 million included. So higher vacancy today than a year ago, but small improvement since last report and during 2026, the improvement from new leases will show. And the streak of positive net letting continues, plus SEK 6 million in the quarter, plus SEK 65 million for the period and in total, new leases at a yearly value of SEK 300 million signed in the period. For the third quarter, the volume of new leases of SEK 66 million is good. And maybe I expected the net letting to be a bit better than SEK 6 million, but we got a late termination of SEK 16 million from a tenant who I'm not sure if they really want to move or just renegotiate. Discussions are ongoing, but the total termination is registered. So a possible upside ahead, 42 quarters in a row with positive net letting. Here are some of the tenants that we have signed during Q3, a combination of expanding tenants and new tenants from many industries, health care, insurance, biomaterials and a company that manufactures equipment for land-based fish farms as examples. And here, we have the net letting in a historical perspective, lettings in green, termination in light blue and dark blue stacks are the net letting. And as mentioned, quite high volume of new leases for being a third quarter. And the list of our 10 largest tenants in alphabetic order, strong customers, and they contribute with 20% of our rental income. 7 out of 10 are governmental tenants and the public sector contributes with 23% of total rental income. Rental value as of 1st of October is SEK 4.889 billion per year, plus 7.2% and rental income, SEK 4.379 billion, plus 4.6%. Effects from acquisition, indexation and higher willingness to pay for the right quality. Looking at like-for-like figures, all the properties we owned a year ago, excluding projects compared with updated figures, we can see that rental value is up 2.4% and rental income is down 0.8%. The growth in the rental market is supported by indexation of 1.6% in Sweden and approximately 1% in Denmark last year. Indexation ahead in Denmark expects to be a bit higher, and that will be reflected in the rental levels for 2026. I think the September number was 2.3% or something. Lower rental income in like-for-like is an effect of higher vacancy than a year ago. And at least, it's encouraging to see that vacancy appears to have bottomed out in several areas. More on that topic later. Changes in the market value of our properties. We started the year with SEK 59.168 billion in accordance with the external valuation of 100% of our portfolio. We have made acquisition, which adds on SEK 2.552 billion; in investment, SEK 1.911 billion; divestment, minus SEK 114 million; changes in valuation, plus SEK 450 million. And together with currency translations of minus SEK 500 million, that summarizes to a value of SEK 63.457 billion. The valuation this quarter have no changes in valuation yields, indexation or other underlying parameters. Expectation ahead is more likely to be positive, if I may guess. These figures, the running yield show how we actually perform in relation to the valuation, so not the valuation yield. For the whole portfolio, the occupancy rate is 90%, excluding projects and land and with an operating surplus of SEK 3.326 billion, that gives a running yield of 5.6%. Fully let, the portfolio would give a running yield of 6.4%. Good earnings capacity in relation to the value of the portfolio and good cash flow generation is the foundation also ahead. Occupancy is slightly up looking at the decimals since the last quarter and at least that is in the right direction. In the office portfolio, the market value is SEK 50.394 billion with an occupancy rate of 91%, 92% in Malmö, improved to 90% in Helsingborg, 90% in Lund and 92% in Copenhagen. The improvement has started and will be clearer during 2026. Operating surplus from offices summarized to SEK 2.755 billion and running yield of 5.5%, 6.2% fully let. The demand for logistics and production continues to be good in Malmö with an occupancy of 93%, lower occupancy in Helsingborg at 83%, 91% in Lund with a small portfolio and 96% in Copenhagen. 87% occupancy rate as a whole with a running yield of 6.4%, 7.5% fully let at a total value of SEK 8.988 billion. As mentioned before, we continue to see harder competition in the third-party Logistics segment with very quick changes in needs. That also means that occupancy can improve quickly when the market changes. But I assume that vacancy in the southern parts of Helsingborg will be a bit sticky since the area will go through a makeover that would take a number of years. But as mentioned before, still a decent running yield of 6.4% even with the high vacancy and the market as such continues to be interesting. The development of our total portfolio running yield, 5.6% brings stability, not least since the portfolio overall has a high quality and good location. As noticed before, a high increase of the running yield since 2021. Some sustainability highlights from Q3. We have been appointed as Global Sector Leader by GRESB, completed a battery storage in Lund and actually one in Helsingborg as well. We have signed more sustainable -- sustainability-linked loans, also including Scope 3 carbon dioxide performance, and we continue to reduce our energy consumption. As a new example, we have reduced the electricity used for heating and cooling by 50% at Ideon Gateway in Lund, including both offices and hotel. New cooling technology and of course, the Janne solution is the answer. And something about what our customers think about us. Our latest customer satisfaction index from now in September shows an index of 79 and a loyalty score of 82, very high numbers. Tenants are especially happy with our personal service with 88% satisfaction, our competence scoring 86 and accessibility score 85. Let me just say that I totally agree with our customers. I'm also very satisfied with my competent and service-minded colleagues. I give them 100 out of 100. A catalog of our value and properties in our 4 cities in Q3, 39% of the value in Malmö, 23% in Helsingborg, 17% in Lund and 20% in Copenhagen. The region and especially these 4 cities continues to be of high interest for future growth, both in population growth forecast, which will otherwise be a challenge in many places and in a number of new workplaces. And time for financials. Over to you, Arvid. Arvid Liepe: Thank you very much, Ulrika. Looking at the income statement for the third quarter isolated. Are we on the right slide? There we are. Thanks. Rental income grew by 6% to SEK 1.101 billion, and operating surplus increased by 4% to SEK 790 million. There are a couple of things to bear in mind looking at those 2 numbers. First of all, we've been through a new property taxation, and we got the new taxation values this summer. The taxation values are higher, which means that the property tax also is higher. The property tax -- the new property tax is applicable from 1st of January. So we have, you could say, a catch-up effect. So we -- the changes for all 3 quarters are accounted for in the third quarter numbers. That means that on the rental income line, as Ulrika mentioned, that has been affected with plus SEK 15 million from increased property tax, and on the operating cost side, our operating surplus has been affected with minus SEK 20 million from the increased property tax for the first 3 quarters during this year. So the ongoing -- or the future effect of the increased property tax will be smaller on a quarterly basis than you can see in the Q3 numbers. It's also important to bear in mind that on the rental income line, we've had a negative effect from currencies of minus SEK 7 million, and that same currency effect on the operating surplus line has been minus SEK 5 million. The income from property management amounted to SEK 495 million. We've had a small positive impact there from FX since we borrow a lot in Danish kroner as well. Income from property management up 11% versus the same quarter in 2024. We had positive value changes in the quarter of SEK 103 million. And all in all, a profit for the period of SEK 487 million. Looking at the balance sheet. The value of our property portfolio is now SEK 63.5 billion, up SEK 5.6 billion versus 12 months previously. Equity stands at SEK 23.5 billion, up SEK 1.2 billion versus 12 months previously. And during that time, we have, as you know, also paid approximately SEK 1 billion in dividends to our shareholders. And our borrowings are SEK 33.2 billion, SEK 3.5 billion higher than 12 months previously. Translating that into key numbers, our equity assets ratio now stands at 36.2%. The LTV has gone down from the last quarter to 52.3% and the interest cover ratio for the period stands at 2.8x. Looking at some per share numbers, I'd just like to highlight the EPRA NRV value at SEK 96.23 per share, which is up 10% adjusted for dividends versus 12 months previously. On the next slide, you can see the historic development of EPRA NRV, a stable growth over many years and the average annual growth adjusted for dividend is actually 15%. Moving on to the historical development of our financial ratios. The equity assets ratio at 36.2%, as you can see, is well above the 30% that we have set as the minimum level for ourselves and also on decent levels in a long-term historical perspective. The loan-to-value in the perspective of approximately 10 years has come down from around 60% now to 52.3%. And the interest cover ratio, as we've talked about before, has been very variable, especially during the special period when we had almost 0 interest rates when we had an extremely strong interest cover ratio. The rate is now stabilized and 2.8x is a quite decent level to be at. On the next slide, you see the net debt in relation to EBITDA, also that's in a long-term historical perspective. The ratio stands at 10.3x. It varies with a couple of decimals up and down, but being at 10.3x is a comfortable level for us. Looking at our sources of financing, we still have approximately half of our loans from bilateral bank agreements with Nordic banks, about 1/3 from the Danish rail mortgage system and 17% from the bond market. I would say that the banks are definitely more proactive in their lending efforts than they have been for many years actually. And we do see bank margins gradually moving downwards. The bond market has also -- as we noted already in the Q2 report, the bond market is a lot stronger than it was a year ago, and we can issue unsecured bonds at quite attractive levels in this market. The structure of our interest rate portfolio, you can see on this slide. The average interest rate is 3.29%, 3.33% if you include costs for unutilized credit facilities. We have both in the past quarter, but also if you look over the coming couple of years, we will have some effects of attractive interest rate swaps expiring, but we also see an effect of the margins that we pay to banks and in the bond market coming down somewhat. So overall, over the coming few quarters, I would expect the average interest rate to be reasonably flat. And yes, we can move to the next slide and see the development of the fixed interest period, which has gone up a touch in the quarter. It's now 2.7 years. And the average loan maturity in the loan portfolio is 4.8 years. And lastly, from my side, looking at available funds, we have unutilized credit facilities plus liquid funds of SEK 2.9 billion at the end of the third quarter, which gives us, in our view, enough financial flexibility to manage operations and seize opportunities in a good way. With that, I hand the word back to you, Ulrika. Ulrika Hallengren: Thank you. And an update on our investment in progress and a quick overview of our largest project. During the period, we have invested SEK 1.911 billion, and it remains SEK 2.730 billion to invest in approved projects, good volume in all our cities, a reasonable yield on cost with 6% or a bit above 6% for new build offices and 7% or a bit above that for industrial and a good mix of refurbishment and new build in the portfolio. Let's start in Copenhagen with our project at Ejby Industrivej 41 in the beginning, planned as and decided for a multi-tenant transformation, but with a 15-year lease with Per Aarsleff turned into a single-tenant building. 24,000 square meters, investment SEK 231 million and yield on cost a bit above 6%. Completion is planned to February 2026. The large project at Amphitrite 1 in Malmö has started off really well, a bit about 20,000 square meters for Malmö University at a 10-year lease. We have started at site with deconstruction. And during September, we got the building permission from the municipality. Completion is planned to Q4 '27 and procurement will be completed shortly. In Malmö and Hyllie, we continue with Bläckhornet 1 VISTA, an SEK 884 million investment. The mobility hub has already been completed and the office will be completed in Q1 '26 and during '26. Yield on cost, 6.2% and today, approximately 40% pre-let. The best possible product and low competition from new build in the area, but we still need more activity and more decisiveness from our customers before we are satisfied. An example of top-level refurbishment in Malmö is Börshuset 1. This is an almost iconic building right beside the train station, 6,000 square meters, offices, restaurant and co-working and absolutely top rents in a Malmö perspective. Completion in Q1 '26 and moving in will continue during '26. Pre-let, 95%. At Kranen 7 in Malmö, we will invest approximately SEK 136 million in a preschool for the municipality, 2,900 square meter zoning plan approved and completion is expected to Q3 '27. Public procurement act starts now. And at Sunnanå 12:54, 17,000 square meter logistics, 100% pre-let in a 15-year lease will be completed 1st of December '25, SEK 280 million investment and yield on cost close to 7%. In Lund, we are building a new modern office right beside the Central Station, Posthornet, phase 2, 10,100 square meter, yield on cost, 6.5% and completion Q2 '26. Pre-let, a bit above 40% today. But together with ongoing discussions, I believe we can reach approximately 70% before year-end, keep our fingers crossed, and very attractive product. And at Vätet 1, also in Lund, we continue with refurbishment and adding on areas for our new tenant, Arm, 5,700 square meters and a 7-year lease, investment SEK 145 million, excluding value of the land, and yield on cost a bit above 10% and over 6.6% yield on cost, including ingoing property value. In the southern part of Lund, we continue to develop of Tomaten. This product for BPC, completion Q2 '26 and investment SEK 79 million, 3,600 square meters and yield on cost 7%. Next to that, at former Stora Råby 32:22, now named as Surkålen 1, we have been able to improve since the project started. Tenants will be both Note and Lund University. So well-used land area and long leases. In total, 14,500 square meter completion in Q2 for Note and Q4 '26 for Lund University. Investment, SEK 260 million and yield on cost 9.2%. In Hörsholm, Copenhagen, we invest in a new school for NGG, 25-year lease, 11,600 square meter and investment SEK 390 million. Completion in Q1 '26. And at Giroströget in Höje Taastrup, the refurbishment for Novo continues, 62,000 square meters. Our investment is limited to SEK 423 million and completion is expected in Q1 '26, but Novo also pays rent during the refurbishment period. That was some of the ongoing project and just to touch on future possibilities as a repetition. 4 possible projects in Lund and Helsingborg, where we can develop some 70,000 square meters in the future. Zoning plans are approved for the first few projects and ongoing at Västerbro in Lund and some of the office possibilities in Malmö in the area of Nyhamnen and Dockan. High interest for the future, of course. If you should ask me which projects of these will be the next one, my best guess today is that will be none of these. The Ideon site in Lund is developing very well, and we have building rights there that might be of high interest for the growing defense and tech industries. Early volume studies have started, but nothing I can show yet. And the summary of Q3 again. Rental income up 6%; income from property management, plus 11%; net letting positive, net debt to EBITDA at 10.3x and good access to financing. And we will continue with a focus on cash earnings and future growth. We have been able to grow every year during different economic environment since 2005. We know how to adapt, find new ways and we will continue with this knowledge and ambition. Growth and cash flow is our passion and the compound interest effect of stable growth is hard to beat from SEK 7 billion to SEK 63.5 billion without any new equity from our shareholders. We have been able to grow, thanks to continued investments. They contribute to upgraded attractiveness and new demands and what comes first, higher rents or investments, have no answer, but these factors have a relation. Here is a graph showing the market rents for prime offices in Malmö and our quarterly investments during the same period from 2010 to present. The green bars represent our investment and the green line represent rent levels. And finally, a market outlook. Employment growth in our region continues. Office rents show long-term growth. Wihlborgs' project investment increase over time. Tenants on average, stay in the premises for 14 years, which support the strong customer satisfaction score. And if we just take the largest leases we have signed, we have a volume of some SEK 320 million moving in from now until end '27 and during the same period, terminations of some SEK 190 million, a good gap. So possibilities for growth is in sight. And with that, we are open for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Oscar Lindquist from ABG Sundal Collier. Oscar Lindquist: So firstly, on projects. The 2 projects completed in the quarter, Galoppen and Kranen, how much did they contribute in the quarter? And how much should we expect into Q4? Ulrika Hallengren: They didn't contribute in the quarter, but will contribute for the full Q4. Oscar Lindquist: And then on the Sunnanå project, from when should we expect contribution from that project? Ulrika Hallengren: Also from 1st of October. No, 1st of December, sorry. Oscar Lindquist: 1st of December. Okay. And then the Börshuset project was moved to Q1. What's the reasoning? Ulrika Hallengren: The tenant will start moving in there. So there's no delay in the project, but it's a difference between when the building is completed and when tenants moving in. So I think the -- we will have a ceremony there in February, but the rent will be started to pay in Q1. Arvid Liepe: However, everybody does not move in Q1 of the signed leases. Ulrika Hallengren: Correct. we have moving in during the whole '26. Oscar Lindquist: Yes. And then if we move over to net letting, you mentioned a late termination of SEK 16 million in the quarter. When do you think you will know if they terminate or extend their contract? Ulrika Hallengren: We have calculated as terminated and discussions are ongoing. So I guess now during Q4, there will be a decision if they stay or... Oscar Lindquist: Yes. And if they terminate the impact would be in 9 to 12 months or what's fair to expect there? Ulrika Hallengren: Just a minute. 2027, from 1st of January 2027. Oscar Lindquist: Okay. And then -- so if we adjust for that termination, net letting was positive SEK 22 million. What's the mix here between projects and existing properties? Ulrika Hallengren: In the quarter, I don't have that figure right away. But I think actually that the existing portfolio contributed very well this year and also in the quarter and also good contribution from all our cities, at least for the 9-month period. So I would say that we see positive signals in all our 4 cities. Oscar Lindquist: Okay. So effectively [indiscernible] Arvid Liepe: It's -- in the quarter, I would say, without -- I don't have the exact figure either, but I would say that more existing properties than projects during this quarter in the net lettings. Oscar Lindquist: Okay. Perfect. And then if we look on the Bläckhornet project and the Posthornet project, how is discussions going there? You improved the occupancy slightly in Bläckhornet now in the quarter. What's your sort of ambitions closing in on completion? Ulrika Hallengren: Our ambition is to improve, of course. It's a very good product. And -- but the volume is quite large. So something tends to take longer time when you can choose of good things in many levels, so to speak. So I can't give a figure when I think it's -- but I think we will continue with the work for letting also during 2026. That's reasonable to think that. But let me also mention that we see a good -- we have signed new leases in [indiscernible] in the same area. And also, actually, we -- the portfolio we bought 1st of April, there was some vacancy at [indiscernible], for example. And that is now, I think, 20%, 30% vacancy, and that is now fully let. So there is definitely activity out there. Oscar Lindquist: And would you say sort of the outlook or discussions with the tenants has improved in the quarter and going into Q4 or... Ulrika Hallengren: Yes, I think so. But it depends. One day, you think it's slow and one day you think it's very active. So -- but overall, I would say that there's more positivism out there. Oscar Lindquist: Yes. And then on occupancy, it's essentially flat Q-on-Q, and you sort of alluded or guided to improving occupancy in the second half. Could you quantify what you expect in -- or what we could expect in Q4? Ulrika Hallengren: I especially guided on occupancy in offices in Helsingborg, and that have improved 2% during the year. And otherwise, I think that we will continue to have some improvements, but not quick improvements since we also have -- I mean, for example, SAAB will move out the 1st of January '26, and that will take some time before we have entering new tenants there. But a very good example of that is that we have already signed new leases for that building with new tenant moving in a year. So only 9 months for refurbishment. And I... Arvid Liepe: For part of the building. Ulrika Hallengren: Yes, for part of the building. So they take -- yes, [ they'll likely ] take one part of the building, and we also have good discussions for more areas there which might also end up in moving in, yes, I mean, October next year or so. So quite quick period between moving out and new tenants moving in. And not for the total volume, but at a good part of it. So... Operator: The next question comes from Eleanor Frew from Barclays. Eleanor Frew: Just one question from me. So on rental growth, your chart clearly shows there's prime rental growth, but can you comment on the more secondary assets? What's the rental growth you're seeing there? And is there any negative re-leasing on those poorer-quality assets? Ulrika Hallengren: I mean, of course, when you look into the absolutely best location and top rent levels, that is one area. If you just take a small step from that and still good location and good quality, the rent levels continue to develop well. If you go to more poorer area, we have not a large amount of equity there. So I can't really give a good guidance. But of course, it's harder to find higher levels of rents in poorer area. There will be a larger difference there in the market as it is today. Operator: The next question comes from Lars Norrby from SEB. Lars Norrby: I'm a bit late into the call. So cut me off if I ask a question that somebody else has already asked. But I have a follow-up on a question I heard, and that was about the occupancy rate, once again, flat in the quarter. Just to be clear, I mean, you have some 6 projects or so being completed in the first quarter of '26 and then you talked about that SAAB moving out. But based on what you know today, has the occupancy rate bottomed out? And at what point in time do you expect it to improve, at what stage in '26? Ulrika Hallengren: I would say that for the whole portfolio, I think the vacancy has bottomed out, but we can see for a shorter time or period, higher vacancy in some areas, for example, when SAAB moves out and before we have new tenants in place. But we meet that well with new rental agreements. So yes, I think we have bottomed out and will improve, but the improvement isn't a quick shift. It will take some time. And especially during 2026 and end of 2026, as mentioned before, we have a quite large volume coming in. But also now in Q4, we have good volumes coming in from Galoppen and Sunnanå, for example. So yes. Of course, we want the occupancy to be even higher, but still, it's good to see that we have flattened out and are on the up-going way on the occupancy again. Lars Norrby: Second and final question. 2025 has been a year where you're growing through projects, but also through a quite substantial acquisition. Looking ahead, '26, '27, is it very much all about projects? Or are you considering adding additional size of any magnitude through acquisition as well? Ulrika Hallengren: I expect that we will see a combination. It's good with the project volume because you can manage that and plan for that. And acquisition is harder to plan for. But we continue to be active and trying to find the best premises for us. And of course, it's an interesting period we're in. Lars Norrby: And just a quick follow-up on that. In what geographic area? Are we talking primarily about Copenhagen then? Or is it more likely to be in Sweden? Ulrika Hallengren: I think there is interesting things going on both in Sweden and Denmark. So we try to be active on both places, both countries. And as mentioned, I mean, you can't plan for transaction if you want them to be the best things for you. So of course, you can be aggressive and try to buy whatever, but we will continue to be picky on what we want to go into, of course. Lars Norrby: Sounds good. I hope you don't buy whatever. Ulrika Hallengren: We will not. Operator: The next question comes from Oscar Lindquist from ABG Sundal Collier. Oscar Lindquist: So I just had a follow-up question on the property tax you mentioned weighing on the NOI margin. So the effect in this quarter was SEK 5 million, as I understand it. Is that correct? Arvid Liepe: On the operating surplus line, yes. A negative effect of SEK 5 million. Oscar Lindquist: Yes. But going forward, will you be able to sort of pass on the full increase in property tax to tenants? Arvid Liepe: Not 100%, but the very largest part. I mean, we do have some vacancies, for example, and we have a very small proportion, but still a few inclusive contracts, so to speak. Oscar Lindquist: But then significantly lower than the SEK 5 million we saw this quarter? Arvid Liepe: Yes. Operator: [Operator Instructions] There are no more phone questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any written questions and closing comments. Ulrika Hallengren: Perfect. Thank you. Have we got any written questions as you can... Arvid Liepe: Let me double check. Not that I can find. No. Ulrika Hallengren: No? okay. So of course, you're welcome to come back to us whenever with whatever asked questions. Thank you for this. Arvid Liepe: Maybe we should conclude. This may actually have been a record quick presentation. Ulrika Hallengren: Definitely, 42 minutes. It's our quickest [ version ] , I think. We try to be precise and quick, but that was part of it. Arvid Liepe: Thank you, everyone, for listening in. Ulrika Hallengren: Thank you.
Kati Kaksone: Good morning, everybody, and welcome to Terveystalo's Q3 Results Call and Webcast. My name is Kati Kaksonen. I'm responsible for Investor Relations and Sustainability here at Terveystalo. As usual, we'll go through the result highlights with our CEO, Ville Iho; and our CFO, Juuso Pajunen. And after the presentation, you will have a chance to ask questions. I will take the questions from the phone lines, as well as through the webcast, after the presentation. Without further ado, over to you, Ville. Ville Iho: Thank you, Kati, and good morning from my behalf. Let's dive directly into Q3 highlights. As you can see from the numbers, this quarter 3 was a quarter of margin improvement amid a revenue headwind. So the EBIT -- adjusted EBIT margin developed positively; very strong operating cash flow; EPS developing positively as expected; very high NPS, taking all-time highs all the time; but then with a decline of some 5% top line, adjusted EBIT in absolute terms slightly down. Double-clicking into different P&Ls and their role in the business, how they are contributing and continue contributing in the future, starting from Sweden. Just as a reminder, Sweden is in a phase still of turnaround. We have been adamant in the fact that we continue focusing only on turnaround and profitability improvement. Sweden is getting -- our Sweden team is getting the results. The underlying efficiency is continuously improving. The results continue to improve. The market being fairly muted at this stage still, we are not making proper profits yet. But looking at next year, volume development looks positive, and we start making results, and then it's time to focus on growth. Portfolio Businesses, quite the same story. The profitability turnaround has for large parts happened. Some minor fixes in smaller businesses, but the bigger businesses are doing fine and developing positively. Now, it's time to grow, and we are eyeing specifically in 2 different segments, as we have said before, dental and then opening public market. Healthcare Services, our biggest business, margin on a very, very high level, really strong, starting from a very strong position. Now, our eyes and focus turn into volume growth, and we continue to boost that one with selective specialties-driven M&A, and then investments in digital delivery and capabilities. Further double-clicking into the strategic agenda, as I said, Sweden profitability improvement program, [ Gamma ], almost done and dusted. Efficiency in all-time high level. Now, looking at organic and potentially inorganic growth there on a solid base. Portfolio Businesses, as I said, profitability improvement done and dusted. Now, organic growth in dental and also inorganic growth in dental and public partnership being relevant in the opening market when health care counties are actually starting buying, where we have seen positive signs already. Inside Healthcare Services, we are seeing very strong development in our consumer-driven businesses. We continue boosting that one, Kela 65 being a prime example of sort of a positive drive. Also in insurance business, our position continues to be strong and developing nicely; out-of-pocket in good place and developing positively against the low morbidity. We have reorganized our operations and our delivery model so that there's clearly separate brick-and-mortar delivery through our health care services or hospital network, and then, now, forcefully and decisively scaling up the digital health 10x, where we are eyeing at major leaps in efficiency, in transactions, more intellect in our patient and customer steering, and then finally, truly scaling up truly digital health care services, tech-based services, nurse services and in very near future also, AI-supported health services. Among all the positive developments, the challenge currently, which we'll further discuss is in occupational health care. We know exactly where we are. We know how to turn around the negative development. There we have a program called [indiscernible], led by new SVP, Occupational Health care or Corporate Health, Laura Karotie, and that one will be discussed in more detail. So, all in all, agenda, very clear, sort of 9 out of 10 moving very fast to the positive territory, more focus needed for occupational health care, which will be fixed. Looking at the volume development and our sort of view on markets in near term, next 12 months, starting from the smallest, Sweden, as we have communicated many times, the market has been very soft. Swedish economy has driven the demand for occupational health care services very low. Now, looking forward, both the market seems to be picking up. Sweden economy is doing better next year. But more importantly, looking at our internal view on the sales funnel, commercial activities, sales funnel looks positive. And when we are able to do, in next year, more volume on higher operating leverage, of course, then we'll start making money. Portfolio Businesses, public business, as all know, has been very, very slow in buying. Health care counties are only sort of picking up the buying activities. What we see in large tenders and also in smaller tenders is increased activity. And looking at the next 12 months, we see the market developing positively. Same goes with the consumer business. It has been fairly muted due to low confidence of consumers. We have seen already some positive signs, specifically in the dental services, which typically is the most sensitive for consumer behavior, and we expect the positive drive and vibe to continue for next 12 months. In public business, when we jump over to Healthcare Services, in public services produced by health care services units, it has come down and it has brought -- or contributed to lower volumes in Healthcare Services. We see that one bottoming out, and next 12 months should be more positive. Consumer business, even though our own position has been strengthening, has been fairly flat due to low morbidity. But with the sort of normalized view on that one, our strong drive in Kela 65 and insurance business, we see that one developing positively also going forward. Insurance business, equally, it has actually been the growth driver inside Healthcare Services, continues to be so. Number of insured persons in Finland continues to slowly pick up, and use of services is on a high level. Occupational health care, finally, so we'll double-click on the development, what has contributed to lower volumes in Q3, but very shortly, it's number of connected employees, sort of thinner scopes in the agreements by the corporate clients, and then inside those agreement scopes, lower use of services. All of these are slightly negative from our business point of view. It's been negative. It's going to stabilize. But specifically, number of connected employees will not be sort of turned around in 1 quarter. We'll turn that one around, but it will take a couple of quarters to get to -- again to all-time highs. If we dive deeper into this phenomena, as you can see, and it's good to remember the phases that we have seen in the development over the last couple of years and quarters. In '22 and '23, in the number of connected employees, we were pushing all-time highs. At the same time, as you remember, the profitability of this business was really, really low. And we struggled with the low contribution to rest of the business and hence, the Alpha program. With the Alpha program, we totally turned around the profitability of not only occupational health care, but the company. With that one, of course, the -- some of the less profitable agreements went out. And now, we see also some unintended tail effects of the Alpha period. Now what we are doing is, of course, we are rebalancing products, pricing, offering, and it's not going to be either or. It's going to be both, so both profitability and volumes. Occupational health care, as I said, is the biggest focus area in our agenda currently. It will be turned around with our program. It's a comprehensive exercise of renewing, partly even transforming sales and account management, our product offering to become more relevant and according to expectations by ever-demanding customers. And then, finally, digital front renewal, which we now can accelerate and fast track with our MedHelp joint venture. And our customers will see tangible results already from Q1 onwards on this area. Positive thing -- a very, very positive thing in our portfolio is consumer side, so combined insurance, Kela 65, out-of-pocket area. Our brand is doing fine. And that's, of course, one of the basic building blocks for boosting this business. We are the most preferred brand when we look at the brand preference development. We have been so. But now, we are all-time high. Also in top of mind, the company, health care services company that Finnish consumers think about them when they wake up in the morning, that's now Terveystalo for the first time. And that itself gives a very solid base for further improvement in this business. We have invested heavily in services. We invested heavily in digital engagement with our consumer customers. We have invested in Kela 65. And in that particular new segment, we are a clear leader in that developing market. Finally, Juuso will explain in detail the strength of our finances, the profitability, cash flow and balance sheet. We continue increasing our investments in our digital capabilities. It's an ever-increasing value driver in our business model. And we have some key focus points and developments in that digital ecosystem. For the professionals, we have launched the Ella user interface and digital front door and continue scaling that one up. And that's going to bring tangible efficiency improvements during next year in our sort of traditional brick-and-mortar appointment activities. For individual care, looking at -- looking from a customer's point of view, as I said, it's very much in the core of our 10x agenda. We are making leaps in efficiency, in transactions related to our incoming traffic and customer contacts. We are going to further improve the leading capabilities that we today already have in patient steering and customer steering. And then, finally, we'll make efficiency leaps in text-based appointments, text-based digital appointments, nurse services and introduce first AI-supported health services in very near future. In occupational health, as I said already, we are now in a very good position to migrate our occupational health capabilities, digital capabilities into new MedHelp environment. It's best-in-class in Europe. And our customers, as I said, they will see tangible results and fully a new view and sort of better control on their own people, own organization, sick leaves, workability, starting from Q1 next year when we start deploying new system to first customers. All in all, we are, in this digital journey, in very strong, very good place. Our architecture is where it should be. Our initiatives, projects create value, not in years, but rather in months, and we are confident in investing more and getting more yield out of the digital engine. With that one, over to you, Juuso. Juuso Pajunen: Thank you, Ville. So good morning all. I'm Juuso Pajunen, CFO of Terveystalo, and let's talk about the financial performance in the third quarter. So first of all, if we look at the whole group, we have the positive margin development continued despite the revenue headwinds. This was, in relative terms, the second best Q3 during the group's history, and the best one was during the COVID times. So what I want to highlight is that our efficiency is in place, our machine is [ ticking ]. But also having said that one, we do know that we can't be happy on the growth and especially the revenue development when it comes to occupational health care. So if we look at the big picture, portfolios in Sweden improved both in relative and absolute profitability, while they are still facing anticipated negative growth. So portfolios in the outsourcing businesses in Sweden, we are still coming from the efficiency hunt and now going for the growth mode. And then, with Healthcare Services, we have the strong margin, but the headwinds in the occupational health and the morbidity have been pushing the growth negative, like Ville also explained a bit on the occupational health part. So then, if we look first on the Healthcare Services, I will double-click in the next slide on the growth, especially what comes to visit growth. So let's park that question. But all in all, the performance, what comes to the relative profitability, it was really solid. We had the decline in revenues, headwind in the markets. And despite those ones, we were able, through solid cost control and our flexible operating model, to keep our profitability in a good place, especially remembering that this is the low season Q3. And for the growth, we have a strong plan. And in the longer perspective, I still remind you that the megatrends will continue to support our long-term outlook [ what ] comes to the growth. So then, let's see the visits. Let's address the elephant in the room. So basically, we can split our visits growth. So now, we are talking about the volume. We can split it into different type of buckets. First of all, we have the morbidity. So, that one is basically seasonal. We have no control over that one. And we had plenty fewer visits compared to previous year. And this is part of normal seasonal variation, and it changes annually. We have -- then if we go into the occupational health care, we have different factors behind the decline. We have basically macro-driven components. So the general employment in Finland is lower than earlier, and we have a sluggish economy, and that one also then impacts on the employers' behavior. So basically, they are implementing cost reduction initiatives due to own economic pressures and push, and that one impacts on our demand also. So, a concrete example on that one would be narrowing down the contract scopes on what they offer to their employees. Then we have the third component, which goes into more on what we have done ourselves. As Ville explained, how our profit improvement program has been progressing and how the -- despite having very high amount of connected employees, our occupational health business was not super profitable. Now, we have very efficient machine, profitable business, and we need to load further volume on that one and get then the benefit of the operating leverage. And for that part, we have a solid strong program ongoing, like Ville mentioned. The name is [indiscernible]. And we are confident that by implementing that program, we will address the weaknesses we have had, and we would expect to see growth in the number of connected employees in the coming year. In public sector, especially the capacity sales, which is a minor part in the Healthcare Services segment, but it is in a very low level due to the wellbeing county setups and all of that one. But now we have seen that the sales pipeline is opening up and the market is little by little finding its form. And then, we have the positive momentum, Kela 65 consumer insurance market where we have been growing and we have been able to capture positive momentum. And that one, we will obviously continue pushing. The experiences from Kela 65 are very positive from the patient perspective and also from our perspective. So with all of this one, there are various factors impacting our growth, and we will address especially the occupational health part decisively when going forward. Then if we go into the Portfolio Businesses, we have clear improvement in profitability. We have been able to improve the EBIT margins continuously, 2.2 percentage points up compared to previous year. And then, we have the momentum in especially public sector business. Outsourcing, we have been guiding you that it will most likely decline EUR 30 million this year, and we are on that trend, on that pattern and continuing on that one. On staffing, we started to have revenue headwinds during roughly a year ago, and now those ones are stabilizing out. And part of that one was also our own selection on how we address the market. But now little by little, the positives are coming, markets are opening up. Wellbeing counties are more and more capable of also buying and willing to buy. So this market momentum is little by little turning. And then, we have the consumer part that is growing. It is performing positively, and we will obviously continue to push on that part. So solid performance improvement in the portfolios when it comes to profitability. Then in Sweden, we are also improving both absolute EBIT and relative EBIT. We are still showing heftily negative numbers in a very seasonally low quarter. So Q3 is always difficult and weak in Sweden due to how the offering behaves during vacation period. In here, what I'm really proud is that our efficiency continues to ramp up. We have -- we continuously see, on our KPIs, positive development what comes to occupancy rates, but also we start to see that one on a monthly gross margin levels going up. So we are now getting into an efficiency place, and we will load further volumes on top of that one. We have a solid sales pipeline that supports us getting back on track and on heftily numbers. So program is in plan. Improvements are now continuously more visible also in the backward-looking income statement, and we will push forward. However, there is a weak market environment still in Sweden as a totality. So the macro has not recovered yet to the full extent. But despite macro, we are able to push Sweden back to good numbers in the coming year. Then, if we look at our investments, we've been continuously investing in technology. We have been stating since the Capital Markets Day last year that we will land somewhere between 4% to 5% of revenues in the longer perspective on the investments. Now, we are at 3.4%. We are heavy in digital. We have been talking about Ella, our professional user interface and related flows. You have seen, during the quarter, investments in MedHelp, the joint venture, which will be the digital front door in our occupational health. And then, some may have seen that we have deepening our collaboration with Gosta in the artificial intelligence and ambient scribing, further improving our tools. We have a good momentum. We have solid technology road map, and we have capability to invest. So we will continue on doing on that one. And then, in inorganic growth, the market is there, and we are evaluating different type of opportunities. And for those opportunities, we had a solid quarter for cash flow. We are now in the green bucket again. As was the [ negative part ] normal seasonality, so is this one. Our cash profile has not materially changed, and there is no reason to believe it materially changes either, so normal volatility. We are the Swiss clock we have been. We tick, tick, tick cash. And then, our leverage ratios, 2.1 at the moment, so we have powder to continue investing. So positive financial position, and we can definitely do organic and inorganic investments. Then, if we look for our guidance, basically this is unchanged. So despite some market headwinds, we reiterate our guidance after the second best third quarter ever. So we are expecting our adjusted EBIT to be between EUR 155 million and EUR 165 million. These are based on the current demand environment, employment levels and morbidity rates. So normal disclaimers, nothing new on that one. What is good to note maybe that the implied range for Q4 seems highish compared to previous year Q4. But then, you need to look back on your notes and remember that in previous year Q4, we had especially personnel-related items that we don't have this quarter -- this year in Q4. So the baseline adjusting needs to be a bit taken to understand our Q4 performance. So all in all, I'm happy to reiterate our guidance, EUR 155 million to EUR 165 million in total. With these words, let's invite Kati on stage and let's have a Q&A. Kati Kaksone: Thanks, Juuso. I think we are ready to take questions from the phone lines. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Anssi Raussi from SEB. Anssi Raussi: Maybe I'll start with your guidance as you mentioned that as the last item here. So you already said that there were some special items in your comparison period. But how should we think about underlying assumptions here? Like, does it require any improvement in the market sentiment or something you are not seeing yet to reach your lower end of the guidance range? Juuso Pajunen: I think that's a very relevant question. So, at the moment, the guidance is based on the current market environment and the current morbidity rates. So it already factors in, like always when issuing the guidance, everything we know up to yesterday evening. So the current guidance assumes lowish morbidity rates and the occupational health market in the conditions we know at the moment. Anssi Raussi: Got it. That's clear then. And maybe the second question about your occupational health care. So I think you said that maybe you lost some connected employees due to your profit improvement program. So do you think that it's possible to increase the number of employees or connected employees without sacrificing some of your profitability gains in this program? Ville Iho: Yes. Again, a good question. So, as I said during the presentation, it is not going to be either or, so either volume or profitability. It's going to be both going forward. It requires some balancing in our sort of offering and pricing, but we are not going to sacrifice the profitability just for the sake of absolute volume. Anssi Raussi: Okay. So maybe continuing on that one. So when we look at your -- of course, you showed your appointment volumes and the impact of prices. So how should we think about the pricing going forward in the coming quarters or years? Ville Iho: So, of course, the cycle is very much different than it was, let's say, 2, 3 years ago. The pressure on the -- contracts pressure on prices is, of course, higher post inflation cycle. And we should not -- or you should not expect as sort of a rapid price development going forward. Now, it's more on the how we package our products, what is the mix in our sort of agreement portfolio, and how efficient are we under the hood in delivering those services. And then, final component is the volume. So the growth cannot be, for example, next year, driven so much by the price increases as we have seen during last -- or past 2 years. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers. Kati Kaksone: All right. It's a busy results day today. I think there are some 30 companies today. There's one question in the webcast currently from DNB Carnegie from Iiris; two parts. Regarding the plan to address the revenue headwind, can we talk about when do we actually expect to see these measures to become visible in the top line and whether we plan to provide any financial estimates of the sales or earnings impact of those actions? Juuso Pajunen: If I start, like I actually hinted a bit, or not even hinted, written out loud in the bridge that we would expect the connected employees' impact to be visible in '26. And that's obviously coming from the nature that if you today win something before it's visible and the connected employees are part of our portfolio, that, especially in the big cases, is a matter of months rather than anything else. So we would expect on '26 the impact. And at the moment, obviously, our financial guidance relates to Q4 and full year '25, and we will come back for the total guidance for '26 along with Q4 publication. Ville Iho: Yes. Again, the only caveat is sort of with what Juuso said, this is that -- as I said before, we are not hunting the volume with the price of profitability. So it is going to be both profitability and revenue and also volumes. So we are not repeating the mistakes that the company did some 6, 7 -- or 5, 6, 7 years ago. Kati Kaksone: Maybe then, continuing on that one, a follow-up question from Iiris. We talked about an update to our product offering in the occupational health to make it more relevant for our customers. Can we give some examples on what that means in practical terms and where we expect to see the largest positive impact? Ville Iho: It's down to the segmentation of different needs amongst our customers. Of course, we are serving 30,000 -- roughly 30,000 different companies in Finland. And there's a wide spectrum of different type of needs and appetites also to pay for the services. Now, when we are talking about sort of transforming or renewing the products, typically, it concerns the sort of customers who are more sort of keen on looking at the price and value for money type of sort of comparisons. And there, we do have strong means inside the company to steer the services across our vast network. We have not used them to the full extent. So what I mean is that if there's a company whose main focus is to get things to a certain level and then look at the spend after that one, we have means to serve that type of customer. If there's a customer that wants to maximize the services to the employees, then we can serve that type of customer. If there's a product, which is priced with a fixed contract, we have means to control both the profitability, delivery and cost for that type of customers. And that type of steering capabilities will be sort of utilized to full extent now going forward. So we have the flexibility. We have different type of delivery models, and we are also renewing sort of commercial packaging of these type of different models. Kati Kaksone: Yes. And of course, MedHelp is a concrete example of the value increase that we can show to our customers in a relatively short term as well. Ville Iho: Absolutely. It's going to be the next level. Kati Kaksone: Good. Then, a question on the public outsourcing tenders and the outlook there. Besides the tender of Pirkanmaa wellbeing services county, which was won by our peer yesterday, are there any larger tenders opening up at the moment? Ville Iho: Well, there's one other which we know of. And then, I think what's going to happen is that health care counties are watching very closely each other. And when somebody is opening a path, then the rest will follow, specifically if there's a successful implementation of a certain model. So we believe that this is only a first step, this [ Pirka ], and congrats to Pihlajalinna for good competition and a nice win in there. Kati Kaksone: Yes, indeed. Then maybe a question to both of you. Can we talk about the M&A pipeline? How does it look at the moment? Juuso Pajunen: Yes, if I start, so basically, it is fair to say that M&A opportunities are now little by little emerging in different type of segments. And we are, as we have said, happy to do disciplined M&A when we see an opportunity to fill a blank, whether it's a technology bank, offering blank or other blank. So, that market is little by little activating, and we are and we will be active in that one. Ville Iho: Yes. There's -- just looking from sort of a short history perspective, where we have been and where we are now and potentially will be, the activity on our desk is way higher than it has been for 5 years or so -- 5, 6 years, sort of post-COVID or during COVID times. This is sort of an all-time high activity. And there are sort of real potentials out there. Of course, you always need to get to the -- get over the sort of finish line to get something materialized. But the funnel is there, and it's strongest that it has ever been during my term in Terveystalo. Kati Kaksone: Yes, definitely signs of picking up there. Then a couple of questions from Matti Kaurola, OP. We mentioned that the insurance business is growing fast. Are there any possibilities to take more market share from other players in that segment? Ville Iho: Well, I would say, it's not growing fast. It's growing steadily. So it's -- coverage of insurances in Finland has been developing positively, and then use of services have been developing positively. We have gained market share over the 2 last years. And then, further gaining market share, of course, requires also new means and new type of value creation for insurance companies. I think we have a strong plan there, which we continue implementing. The bigger moves, in my view, will happen only in 2027. Next year will be more like a steady progress in this segment. Kati Kaksone: Of course, we have a clear attack plan for 2027 to deepen the cooperation with the insurance companies. Then, maybe continuing on the outsourcing market and the well-being services counties, how do we look at the public outsourcing market in general in the future? Is it attractive? And is it a part of our core offering and our business going forward? Ville Iho: Well, we explicitly said earlier that we are interested in this new type of outsourcing deals. We were part of [ Pirka tender ]. And one can say looking now in hindsight, the competition and the outcome that each and every out of 3 main players were on the ball in sort of pricing and offering the package. So very close margins who won and who did not win. When it comes to profitability, of course, this would have not been sort of the richest agreement, but still value-creating, EPS enhancing, which is the key for our business model. So when this type of tenders come to the market, we are interested. Kati Kaksone: Indeed. At the moment, we don't -- we have one more question from the phone lines. Let's take it now. Operator: The next question comes from Anssi Raussi from SEB. Anssi Raussi: One follow-up from me. So you also mentioned these somewhat extraordinary costs last year in Q4 and that there were some one-offs related to employee expenses. But can you remind us like what kind of amount we are talking about that you consider one-offs in Q4 last year? Juuso Pajunen: Yes. So basically, compared to baseline in last year, if you go into the details, you remember that we paid EUR 500 per employee to all employees an extra bonus. And based on the CLA, there was EUR 500 per employee fall all under CLA. So that's the personnel expenses I referred to. And then, if you go into a bit deeper, you see that there was a bit of accelerated amortizations and depreciations in the income statement in Q4 last year. So, that one you need to put your finger into yourself, but normally, forecasting depreciation and amortization is not super difficult. Kati Kaksone: Thanks. With that, I believe we don't have any further questions on the phone lines or from the webcast. So any closing words? Over to you, Ville. Ville Iho: Well, as discussed earlier, a quarter of improving margins with revenue headwind; strong agenda to further accelerate the areas where we are progressing well and to tackle the headwind in occupational health care; investments with the dry powder provided by [indiscernible], used more and more to digital offering, where the agenda is -- strong architecture is there and delivering tangible results. Kati Kaksone: Great. With that, we thank you for your time, and have a great rest of the week. Juuso Pajunen: Thank you. Ville Iho: Thank you.
Operator: Good morning. The Roper Technologies conference call will now begin. Today's call is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to turn the call over to Zack Moxcey, Vice President of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Zack Moxcey: Good morning, and thank you all for joining us as we discuss the third quarter 2025 financial results for Roper Technologies. Joining me on the call this morning are Neil Hunn, President and Chief Executive Officer; Jason Conley, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer; Brandon Cross, Vice President and Principal Accounting Officer; and Shannon O'Callaghan, Senior Vice President of Finance. Earlier this morning, we issued a press release announcing our financial results. The press release also includes replay information for today's call. We have prepared slides to accompany today's call, which are available through the webcast and are also available on our website. Now if you please turn to Page 2. We begin with our safe harbor statement. During the course of today's call, we will make forward-looking statements, which are subject to risks and uncertainties as described on this page, in our press release and in our SEC filings. You should listen to today's call in the context of that information. And now if you please turn to Page 3. Today, we will discuss our results primarily on an adjusted non-GAAP and continuing operations basis. For the third quarter, the difference between our GAAP results and adjusted results consists of the following items: amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, transaction-related expenses associated with completed acquisitions; and lastly, financial impacts associated with our minority investment in Indicor. Reconciliations can be found in our press release and in the appendix of this presentation on our website. And now if you please turn to Page 4, I'll hand the call over to Neil. After our prepared remarks, we will take questions from our telephone participants. Neil? Neil Hunn: Thank you, Zack, and thanks to everyone for joining us and excited to be with you this morning. As we turn to Page 4, you'll see the topics we plan to cover today. We'll start with our third quarter highlights and financial results. Next, we'll review our segment performance, our AI progress and momentum and our most recent set of bolt-on acquisitions. Then I'll get into our guidance details and of course, wrap up with your questions. So with that, let's go ahead and get started. Next slide, please. Turning to Page 5. Let me run through the 4 key takeaways for today's call. First, we had a strong third quarter. Total revenue grew 14%, organic revenue grew 6%, software bookings grew in the high singles area, and we continue to deliver impressive free cash flow with free cash flow growing 17%. And of note, free cash flow margins posted at 32% for the TTM period, really impressive financial results. Second, we're super encouraged by the progress and momentum we're seeing across all of our businesses as it relates to our AI enablement and our product stacks and our internal operations and more on this in a moment. Third, we're announcing today our first share repurchase authorization, $3 billion in total. And lastly, we continue to execute on our M&A strategy of acquiring faster growth platforms and bolt-on or tuck-in acquisitions at a high fidelity rate. In the quarter, we deployed $1.3 billion, $800 million for Subsplash, which we detailed this time last quarter, and $500 million on a series of tuck-in acquisitions. Also more on this later, but worth highlighting here, we are very encouraged by this recent capital deployment execution and the future growth potential that's being layered into our enterprise. Importantly, we remain very well positioned for the continued execution of our M&A strategy and continue to have north of $5 billion of capital deployment capacity available over the next 12 months or so. As I turn the call over to Jason, reflecting on the quarter, I'm quite bullish on most of what we're seeing, a very strong 3Q, real demonstrable AI progress, which is a long-term growth driver for us, excellent execution of our higher growth, higher returning capital deployment strategy and the announcement of our first-ever buyback authorization. This all bodes very well for the future. That said, we'd like to see some of our markets start to cooperate a bit better, namely the government contracting and freight markets, and we have some delays in Neptune. Much more on this as we walk through today's call. So with that, let me turn the call over to Jason to talk through our P&L and our balance sheet. Jason Conley: Thanks, Neil. Good morning, everyone, and thanks for joining us today. I'm pleased to take you through our third quarter results and strong financial position. Turning to Page 6. Q3 and TTM results reflect the long-term financial profile of Roper, which is to compound cash flow in the mid-teens area. We'll start with revenue, which was 14% over prior year and surpassed the $2 billion mark. Acquisitions contributed 8%, led by the final quarter of Transact before it turns organic and CentralReach, which we acquired in April this year. Of note, these businesses are tracking very well against our acquisition expectations. We printed 6% organic growth, both for the consolidated enterprise and across each of our 3 segments. Our Application and Network Software segments were in line with expectations, while TEP was a bit below given near-term timing at Neptune, which Neil will discuss further. EBITDA of $810 million was 13% over prior year with EBITDA margin of 40.2%. Core margins expanded 10 basis points and segment core margins expanded 30 basis points, led by our software segments. DEPS of $5.14 was 11% over prior year and $0.02 above the high end of our guidance range despite absorbing $0.05 of dilution from Q3 acquisitions that were not reflected in previous guidance. Free cash flow was outstanding at $842 million, up 17% over prior year and representing 32% of revenue on a TTM basis. Our software businesses captured strong renewals, and we drove great working capital performance across the board. Broadening out a bit, TTM cash flow of over $2.4 billion is a 17% CAGR over a 3-year period. And for those looking at per share metrics, you'll note that our share count has compounded at about 0.5% over that same time period. At Roper, we have been and will continue to be relentlessly focused on cash flow and shareholder value creation. Now let's turn to Slide 7 and discuss our very strong financial position. Our net debt-to-EBITDA stands at 3x, which is up only modestly from Q2 at 2.9x despite deploying $1.3 billion towards acquisitions. This places us in a great position with over $5 billion in next 12-month capacity for capital deployment. Regarding M&A, you can see that we've been quite active this year in acquiring high-quality growth businesses and several strategic bolt-ons. This is against the backdrop of a muted PE deal environment. The pipeline of high-quality acquisitions continues to build as assets mature in PE portfolios and a return of capital to LPs becomes paramount. Additionally, as Neil mentioned, we're pleased to announce another capital deployment lever that was previously unavailable. Our Board has authorized a $3 billion share repurchase program with an open-ended time period to execute. While M&A will continue to be the majority of our capital deployment allocation, our share repurchase program will allow us to opportunistically complement our M&A program. Over the last year or 2, we have talked about the great business building taking place across the Roper portfolio from strategy to talent to execution, all now greatly turbocharged by AI. Our repurchase program reflects both confidence in our strategy and our commitment to delivering long-term shareholder value. So with that, I'll turn it back over to Neil to talk about our segment performance. Neil? Neil Hunn: Thanks, Jason. Turning to Page 8. And before we get into our segment details, we want to discuss why AI is a powerful and durable growth driver for Roper. To start, AI represents a meaningful expansion of our TAM across the portfolio. We can now deliver transformational software solutions that automate labor-intensive work adjacent to our existing platforms. This creates substantial new value streams for our customers and correspondingly facilitates long-term growth for Roper and our businesses. Importantly, our businesses are uniquely positioned to win in AI, in fact, having a very high right to win in the AI world. Our software solutions are deeply embedded system of record applications with workflow-oriented domain-specific architectures. The decades of cumulative workflow knowledge built into our platforms, combined with the proprietary vertical market data, provide the precise context needed to develop Agentic AI solutions. Because of this, our businesses have an exceptionally high right to win as we deploy these capabilities across our VMS end markets. Internally, we're becoming AI native across all functions to drive productivity gains. We're excited to reinvest these gains to further accelerate our product development and go-to-market initiatives. It's important to note, we've always had more great ideas than resources needed to execute, and AI has the potential to attack this challenge. Finally, we have tangible proof points, though it's still early. Aderant has claimed a technology leadership position in legal tech, accelerating their bookings growth. CentralReach now has roughly 75% of their bookings attributed to AI-enabled products, which have automated 100 million reimbursement rule evaluations, over 3.5 million learner appointments and over 1 million clinical summaries being generated, great real-world examples of the power of AI. Deltek has released over 40 AI features into their cloud offerings, driving increased cloud conversion activity. And DAT has industry-leading AI/ML-enabled freight matching capabilities, which I'll detail shortly. These are but a few examples from across the portfolio. Very exciting times for sure. With that, let's now turn to our segment review, starting with Page 10 and our Application Software segment. Revenue for the quarter grew by 18% in total and organic revenue grew by 6%. EBITDA margins were 43.4% and core margins improved 40 basis points in the quarter. Starting with Deltek. Deltek delivered solid performance in the quarter with particularly strong results in their private sector end markets. Construction, architecture and engineering remained robust throughout. The GovCon business experienced softness in September as agencies paused activity ahead of the pending government shutdown. This timing is unfortunate. Pipeline activity and commercial momentum had been building nicely following the passage of the one big beautiful bill in July, and we are seeing increased engagement across our customer base heading into the new fiscal year. The fundamentals remain strong. The OB3 authorized significant increases in defense and infrastructure spending that will flow through to our customers once appropriations are finalized. This is simply the timing issue, not a demand issue. Finally, retention levels across the entire Deltek franchise remain very high. Aderant continues to be incredibly strong and continues to post impressive bookings and recurring revenue growth. The booking strength is broad-based, fueled by their AI-enabled solutions, especially as it relates to AI-enabled compliant time capture and billing and is a combination of market share gains, cloud migration and SaaS growth. Vertafore continues once again to be steady and solid for us. We continue to see consistent ARR growth and strong customer retention and strength across their agency, MGA and carrier solutions. This growth is enabled by their strong go-to-market capabilities and their long-term commitment to product strength. PowerPlan's performance has been terrific. Their success is a result of several years of business building in the product stack, the go-to-market capabilities, their service delivery really across all functions. In addition, to remind everyone, they serve power generation customers, which are adding capacity as quickly as possible to handle the AI workloads. The setup here should be quite good for a long time. Also in the quarter, we completed the acquisition of Orchard, a tuck-in acquisition for our Clinisys business. Orchard brings additional clinical laboratory capability to Clinisys with particular strength in reference, physician office and public health labs. Finally, the balance of our application software portfolio continues to execute very well. CentralReach was awesome again in the quarter, driving accelerating adoption of their AI tools and capturing ABA therapy capacity additions. Procare made a great installment of progress with new bookings continuing to be strong, posting low double-digit growth in payments with improved gross margins, though still work to do, in particular, with faster implementation time frames and share of wallet expansion, but meaningful progress for sure. Finally, Strata and Transact were steady and solid in the quarter. As we look to the final quarter of the year, we expect to deliver mid-single-digit organic revenue growth. This outlook reflects high single-digit growth in our recurring revenue base, offset by declines in nonrecurring revenue, primarily due to anticipated softness in our Deltek business stemming from the ongoing government shutdown. Given the uncertainty surrounding the duration and impact of the shutdown, we see potential outcomes across the full range of our MSD outlook from the lower to the higher end. That said, our businesses in this segment continue to compete and execute exceptionally well. The primary variable remains a higher level of market uncertainty than we typically experience for our Deltek business. Please turn with us to Page 11. Total revenue in our Network segment grew 13% and organic revenue 6% in the quarter. EBITDA margins remained strong at 53.7% with core margins improving 60 basis points. As we dig into the individual businesses, we'll start with DAT. DAT was solid in the quarter and had strong ARPU improvements. DAT continues to execute exceptionally well on their core strategy of driving enhanced network value for both brokers and carriers. This dual-sided approach positions DAT to better monetize their entire network ecosystem and more on this when we turn to the next page. ConstructConnect was solid again for us in the quarter. The growth was fueled by strong customer bookings activity and improved customer net retention. Of note, this business continues to make good progress with our emerging AI-enabled takeoff and estimating solution. Foundry is turning the corner on growth, posting continued sequential improvements in ARR, and we expect our Q4 exit ARR to grow year-over-year in the HSD area. Really happy for the team there as they've had to work through some tough market conditions. Next, our network health care businesses, MHA, SHP and SoftWriters were very good in the quarter. Of particular note, SoftWriters is executing at an exceptional level, winning a few very large pharmacy customers and making substantial progress on a high-impact AI solution, which is being beta tested in the market currently. Congrats to Scott and his entire team for their success. Finally, Subsplash, our most recent acquisition that closed on July 25, is off to a great start, delivering financial results in line with our deal model expectations. Of note, they saw very good market traction with their AI-driven [ sermon ] content offering, Pulpit AI, and they deepened its integration with their core engagement platform, driving strong product-led growth, exciting stuff. As we turn to the outlook for the final quarter of the year, we expect to see organic revenue growth at the higher end of the mid-singles area. As we turn to Page 12, we'd like to spend a few minutes describing the strategic evolution of our DAT business and why we're so excited about its future growth prospects. To start, our legacy DAT platform is the largest freight matching network across the U.S. and Canada. The scale is remarkable, over 1.2 million loads posted and 15 million rate views every single day. DAT is the clear market leader, delivering tremendous value to both freight brokers and carriers, both of whom pay to participate in this powerful network. As strong as the legacy business is, we're even more bullish about where DAT is headed. To bring this vision to life, DAT is building capabilities across the entire freight automation workflow from carrier vetting to broker carrier matching to AI-driven rate negotiation, load management tracking and finally, payment and settlement. Through deep customer partnering with the brokerage community, DAT is working to fully automate the freight matching process. As this happens, DAT will generate $100 to $200 per load in savings for brokers while giving carriers greater predictability and faster payments on their invoices. What sets DAT apart is this end-to-end product capability and its role as a neutral trusted partner, a Switzerland-like player that equally serves the entire freight brokerage market. This is a truly unique position in the market. This evolution also highlights the Roper DAT partnership at its best. We work closely with the DA team to craft this strategy, then we executed a focused M&A program to strengthen it through 3 strategic tuck-ins: Trucker Tools, Outdo and Convoy. With the deals complete, DAT is now fully focused on delivering against this strategic opportunity. Important to note, Convoy is an unusual transaction for us as it currently is not profitable, but we expect the financial returns over the next several years to be extremely attractive. The key to success is scaling efficiently, leveraging DAT's advantaged customer unit economics for both brokers and carriers to drive sustained growth and profitability. We are confident in this strategy, market position and DAT's ability to execute. I know this was a bit of a deep dive, but we wanted to share with you why we're so excited about the growth opportunity that sits in front of DAT, true AI-based freight automation. Now let's turn to Page 13 and review our TEP segment's quarterly results. Total revenue here grew 7% and organic revenue grew 6%. EBITDA margins came in at 35.2%. Let's start with Neptune. As we've said before, Neptune continues to execute really well, particularly around its ultrasonic meter strategy, and we're seeing strong traction in its data and software billing solutions. The new copper tariff that took effect on August 1 caused some short-term disruption. Neptune responded by implementing surcharges to offset the tariffs impact, which temporarily slowed order timing. These actions reflect the benefit of being part of Roper, doing the right long-term thing for customers and the business even when it creates near-term headwinds. Verathon continues to perform well. In particular, during the quarter, Verathon saw continued strength in its single-use recurring product lines, both BFlex and GlideScope, which remain key growth drivers. NDI also delivered an excellent quarter. As we discussed previously, NDI provides proprietary world-class precision measurement technologies to a range of health care OEMs. These technologies in turn enable guidance-enabled solutions across multiple clinical markets, including orthopedic surgery, interventional radiology and cardiac ablation. Finally, we saw strong execution and growth across CIVCO, FMI, Inovonics, IPA and rf IDEAS, rounding out a solid overall performance for this group of companies. Looking ahead to the fourth quarter, we expect organic growth in the low single-digit area given the very difficult prior year comp and the timing we discussed at Neptune. Now let's turn to Page 15 and review our Q4 and updated full year 2025 guidance. Starting with the full year outlook, we continue to expect total revenue to remain in the 13% area. Also, given the delays at Neptune and the temporary impact of the government shutdown, which is slowing year-end commercial activity at Deltek, we now expect organic revenue to land in the 6% area versus our previous 6% to 7% range. Relative to our full year DEPS outlook, we're tightening guidance to the high end of our prior range after adjusting for $0.10 of dilution from the $500 million of tuck-in acquisitions completed during the quarter. Specifically, we now expect adjusted DEPS to be in the range of $19.90 and $19.95. We expect to see our tax rate at the lower end of our 21% to 22% area for the full year. For the fourth quarter, we're establishing adjusted DEPS guidance to be between $5.11 and $5.16, which includes $0.05 of dilution for last quarter's tuck-in deals. Now please turn with us to Page 16, and we'll open it up to your questions. We'll conclude with the same key takeaways with which we started. First, we had a very good third quarter with exceptional free cash flow. Second, we're super excited about the pace of AI innovation and the growth potential in front of our enterprise. Third, we're announcing a $3 billion authorization for a share repurchase. And finally, we remain super well positioned for further M&A activity. Relative to our financial results, we grew total revenue 14% and organic revenue 6%, grew EBITDA 13% and delivered 17% free cash flow growth in the quarter. AI is a significant growth driver for Roper, expanding our TAMs by automating tasks and work across our vertical market offerings. With deep workflow integration, proprietary data and vertical market-specific architectures, our businesses are well positioned to succeed in AI, in fact, have a very high right to win and are already seeing measurable yet early product and commercial results. DAT exemplifies this strategy in action, evolving from a traditional freight matching network to a fully automated freight marketplace powered by AI. Through this transformation, DAT is unlocking significant efficiency and economic value for brokers and carriers alike, positioning itself for improved high-quality growth. As Jason mentioned earlier, we're excited to announce a $3 billion share repurchase authorization, which will deploy opportunistically, enabling us to take advantage of dislocations in the market. We're super confident with our talent advantage, our strategy and our execution capabilities, and this first-ever buyback is evidence of such. Importantly, we remain exceptionally well positioned to execute our M&A strategy. We have north of $5 billion of available firepower over the next 12 months and a very active, large and attractive pipeline of opportunities. Importantly, Roper continues to strengthen its position as an acquirer of choice for both target CEOs and their private equity owners. As always, we'll pursue these opportunities with our consistent, unbiased, patient and disciplined approach. Prior to turning to your questions and if you flip to the final slide, our strategic compounding flywheel, we'd like to remind everyone that what we do as Roper is simple. We compound cash flow over a long arc of time by executing a low-risk strategy and running our dual threat offense. First, we have a proven powerful business model that begins with operating a portfolio of market-leading application-specific and vertically oriented businesses. Once the company is part of Roper, we operate a decentralized environment so our businesses can compete and win based on customer intimacy. We coach our businesses on how to structurally improve their long-term and sustainable organic growth rates and underlying business quality. Second, we run a centralized process-driven capital deployment strategy that focuses in a deliberate and disciplined manner on cultivating, curating and acquiring the next great vertical market-leading business or tuck-in acquisition to add to our cash flow compounding flywheel. Taken together, we compound our cash flow over a long arc of time in the mid-teens area, meaning we double our cash flow every 5 years or so. So with that, we'd like to thank you for your continued interest and support and open the call to your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first question comes from the line of George Kurosawa with Citi. George Michael Kurosawa: Great to be on the call here. Wanted to first touch on kind of the high-level organic growth picture. I think you can -- took a step back this quarter, but I think you can certainly argue there are some onetime or short-term dynamics at play here. Maybe just if you could frame your confidence in a reacceleration from here, particularly as we start to sharpen our pencils for '26. Neil Hunn: Yes. Appreciate it. Thanks for being on the call this morning. So the -- yes, I think you're right. I mean the reason that was a little rough this quarter were the 2 reasons we talked about, the commercial activity at Deltek with the government shutdown and then this tariff-related impact at Neptune. As we think about '26, I mean, it's a little early for us to get super detailed about '26. But if you sort of roll sort of segment by segment, it's been pretty -- in application, it's been pretty consistent trends there throughout '25. Deltek and government contracting should improve next year given the passage of OB3. I think the timing of when that improves is still up in the air a little bit. We'll see that as we get through our planning and roll into next year. But there's definitely sort of improvement happening in that market given the spending attached to OB3. In the Networks segment, it's been pretty consistent over the last 3 quarters. There is sort of a comp thing in the first quarter. So pretty consistent over the last 3 quarters despite the sort of the headwinds in the freight market. We'll have to see how the freight market evolves next year, but really like the business building we're doing at DAT, as I talked about. As I also mentioned, foundry is going to be better next year. And then on TEP, the Neptune order patterns likely continue normalizing the pre-COVID sort of lead time levels. Orders there have been pretty good. It's just the lead -- and the lead times are going to continue to shorten. NDI is poised for a couple of strong years, but we really need to get through our planning process to have more clarity on how TEP is going to play out next year. But all in all, we feel pretty good about the trends in GovCon, Foundry, CentralReach and Subsplash turning organic in the second half of next year and the general business building. But as usual, we go through a pretty exhaustive Q4 planning process, which we kick off in a couple of weeks. George Michael Kurosawa: Okay. That's super helpful color. And then maybe just one quick follow-up here on the AI strategy. I think you disclosed 25 products last quarter. I'm curious if you have an updated number just to give us a sense for the pace of innovation and just more generally, how you feel businesses are coming up the AI curve here. Neil Hunn: Yes. We feel very, very good. I won't rehash all the prepared comments about why we feel that way. But we're going from having a large number of products and key features. We talked about the 40 AI features in the Deltek core that's driving sort of the cloud migrations and SaaS. But increasingly, we're seeing sort of AI SKUs. So we feel real good about that. Now we've got to get through the commercial activities as we release these SKUs across essentially every one of our software businesses now and in the first half of next year that we got to go sell them and commercialize them and then the momentum will sort of pick up from there. But feel very good, very high right to win, a lot of compounding of knowledge about how to do all this stuff internally. This is -- you can hire some talent, you got to build it. So we feel real good about that. A lot of internal sharing that's going on, which is great to see, a lot of momentum. So we can certainly talk more about that, but feel great about where we are on the AI front. Operator: And the next question comes from the line of Brent Thill with Jefferies. Brent Thill: Just on the buyback, I guess, maybe walk through the strategy, why not leaning harder into M&A versus -- I believe this is your first buyback ever. What drove that decision? Neil Hunn: Yes, I appreciate it. The -- so just to be clear on what it is. So it's $3 billion. It's open-ended timing. It's opportunistic and in no way, shape or form, a change in our strategy. Set this in the context of the amount of capital we have to deploy over the next 3 years is somewhere in the $15 billion to $20 billion range. So it's not a change in any way, shape or form. The rationale for it is pretty straightforward. We just have a ton of conviction in what we're doing. And in terms of the talent we have on the team and that lead our companies, the strategies, the AI execution, the general continuous improvement execution, the business building we're doing. And we think this buyback is just clear evidence and support for our conviction there. But we're going to maintain a strong bias towards M&A. The compounding nature of the numerator is better than the denominator. It's just straight math. We're super active on the M&A front. We cultivate every day. In fact, our Janet Glazer leads our capital deployment efforts had a fantastic meeting 3 or 4 weeks ago, I think, with 18 CEOs of companies that are in the pipeline, so a marketing event, and it was met with great reviews, and we're really becoming sort of a buyer of choice, both for the CEOs of companies and also the private equity sellers. So we feel real good about the execution of our M&A strategy, and this buyback is just a small complement to the overall strategy of Roper. Brent Thill: Okay. Neil, I know the last couple of years, we've had a couple of things that maybe haven't gone the way you wanted to. The question is just how do you derisk this out of the guide? And I think investors have looked at the portfolio and said that you get the diversification aspect, but why do we keep having kind of the setbacks if we're that diverse. So that's the question I'm getting. Neil Hunn: Yes. So you're right. I mean we've built this portfolio to essentially take as much cyclicality and cycle risk as you can take out of an enterprise. If you look back over our long history, before we sold and divested all the industrial businesses, we'd cycle up or down 5 to 10 points. Now we're cycling like a point here or there. So we've essentially beaten out ostensively all the cycle risk you can in an enterprise. In this case, it's just -- it's frustratingly bespoke situations. Government contracting, normally, you're in GovTech because of the stability of the end market here. It's been anything but that the last couple of years. Transportation, who would have predicted like a 3-year freight recession. And so it is frustrating these things are stacking on top of each other, but they're bespoke, and we like the construct of the portfolio for sure. Jason Conley: I think the cash flow generation continues to be strong and consistent with what we thought. Obviously, we've had some new deals come in that have been dilutive, but we have been able to sort of push through that. Our guidance is -- adjusted for dilution is pretty close to where we were before. So despite some of the softness we've seen, we've been able to sort of maintain the bottom. Operator: The next question comes from Brad Reback with Stifel. Brad Reback: Software bookings decelerated a little bit sequentially, I think from the mid-teens to the high singles. Was that predominantly Deltek? Or were there other drivers there? Jason Conley: Yes. It was mainly Deltek, a little bit of frontline. We've talked about the -- some of the funding from the DOE. We don't get a ton of funding down to the states, but at the margin, it does slow down a little bit in K-12. But yes, it's Deltek Frontline. Outside of that, it's very strong. So if you look on a TTM, also a very lumpy dynamic, right? Software bookings are -- can be lumpy quarter-to-quarter. TTM is up low single digits -- sorry, low double digits. So I feel good about that trend. And I would also just call out that health care has been particularly strong this quarter. Our Strata business, we combined Strata and Syntellis a couple of years ago, and that's really starting to take hold in the market. So bookings are really strong there. And actually, our Clinisys business is doing quite well, too, in Europe and even in the U.S. with some of the bolt-ons we've done for them to get outside of the hospital, that's starting to gain traction as well. So just some color behind the bookings this quarter. Brad Reback: Great. And then, Neil, I think 2 questions ago, you talked about the rollout of the AI SKUs happening now through the first half of '26 and then needing to sell it. That all seems like we should be thinking about this more of a '27 and beyond organic driver as opposed to '26? Neil Hunn: I think that's a fair -- we're certainly viewing it that way. I think it's a fair assumption. We'll certainly see progress in bookings throughout next year because again, this is across 20-plus software companies and multiple products across 20 software companies. And so we'll see building momentum. But before it has a meaningful impact, I think it's '27 because of the commercial activity that has to go along with the innovation. Operator: The next question comes from Ken Wong with Oppenheimer. Hoi-Fung Wong: Fantastic. I wanted to maybe drill in a little bit on just the organic growth. Any way for you guys to help kind of slice what you might have seen from maybe the same-store sales versus maybe the net new organic that's coming on to the P&L. Hopefully, that question makes sense. Neil Hunn: We want to make sure we're framing -- answering the right question. Essentially, what's the cross-sell versus sort of net new mix? Is that your question? Hoi-Fung Wong: No. I guess what was coming from, let's say, the portfolio, let's say, prior to, let's say, like a Procare, Transact versus the stuff that is now kind of flowing in as incremental organic. What was once inorganic coming in as organic? Does that make a little more sense? Jason Conley: Yes, like what's the impact of Procare coming into organic. A little bit of accretion from Procare, not as we talked about, not as much as we had thought when we did the deal, but it's certainly accretive to the segment. Hoi-Fung Wong: Okay. Got it. And then on the TEP business, I think going into the quarter, I think the expectations were high single digit in the back half. I guess, yet only 6% in the quarter, low single in Q4. Was that isolated to any particular piece? Or was it a little more broad-based? Is it just Neptune? Or should we think about any other pieces that contributed to that slight weakness? Jason Conley: Yes. It was Neptune predominantly. I mean you had -- it was an acute impact in Q3. We always had a little bit of a tougher setup in Q4, but even aside from that, it was definitely down in both quarters -- it's Neptune, sorry Neptune. Operator: The next question comes from Joshua Tilton with Wolfe Research. Joshua Tilton: Hey guys, can you hear me? Neil Hunn: Yes. Joshua Tilton: I've been bounced around a few earnings this morning, so I apologize if it's already been asked. But I guess the #1 question for me is just, is there anything you can give us on the guidance front, specifically for organic revenue growth that could increase our confidence that like you derisked it enough. Maybe you could just like walk us through a little bit further on where the derisking is coming from Deltek versus Neptune and kind of what gives you the confidence that this is a good base to start for the rest of the year? Jason Conley: Yes. I mean I think we've given the outline by segment. And so I think Neil had framed at AS, we've got it at mid-single-digit growth. There could be a range there, and it really depends on Deltek's perpetual license activity and a little bit to a lesser extent, there's a couple of projects at our Transact business that might hit this quarter or next quarter. So that's sort of the range there. And so I think we've given you that. Network is going to be sort of mid-single-digit plus. I think we've -- a lot of that's recurring revenue. And the only thing that can move around is Truckers, right? They can come in and out of the DAT on a monthly basis. So we think we've sort of -- we've got that sort of boxed. And then on low single digits for TEP, I think we've identified where the challenges are for Neptune's tariff activity. NDI works on mostly backlog for the quarter. The others are a little bit less backlog. But just based on the trends and the call downs we had with the business, we feel like that's an appropriate number for the quarter. Joshua Tilton: Really appreciate the color. And just maybe for a quick follow-up. I really appreciate all the color you guys gave on the AI positioning that you guys have and some of the examples. I guess what I'm trying to understand is it feels like every company that we talk to is trying to race to be a winner in this AI world at a pace that we've kind of never seen before. Is there a dynamic? Or do you feel that maybe you guys have this unique AI think tank going on inside of Roper because you have a group or a portfolio of companies that are all marching towards the same AI goal? And then if that's the case, maybe could you share with us how they're sharing knowledge and best practices and what they're seeing across some of the use cases that are already being successful to kind of set up the rest of the portfolio to be just as successful in their AI endeavor? Neil Hunn: Yes, I appreciate that. So I don't know if I would go as far as say like there's some think tank sitting in Sarasota that's like crafting all this. What it is, is we have clarity of purpose, right? So when you're vertical market, system of record, you're going to evolve like system of work, it's everybody -- the portfolio construct is so similar that we're running basically the same play across the 20-plus software companies. There's common purpose and common understanding about that. Then there is a lot of information sharing. Every 3 weeks, there's an AI sort of showcase inside of Roper. We have a few hundred people in sort of talking about 1 company or 2 companies to highlight what they're doing internally or externally, architecture, commercial, whatever it may be. We send a weekly e-mail about sort of where the state of the technology is, the state of the evolution of AI to galvanize the leaders. There's telemetry we're putting into our planning process that we're looking for, for both the product road maps and internal productivity. The group executives who, as you know, coach 6 or 7 businesses each, those businesses are together all the time on all things related to business, AI being a big topic of it. And I could see us in the not-too-distant future, sort of adding some resources at the corporate office at the center that are an overlay to all of that, that are really sort of scanning the horizon for the -- enabling technologies are going and how to apply that technology. Because at the end of the day, this stuff is hard. I mean it's what we're trying to do to identify tasks and work where you have to be deterministic and not probabilistic. It's hard to do. It's good that it's hard because when you do something that's hard, you create this magical moment for your customer, and that's where you can sort of have this win-win relationship on value. And so we're super excited about all that, again, have this high right to win because of all the context and data and decades of sort of accumulated knowledge about how these verticals work. And the final thing I would say is the real unlock for really anything inside of Roper is our org structure, right? where this highly decentralized high-trust autonomous structure, taking an $8 billion P&L gets put into 29 units. You have super talented leadership teams that are highly motivated intrinsically and through our financial reward system to compete and win in the marketplace, and this is the new frontier on how to do that. Joshua Tilton: Sounds like a good setup for AI success. Operator: The next question comes from Terry Tillman with Truist Securities. Terrell Tillman: Two questions. The first question is on software bookings and specifically with Deltek. The second one is going to be DAT. So first, in terms of software bookings, I think you said high singles in 3Q. So what are you assuming in 4Q? And the second part of that first question is, and maybe this is wildly optimistic, but assuming at some point, the government shutdown thesis, could you actually get those licenses in still in November or December? Or are you just assuming that doesn't happen? And then I'll have that DAT follow-up. Jason Conley: So -- yes, so thanks for the question, Terry. So I think for the fourth quarter, we'll see how it plays out. We had a very strong Q4 last year. So the comps are a little tougher, but I think it's the end of the year. And obviously, the pipelines look very strong across our businesses. You're right about Deltek. We're not assuming that's going to hit this year, but we've also seen customers make very quick decisions in the last few days, especially if it's sort of -- they've got an internal budget dynamic that they can utilize. So we're not assuming that at this point, but I will say just for '26, we do feel really good about what [indiscernible] is going to mean for Deltek. Additionally, I mean, just Deltek's had -- the markets haven't been cooperative just in general for the last couple of years. So the demand is definitely there. Deltek has done a lot to their cloud product. They're incorporating a lot of the new AI features that are going to be cloud only. So that should help drive some higher conversion. That's one of our -- I think it's our biggest maintenance base at Roper. So excited about the future, just need to get past this quarter of sort of uncertainty. Terrell Tillman: Got it. And then, Neil, on Slide 12, I like that slide, shows kind of where you've delivered on the platform. I know with DAT, pricing and packaging was an important kind of growth unlock and improvement this year. But now you have this idea of one-click automation and then newer areas that seem like they've expanded the TAM around management and payments. Like is there any way you can frame like how much you can garner now per successful load or transaction going forward with some of this newer technology versus the past or the present as you laid out on that page? Neil Hunn: Yes. I appreciate it. So yes, you're right. So the strategy at DAT, and I've called this out for a few quarters, if not longer, is we have this remarkable business that's a network between brokers and carriers, and we monetize both sides of the network on a subscription basis. And we have -- what we have is the market captured, and we have very favorable go-to-market unit economics, especially on the carrier side because the carrier, you get your authority first, then you probably subscribe to DAT second, so you can understand where you're going to grab your load from. So they -- it's a very efficient go-to-market motion on capture there, very unique go-to-market motion relative to the unit economics. So then the strategy is how do you just scaffold more value on both sides of that network. And then the ultimate value creation is the one you're talking about, which is how you sort of take the labor -- the task labor out of the matching of a broker transaction. As we mentioned today, we broker about -- there's about 1.2 million loads a day on DAT. There's about $100 to $200 in task labor savings for each one of those that's automated. So you can apply whatever percentage you think is fair. I'm going to leave that open at the moment. We have a good indication internally, but some small percentage of the total loads and then some small percentage, a fair percentage of the labor task savings, and you'll get a very large sort of opportunity. Now that's the opportunity. Now we have to go equip it. You've got to make -- we've got to integrate this capability into the TMS of every broker, so it's native. You got to onboard a large portion of the carrier base into this, which we're actively doing. So we're super excited. The early results were like sold out on the broker front. So the early results for integration is great. But there's a business we've got to go build here. And the reason that we're unique in this is that we're truly Switzerland. Like we don't -- we're not competing with the brokers. We're enabling the brokers, and it's a huge value savings for both the brokers and the carriers. Operator: The next question comes from Deane Dray with RBC Capital Markets. Deane Dray: Just want to get a clarification on the timing delays at Neptune. Our experience has been, especially recently going through COVID is once a utility is ready to place an order, they're unlikely to switch. It's already gone through the rate case. It's all a pilot study and so forth. So have they lost any of these orders? Or this is strictly delay at this point? Neil Hunn: No, no, just to be super clear. This is pushed to the right. So what we've done, and I alluded to this in the prepared remarks, is we have this tariff coming through. We at Neptune decided we concurred fully that they're going to assess a surcharge, which then you've got to go essentially recontract or renegotiate with all the open orders about how to do that, and it just puts some gum into the system. It's a little bit easier when you're going through distribution to do that because you have a distribution partner, you can sort of share some of this surcharge with, but when you're doing the direct business, that's a little bit more difficult to do it and a little bit slower. So this is 100% pushed to the right. In fact, Neptune reports, I mean, there was a little market share gain in the quarter for Neptune, but these sort of market share quarter-to-quarter are sort of a point here, a point there, 0.5 point here, 0.5 point there, but the latest report is the share has actually improved a little bit with Neptune in the quarter. Deane Dray: That's really helpful. And then a follow-up, and I'll echo the -- how much we appreciate that spotlight on DAT. And just the idea, can you talk about the implications of making the investment in Convoy. You added that it's not profitable, but just the willingness to subsidize and make that investment so you have this end-to-end automation, but just the implications of a bolt-on that's not profitable. Neil Hunn: Yes. So I'll just -- I'll start and ask Jason to add a little bit of color. In our case, it was very -- it was a unique situation for us. It was very much a buy versus build. This is very complicated. It sounds very easy. It is very complicated, complex algorithms to do this. They have to be absolutely deterministic. It's more ML than AI. There's a very large group of talented engineers that came with the acquisition. They're now part of the DAT sort of franchise. And so it's unique in that it's money losing at the moment, but it's like the final piece to sort of manifest the strategy of DAT and because of what we talked about earlier, we have such high conviction of what's going to happen here. Jason Conley: Yes. I would just add that, I mean, most of our strategies call for tuck-ins that are adjacent and they sort of fold them in. It's like we just did Orchard for Clinisys. That's sort of the bread and butter that we would do for bolt-ons. This is really a technology acquisition that was -- it's really to create a new market. And so I would say that's very rare for us, but we think it's a great opportunity. And so we're willing to make that technology investment. Operator: The next question comes from Dylan Becker with William Blair. Faith Brunner: It's Faith on for Dylan. Maybe expanding on the DAT question. It seems like this end-to-end platform has been in the making for some time. So can you talk about where you see DAT growing as you continue to build out this network and the long-term potential there? And maybe even how this can drive durability despite some of the headwinds we're seeing in freight? Neil Hunn: Yes. So we want to -- so the DAT core business is a low double-digit growth business when you get the benefit of some unit growth versus just packaging and price. So that's the long-term sort of organic growth rate of the core business. When you talk about this sort of this entire sort of tracking automated business, we're talking about adding a capability that doesn't exist in the industry that is multiples of the existing TAM. And so we want to see actual momentum in there before we quote sort of what the acceleration magnitude could be to DAT, but it's exciting for sure. So I know that's a little bit of a -- but not an answer you're not looking for at the moment, but we want to actually see the growth on the field before we call the how much accelerated growth rate that's going to be there. Faith Brunner: All right. No, that's helpful. And then maybe just double-clicking on Deltek. Can you maybe remind us what you guys saw during past government shutdowns and the impact to the business and any potential insulation there? Neil Hunn: Yes, happy to do that. So just to remind everybody, Deltek is 60% GovCon, 40% non-GovCon. We're talking about the 60% of Deltek that's in GovCon. What we've seen is when you have the government shutdown, it's the pending -- it's the potential of the shutdown and the actual shutdown that it just pauses commercial activity. The activity is still there. The pipelines continue to build. There's still discussions because everybody knows the shutdown will end, the government will be operational again, and we have this OB3 spending where we have to -- all that will be awarded and has to be delivered. It's just -- in the height of the uncertainty, there's just not a lot of signing of the purchase orders or the contracts. If this were -- hypothetically, if this were happening in March, we would probably not be calling down the year because there'll be time left in the balance of the year to sort of for the commercial activity to sort of resolve itself. It's just we're sitting here in the last 2 or 3 months of the year, we're going to run the clock out on the year and roll into next year. Operator: The next question comes from Joe Giordano with TD Cowen. Joseph Giordano: Just looking at App Software, I mean, if we strip out the Deltek GovCon stuff for a second and just think about like the acceleration of organic here, what's the catalyst for this? I mean you look back, I mean, it's been small variance, but we're kind of like 3 years around 6%, give or take. So like what in your sense is like really the catalyst to bring this into like a high single to -- more of like a high single framework? Neil Hunn: Yes. So it certainly will help when your largest business -- the largest segment of your largest business can sort of grow at its normalized growth rate. I mean we're a couple of years into sort of a slowdown with the uncertainties across all the government sort of spending so that helps quite a bit when you look at that. We've had -- just going through the businesses, Vertafore is steady for us, a lot of AI opportunity in front of that business, probably takes -- I mean, we'll see some early green shoots of that next year, but as we said earlier, probably more '27. Aderant has been just killing it. PowerPlan, doing a great job. CentralReach will turn organic, which will help. Frontline has been a little sluggish for the last couple of quarters, couple of years -- a couple of quarters, largely because of some uncertainty around the funding coming from what's happening in Department of Education. You've got this hangover from all the COVID spending and it's just now that's getting more normalized. So frontline reaccelerating, which is in the offing in the next couple of years will be super helpful to that regard. And then finally, our Clinisys business for the U.S. part of our laboratory business, the legacy Sunquest has just lagged for all the reasons that everybody knows for 8 years, and now that's turning or that's a mid-single-digit organic growth enterprise for us now. So that starts to help. So we like what's happening here in terms of the growth optionality and growth capability. Joseph Giordano: When you think about the buyback now and you think about the multiple of your stock, like what's the thought process when you're weighing like, okay, here's a $1 billion opportunity here or $1 billion of deploying capital. Like it used to kind of be pretty straightforward with where the multiple your stock was versus the multiple of what you're acquiring, and now it's kind of -- it slipped a little bit. So maybe talk us through how much that's informing your decisions on where to allocate at a given moment in time. Neil Hunn: Yes. For us, it's never been about the multiple of our stock. It's been what's in the compounding math for a cash flow acceleration, what's the best deployment of capital to optimize the long-term cash flow compounding of the enterprise. And now we just have another lever to buyback to put into that consideration set. Operator: The next question comes from Julian Mitchell with Barclays. Julian Mitchell: Just wanted to start off with the outlook for TEP and Neptune, in particular, on the top line. So you had the backlog declining there for sort of 2-plus years. The revenue growth is slowing a little bit. So I just wondered sort of what's the confidence that, that organic growth on revenue doesn't continue slowing into next year, just given those backlog dynamics? Neil Hunn: Well, I think we got to -- so let's be clear about the backlog dynamic. This is about the buildup from the COVID period. I mean pre-COVID, this was -- you might have a couple of quarters of visibility to an order backlog. And it wasn't quite a book and ship business, but much more book and ship than it was when you ran up through COVID. And then all the customers gave us blanket orders that were a year plus out. Now we're -- when I spoke earlier, we're normalizing the order lead times slowly over time. So we -- the backlog grew and it's bleeding down based on this order timing dynamic. Set that apart from the demand environment, the market share environment. So that's point one. Point two, on the more normalizing piece at Neptune on the demand environment is we're just in a cycle now this year, probably next year, where we're just in normalized growth for that business, where the prior 2 or 3 years were accelerated growth because of the hangover from the COVID period. Julian Mitchell: That's very helpful. And then just my second one might be around sort of with all this effort around sort of AI, just wondered what the implication for that might be on your, let's say, core R&D. Is that -- could that be a bigger headwind to core margin expansion in future? And whether there's been any view to sort of looking to acquire more AI-intensive businesses within your overall capital deployment framework? Jason Conley: Yes. So actually, this is Jason. I think the -- it's interesting. We're getting quite a bit of activity using some of the frontier models out there, CloudCode, Codex, Cursor. And so we're not really seeing now. Obviously, we're going through our planning this year, but it's creating a lot of opportunity to just do more with less. And so that's the -- that's our posture is that our R&D envelope will probably stay the same, and we'll just get more out of it. And when it comes to acquisitions, look, yes, we'll look for small tuck-ins that we can do. We just did a really small one for Aderant, and that's not necessarily buying AI talent, but it's providing an AI solution that gets us faster to market. So we'll do those occasionally, I think it's not going to be our primary way to get after AI faster, but certainly will be an option. Operator: And this concludes our question-and-answer session. We will now return back to Zack Moxcey for closing remarks. Zack Moxcey: Thank you, everyone, for joining us today. We look forward to speaking with you during our next earnings call. Operator: And this -- the conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Martin Carlesund: Good morning, everyone. Welcome to the presentation of Evolution's report for the third quarter of 2025. My name is Martin Carlesund, and I'm the CEO of Evolution. With me, I have our CFO, Joakim Andersson. As always, we will start with some comments on our performance in the quarter and then I will hand over to Joakim for a closer look at our financials. After that, I will conclude with an outlook and then we will open up for your questions. Next slide, please. So let's start with the financial and operational highlights in the quarter. And I would like to start by taking the bull by the horns and address the bad performance in Asia. This has been a recurring theme over the past quarters. But unfortunately, this time, it looks a bit worse. We were, as you remember, very cautiously optimistic about the remainder of the year in the last report. And there's really nothing that doesn't say that Q4 could be better. However, we are experiencing a lot of volatility, which makes the near-term performance hard to predict. At this stage, we want to be realistic and keep expectations low. So what are the main reasons behind the Asian development. First is the cybercrime activity that continues to hurt us. Every day and around the clock, we do everything that we can to mitigate the issues. However, some measures do impact also the end users, and this is what makes it tricky. At the point in time, within the quarter, we did too much, causing loss in revenue. On the other hand, if we do too little, we lose to the pilots. Towards the end of the quarter, we found a better balance, but it's still volatile. And we are -- we do constant security updates to our core to increase protection. We will continue to adapt the changes that are working, and to fine-tune the methods that are working well and explore completely new actions as well. I ask for continued patience on this, but rest assured that is a top priority. Additionally, in Asia, the newly regulated markets, Philippines is volatile, which often is the case when operators and players adapt to the new framework. There are also other markets, such as India, that show signs of moving towards regulation, which creates a higher level of uncertainty than before. And to clarify, with showing signs, I mean that the current heated debate and quick and not widely acknowledged political decisions is something that we often see in the very beginning of potential regulation. Over a longer period of time, it will likely not be noticeable, but on a quarterly basis, it will cause variations like the one we see now. With the context of Asia in mind, let's look at the overall numbers. Net revenue came in at EUR 507.1 million, corresponding to a year-on-year decline of 2.4%. EBITDA amounted to EUR 336.9 million, and the EBITDA margin came in at 66.4%, which is within the range of our full year margin target of 66% to 68%. What stands out as positive in the quarter is the performance in Europe, which is back to growth quarter-on-quarter compared to the first half of the year. We saw the full effect of our protective ring fencing measures in the second quarter, and this provided a new foundation for growth. Worth mentioning is also that we got recognition for our ring fencing from one of the largest regulators in Europe, where we were pointed out as one of the best B2B suppliers. I'm happy with the progress in Europe in this quarter. North America also performed decently, and Latin America is stronger than what we have seen earlier this year. Our Live revenue declined by 3.4% to EUR 431.7 million, while RNG increased by [ 4.2% ] to EUR 75.5 million. It is actually the first time that RNG outperformed Live in terms of growth. Our studios have worked hard and especially Nolimit City has performed great in this quarter. To further strengthen our portfolio, we have launched a completely new brand, Sneaky Slots from scratch, and it will be very exciting to follow that progress going forward. On Live, growth is held back by Asia, but we continue to see good growth in the rest of the world. In both North America and Latin America, Live is still in early days and gains considerable attention from operators and players alike. The opening of our new studio in Brazil has been a true success. On the game side, our highly anticipated Ice Fishing title has finally seen the light, and reception has been great across our market. It is mirroring the trend of faster and shorter forms of entertainment that are widely consumer channels like TikTok and Reels. And it is needed -- is indeed a much faster experience than, for example, Crazy Time. Another great thing is that expansion of Ice Fishing to other studios will be fast compared to the more massive games like Lightning Storm. With its success, we will definitely explore more opportunities in the speed game show arena going forward. To conclude the quarter, overall revenue is not where I want it to be. But when opening the lead, it's clear that the development comes from 1 out of 4 regions. The development in Europe, North America and Latin America is overall good and also supports the margin together with our clear focus on cost efficiency. Next slide, please. If we then move to our operational KPIs, consisting of head count and game round index. On head count, we are growing 4.2% on a year-on-year basis, but we have actually decreased 2.7% quarter-on-quarter. The slowdown is, to some extent, reflected in the revenue. We don't hire unless we grow, but looking at recruitment base within full year, there are sometimes fluctuation based on temporarily slower high pace in recruitment. As we plan for more studio expansion over the next years, the long-term trend is that we will see continued increase in the number of Evolutioneers. The game round index can be seen as a general indicator of activity throughout the network over time, as you know. And for an individual quarter, it can be -- can vary quite a lot and does not always correlate with the revenue development. However, as you also can see this quarter, this actually shows a decrease. Next slide, please. Innovation and quality will always be our signature when it comes to our game portfolio. And I am ever so proud of the continued delivery on our product road map for 2025. During the quarter, we released Ice Fishing, which I have already talked about, and also Dragon Tiger Phoenix, SuperSpeed Dragon Tiger, both the latter are based on a popular Dragon Tiger, a straightforward car game that now has been elevated with the new excitement. Rules are simple and gameplay is quick. In Dragon Tiger Phoenix, the Phoenix is introduced as the third legendary car and the players simply bet on which car that will win or if it will be a tie. Another very exciting release is the Sneaky Slots brand, which joins our portfolio that already includes Nolimit City, Red Tiger, NetEnt, and Big Time Gaming. We have created Sneaky Slots from scratch, leveraging all our know-how that we have within RNG and using our one-stop shop and global sales network to further boost its launch. Sneaky Slots will fill a gap between Nolimit City and NetEnt in terms of game style. And selected releases will use ex mechanics from Nolimit City that we know that the players love. First title was released -- was NetEnt, which will be followed by the new title every month until year-end. Among upcoming releases, we have Red Baron, a mix of Live and RNG where the goal is to cash out before the Red Baron flies away. The longer you wait, the higher the potential. Another release is Insurance Baccarat, which is an exciting variation of the classic Baccarat that adds a unique insurance feature to protect the space. While summarizing the year, we look back at over 110 releases, which is a truly great achievement. And as time flies, there's now only 3 months left until [ Ice ] where we, as always, will showcase the most exciting titles for 2026. I can promise that Todd and his team are ready to take entertainment to yet another level. Next slide, please. Okay. Let's look at the geographical breakdown. As already highlighted, I'm pleased to see that Europe growth quarter-on-quarter, with revenue amounted to EUR 182.2 million. We have talked a lot about ring fencing this year, and you probably remember that the effects on revenues were a bit larger than we had anticipated. It is a price that we have to pay to stay ahead of the regulatory curve. But with that said, we have a new base to grow from. And despite the summer without any major sports event, development has been overall good. I should also mention the dialogue with the U.K. Gaming Commission, which continued, and we are yet to receive the conclusion of its review. What I believe is important to note is that we have been very cooperative and also responsive to various requirements that the Gaming Commission has put upon us. We still have to wait for the outcome, but I truly believe that we have the most sophisticated compliance framework among all providers targeting the U.K. Moving on to Asia, where I have already provided the context for the bad development and revenue decline of 9.6% quarter-on-quarter. Even though the market in Philippines has been volatile, our newly opened studio has been off to a great start. A while ago, there were some media noise on our studio partner losing its B2C license, but it has nothing to do with us or our studio. Everything is working as it should. We did, however, suffer some building damage in the 6.9 magnitude earthquake that struck Cebu in the beginning of October, but to our great relief, no employee was hurt and operations continued, even though that is secondary when people's lives are on the line. Next slide, please. On the contrary from Asia, North America is, thanks to its regulation, more predictable and stable. Quarter-on-quarter growth is modest, but on the positive side, it is -- on the positive side, the operators continue to invest heavily in Live casino solutions and environment. Year-on-year growth is 14.5%. To meet the demand, we have launched our second Live studio brand, Ezugi, just around the end of the quarter, and we are planning to open a second studio in Michigan during the first half of 2026. I would also like to highlight that we, after the quarter, have launched Crazy Time in Connecticut. Great. Very, very good. Also, while speaking on North America, I would like to mention something on Sweepstakes as it has been a topic of discussion during the quarter. Sweepstakes is a popular product in the U.S., and we offer it in states where it's not prohibited or in any way under regulatory scrutiny. Sweepstakes is a very small part of our total revenue, but we believe it has some potential. And as you know, as the market leader, we'll want to offer a great variety of content. In the quarter, a city attorney in Los Angeles made a personal interpretation of the California law, and as our strategy is that we don't offer Sweepstakes where there are regulatory uncertainties, we pulled it from the market, simple as that. I'm also quite certain that you will ask us about the completion of the Galaxy Gaming acquisition. We are still awaiting some regulatory approvals, but believe me, we will be able to -- but we believe we'll be able to close the transaction before year-end. However, it's a regulatory process. It's not completely in our hands. Moving on to Latin America, where growth is picking up with 6.4% year-on-year and 5.9% quarter-on-quarter. The new regulation in Brazil seems to be done with its initial [ teething ] problems, and operator and players are becoming more active. Our new studio in Sao Paulo, Brazil has developed nicely during the quarter and will expand as we move forward. Now I will hand over to Joakim for a closer look at our financials. Next slide, please. Joakim Andersson: Great. Thank you, Martin, and good morning. As usual, I will now zoom in on some of the financial highlights this quarter. Let's start on Slide 7, where we have the financial development of the last 14 quarters. For the ones that are following us and are used to our format, you will note that we have added the revenue split by regulated and unregulated on this slide. Let's start there. As you can see on the line, regulated revenue is up to 46% of the total this quarter. And even if this will fluctuate between quarters as revenue mix shifts, the longer trend is clear. The portion of regulated revenue will continue to go up. To the left, as mentioned by Martin earlier, we had net revenue of EUR 507.1 million this quarter, and EBITDA margin of 66.4%. What is not shown on this graph is that we, now year-to-date, are at 66.7% in EBITDA margin, making it within the expected range of 66% to 68% for the full year. As you can see from the chart, our growth has clearly tapered off and even become negative, and this is not something we are happy about, and we can assure you that we are doing whatever we can to reverse that trend. Let's go to the next slide. And here, we had our profit and loss statement. A lot of numbers on this slide, so I have highlighted the key takeaways, and I will comment on them one by one. So firstly, again, we had net revenues of EUR 507.1 million, which is down 2.4% year-on-year and down by 3.3% quarter-on-quarter. Secondly, total operating expenses amounted to EUR 210.5 million, which is 5% higher than last -- higher than Q3 last year, but more importantly, down 3.4% from last quarter, which is good evidence of our efforts adjusting the cost base to the weaker revenue momentum. We are not only trying to work smarter and be more efficient optimizing how we use our studios and tables, but we are also taking some broad-based cost-cutting measures, which will continue for the rest of the year and into 2026. Thirdly, our operating profit amounted to EUR 296.6 million in the third quarter. And finally, EPS after dilution amounted to EUR 1.25. To be noted, the profit for 2024 includes EUR 59.7 million of other operating revenue related to reversal of earn-out liability. And so to make it comparable with this year, you should probably adjust for that. Let's move on to the next slide, where I'm going to show you the development of our cash flow. First, to the right, our capital expenditures. And as can be seen in the graph, we are down quarter-on-quarter, the total CapEx related to tangible and intangible assets of EUR 29.8 million. With that, we are likely going to be slightly lower than the full year forecast of EUR 140 million that we announced in the beginning of the year. If we then look left, our operating cash flow after investments amounted to EUR 342.1 million in the quarter, which corresponds to a cash conversion of 83%. With that, we are back on track after a seasonally and unusually weak second quarter. The change in working capital was positive EUR 35.2 million this quarter, meaning a swing back from the weaker number last quarter, which is good and in line with our expectations. Then finally for me, some brief comments on our financial position on the next page. On this page, you will find our summary of the balance sheet for the third quarter compared to what it looked like at the end of last year. The main items that I usually highlight, which are all signs of our financial strength, are the value of the bond portfolio of EUR 103.2 million, our total cash balance that amounted to EUR 656.4 million and the equity position at the end of the quarter, which amounts to EUR 3.8 billion. We have continued with the buybacks in the third quarter. And in total, we invested EUR 187 million and bought back 2.5 million shares. In total, we have now used EUR 406.5 million of this year's mandate from the Board of EUR 500 million. And following the release of the Q3 report today, we'll be back in the market with an aim to use the full mandate before the year ends. With that, I will hand back to Martin for his closing remarks. Martin Carlesund: Thank you, Joakim. So let's summarize the quarter and then move to the Q&A. Performance in Asia was bad and left a negative impact on the group revenues as a total. But with that said, the rest of the world is doing decent to good, and we are determined to get Asia back on track. I understand that it causes some frustration, especially since we actually saw some signs of improvement in the second quarter. And believe me, I'm frustrated, too. I can only repeat that it requires patience while being a top priority. I'm happy to see that the margin has improved compared to the first half of the year, and we don't see any reason why -- for it not to stay within our target range of 66% to 68% for the remainder of the year. Cost efficiency is something that I feel strong about as it's part of our roots as an entrepreneurial company. We never spend a penny unless it provides value to the business in terms of growth. This presentation is about the financial performance in Q3. We don't have a separate slide on the movement in the ongoing deformation litigation in the U.S. We have -- where we have for 4 years finally received information on who was behind the [ false ] report. This process will continue in court, and I will not make any comments about its future development. What I can say is that we believe in fair competition, where innovation and excellent operations count. When a competitor decides not to play by these rules, it hurts not -- it hurts not only us, but the industry as a whole. With that said, with a little bit more than 2 months left of 2025, we will continue to run, adapt and improve. When we summarize the year from a financial perspective, it will have been a bumpy ride, but from an operational perspective, a very strong and important period for Evolution. With that, we'll open up for questions. Next slide. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Martin Arnell from DNB Carnegie. Martin Arnell: My first question is on -- if we could discuss the Asia situation just a little bit more. I think you mentioned it remains volatile and you, of course, the ambition is to get it back on track. And my question would be, are there any signs that it has bottomed out because the counter measurements, that's in your control, right? So if you have been too stringent, you can adapt. But the regulatory situation and the effect from that is more -- is not in your hands. Is that a correct interpretation? Martin Carlesund: We are doing everything we can with the countermeasures. And as I said, we did a little bit too much, and we have to do a little bit less, and we'll find the balance. And I think that we are on to it and we're doing the right things. And it's also natural that there will be a situation where you do a little bit too much because otherwise, you won't know where the borders are. When it comes to the dynamic and the regulatory situation in the region, there's a lot of countries. And right now, there's volatility in some of the regions, some of the countries and that affects us as well. I can't predict much more than that. Martin Arnell: And my second question would be, first on Europe, return to growth quarter-on-quarter there. Is that because players finding their way back after the ring fencing through regulated alternatives, do you think? Martin Carlesund: That's a very good question. And I -- yes, I believe that players in some markets find their way back and want to play a regulated and good compound. So that's probably part of it. And we see good development in total. And I'm actually happy with the development in Europe. Martin Arnell: Okay. And final question is just on investments. I mean is there any investment that you could accelerate to improve this current situation in Asia? You've always commented that you will prio growth over margins. Martin Carlesund: It's -- there is no -- it's not -- if I could throw more money at the problem and I would get a quicker solution, I would do that. I don't see that it's a money issue. We invest and we put the resources -- topnotch resources in the world to do whatever we can. And there is actually -- but don't quote me on that, please, but there is no limitation when it comes to that money. We put revenue and market share before cost, but we also need to adapt to the situation we have. So that's what we're doing right now. Operator: The next question comes from Ed Young from Morgan Stanley. Edward Young: My first question is on North America. It's showing the best growth across your geographies, but it's still behind market growth. Could you give us an update on the drivers there? What's going well? What's going less well? And do you expect any material change in the growth rate into next year? The second is on Asia. It sounds like it's a reasonable conclusion from your comments around countermeasures, Martin, you may never be able to fully deal with these issues. So put another way, should we be rebasing fundamentally our Asia revenue and growth expectations? Or on what sort of time line do you have optimism over market growth and market share gains in Asia? And then finally, I'll ask it. I appreciate giving your very final comment. You may not want to answer, but what are you looking for as an outcome from your legal action? Are you seeking maximum financial damages? You expecting regulators to review your competitors' license suitability? What are you looking for? And what sort of time line do you expect this to play out? Martin Carlesund: Thanks. I got it. So when it comes to growth in U.S., Live is doing really well. We have a couple of fluctuations, maybe we didn't have the best quarter when it comes to RNG. There are a little bit fluctuations over the quarters, I'm happy with the development. I look forward to the future in U.S. That's the situation in the U.S. When it comes to Asia, to address this problem, it's technically difficult. It's very advanced, and we're doing it. And we're tuning and we're finding. My belief is over time, that we will find the right balance and the right solutions and continuously enhance and protect our product to make it even better. So in the longer perspective, I look at a very good situation in the Asian market. Now I don't have any -- I can't share any sort of time frame on that right now. I'm a bit more cautious with that. When it comes to the outcome of the litigation process in U.S., I mean I look for fairness, justice. I think that it's horrible to do what has happened to us. Someone is hiding between layers of companies and hiding the true identity and writing false -- a number of false statements in the report to us. It's unfair. We are protecting the shareholder value of Evolution. The company, as such, defending ourselves from our employees. And the first thing that we look for is some kind of justice, I would say. Operator: The next question comes from Ben Shelley from UBS. Benjamin Shelley: I've just -- I've got 3, if that's okay. On Asia, could you talk a bit more about the developments in India in more detail? What exactly is happening on the ground? And how should we expect this to develop over the coming quarters? My second question is on North America. Could you talk more about your Sweepstake exposure in the U.S. and how meaningful that is versus your North American revenues? And three, I was wondering if you could -- if you had any early thoughts on capital allocation for 2026? Do you think EUR 500 million is the right starting point for share buyback expectations for next year? Martin Carlesund: So the situation on the market in Asia, is a lot of different countries. We point out, Philippines is very volatile right now. There's things happening in India, but there's also other countries that are fluctuating and things are happening there as well. India is a large country. There are regions that have portions regulated when it comes to sports. There's a desire in some regions to regulate. Now there are suggestions on a sort of federal level to take a few steps towards blocking online gaming. These type of movements we often see, when there is talks and happenings about regulation, it opens up for different routes forward. It could go into regulation, it could settle down or it could go to somewhere else. We can't speculate on that. We just see that it's affecting us to a certain level right now. North America, I think that you asked about Sweepstakes, and Sweepstakes is -- we provide to the Sweepstakes market, where there are no regulatory problems or any legal problems. And we are very lean. We talked to regulators. And if there would be a letter or someone, a regulator or an authority stating, don't do it here, we would immediately go away. U.S. had the history of river boats that, from the beginning, travel on the river, down to only shore and they have to have the engine running and then they didn't have them, and then it was [indiscernible]. These type of movements have been -- prediction gaming could be one of these. But these type of movements have been there. And we want to supply to them as long as there is no regulatory or authorities saying no. So we did that. In the case of California, it's a state attorney in Los Angeles that made a personal lawsuit, and that's okay. And immediately when that happen, we withdraw from that. So that we -- okay, if that's what you want, then we will withdraw from that. So that's the Sweepstakes situation. Capital allocation, I don't want to comment on that. It's, in the end of the day, an AGM decision and a Board proposal. We are acting on the capital allocation that we have. And you also have the capital policy that we published last year, and I'm sure that the Board will continue following that. Operator: The next question comes from Pravin Gondhale from Barclays. Pravin Gondhale: Firstly, on Asia cyber attacks, so yes, we are seeing that. It sort of continues to be a drag on your performance. But do you see any risk of spreading these cyber attacks to your other markets like Latin America, where black market continues to be big? And then in Europe, can you just give us a sense that between Live and RNG, which have been the key drivers of your European growth on a sequential basis, and any sort of steer on how do you expect European revenues to grow from here? Martin Carlesund: The protection measures that we add to our core is valid for the whole core, meaning supply to all parts of the world. So one of the upsides in doing what we're doing now with advanced technology and AI and everything is that it also protects our core in other markets and all over the world. So I would almost say that it becomes a competitive advantage where we increase the gap to competition. And eventually, we make it so hard to steal our products. So if you want to steal the product, you have to go to someone else. So it's protecting everything. So any measure we take in Asia will be accommodated in all of the core. So that's that. And when it comes to the split in the growth, I mean, we're doing very well right now, momentarily very well, maybe not even showing in the figures in the right way. But when it comes to RNG, we're happy with the development. Nolimit City is delivering great games. And of course, it's contributing in a good way to the total revenue in Europe. Now it's still a smaller part. So Live is the big part. So don't forget that. I mean, it doesn't matter if it does tremendously well. It doesn't affect the figures that much. Operator: The next question comes from Monique Pollard from Citi. Monique Pollard: Three from me, if I can, as well. The first was just on the regulated revenue increase we saw in the quarter. And you talk about the sort of direction of travel. Just trying to understand whether that increase in the regulated revenues is driven by the fact that North America and regulated territories performing better than Asia or whether there were some new markets that regulated in the quarter that also added to that progression? The second question was just on the U.K. Gambling Commission review. You mentioned in the presentation that there's no new news, but also in the report, you say you're expecting a conclusion by the end of the year. So I just wondered what gives you confidence in that time line of end of year, please? And then the final question is in relation to the news we had a couple of days ago on Playtech Black Cube. I appreciate you don't want to get into the details of the types of damages being sought, et cetera. But it would be really helpful if you could give us some indication of how you look to assess the damages. So is the starting point for assessing damages based on market cap movement on the day that these bits of news became public? Or are there other sort of processes you use when you're thinking about the damages that have been caused by these reports? Martin Carlesund: The regulatory percentage, 46% in the quarter, good development. We're moving in that direction. That's nice. That comes out of, of course, that the regulated markets are outperforming the nonregulated, and it's affected, of course, by the situation in Asia. So more and more gets to be regulated. And I might remind you that as soon as it tips over to 50% and if the revenue grows equally, it will continue to increase more and more. So we're in a good position with that. When it comes to the U.K. Gaming Commission time line, unfortunately, I don't have any other information than what -- it's in the hands of the regulator, and we have been -- our estimation is that it will be by the end of this year. I have no further information. That's what it is. For me, when it comes to the Playtech situation, I mean -- I will say about the same things all over again, but -- when someone behaves in that way, [ hypes ] in -- during 4 years doing this type of action with that type of company that the Black Cube using, Juda as a PR company, it takes a bit away from my belief in humanity and fair play and in ethics and moral. Exactly how we will assess the damages, that's a later question, but it's a severe amount. Operator: The next question comes from Adrien de Saint Hilaire from Bank of America. Adrien de Saint Hilaire: So first of all, on Asia, again, it's been a volatile region now for a while. I'm just curious, high level, if there is a point where you might draw a line in your commitment towards that region and refocus towards other markets? Secondly, you touched on this, but cost of employee was down quarter-on-quarter. Can you explain a bit what's going on there and the sustainability of that? And then, sorry, this is a bit like technical perhaps, but there's been quite a switch between current liabilities and other noncurrent liabilities in the quarter. Can you explain a bit what's going on there, please? Martin Carlesund: Okay. I will start with the first 2, and then I will, with warmth, hand over the last one to Joakim. So we look forward and we are engaged, and we actually think it's intriguing, even if it's tough, to find a solution to protect our product in Asia. But I think it will become more and more important also for other markets if we look in a longer time perspective. So we don't have any line that we will draw against Asia. We'll continue to fight that. And as I stated before, it's not about money. It's not a cost that is the problem. It's to find real good solutions on the level for that. When it comes to cost per employee and the cost base, we have talked about all since actually July 2024, where we have the strike in Georgia in that situation and the cost mix and we had to shift a little bit. So we had an unfavorable cost mix. Now we're starting to be able to shift that, which is what we have talked about during the quarters that we need to have a better and favorable cost mix. It's not like we're cutting delivery right now. It's -- we are putting the delivery in the studios, which are good. So that's the reason why we come to that. And then I will hand over to you, Joakim. Joakim Andersson: Of course, the balance sheet question. It's simply a reclassification of earn-out bilities that we have moved from long -- being long term to short term in this quarter as they indeed are shorter than a year. I think that's the one that you are referring to. Well spotted, by the way. Operator: The next question comes from Raymond Ke from Nordea. Raymond Ke: A couple of questions from me. I'll take them one by one, starting with no surprise maybe at Asia as well. Compared to, say, Q2, how much of the decline here that we saw in Q3, which is due to cyber attacks, and how much is from regulations and changes in geographies like Philippines and India, would you estimate? Martin Carlesund: I don't split that out. There are sort of 3 components in the situation. One is cyber attacks, and the cyber attacks is, of course, the constant level of it, but also our action that was a little bit too tough and then we had to retract. And then there is unstability in the region when it comes to regulatory situation. And here, we point out India and Philippines as 2 of those, but there are also others. So unfortunately, I don't want to go into exactly where in detail, and it's also very hard to see that. Raymond Ke: Got it. And then regarding sort of the regulatory situation in not just Philippines and India, I understand it. But how many months of impact would you estimate that we have seen here in Q3? If we compare it sort of to ring fencing back in Q1, do we have the full effect? How much should we expect ahead? It would be really helpful to understand. Martin Carlesund: No, I understand. I assume that you're talking about Asia, right? Raymond Ke: Yes, that's right. Martin Carlesund: So I think that there is a difference between the situation in Europe and Asia, so to speak, but the ring fencing has a little bit of a tail. I think that in Asia, the situation is more momentarily, okay, this is where we are right now, and we need to take it from there. And then we need to see that we do the right things in the coming quarter and see to find the balance. Raymond Ke: Got it. And then on North America, your sequential sales growth was flat here in Q3. You had momentum going into Q2 where it added EUR 2 million on top line. How much of the trend here in Q3 would you say is due to withdrawing from California stake? Is it the majority here? Or is there other explanations? Martin Carlesund: I wouldn't say that, that affects significantly. Raymond Ke: And finally, just one more, if I may. Could you maybe help us get a better understanding of how you intend to reach your margin target with the revenue we see here in Q2? How much should come from, say, revenue growth? How much should come from additional cost savings? Is it sort of equal, equal? Or how should we think about that? Joakim Andersson: No. If I jump in and take that. I mean in Q3, clearly, we are within, right? It has a separate quarter, 66.4% this quarter. And also, as we said, year-to-date, 66.0%. So if we just repeat what we now delivered in Q3, we are there, right? So it doesn't take a lot to make it for the full year, and we are quite confident that we will make it for the full year. Operator: The next question comes from Rasmus Engberg from Kepler Cheuvreux. Rasmus Engberg: Cheuvreux that is. Do you anticipate that India could potentially have an impact also in the fourth quarter? So that's the first question. Martin Carlesund: I can't comment on that. I don't -- I look at Asia right now, and I'm cautious when I make any predictions due to the situation that it's so volatile. Rasmus Engberg: Fair enough. Can you explain the next step in your legal battle with regards to Playtech? What happens next? And could you also perhaps give us an indication of what the run rate of costs that you're incurring, if possible? Martin Carlesund: The first question I can answer. It's like -- the thing that happened this week is actually a non -- it's not an action that affects Evolution in any way. When we initiated the litigation, it was with a fake name, [ Joe Roe ], and that was Playtech, but we just didn't know that it was Playtech. So right now, that is just exchanged for Playtech because we finally got the name. So that's what happened. That's -- and then we gave you, to the market, all the information we had relating to that, and that's it. So from our perspective, and the next thing is that there are a number of depositions and potential information that should be shared, and the legal process will continue just like it had been. When it is -- when it relates to the cost, it's naturally very expensive to do this type of exercises. We do it to protect the shareholders. We do the value for the shareholders. We do to protect the company. We think it's unfair. It's unheard of. It's a behavior that we just don't understand. Now we won't split it out right now, maybe in the future to come, we will look into it. But right now, we don't comment on the exact cost. Operator: The next question comes from Jack Cummings from Berenberg. Jack Cummings: Two questions, please. The first is just on the ring fencing in Europe. Is there any more that you still have to do? Or is all of the European ring fencing now completed? And then just on my second question, I appreciate it's a little bit early than when you normally talk about full year '26. Based upon your comments on cost shift and cost mix, would you expect to see EBITDA margins expand in full year '26 or full year '25? Martin Carlesund: When I look at ring fencing, I think that we are in a very good position right now in Europe. Things can happen in both directions, but I don't know any other actions that are ahead of us right now. When it comes to EBITDA margin, we have full focus on 2025 to deliver the 66% to 68%. And we look forward to do that. And then I assume somewhere on a release to Q1 report -- the Q4 report, sorry for that, I'm a little bit ahead of the curve, then we will guide you for 2026. [indiscernible] is positive. Operator: The next question comes from Karan Puri from JPMorgan. Karan Puri: Most of my questions are actually answered. Just one on Europe, I guess, wondering how should we be thinking about a more normalized growth profile in '26 onwards once you sort of lapped the ring fencing adjustments. If you could share a bit on that, would be great. Martin Carlesund: The answer to that -- I don't guide on the future, but historically, over the time, Europe is the most mature market, and we had a pace of growing 9%, 10%, quite consistently over a number of years. That's the best knowledge we have of the situation. And right now, we are ring-fenced, and we are starting to see a little bit of growth from that. Operator: The next question comes from Andrew Tam from Rothschild & Co Redburn. Andrew Tam: Just one question from me. Can I just clarify just your position on India. You talk about the regulatory volatility there. I just wanted to just fully understand what that means. Obviously, you've seen in recent weeks, one of your largest customers globally, decide to exit that market entirely with the real money gambling band. Are you saying that, that is a market that you would look to ring fence as well, should you get some more regulatory clarity going the other way against you? Martin Carlesund: Ring fencing has to be done in relation to regulation and what is there. We are watching it closely right now, and there are volatility in India, as you understand. At the time, if there would be a ring fencing, that will be later down the road. Andrew Tam: Okay. So no plans to ring fence in future in India? Martin Carlesund: We're watching it carefully right now and see what will be there. Operator: The next question comes from Martin Arnell from DNB Carnegie. Martin Arnell: Yes, I just had a follow-up question on RNG, actually because I saw that you had growth improvement there. And could you just say, is it because Nolimit City has a strong edge in the market? Or do you see the market for RNG has improved? Martin Carlesund: We are doing better and better, slowly, bit by bit when it comes to our RNG offering. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Martin Carlesund: Thank you very much for participating, listening to us. I really look forward to seeing you in a quarter. Thank you.
Operator: Welcome to the conference call. [Operator Instructions] Now I will hand the conference over to the speakers. Please go ahead. Jonas Gustafsson: Good morning, everyone, and a warm welcome to this 2025 Q3 release call for Hemnet Group. My name is Jonas Gustafsson, and I'm the Group CEO of Hemnet. With me here on my side today at our headquarters in Stockholm, I have our Chief Financial Officer, Anders Omulf; and our Head of Investor Relations, Ludvig Segelmark. As usual, we will go through the presentation that was published on our website this morning during today's session. I will kick it off with a summary of the main highlights during the third quarter and a few exciting updates regarding strategic initiatives and planned product launches soon to come. Thereafter, Anders Omulf will cover the financial details before I will come back in the end to wrap up this session. As always, there will be opportunities to ask questions at the end of the presentation. Today's session will be moderated by our operator, so please follow the operator's instructions to ask questions through the provided dial-in details. So with that, let's get started, and let's move on to the next slide, please. Despite a continued challenging property market, Hemnet demonstrated strong ARPL growth and resilience in the third quarter. Net sales decreased by minus 1.5% on the back of low Q3 listing volumes. ARPL, average revenue per listing grew by 21% in the third quarter, driven by a continued increasing demand for Hemnet's value-added services, where conversion towards Hemnet premium continues to be the main driver. Paid published listings were down with minus 19.2% in Q3, reflecting a challenging Swedish property market with continued high supply levels, extended sales cycles and continued pressure on the housing prices. Around 4 percentage points of the volume decline was attributed to a new business rule introduced in Q1 2025, allowing sellers to change agents without buying a new listing that is impacting the year-on-year comparison negatively. EBITDA declined by minus 5.9% to SEK 195.4 million as the low listing volumes lead to lower net sales and lower fixed cost leverage. Today, we announced new strategic product initiatives to strengthen Hemnet's role throughout the sales process. The aim with these new initiatives, which include a new commercial proposition where you pay only when you sell is to help sellers and agents to fully realize the value of Hemnet, which we think leads to a better chance of a successful property transaction. I will come back to these initiatives later on in the presentation. Now let's turn to Page 3 for a quick look at the financial performance. Net sales amounted to SEK 367 million, down with minus 1.5% compared to the same period last year, driven by a significant decline in listing volumes during the quarter. EBITDA decreased by minus 5.9% to SEK 195 million. The decrease was driven by the lower listing volumes, which drove lower net sales and reduced fixed cost leverage. The EBITDA margin amounted to 53.3%. We are pleased that we're able to deliver a high margin despite low volumes. Anders will break down these profitability dynamics in more details as we move on in the presentation. Now let's turn to Page 4 for a look at the property market and the listing volumes. On the left-hand side on this slide, you see a combined chart showing published listings per quarter and yearly as well as the year-on-year change between quarters. Published listings decreased 19% year-on-year in the third quarter, reflecting a property market with high supply, longer sales cycles and continued price pressure, leaving many customers hesitant to enter the market. The most recent buyer barometer from Hemnet gives further support to the sentiment, indicating that more consumers now expect prices to fall compared with last month. At the same time, lower interest rates, stabilizing inflation and the easing of mortgage regulations planned for April ‘26 could gradually help increase activity. Listing duration, the average time it took for a property to sell on Hemnet during the last 12 months increased by 18% to 52 days compared to 44 days in Q3 last year. Anders will break down the financial effect of the longer listing duration later on in the presentation. Around 4 percentage points of the volume decline was attributed to a new business rule introduced by 1st February 2025. This new business rule allows sellers to change agents without buying a new listing. It's important to remember that our published listing number follows a specific definition and differs from general market numbers. The negative listing development is challenging, but it's more important to remember that property market can be volatile, and we've been through the similar development in the past years. Just look at 2023. Let's move on to the next slide and provide some additional color on the supply situation and how that impacts the current state of the market. We do get a lot of questions on the state of the property market and how new published listings relate to transactions and total supply. Therefore, I wanted to take this opportunity to provide some color on what we are seeing and visualize it in a few graphs to eliminate some misunderstandings. We continue to see a high supply on Hemnet, but the growth rate has started to come down during the past few months. In September, in 2025, our supply grew by 2% year-on-year compared to 22% the same month last year. With that said, we're still at aggregated supply levels on the platform that is 50% higher compared to 3 years ago. The supply of Hemnet and how it moves is a function of a number of different factors. The supply increases with new listings as new listings are down the last 12 months compared to the previous year, that has a negative effect on the supply. The supply decreases with transactions as transactions are up during the same time period, that also has a negative effect on the supply. The supply follows the sales duration as average days on the platform increases, so does total supply. Average listing days on a last 12 months basis in Q3 were 18% higher compared to last year, which obviously has a significant impact. In addition to these fairly straightforward effects, there are other factors like renewals, like relistings and where we are in the new property development cycles that also impacts the overall supply levels. Now let's look a bit on how this has looked over time on the next slide. The number of new listings have exceeded the number of market transactions on Hemnet since 2022, which has built up a large supply of unsold properties during this time, which is visible on the top graph. As you also can tell clearly from the same graph, that trend has started to reverse during 2025. This is a natural correction after a few years of increasing supply. Looking at the history, we've seen the same similar patterns historically. You can also see from the bottom graph that listings and transactions over time follow the same seasonal patterns, but that the relationship between the 2 can differ quite a lot in the short term. To summarize, supply coming down from aggregated levels is positive for the property market. Lower supply signals a more healthy market where more transactions are taking place, while it is also supportive for the price development. Now turning to Page 7 to look at the ARPL development in the third quarter. ARPL grew by 21% in the third quarter. The ARPL growth was mostly driven by a strong demand for our value-added services. The conversion rate to higher tier packages continued to increase during the quarter and 3 out of 4 sellers on Hemnet now shows either Hemnet Plus, Hemnet Premium or Hemnet Max. This highlights the strength of our offering and that our customers see clear value in investing for increased visibility and impact. Our newest package, Hemnet Max, introduced earlier this year is a natural step for sellers seeking maximum exposure. The product is showing strong performance per seller. So let's look a bit on the performance on Hemnet Max. So please move to Slide 8. As mentioned, Hemnet Max continued to show strong product performance, while adoption is still at low levels. In Stockholm County, for example, homes advertised with Hemnet Max that were sold between April and August received more than 70% traffic compared to homes advertised with Hemnet Premium. Moreover, the Hemnet Max homes also got more engagement on the listing and on the average generated a much higher bid premium. We have launched a number of key initiatives to drive Max adoption going forward, including further enhancement of product features and scaling up the marketing of Hemnet Max towards agents and property sellers. We continue to work with the product, and we look forward to it being an important growth driver for Hemnet in the coming quarters and years. Now turning to Page 9 for some other exciting news. Today, we are very happy to be able to announce a set of new strategic product initiatives to help sellers and agents to fully leverage Hemnet's potential. Looking at property transactions in Sweden, we have a large opportunity as Hemnet to increase the value of the Hemnet investment for agents and sellers. We know that ensuring visibility throughout the entire home selling journey is an important part of achieving the best possible outcome. For example, data shows that listings visible on Hemnet from the start of the sales process have a higher chance of a successful sale with homes published as upcoming on Hemnet on average, selling 5 days faster than those listed as directly for sale. To help sellers and agents fully leverage Hemnet's potential, we're announcing 2 strategic initiatives today. First of all, a new success-based product offering. Since 1st of October, we have had a live pilot where we are testing a new commercial model where sellers pay only when a property is sold. Second to that, we're also announcing new strategic partnership with franchisers and brand owners that want to recommend Hemnet as part throughout the entire sales process. Now let's move to Slide 10 to talk a bit more about the ongoing pilot. So we're announcing a new commercial model to further lower the threshold for sellers to list on Hemnet. We launched a pilot test for a new commercial model on 1, October, where sellers pay only when the property is sold. The new model aims to lower the barrier for sellers to advertise on Hemnet from the start and will be a part of our strategic partnerships, and I'll elaborate a bit more on those on the next slide. This is a highly demanded model from both sellers and agents as it becomes a risk-free for the seller and easier for the broker to recommend the most suitable package for the client. We share the risk with the seller to maximize the chances of a successful sale. And we do this because we know that Hemnet works. It is still early, but the initial response and the initial feedback and collected data from the pilot has been very supportive and very strong. with sellers showing increased willingness to list on Hemnet with the new model. We plan to roll out the new model as part of the strategic partnerships during 2026. Now let's move on to Slide 11 to elaborate a bit more on the strategic partnerships. The second exciting announcement that we have to make today is our new strategic partnerships. Hemnet will offer all franchises and brand owners that want to recommend Hemnet as partner throughout the entire sales process, the opportunity to enter into a strategic partnership agreement. The aim of the strategic partnership is to help home sellers and agents to fully realize the value of Hemnet to enhance the chance of a successful property transaction. It is also a way for Hemnet to strengthen the relationship on an HQ level, meaning headquarters. The new commercial model will form a part of this strategic partnership, along with increased visibility, increased brand exposure, increased traffic and increased lead generation and new product features. We very much look forward to being able to speak more about these news and what they will mean for Hemnet and our partners as they are being rolled out over the coming months. Moving on to Slide 12 for some additional launches and product news. We continue to accelerate the pace of our product innovation. Within short, we're launching Hemnet Insights, a new AI-powered analytic tool providing agents with valuable market data as part of their Hemnet business subscription. We're confident that this will be a very useful tool, and extremely appreciated tool for agents across the country, and we're excited about the launch. During the quarter, we improved our CRM functionality, which makes it possible for us to strengthen communication and add more value to both homebuyers and home sellers on the platform. Moreover, by the beginning of next year, we will also launch a new enhanced offering for property developers that is better suited to their needs. We have also launched a marketing partnership with hitta.se, where both our listings and valuation tools are now being integrated. Lastly, our increased marketing investment during the year have begun to show results. We are seeing positive development in key brand metrics with spontaneous brand awareness increasing 11 percentage points year-on-year in Q3. And according to Orvesto survey data covering May to August 2025, Hemnet remains Sweden's third largest commercial website, reaching close to 2 million unique visitors per week with a slight year-on-year increase of 0.4% compared to last year. This is particularly encouraging given the weaker market conditions. All in all, we continue to accelerate product innovation, invest in marketing and build for the future, and it's yielding results. With that, I will hand over to Anders for the financial update, starting with Page 13. Anders, please take it away. Anders Ornulf: Thank you, Jonas. Let's turn to Page 14 directly and the financial summary. Let me begin with an overview of the third quarter of 2025. Net sales for the third quarter were SEK 367 million, a decrease of 1.5% year-over-year. This demonstrates strong resilience. We managed to maintain revenues despite published listings dropping by almost 20% in the quarter. It's a testament to our business model holding up across market conditions, much like we saw in the first half of the year 2023 before bouncing back the second half year. Key driver, of course, sustaining revenue was ARPL growing 21% year-over-year. This was supported by continued strong demand for our value-added services for home sellers, Hemnet Plus, Premium and Max. This underlines the value our platform delivers to home sellers also in a challenging housing market. In addition, our B2B segment had a strong quarter with a growth of 1.5%. We will discuss the B2B segment in more details on the next slide. Another noteworthy point is the average listing time, which on a rolling 12-month basis increased from 44 days in Q3 2024 to 48 days in Q2 2025 and now 52 days in Q3 2025. The year-on-year effect of a longer listing time is negative SEK 9 million in revenue and the sequential effect of 4 additional days from Q2 to Q3 is also SEK 9 million. To smooth out seasonal variations, we recommend tracking ARPL growth on a rolling 12-month basis as shown on Page 4 of the presentation. Turning to profitability. EBITDA came in at SEK 195 million, down 5.9% development in more detail later on. The EBITDA margin for the quarter was 53.3%, which is 2.5 percentage points lower than the margin in Q3 2024. This decline is mainly due to fixed costs that cannot be fully adjusted to offset the 9% drop in listing volumes. One important component in the margin development is compensation to real estate agents. When expressed as a percentage of property seller revenue, this ratio increases quarter-on-quarter from 30.1% in Q2 to 30.9% in Q3, driven by further improvement in both recommendation rates and actual conversion to value-added products. Looking at the effective commission compared to Q3 2024, it rises from 29.4% to 30.9%, higher commission reflecting a substantially stronger underlying improvement of our [ VAS ] products. And as always, the effective commission is a variable component and tends to fluctuate somewhat between quarters, making it more suitable to measure over longer periods. Free cash flow last 12 months was SEK 808 million, a 36% increase year-over-year. This robust cash generation underscores both the scalability of our business model and our strong profitability even in a very soft housing market. Our operations continue to convert a high portion of revenues into cash, highlighting the quality of the earnings. We continue to uphold a strong financial position. Net debt leverage ended the quarter at 0.5, an improvement from 0.6 in Q3 last year. This low leverage provides us with flexibility going forward. The reduction is particularly encouraging given our active capital allocation strategy. As you know by now, we expanded our share buyback program from SEK 450 million to SEK 600 million this year following the mandate approved at the AGM. We have been returning capital to shareholders while still maintaining a conservative balance sheet. At first glance, the headcount increase of 13 may appear notable. However, it is important to take into account the technical nuance that helps explain the development. A higher number of employees were on parental leave during Q3 '25 compared with the same period in 2024. In addition, the organization has been selectively strengthened primarily within product and tech. With that overview, let's turn to the revenues by segment and take a closer look at the Q3 figures. Moving into Slide 15, which breaks down the revenues by customer group. Since we focus the seller -- very much on our seller revenue so far, let's turn the attention to our B2B segment, which grew by 1.5% despite the continued challenging and cautious market environment. Revenues from real estate agents increased by 2% to SEK 26 million and property developers contributed SEK 13 million, up 14% year-on-year. These gains reflect strong engagement for our prioritized customer segment, and it's particularly encouraging to see both an increase in listings and an uptake in VOS products for property developers, leading to a double-digit growth. However, advertising revenues from other advertisers declined by 8% to SEK 16 million, reflecting a softer display advertising market. This was again driven by broader macroeconomic headwinds and lower impressions as a result of reduced listings volumes on the platform. Overall, an uplift for the B2B segment, marking it the strongest quarter this year. With that, let's move to the EBITDA bridge to dive deeper into the Q3 figures. On Slide 16, we show the year-on-year development of EBITDA. We have already covered what has driven the top line for the quarter, so let's turn to costs. As mentioned, EBITDA declined by 5.9% compared to the third quarter of 2024. Agent compensation increased in absolute terms, driven by strong recommendation and commercial levels despite net sales declining by 1.5%. And again, remember, ARPL grew 21% in the quarter. Looking at costs, expenses were higher than last year, mainly driven by increased marketing investments. We continue to raise our ambition in external brand building activities, and we have also increased tactical digital marketing efforts. In addition, higher pace in product development resulted in higher consulting costs. In total, fixed OpEx, excluding personnel costs increased by SEK 9 million. Personnel expenses increased somewhat, reflecting wage inflation and larger headcount. However, this quarter was -- we also benefited from a reversal of a bonus provision, which explains why personnel costs as a total were slightly lower compared to last year. The other cost category remained fairly stable, although slightly higher capitalized development costs reflect the higher product development activity. Overall, the minus SEK 19 million listing effect naturally mirrors our revenue and profit development and puts pressure on the margin. That said, taking a step back, it's encouraging to see the resilience of the underlying earnings capacity. We're not afraid to continue investing in marketing and product development, even though the total cost increase remained relatively modest at around 9%. In total, this adds up to an absolute EBITDA decline of minus SEK 12 million year-on-year. Moving on to Page 17 and some spotlight on the cash flow. Starting on the left-hand side, our rolling 12-month free cash flow continued its upward trend and exceeded SEK 800 million. Cash conversion remains strong, supporting both reinvestments in the business and capital returns to shareholders. In the middle, you can see the development of our share buybacks. During the third quarter, we repurchased shares worth approximately SEK 149 million. In volume terms, we acquired 560,000 shares, reflecting the lower share price during the period. This is part again of the SEK 600 million mandate approved in May. And finally, on the right-hand side, our net debt stood at SEK 427 million, corresponding to 0.5 leverage, well below our target of 2x. In summary, continue to accelerate investments in marketing, product development while delivering strong cash flow, gives us the flexibility to keep executing on our strategic priorities and maintain attractive shareholder returns. With that, I want to hand over to Jonas for a summary on Page 18. Jonas Gustafsson: Thank you, Anders. Let's move to the summary slide on Slide #19. To summarize the third quarter and the news that we announced today. First of all, we saw continued pressure on new published listings in Q3. The weak volumes negatively impacted both net sales and EBITDA. Second to that, we had a strong ARPL growth of 21%, and we continue to show resilience in a difficult property market. Thirdly, we announced 2 new strategic product initiatives that will aim to help sellers and agents to fully leverage Hemnet's potential, and I'm extremely excited about the impact this will have on our business in 2026 and onwards. All in all, we continue to act decisively. We're working faster. We're working smarter, and we're working with a continued focus on innovation. By doing so, we're strengthening Hemnet's position for the benefit of buyers, sellers and agents alike. With that, let's open up for the Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Will Packer from BNP Exane. William Packer: Three from me, please. Firstly, could you help us think through the strategic rationale of pivoting your revenue model now? You had a very strong track record over the last 5 years. Paying a bit later does bring in new risks such as arguably low inventory quality and revenue recognition headwinds. Can you just help us understand why now? Secondly, thanks for the initial details on the agent partnerships. Would you consider listing exclusivity as a part of that partnership? Or do you think the regulator wouldn't allow it? And then finally, as has been well flagged, inventory is down significantly in the quarter, 19%. Could you help us understand what cyclical market dynamics versus inventory share loss? So for example, Boneo claimed Q3 listings and the market were down high single digit for Q3. What do you think market listings are down? Jonas Gustafsson: So we'll take them one by one. And on the split ship in, and I'll start. So with the sort of the new model from a commercial perspective that we now are piloting, I think this is, to a large extent, based on discussions and feedback that we've had with agents that we've had with sellers. And it's especially sort of important, the reason for testing this out right now is the fact that we have a -- the market dynamics have changed, and we've seen them gradually changing driven by a few different factors. I mean one is related to the high competitive situation that you see on supply. Number two is driven by the fact that you have longer sales periods that we also spoke about. And I think it's one dynamic that is important and that has changed over the last 5 years is that you now see a pattern where a seller of a property typically sell before you buy. That is creating a different market dynamics. What we want to achieve is to ensure that you use the full value of Hemnet. And a way of ensuring this is that we're now testing this new model, and it's conditional to the fact that you would list directly on Hemnet. We know that we have a model that works. We know that we have an extremely efficient platform. We're the market leader. But at the same time, we need to adopt to the changing market conditions. And I think this is something that will be highly appreciated. It will help us to drive volumes. It will help us to strengthen the relationship with the agent industry that is so extremely important. So that's number one. Number two, related to the agent partnerships. We elaborated a bit on the different components as part of these strategic partnerships. And as it goes, by definition, this is a partnership. So obvious when you go into a partnership is that you want to find mutually beneficial wins. So this is a win-win partnership where we see an upside, but we're also going to help our friends out there who wants to be a part of this agreement to help them to sell more properties and help them to gain market share. And when it comes to exclusive listings, I think having exclusive listings totally depends on how you would do it, but it's obviously something where you would need to look at the regulatory dimensions very closely. And that's something that we will explore going forward. Thirdly, when it comes to volumes, so I think -- the sort of -- if you start with the minus 19%, which is our starting point, I think we clearly laid out both in the CEO letter in the presentation that we conducted earlier that parts of this 4% is driven by a business rule change that is impacting the year-on-year figures from a Hemnet perspective negatively in Q3. And it's important to remember that the numbers that was published by Boneo without knowing them in detail, I think if you look at the market and how it defines sort of the volume development, it is not like-for-like compared to Hemnet. The business rule change, I'm pretty sure that the numbers from a market perspective would not capture the relistings and the effect that the 4% had on our numbers. So that is also explaining it. Then I think there's a number of different factors, right? And it is the low demand in general. It is the duration of the sales cycles that is impacting. And also, the way I understand those numbers is not taking into consideration impact from new property developments. So there's a lot of different factors. And the most important thing for Hemnet is to ensure that we remain as the #1 player in Sweden. We want to ensure that the listings end up on Hemnet. And eventually, they do. We've seen that in 2024, and you know the numbers that we published in July, we had 89% market share in 2024. That has moved up and down. In 2023, it was 90%. In '22 and '21, it was 86%. In '20, it was 90%. So market shares tend to move with the market dynamics. So it's difficult to make a full assessment, and there are so many different type of market shares that you could define, whether it's content market share, whether it's new published listing market share, whether it's sold market share. For us, it's most important to ensure that the properties end up [ atonement ] eventually. Anders Ornulf: I can just -- maybe it was a good overview, Jonas. Maybe I can just add that of course, when it comes to our dominant position that we will -- we take that into a very deep consideration before signing any contracts. So as we have always said around that question, it's a very important question it has to be with the position we have. Operator: The next question comes from Yulia Kazakovtseva from UBS. Yulia Kazakovtseva: This is Julia Kazakovtseva from UBS. I have 2 questions, if that's okay. So my first question would be about volumes. So you said that 4 percentage points of the 19% decrease in Q3 was driven by the change in the business terms. Could you please give us the estimate of this impact for Q2? And my second question would be about the new pilot scheme where sellers only pay once the property is sold. So just thinking about the process and the mechanics of this. So if a seller lists their property, but it remains unsold after, let's say, a few months, and they decide to eventually remove it from Hemnet, will they still be required to pay for this listing? And then in this situation, if this happens and then eventually if the property is transacted somewhere outside of Hemnet after this, what's your position here? Would they still need to pay for this or not? Jonas Gustafsson: I'll start off and then Anders, please fill in. So when it comes to the volumes, you're absolutely right, Julia. 4% is connected with the change in terms of the business rule. The 4% that we saw in Q3, if you look at Q2, that number was also 4%. So you should sort of consider the same levels in Q2 as in Q3. So hopefully, that covers the first question. Second to that, when it looks -- when we look at the new product proposition, First of all, we're testing right now. So we don't know the exact scope, the exact terms and conditions of this pilot. We're extremely satisfied with the initial results that we've seen, the reception that we've had from both sellers and especially from agents, it's been very, very positive. When it comes to the specific case that you asked for, obviously, something that we need to detail out. But the current hypothesis and that hypothesis is very strong, is that if you take one listing as an example, you would use this new business opportunity, meaning that, first of all, you would list directly on Hemnet with this new proposition and just play with the thought that it would not be sold for 3 months or whatever period you decide, and it would be taken down. If it's then selling on off Hemnet, if the property has been taken down, you would still need to pay for it. So we will track individual properties and ensure that we get the money for it. The terms and conditions would be that you have used and you have leveraged the marketing power of Hemnet being the most or the leading and the strongest property platform in Sweden. So therefore, you should pay for it. So that's the hypothesis. With that said, it's one of the things that we're testing. But I think otherwise, it would be a way too large risk, and we don't want to cannibalize on our core business. That is a key component in deciding this new proposition. Operator: The next question comes from Georg Attling from Pareto Securities. Georg Attling: I have a couple. So just starting with this new initiative with success-based product offering, how is that going to work with the other product that you have, which is pay when listing is removed because that doesn't seem to make much sense anymore if you go live fully with this. Jonas Gustafsson: Obviously, just repeating the same message that we said before, this is a pilot we're testing. And as part of this pilot and making the full assessment of this new product proposition, we would also look at the totality and the full scope of our portfolio. Current hypothesis is that the pay later if removed, that product would remain. However, and I'm sure there will be questions going forward around this as well, is obviously what price point we would price this new proposition at. And that's something that we're testing and you could expect potentially a differentiation from PL when it comes to the new product. Hopefully, that's helpful, Georg. Georg Attling: Yes, it is. And just second question on the ARPL slowdown here. It's 14 percentage points lower than Q2. if you could just help with the components to this. I mean the price effect should be similar, if not higher than Q2. So I guess mix is really the main reason for the delta helpful for -- with any details would be helpful. Jonas Gustafsson: Please take it. Anders Ornulf: The main explanation is actually tougher comps. So last year, 1st of July, we launched a new compensation model. So a very high uptick to [indiscernible] and now we are lapping and meeting those. So remember, ARPL growth is a growth figure year-on-year, right? So -- and we called out on the call that [indiscernible] is actually growing, continue to grow. So even though we continue to grow, the ARPL growth actually slowed down, as you called out here. So the main reason to answer your question is actually tougher comps. Georg Attling: Yes. And then tougher comps in terms of mix, right, because of the steep increase in premium in Q3 last year. Anders Ornulf: So the uptake between Q2 and Q3 last year was a lot higher than Q2 and Q3 this year. Operator: The next question comes from Giles Thorne from Jefferies. Giles Thorne: The first question was back on the PO sale new commercial model. And the elephant in the room for Hemnet for the past 6 months, maybe 12 months has been buy in the free-to-list model. So it'd be interesting, Jonas, to hear you talk on how the pay on the new commercial model will directly deal with that competitive threat. The second question was a bigger picture question, and it's on agent compensation. And I suppose, Jonas, it'd be useful to hear your case with this new partnership model as to why that amount of capital being allocated to the agency base is still the best thing for Hemnet's long-term interest. I appreciate that's a much bigger, harder question to answer, but it's certainly something on a lot of people's minds. And then the final question was on the open letter that we all saw over the summer from one of your largest shareholders, which called out many things, but in particular, how you're allocating capital your shareholder remuneration. So maybe Anders, some comments on any changes you intend to make on the back of that pressure. Jonas Gustafsson: Thanks, Giles. I'll start, and we'll take them one by one. And Anders, please help me, and I think you are the best one to ask the last question, but let's take it off. So when it comes to this pay on sale, I think the most important reason for us elaborating and testing this pilot now as we speak is that there are -- the market dynamics have changed. And I think I've been repeating this message over the last months since I've had the privilege to be the CEO of this company is that there's a few market dynamics right now where you have an all-time high supply where competition in the supply segment and in the own sales segment is tougher than it's ever been before. Second to that, it takes much longer time to sell a property today than it used to do 3 years ago. If you just look at the average sales duration, that was hovering around 25 days 3 years ago. Now on the last 12-month basis, it is 52 days. That has changed the sales process, the way the agents work and the way the sellers think. Thirdly, which is important is the fact that you now sell before you buy. So what we see right now with the data is that roughly 70% of all property transaction happens in sort of in a way where you sell before you buy. That used to be the opposite. So that used to be 30%. So the market dynamics have changed. This means that we want to ensure that we adopt our product proposition towards the market rather than the competitive situation to ensure that we become relevant, we remain relevant throughout the entire sales process. We know that we have a platform that works. We know that if you list on Hemnet from the beginning, the likelihood of a successful transaction and successful transaction covers everything from finding the right buyers, ensuring that you get reduced sales cycles and maximizing the bidding premium. Those 3 factors are improved when you use Hemnet the entire way. So that is a way -- and that's our hypothesis of using this. And given sort of the market situation, we want to lower the entry barriers for the sellers. We want to help the agents from the beginning. And we think that this product is going to make the difference here. We think it's a very strong proposition that will get listings earlier on Hemnet, more listings and it will help sellers to make better transactions. I think that should cover the first question. When it comes to the second question, it was a bit difficult for me to hear. But I think the question is around agent compensation and how that is related to the new strategic partnerships. But please clarify if I misunderstood it. Giles Thorne: Yes. It was -- it's at heart, a very simple question, albeit probably quite a difficult answer, which is you pay away a lot of your value to this large pool of important stakeholders. And for a very long time, that served you very, very well. But now there are open questions about whether that is the best use of your capital. So it was a question for you, Jonas, to make the case of why this is still the best use of your capital and perhaps use the new strategic partnership as a way of illuminating that case. Hope that's clear. Jonas Gustafsson: Yes. Perfect. So I think when it comes to the agent compensation, I think that has served us well. I think it continues to serve us well. It's strengthening the relationship with our most important ambassadors in the market, and that's individual agents. I think it's fair. And I think I fully understand where you come from, it's a substantial part of our P&L on the cost side that is related to compensation, but it's also helping us to build very strong relationship and mutual beneficial opportunity for both Hemnet and for the agents. When it comes to the way you understand this, Giles, but I think -- I mean, the agent compensation and the compensation model, that is a contractual and transactional relationship between Hemnet and the franchise owners. We see large opportunities of also strengthening our relationship with the HQs, the ones that has a central role and in many cases, a very important influence. And creating opportunities also on HQ level is important. And what we haven't spoken too much today about is also the individual agents. I think Hemnet in the past has been very strong with the franchise owners. We need to remain strong there, but we should also strengthen the relationship with HQs, and we should become better friends and become more supportive to the individual agents. So it's the full slate that we're thinking about. Then thirdly, the open letter from GCQ. Anders, would you like to elaborate around our view when it comes to the capital allocation? Anders Ornulf: Sure. Of course, we saw the letter and the shareholders' input is very important for us. It's one very important piece of the puzzle. But we stick to the current capital allocation strategy that we will continue to distribute excess cash through buybacks on an arm's length basis via Carnegie. On a personal view, I think not, I think it's a good success story for Hemnet since the IPO to be consistent with the buybacks and not taking bets on share price from time to another. So that's the answer. Giles Thorne: So Anders, you won't change the cadence or the pace of buybacks depending on share price moves? Anders Ornulf: No. Operator: The next question comes from Thomas Nilsson from Nordea. Thomas Nilsson: What development do you expect for staff costs and other costs at Hemnet in 2026 and 2027? Jonas Gustafsson: Anders, would you like to take that? Anders Ornulf: Sure. We don't know since we haven't decided, but what we said in the beginning of the year is that we will continue to grow this company. We will invest in marketing and talent and the product, and we will continue with that. Last year, we had a fixed OpEx growth of 30%. We said then that you will not see that this year. And now after 9 months, we are at around 15%. So all else being equal, you should expect us to continue that. But to be fair, the details has not been decided and the best way to look at it is to look at the current run rates. Jonas Gustafsson: And I think just to kick in an open door, we like operational leverage, and that's what we're going to plan for also for the next year and after that. Thomas Nilsson: Okay. And one second final question, if I may. Looking at your growth targets of 15% to 20%, how much do you think this will come from structural price raises and how much will come from promoting higher-priced packages? Jonas Gustafsson: We remain committed, and we think that the growth ambition of 15% to 20% is important. I think what we've said is that in the past, I think the largest price hikes days for Hemnet, those days are over, and we need to work on value-based pricing. And when I talk about value-based pricing, we need to ensure that we deliver products that the customers are willing to pay for. And I think this quarter, Q3, but also what we saw in Q2 and Q1 is a testimony of that. We do see that the product mix and the BOS penetration is the main driver. It is not prices. Operator: The next question comes from Ed Young from Morgan Stanley. Edward Young: Two questions, please. First of all, you've mentioned about further enhancements of Max. Should we read that as small sort of iterative additions to the Max package or perhaps a bit more of a rebalancing of the relative benefits across the package structure, so potentially including elements like free renewals? And then you've also talked about increased Max marketing. How receptive do you think agents have been able to be to these messages about the value of Max in a sort of difficult market backdrop? Or do you think their interest and ability to upsell packages will also be reliant on picking up when the macro also picks up? Jonas Gustafsson: So on the first one, I think when it comes to the enhancement of Max, I mean, Max is still a baby. It's been around for 6 months. So it's still young. We are continuously testing new features. We're elaborating with the price point. We've been running different campaigns. There are campaigns live now in the larger cities to just learn. So we're still in data collection mode. I think we need to look at a few maybe potentially bigger things as well going forward. And per your point, classifieds. So it's all a relative game comparing the features of Max also towards premium and others. But I think -- I mean, I don't think that you should continue to decrease the proposition of premium and Plus. This is all about ensuring that you improve features when it comes to Max. So that's something that we continuously work on. Anders Then I think, would you like to take the second one? Anders Ornulf: I didn't get that to be fair. Jonas Gustafsson: Sorry, can you take it again, Ed? Edward Young: Sure. I was just saying you're talking about increased marketing behind Max. I was just wondering, do you think that agents have been receptive to those messages? Or do you think ultimately that in sort of in the difficult macro backdrop? Or do you think that you need macro to pick up for them to sort of have more space if they're under pressure? Is it really a priority for them to push that? Is the macro impact an important part of the backdrop there? Jonas Gustafsson: Thanks, Ed. I can take it, Anders, and then you can fill in sorry. So I think -- I mean, it's a very good question, Ed. I mean, I think if you look at the actual product performance, and we showed a few highlights with 70% more traffic, 50% higher premiums, 50% more lift, things and engagement up. So I think those are fantastic results. I think that when it comes to Max, obviously, it is priced at a 50% premium versus Hemnet premium. And I think that has been part of the challenge in getting a quick adoption given these current market conditions. The key -- the sort of -- the way this business works to a large extent, is the fact that conversion follows recommendations. So it's all about ensuring that the individual agents recommend Max to a larger extent. That's really the main lever that we have to pull. And I think these marketing investments that we refer to is to a very large extent, B2B marketing, so investing in communication, investing in roadshows, investing in getting the message out there. But I think the sort of the Max adoption to some extent, is held back given the current market conditions. Operator: The next question comes from Eirik Rifdahl from DNB Carnegie. Eirik Rafdal: I got a few at the end here. Just to start on the strategic partnership. Are you configuring or looking to configure the commission model as well to kind of drive more agents to push this offer with pay when sold? Jonas Gustafsson: Simple answer is no. We're not looking to adjust the compensation model. Obviously, kicking an open door, everything, you would understand this. But obviously, I mean, we would pay a commission towards the agent if the property is sold and only so. So that's the part of it. But that's also one thing that we're obviously testing. Eirik Rafdal: That's very clear. And Jonas also you stated that the initial feedback and data from the pilot has been supportive and sellers showing increased willingness to list on Hemnet with the new payment option. Have you also seen increased willingness to jump on Max on the back of this? Jonas Gustafsson: What we've seen is that I wouldn't comment on Max specifically because the numbers are still quite low, but we see that there is a willingness to recommend higher tier products and higher than we have today. So that has been part of the reason why we see a very positive response. Perfect. Eirik Rafdal: And just a final question for me, which is a bit more big picture. What's your overall thoughts right now on AI risk, particularly on the back of the Silo ChatGPT integration announced a couple of weeks back? Jonas Gustafsson: I mean if you look at AI, and I'll take the big picture answer. I mean we're actively looking at how to best integrate AI into our operations to enhance user experience and internal efficiency. Up until today, our efforts internally, we focused a lot on our valuation pool. But obviously, we follow and see what is happening. And I think the -- so and the ChatGPT integration last week are very relevant and interesting. So we continue to look at that, and that's something that the team is looking at it, and we're exploring those opportunities. We want to be part of this when this takes off and when it gets to Europe. Operator: The next question comes from Annabel Hames from Deutsche Bank. Annabel Hames: Just one from me. Can you give more color on why the Max package uptake hasn't accelerated given the data that you have on product performance and investment? Is it purely just a lack of understanding from sellers? Or is it something you eventually consider having part of the commission model for agents to help uplift that uptake? Jonas Gustafsson: I think I mean taking a step back, Hemnet Max is something that would help us in '26, '27 and '28 and will be an important component to continue to drive ARPL growth. We're still in the learning phase. Please remember the last time the Hemnet launched a new product was back in 2019. So this is not something that we do on a sort of on a quarterly basis. And I think -- I mean, sitting here today and being a part of this earnings call, the key driver of what is actually driving ARPL growth in Q3 2025 is Premium and Plus, and that was introduced in 2019. So this is a long-term bet. I think when it comes to why the adoption has not picked up faster, I think parts of it is sort of related to what Ed asked about before. There is tough market conditions right now that I think has been holding back the MAX penetration. That's just a fact. And second to that, I think the awareness, this is the numbers that we show to you guys today are very, very strong. Now it's -- we have a lot of things to be done at our communication department. We need to be out there and spread the dos. Operator: The next question comes from Nicola Kalanoski from ABG Sundal Collier. Nikola Kalanoski: So firstly, interesting news regarding the new model. I appreciate that this is just in pilot mode so far, of course. But just to understand the mechanics of this. Will the cost of the listing ad be automatically deducted during the settlement with the banks when a home transaction closes? Or will the seller have to pay as they've done previously, that is just paying a regular invoice to Hemnet? Jonas Gustafsson: So the simple answer is that what we're testing right now is that the payment method and the payment flow would be very similar to our current products, meaning that would be a separate bill. However, I mean, if you look ahead, and that's a question about product development and integration towards our partners, I think sort of having the Hemnet cost being deducted in the overall settlement, that's also an interesting opportunity. But what we're piloting right now is the first stage. Nikola Kalanoski: Yes, that's crystal clear. And just another thing to clarify. I believe you mentioned earlier during this conference call, some changed market dynamics, which I'm sure we're all familiar with. But I reacted a little bit to you saying that competition in the supply segment and -- or sorry, competition in the on sale segment is tougher than it's ever been before. I just want to make sure, does this refer to there being competition among home sellers trying to sell their home or competition between Hemnet and other marketplaces, right? Jonas Gustafsson: Thanks for allowing me to clarify that if that was unclear. What I meant and clearly meant is that if you look at the on sale segment, supply levels are at record high levels, meaning that if you're a home seller, the competition to sell your property is very, very high. So it's a question about supply/demand to put it simple. Do you follow me, Nikola? Nikola Kalanoski: Yes, absolutely. I was just looking for a clarifying Operator: The next question comes from Julia Kazakovtseva from UBS. Yulia Kazakovtseva: Just one small follow-up for me. What's the current penetration of the pay later feature at the moment? I mean, the number of new listings. Anders Ornulf: It tends to fluctuate a bit, and we've commented before that it's been around 40% to 50% since launch, and it might be -- I haven't looked at it today, but it might be a little bit lower today. Jonas Gustafsson: Hovering around 40% but it goes with seasonality. So around 40% to 50%. Operator: The next question comes from Eirik Rifahl from DNB Carnegie. Eirik Rafdal: It's Eirik again. Just a quick follow-up question because we've been kind of discussing the perception of the max value and the perception of the value you guys create overall. And one thing is the perception that the agents kind of know of your value. But do you have a feeling that they understand the relative value between you and for instance, [indiscernible], I mean, on the numbers we're tracking and looking at, you guys are reporting all-time high time on site today of 52 days, but [indiscernible], at least on our numbers, is north of 120 days, so more than 2x what you guys can deliver. Do you feel that the agents kind of understand this in this market that it doesn't really help them to go there and kind of try to avoid going on Hemnet? I mean I think obviously, it's a mix. I think we have we have more work to be done and continue to educate the market around that. And you're absolutely right. I mean Hemnet is a much more efficient and much stronger property portal when it comes to ensuring that you sell your property quickly and fastly. With that said, I think this is something that we're continuously work on. And I think I've been talking a bit about how we invest in our sales force. The main reason for investing in our sales force is that we need boots on the ground to be out there, help the individual agent to understand the fantastic value that Hemnet is delivering. And also what we did in Q3 was to lift up Marcus to become my management team. And I think becoming closer to the agent, becoming closer to the industry is it's a strong rationale of why we're doing that and not only because Marcus is a fantastic salesperson. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Jonas Gustafsson: Thank you, everyone, for joining the call today and for a lot of good questions. We ran slightly over time. But with that said, we'll conclude today's session, and I wish you a fantastic day. Thanks.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Packaging Corporation of America Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Mr. Mark Kowlzan. Please go ahead. Mark Kowlzan: Thank you, Elissa. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for all of you for participating in Packaging Corporation of America's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Release Conference Call. Again, I'm Mark Kowlzan, Chairman and CEO of PCA. And with me on the call today is Thomas Hassfurther, President; and Kent Pflederer, our Chief Financial Officer. I'll begin the call, as usual, with an overview of our third quarter results, and then I'll turn the call over to Tom and Kent, who will provide further details. And then after that, I'll wrap things up, and we'd be glad to take any questions. Yesterday, we reported third quarter net income of $227 million or $2.51 per share. Excluding the special items, third quarter 2025 net income was $247 million or $2.73 per share compared to the third quarter of 2024 net income of $239 million or $2.65 per share. Third quarter net sales were $2.3 billion in 2025 and $2.2 billion in 2024. Total company EBITDA for the third quarter, excluding special items, was $503 million in 2025 and $461 million in 2024. The third quarter net income included special items expense of $0.22 per share. The $0.22 were costs related to the acquisition of the Greif Containerboard business, including step-up of the acquired inventory, integration-related expenses and transaction expenses. Details of the special items for both the third quarter of 2025 and 2024 were included in the schedules that accompanied our earnings press release. We completed the acquisition of the Greif Containerboard business on September 2. Our results included 1 month of the acquired operations from Greif, which impacted earnings per share by $0.11 after special items. These include depreciation and amortization after preliminary purchase accounting and additional interest on new borrowing to finance the acquisition. Excluding the special items and the impact of the acquisition, our earnings increased by $0.19 per share compared to the third quarter of 2024. This increase was driven primarily by higher prices and mix in the Packaging segment for $0.73, lower fiber costs of $0.16, higher prices and mix in the Paper segment, $0.02 and a lower maintenance outage expense of $0.01. Partially offsetting the improvements were higher operating costs, $0.33; lower production and sales volume in the Packaging segment, $0.16; higher depreciation expense, $0.07; higher freight expense, $0.07; higher fixed and other expenses of $0.07 and higher interest expense, excluding the Greif acquisition debt of $0.02 and lower production volume in the Paper segment for $0.01. Because of the uncertainties of the Greif closing date, our third quarter guidance did not forecast any impact from the acquisition. Excluding special items and acquisition impact, the results were $0.04 above the third quarter guidance of $2.80 per share, primarily due to favorable price and mix in the Packaging segment and lower freight costs. Looking at our Packaging business and including the acquired business, EBITDA, excluding special items in the third quarter of 2025 of $492 million with sales of $2.1 billion resulted in a margin of 23.1% versus last year's EBITDA of $446 million and sales of $2 billion or a 22.2% margin. Corrugated volume was largely on plan and continued to reflect the cautious ordering patterns we've seen most of the year. We ran to demand during the quarter and produced 38,000 fewer tons of containerboard than the third quarter of 2024 and 59,000 more tons of containerboard than the second quarter of 2025. Our containerboard inventory in the legacy system increased by 15,000 tons during the quarter in preparation for the fourth quarter DeRidder outage. From the operational standpoint, we ran very well the entire quarter and with strong performance in terms of cost and production efficiency across the entire mill and corrugated system, which is a testament once again to the successful investments across our business. We continue to look every day at opportunities to take out cost and optimize production capabilities with the support of our considerable in-house technical and capital execution expertise. The acquired mills produced 47,000 tons during the month. Having closed the acquisition on September 2, we used the initial month of ownership to our advantage. While our activities impacted the September results, they will improve long-term productivity and efficiency. Massillon had a scheduled annual outage -- maintenance outage, which we extended to 5 weeks and completed earlier in October. We did a comprehensive refurbishment of the mill, including reliability improvements on the paper machines, the OCC plant and the power plant. All mill infrastructure and unit operations were cleaned and inspected. We took the 2 paper machines at the larger Riverville facility down for 5 days a piece to implement the first phase of our reliability improvements. We'll have additional work to do to implement our efforts and expect to have achieved the first phase by the end of the fourth quarter. We're already seeing the benefits of improved performance and quality with both mills running at higher performance. We'll continue to manage and invest in these facilities to achieve operating performance in line with the legacy PCA system. I'll now turn it over to Tom, who'll provide more details on the containerboard sales and corrugated business. Thomas Hassfurther: Thank you, Mark. The performance of the Packaging business was largely as we expected, and it was another strong quarter. Domestic containerboard and corrugated products prices and mix were $0.72 per share above the third quarter of 2024 and down $0.02 per share compared to the second quarter of 2025, which was all attributable to containerboard mix. Export containerboard prices were up $0.01 per share versus last year's third quarter and flat with the second quarter of 2025. As Mark mentioned, while customer ordering patterns have continued to reflect market conditions that have persisted throughout most of the year, corrugated demand improved as the quarter progressed. In the legacy business, shipments per day in our corrugated products plants were down 2.7% versus last year's record third quarter when per day shipments were up more than 11% over 2023. We will continue to see tough comparisons going into the first quarter of 2026. Total shipments were down 1.1% in the third quarter of 2025 versus last year, reflecting 1 more workday this year. For a little context, on a per workday basis, July shipments were about 6% down from last year, while August was less than 1% down and September was less than 2% down. Margin performance was very strong again with Packaging segment EBITDA margins improving to 23.1% versus 22.6% in the second quarter and 22.2% last year. Including the acquisition, shipments were up 3.7% over last year per day and 5.3% overall. The acquired plants had a strong September with volume growth and good price realization. We're working very hard to integrate the operations into the PCA corrugated system, and we like what we see so far. The culture is highly compatible with PCAs, and our new colleagues have gone beyond the call of duty to continue to develop strong customer relationships and serve those customers. Greif has historically carried relatively more inventory in its corrugated system than we do. With the acquired plants being part of a much larger integrated system, we can more efficiently and nimbly supply them now that they are part of PCA. We have the opportunity to bring inventory down to lower levels, and we'll manage our operations to do so over the next couple of quarters. As expected, export sales volume of containerboard was down 8,000 tons from the second quarter of 2025 and down 32,000 tons from the third quarter of 2024. I'll now turn it back to Mark. Mark Kowlzan: Thanks, Tom. Looking at the Paper segment, EBITDA, excluding special items in the third quarter was $40 million, with sales of $161 million or a 24.9% margin compared to the third quarter of 2024 EBITDA of $43 million and sales of $159 million or 27.1% margin. Sales volume was 1% below the third quarter of 2024 and 10% above the second quarter of 2025. Prices and mix were up 2.1% from the third quarter of 2024 and 0.5% from the second quarter of 2025. Performance reflected the seasonally stronger third quarter and sales volume was higher than expected. I'm now going to turn it over to Kent. Kent Pflederer: Thanks, Mark. Cash provided by operations was an all-time quarterly record of $469 million. And after $192 million of CapEx during the quarter, free cash flow was a record $277 million. In addition to CapEx and funding the Greif purchase price, the primary payments of cash during the quarter included dividends of $113 million and cash tax payments of $19 million. Our quarter end cash balance, including marketable securities, was $806 million with liquidity of approximately $1.4 billion. To update you on annual shutdown expenses, we now expect $0.45 in the fourth quarter for the legacy PCA system and $0.02 for the acquired business. The legacy system expense is expected to be $0.29 higher than the third quarter of '25 and $0.17 higher than the fourth quarter of '24. We are revising our capital forecast for the year to be approximately $800 million from our previous forecast of $840 million to $870 million. This is primarily as a result of timing of expenditures, and we have not changed our overall capital plan. This revision includes incremental expenditures for the acquired business. As part of the Greif acquisition purchase accounting, we are required to record the acquired assets on our books at fair value. Our valuation is preliminary and is subject to change over the 1-year period after the acquisition. Our preliminary evaluation in addition to working capital includes approximately $870 million of property, plant and equipment, $530 million of intangibles and $280 million of goodwill. We recorded $12 million of depreciation and amortization of the acquired assets during the third quarter, and we expect an annual run rate going forward of approximately $130 million. As a reminder, annual net interest expense is expected to increase by $95 million, and we recorded $8 million in additional interest during the third quarter. We were a significant containerboard supplier to Greif before the acquisition and shipments of containerboard that were recorded as third-party sales in the past are now integrated. This affects the timing of recognition as shipments are now recorded as inventory with sales and profit being recorded when that inventory is converted and sold to a customer. We estimate that this affected results by about $0.03 in the third quarter, which will not recur going forward. I will now turn it back over to Mark. Mark Kowlzan: Thanks, Kent. For the fourth quarter, we expect per day corrugated shipments to be higher than the third quarter with 3 less shipping days. Export containerboard sales will be higher than the third quarter, but relatively low when compared to traditional fourth quarter volume. Containerboard production in the legacy system will be slightly lower than the third quarter with the maintenance outage at the DeRidder mill, and we expect inventory levels in the legacy system at year-end to be similar to levels entering the fourth quarter. Outage expenses will be $0.29 higher than the third quarter. We expect prices and mix in the Packaging segment to be lower as a result of seasonally less rich mix. In the Paper segment, we expect seasonally lower production and sales volume and flat pricing. We also expect seasonally higher energy and fiber costs as well as slightly higher freight and other operating costs. We expect significant improvement in the results of operations from the acquired business. We will be impacted by lower production and higher maintenance expenses from the Massillon mill outage that did continue into October and seasonally lower volume and mix in the corrugated business. We will benefit from a full quarter of improved operations at the Riverville mill. We will be managing production to achieve lower inventories, as Tom mentioned. Considering these items, we expect fourth quarter earnings of $2.40 per share, excluding special items. And with that, we'd be happy to entertain any questions, but I must remind you that some of the statements we've made on the call constituted forward-looking statements. The statements were based on current estimates, expectations and projections of the company and do involve inherent risks and uncertainties, including the direction of the economy and those identified as risk factors in our annual report on Form 10-K on file with the SEC. Actual results could differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements. And with that, Elissa, I'd like to open the call up for any questions, please. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] First question is from George Staphos, Bank of America. George Staphos: I guess maybe the first question as it normally comes up during Q&A. Can you talk about bookings and billings as we're starting fourth quarter? Obviously, you have fewer shipping days, but what are you seeing on a per workday basis or however you want to frame it? And then we had some other questions. Thomas Hassfurther: George, this is Tom. Right now, kind of the blend of bookings and billings that we see so far is a little over 1% up. And again, I'll remind you, very tough comps. Okay? George Staphos: Got it. And you said the tough comps just factually will be difficult through 1Q, that was part of your script where we're done by the end of this quarter in terms of what you think tough comps are? And is any -- or [indiscernible] strength in any of the end markets that you would point us to or anything that's particularly challenging right now? Thomas Hassfurther: Actually, George, outside of a couple of end markets, our business has been very, very good. Those couple of markets that were -- that we've struggled -- it's not we've struggled. They've struggled in the marketplace. I mean, everybody has read about beef. That's a big segment for us. And the cattle herds are down to a 70-year low. So there's a lot of struggles going on there, and we even have the administration looking at other ways to solve that problem. And then the other area is the building materials. We all know what's happened with housing starts and where that stands. So those 2 segments have been a drag on us. Other than that, we've been very pleased with the results in all of our other sales segments. George Staphos: As regards to Greif, I know we'll get more color over time, but any big picture, any large sort of boulders you could tell us about in terms of what you're finding with Greif relative to the deal model? And is there any way at this juncture you can give us a view on what the maintenance might look like? So in that regard, again, is $300 million of EBITDA reasonable for the combined business? What does maintenance look like? And then I had 1 or 2 last follow-ons. That will be quick. Mark Kowlzan: Well, again, I think as we talked about this, the CorrChoice side of the business that we acquired, the converting side was very well capitalized in very good condition. The 2 mills, we've had -- from September 2, that day, we've had upwards of -- on any given day, 100 of our PCA personnel in the mills at Massillon and the same number of people in the mill at Riverville, assisting in doing what we do, and that's operational expertise. Tom, do you want to comment about the corrugated? Thomas Hassfurther: Yes. Let me just say in total, what we've -- I think the best way to summarize this, George, is probably that it is an organization that is very customer focused. And as I mentioned, the culture of the business fits very well with ours. That's a great bolt-on. Operationally, not nearly as strong as PCA and because we've had many, many more resources, and we've got this great team to address those issues. But in typical PCA fashion, we get on it right away, right upfront, not trying to manage to a quarter or anything like that. We're looking at the long haul. And I think given that organization and their focus on the customer and the end markets that they supply, this is going to be very, very accretive to our earnings going forward. Mark Kowlzan: One note, George. We took the machines down at Riverville for basically about a 5-day period, each machine in September. But during the time we ran in September, we improved operations. We were running like 97.2% for the month of September in Riverville, and that's up dramatically from prior to the acquisition. And so we've seen immediate improvements in both efficiency and quality. But the good news is we'll continue to see a lot more benefits as we work through things. And as far as your question about some of the accretive value, I think, Kent, you and I are talking this morning. Kent Pflederer: Yes. So George, going into the acquisition, historical Greif performance, $240 million was about a good annual run rate for the EBITDA -- our projection for synergies on a run rate basis after the second year was about $60 million. We're well on target for that. We're looking probably in about the 20-ish range by the second quarter of next year to give you a little bit more clarity on that on a run rate basis. George Staphos: Quickly, $0.20, maybe a sequential increase in D&A as part of the $2.40 is kind of rough math. And any way -- I know it's kind of tough on live mike, but any way to talk about what the inventory strategy quantify what the tons coming down might mean in the Greif system relative to where you've been? Mark Kowlzan: The comment about inventory, again, it was mentioned, we've got 10 mills now in the system. We've got incredible opportunity to take care of all of our box plants nationwide. So we will quickly incorporate that strategy into the CorrChoice operation. And it will take some time to work the inventory down. We've already started that. Thomas Hassfurther: Yes. Also, George, I'd just add that mix is a part of that equation also. So we've got to do both at the same time, but very good opportunities there. Mark Kowlzan: All right. With that, next question, please. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Next question is from Mike Roxland, Truist. Michael Roxland: Congrats on closing the acquisition. I just wanted to follow up, Kent, with you, one, on the numbers that you just mentioned in relation to George's question, the $240 million of EBITDA and the $60 million of synergies. Now that you've owned the assets for roughly 6 weeks, can you talk about any potential upside to those numbers that you foresee from those assets? Mark Kowlzan: Right now, again, I'd rather just let you know that we're -- every day, we're seeing positive results from the work we're doing. So again, I think a lot is going to depend on the marketplace in the future and what we can do to take advantage of the footprint on the converting side. The mills will continue to be improved upon and continue to deliver in much the same way that the Boise assets delivered over the last 10 years. So again, I think I'd rather just be conservative and say we're going to stick with the with the numbers that we've already given you and just say that there's always upside, but it does depend on what the market does. Michael Roxland: Got it, Mark. Any comments you can make in terms of the improvements, whether in terms of efficiency costs went out with respect to Massillon, you extended -- you mentioned in your comments and also in the press release that you extended the maintenance outage to 5 weeks. So can you talk about maybe some of the benefits that you're receiving from that extra work that you put into the mill? Mark Kowlzan: Yes. I mean it's quite remarkable that with the capability we have in PCA, we've got upwards of 200 people in our technology engineering organization. And again, from September 2 that morning at both mills, we were working simultaneously, and we had for at least a 6-week straight period of time at least 100 PCA personnel in Massillon working full time to assist the mill in improving their capability. I don't think there's anything in that mill that hasn't been touched. We undertook the first week of just cleaning the mills, inspecting, taking apart major equipment bearing changes all the way down to lubrication systems, hydraulic systems, role changes, power equipment, boilers, turbine generators. So I feel very good that comprehensively, we understand the opportunities we need to take advantage of going forward. Massillon as an example, we understand the limitations. We understand the upside. So some of it's going to be dependent on ordering some equipment and getting it delivered. The good news, I still feel though what we told you is that it's -- when we converted some of the Boise acquisition, we're spending $0.5 billion, i.e., DeRidder, Jackson, Wallula for these conversions. But I told you before, we expect to be -- the work at Massillon, the work at Riverville, it will be the tens of millions of dollars. So over the next couple of years, $10 million here, $10 million there for system improvements, upgrades and technology and capability. But the bones of the mills are good. We just need to update them and then, like I say, run these mills the way PCA looks at the business and takes care of the business. So I'm feeling very bullish on what we've seen just in 1.5 months. As an example, both mills, we saw -- we started at Massillon the week before last, and we saw at least a 50% improvement just in the quality of the profiles, moisture profiles, basis weight profiles, physical test profiles. So huge improvement there, and that translates into customer experience with the product through CorrChoice. So again, feeling very good about it. Michael Roxland: Got you. I appreciate the color there. And one last question before turning it over. Greif EBITDA for the 1 month you owned the assets came in a little lower than we expected given recent performance prior to your ownership. Was that all due to the outages, these will get Massillon and Riverville? Or was there any economic downtime that you took due to choppy backdrop or as you manage elevated inventories? And then any initial thoughts on 2026 CapEx? Kent Pflederer: Mike, I'll take that one. It was largely from the outages and the timing effects of the revenue and profit recognition that hit us by about $12 million during the quarter. So it was those. In terms of economic downtime, no, we didn't factor that in, the Greif results for September. No. Mark Kowlzan: The other part of your question about CapEx into next year, we'll update you in January for the plan for next year. But I think we're on track with taking advantage of our opportunities. I would like to say that just to remind everybody, the biggest pieces of capital spending this year right now are a couple of big projects on the converting side. We've got one big project going on in Ohio right now, and that's a new facility. And then in upstate New York, we're totally upgrading one of our facilities as a big CapEx project that will -- both those projects will finish into next year. But we're always taking advantage of these capabilities to insert new converting lines and upgrade converting operations. But we'll give you a better feel in January what we're looking at. We do have some very interesting energy opportunities that we'll give you more detail with next year in the January call. Operator: Next question is from Gabe Hajde, Wells Fargo. Gabe Hajde: I wanted to ask, I see this number, and I think you kind of strip out input costs. So it's -- I'm going to call it the frictional inflation treadmill, but running kind of around $1 year-to-date. So I think in this quarter, it was $0.33. So if I annualize that, we're looking at kind of $170 million. Is that something that's particularly elevated this year or kind of post pandemic when we think about labor inflation and insurance costs, things like that, that's a good run rate on a go-forward basis for maybe the combined entity or maybe legacy PCA? Mark Kowlzan: Let me -- one good piece of that, that we're dealing with, but everybody is dealing with it even at your household is energy costs, electricity rates. Just in the last year or 2, we've seen some of our facilities, electricity rates are up 50% to 75%. So that's one good example of what the world is dealing with, and we're part of that world. That's why I was alluding to the fact that we've got 3 significant projects that we're going to introduce into early next year that will take 3 of our mills essentially electricity independent within the next 2.5 years. Kent Pflederer: And then, Gabe, on the others, it's the usual. It's the labor inflation. It's chemicals. It's any kind of supplies, insurance, rent, those sorts of things that have been going up at a fairly healthy clip in the last few years. Gabe Hajde: Okay. But is that -- is it particularly elevated this year? Or is that something that sort of… Mark Kowlzan: Well, again, it's just I think the biggest factor was electricity rate increases nationwide. If I take one element of cost, it would be electricity. Gabe Hajde: All right, Mark. But when you're planning for next year and you're looking at that number, maybe it's down a little bit because we don't expect more energy price increases and maybe we do because we've got to build data centers. Mark Kowlzan: On the contrary, I don't see energy -- electricity cost flattening out with the demand from all of the data centers that's ongoing. The electricity rate increases, I just don't see that it's going to abate anytime soon. That's why we've taken upon ourselves that we've got the plans to -- I would say, 3 more of our mills. We've got a couple of our mills are in very good shape right now with electricity independence. But within 2.5 years, we'll take 3 more of our mills and essentially get them off the grid, and we'll be in good shape. Gabe Hajde: Mark, I feel like you've got me on the hook, so I have to ask. Are you referencing maybe some biogenic carbon capture opportunities? And I think we've read in some outside articles that, that could contribute up to $85 a ton that you produce. Mark Kowlzan: No, that's a separate issue. We're talking about essentially gas turbine technology. We've moved ahead, and we've got some great projects that we're going to be executing. We've got some facility -- I mean without getting into the details, Gabe, we've got some facilities that already burned a lot of natural gas and power boilers, but we're not getting the advantage of the downstream electricity generation. So on a combined cycle through efficiency, you're not getting all of the upside opportunity for each therm of gas that you burn. The gas turbines will give us that complete efficiency on the combined cycle from steam generation and electricity generation. -- and these will be projects, again, we'll introduce to you early next year. A lot of discussion on the January call, will give you a lot more details. Gabe Hajde: Yes, sir. Tom, one, we've read recently about, I'll call it, price elasticity on corrugate. I'm just curious in your conversations with customers, broadly speaking, how sensitive are customers in terms of potential price increases or trying to do more with less, whether it's lightweighting and how that's showing up maybe in your own volumes, not necessarily specific to price increases, but more thinking about lightweighting on that front? Thomas Hassfurther: Gabe, obviously, we don't talk about any forward pricing at all. So I'm going to pass on that one. But I will tell you that the -- again, you hear Mark talk about, as I indicated, that we expect our mills and acquired mills to run at a tremendously efficient rate, and we expect them to meet some very stringent specifications. And those specifications relate to a lot of the technology that we have put into our boards, proprietary technology that gives us lightweighting capabilities that we believe is unique to the marketplace. Those are solutions that we take to our customers. And given this inflationary environment we're in, given the fact that costs are constantly going up, we're doing everything we can to help ourselves and our customers to fight those. However, at the end of the day, I mean, it is an inflationary environment. But I think that's a real competitive advantage we have in terms of our offerings to the marketplace. Operator: Next question is from Mark Adam Weintraub, Seaport Research Partners. Mark Weintraub: First, I just wanted to just follow up on Greif, the big increase in D&A from purchase accounting. Just want to reconfirm in terms of CapEx related to those assets, I think you in the past talked about $50 million to $60 million. And with that type of spend, you can get them up to Packaging Corp efficiencies, et cetera. Is that still a reasonable number, which obviously would be a lot lower than the $130 million D&A you had talked about? Mark Kowlzan: Yes. I mean, after what we've seen with the efforts at Massillon and then the work at Riverville, it's that type of capital that we're going to spend. It's very similar to what we did at International Falls over the last 14 years. We did not have to spend massive amounts at [indiscernible]. We just had to improve the capability on a lot of little systems and taking care of some of the technology, but we're well on our way, but it is in that tens of millions of dollars, and it will happen over the next year or 2. So I'm really confident that, that number is still good. Thomas Hassfurther: Mark, this is Tom. I would also add that, as we indicated before, the sheet feeders and corrugated box plants are very well capitalized, and we're very pleased with that. And although we've got some maintenance costs and some other things that will take place there, we're not going to invest huge amounts of capital in those facilities. Mark Weintraub: Right. So obviously, cash earnings from Greif are much stronger than what the book earnings are going to be. But I'm also kind of curious whether or not -- is there much in the way of tax shield benefit that you're getting through accelerated depreciation? Or is that sort of not something to call out specifically? Kent Pflederer: Well, I think you saw it in our cash tax payment for the third quarter that we called out in the script. The allocation that we had to PP&E, we were able to take bonus depreciation on and reduce our cash taxes out pretty significantly this year. So yes, I think you see that in our cash for the third quarter. Mark Weintraub: Okay. And presumably, you'd see that next year as well. But -- so kind of shifting gears, if I could. Obviously, it's sort of been a pretty difficult environment industry-wise, box shipments, et cetera. In the past, you've been able to, through business wins, grow a lot faster than the industry and fill out these new box plants, et cetera, that you are building. Have you had business wins of late that you have visibility on that can give us confidence that you can continue to outperform on the volume side? Thomas Hassfurther: Mark, this is Tom. We haven't changed anything that we typically would do. Absolutely nothing. We've been -- as I mentioned, we've been hurt in our numbers from a couple of big segments of ours that we can do very little about. However, we continue to grow within existing accounts in a big way. And yes, we continue to have wins, but these are wins that we earn. They're not -- these aren't wins that you just go out and have something to offer that nobody else is doing necessarily, but we have to earn these wins. And we're just continuing to do the things we're doing. We're just not getting -- we're not getting a lot of lift, obviously, from the economy and the starts and stops that we've seen consistently go on throughout the year relative to tariffs and a bunch of other things certainly are impacting the business. Mark Weintraub: Great. And then lastly, we've had this extraordinary year in terms of magnitude of capacity closures in the North American containerboard business. And box demand hasn't been good. But are you actually feeling any more tightness because of the closures of containerboard capacity? Any color you could give would be appreciated there. Thomas Hassfurther: I think the containerboard capacity, I think you're seeing a consistent trend in this industry that it right sizes to demand and we run to demand. We do. That's what PCA does. And I think in addition, even on the corrugated side, we've closed some facilities. We've rationalized some poor assets, things like that, and we'll continue to do so. And again, it's -- we will run to the demand that we see out there. Mark Weintraub: Okay. Tom, just since you mentioned it, I apologize, I know I'm going a little long here. But I think you have 2 box plants, which not -- which you're going to be closing in the fourth quarter. Can you give us a little color around the decision to do that? Thomas Hassfurther: Well, they just happen to be box plants that are not -- that we can't -- capitalization isn't going to be the answer for those box plants, and they have to be in markets where we have other facilities and bigger facilities and better equipped facilities to handle those customers. It's not as if we're abandoning any of those customers. We're keeping all those customers, but it's just a matter of rightsizing to the demand we see in a particular market. Mark Kowlzan: I think people tend to forget, Mark, if you think about the last 16 years, we probably made 25 acquisitions. And during that period of time, we probably shut 20-some-odd plants. Thomas Hassfurther: 20-some-odd plants, yes. Mark Kowlzan: During that period of time, and we've built a number of new plants and essentially recapitalized the rest of our footprint. But as Tom said, we run to demand and we -- but people lose sight of the fact that we have gone ahead and closed a number of our older plants that just don't fit our needs anymore. Operator: Next question is from Anthony Pettinari, Citi. Anthony Pettinari: With Greif, your mix into recycled will increase. And I'm wondering if it's possible to say how many tons of OCC PCA might buy kind of with the Greif assets. And as you look at your end markets and talk to your customers, as you think about the next 3 to 5 years, is there any reason to think recycled demand will grow faster or maybe slower than kraftliner? Or do you not necessarily think about it that way? Mark Kowlzan: I look at it as an opportunity. Quite frankly, I look at Massillon and Riverville as an opportunity to make more medium, which we need. And our plans run very well on the recycled medium, but combining that with our high-performance liner grades, we get the best of both worlds. And so it's not on a total percentage basis. It's really just taking advantage of the opportunity, and we'll play into that in the marketplace. But the recycled medium work very well with us. Thomas Hassfurther: Yes, Mark, the key is that we do need the medium and 100% recycled medium is a good run rate in our facilities and stuff. And so trade for some of that and those sorts of things. But as far as end markets go, we attack every end market with whatever the best solution is. Anthony Pettinari: Okay. And any quantification of like OCC consumption tons or I'm not sure if you disclosed, but... Kent Pflederer: Anthony, we were flexible beforehand. We could flex the system a little bit, but we typically ran around 20 -- low 20 percentage furnish OCC. That's going to move up about 10% on the whole to 30-ish going forward, if that helps. Anthony Pettinari: Got it. Got it. That's very helpful. And then just a couple of quick questions on CapEx. I mean, understanding you'll give us more detail in February. But the box plant projects that you referenced, does the CapEx spend for that from '25 to '26, is it sort of directionally similar? Or does it sort of ramp down modestly or maybe ramp down more sharply? And then I guess second question, Mark, you've got us really interested in these energy projects. Are there currently PCA mills that are selling meaningful amounts of electricity back to the outside utility company? And could that be potentially an opportunity or part of the projects that you'll tell us more about next year? Mark Kowlzan: First part on your CapEx, we would expect as we finish up the 2 bigger projects, the one in Ohio and the one in New York State next year, CapEx will continue to be kind of flat in that range. We would probably take advantage of that opportunity. The good news is, and Tom has mentioned this and I've mentioned it, Greif gave us the opportunity with the CorrChoice converting side of their business. It's going to help us minimize what we have to do in some of these regions. We will avoid having to spend some major pieces of capital on any new plants for the next couple of years. So in that regard, we'll continue to do some converting installations as far as EO, [indiscernible] rotary die cutter type stuff, some corrugator opportunities. But as far as major plant projects, that will mitigate itself. And then I see the next couple of years, the big projects are going to be some of these energy projects. We'll take advantage of that. It's probably a 2.5-year process. We'll get into the details in January and the first part of next year. But these are projects that have 1.5 years payback type projects, very, very high-return projects. But as far as the level of CapEx, we'll be in a very comfortable range, the amount of cash we're generating. I think, quite frankly, people are going to be asking us, what are you doing with all the cash on hand? That's going to be the high-class problem we get into. And so I'm not worried about the CapEx. All of our capital that we've been spending over the years -- we've got a very good track record of return on our investment with this CapEx spending. So as far as what you're modeling, just I would just continue to model what our trend has been, and we'll update you next year. There was one part -- your part of the question on electricity. No, we're not wheeling power into the grid at any of our facilities. We are -- we do have one facility in particular that's essentially 100% independent, but we're not wheeling power into the grid. Operator: Next question is from Philip Ng, Jefferies. Philip Ng: Appreciate all the great color. So Mark, you talked about potentially some of these energy projects in the next few years. And then obviously, you're going to do some great work at these Greif mills kind of get it up to PKG levels. And then you called out some of the inventory where it's a bit more elevated at Greif. So curious, when we think about '26, does that translate to more downtime than we should kind of be appreciative, which could potentially mute some of the EBITDA contribution from Greif. I think Kent gave a number in that $240 million range plus synergies. So I just want to be mindful just because it was extra noise in the back half of this year. Is there a friction that we need to be thoughtful of that could be impactful next year? Mark Kowlzan: I think, again, the work we just did at Massillon for approximately 6 weeks really gave us a comprehensive look at the mill because we literally touched everything in that mill from the ceilings down to the U-drain sewers, everything was clean, touched, inspected, new lighting. And so in doing so, we understand what it is in terms of components, motors, pumps, rolls, systems on paper machines that we want to upgrade to the PCA standards. So we've already got our plan in place. But these changes will take place on monthly outages. It's not the 3-week outages required. It's the 24-hour outage and the annual outage for 5 or 6 days a week type of thing. So no, we'll be in good shape next year. Riverville is in a similar situation. We've got to just continue to take care of the mills, and we'll invest appropriately. And -- but no, I'm bullish on the -- what we've got facing us for the next few years. No major -- we went through a 40-some-odd day outage at Jackson a few years ago, and we don't see any of that type of situation. So we'll be in good shape. Philip Ng: So it sounds like you would largely be able to do the work that you want to do, whether it's energy projects and then, I guess, even taking down the inventory at Greif within the scope of your normal managed outage. It shouldn't be an outside year next year. Mark Kowlzan: Yes. No, I mean the inventory management, that will happen over the next couple of quarters as we work our way down. And like I say, that's just future upside for the business. Philip Ng: Okay. Helpful. And then a question for Tom. You called out building math and beef being more problematic. Tom, can you size up how much of that of your box business is tied to those end markets? Are trends in those end markets getting worse, it's kind of bouncing along the bottom in the other categories, are you seeing order patterns pick up a bit? And how do you kind of envision your customers managing inventory to kind of close out the year? Thomas Hassfurther: Okay. Philip, number one is, I'm not going to give you what -- how much these segments are. I'm just -- I just told you they're relatively large segments for us, and those are the ones that are impacting us the most in beef and building products being down. But beef is more of a long-term thing. So it's going to take a little while. As I told you, the herds are down to 70-year lows, and these things take 2 to 3 years to rebuild, and we're only a year into the process. So that's going to take a little while. Building products, very reliant on what happens with interest rates and they're coming down and what the cost of materials are and how quickly things can be approved and those sorts of things in the nation. And the remodeling bottoming has begun to go the other way. So that's a good thing. The other segments that we're in have been pretty steady and steadily growing. And the -- our customers are pretty bullish on things going forward. So I think overall, I mean, our portfolio is in really good shape. Philip Ng: I mean I'm hearing from many of your customers that they have desires to kind of work down inventory to close out the year... Thomas Hassfurther: Yes. Yes, Philip, I forgot that part of your question. But our customers are already operating at very low inventory levels, and I think they would tell you that across the board. So that inventory is about -- is peeled down about as far as they can do it because, again, it goes back to all these things that have taken place during the year and the bumpy road we've been on with tariffs and all these other sorts of things. So I think our customers have been very cautious. Operator: [Operator Instructions] This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Mr. Mark Kowlzan for any closing remarks. Mark Kowlzan: I'd like to thank everybody for joining us today and appreciate it and look forward to talking with you all at the end of January. We're very, very pleased with where we are today with the acquisition and looking forward to having a good conversation with you in January. With that, have a good day, and have a great holiday period. Take care. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Essi Lipponen: Hello, and welcome to Fiskars Group's Q3 Results Webcast. My name is Essi Lipponen, and I'm the Director of Investor Relations. I'm here with our President and CEO, Jyri Luomakoski; and our CFO, Jussi Siitonen. Jussi Siitonen: Hello. Essi Lipponen: Here is our agenda for this webcast. Jyri will start with key takeaways of the quarter. After that, Jussi will walk us through the financials and then back to Jyri for business area specific performance and guidance. After the presentation, we will have plenty of time for your questions. We will take questions both through the phone line and through the chat. You can type in your questions in the chat already during the presentation. Before diving deeper into Q3, I still wanted to highlight the news that we shared last week. Jyri Luomakoski has been appointed as the President and CEO of Fiskars Corporation following his interim role in the same position. But with this piece of information, I will hand over to you, Jyri. Jyri Luomakoski: Thank you, Essi. It's a pleasure being here. If the numbers would be better, the pleasure would be even bigger. But let's go into the quarter. Key takeaways, some things went well and some clearly less good. And if we start with the positive ones, our net sales turned to growth, and this was very much driven by several of our Vita brands, actually, most of our Vita brands. And Vita grew in Q3 in the magnitude of 8%. The other positive thing is that we had actually a solid growth in the U.S. The market, which has been in some kind of a turmoil as a consequence of the tariffs, consumers becoming uncertain what's happening there, it seems that our value proposition to the consumers has been such that it's continued to appeal and we've had good development there. What didn't go well is certainly the decline of our comparable EBIT in the quarter. And this is much driven by our additional costs in the supply chain and many of them are self-inflicted. Why? Last year, the inventories started to grow, and that was still happening in the beginning of this year in our BA Vita. And we started very determined actions to take down the inventory levels by curtailing production. As a consequence, when you curtail production, your supply chain costs are partly fixed and there is less volume to absorb those costs. So it was a kind of a premeditated action from our side to prefer cash flow and go into '26 without too much of excess baggage from the inventories. What I will soon come back when we get to the BA updates, but in our Fiskars business area, the innovation pipeline actually over the last 1.5 years or so has been more than doubled. And that's very important to stay relevant to the consumers, but soon getting back to that. And then as a consequence of this, we specified actually our guidance. Comparable EBIT range was narrowed to EUR 90 million to EUR 100 million from the EUR 90 million to EUR 110 million. And currently, as we see the market picture, that is pointing us to the lower end of that range for the comparable EBIT for 2025. Turning over to Jussi, please. Jussi Siitonen: Thank you, Jyri, and hello, everyone. So I continue with this positive news what we had in Q3, i.e., top line growth, solid 4.1% growth, so that Vita was up 8.2%, then Fiskars BA came down slightly, 0.9% negative there. Actually, this is the first quarter since Q2 2022 that we were able to deliver this kind of mid-single digit solid growth. There are a couple of good news also where this growth is coming. So the fundamentals are in place. It was very broad-based. If we take our top 15 countries, which represent more than 90% of our sales, 12 out of 15 countries were growing in Q3. Also same for brands. If we take our top 12 brands, 97% of sales, 10 out of 12 brands were also growing in Q3. So it was very broad-based. EBIT, EUR 13.9 million came down EUR 10.4 million from last year for 2 main reasons. Jyri already mentioned the supply chain issue, what we have there of under-absorption of fixed cost when it comes to our production volumes. Another one is our SG&A cost. When it comes to SG&A part, it's mainly phasing between Q3 and Q4. On gross margin, EUR 46.7 million. It was down 140 basis points from last year, so that Vita was down 380 basis points, 3.8 percentage points there. And Fiskars BA was actually up 110 basis points. On cash flow and I will go a bit deeper to that after a couple of slides, it was up from last year, around EUR 7 million, but still negative of EUR 10 million. If we dive a bit deeper about this EBIT bridge here and where the difference versus last year were coming from. So as said, group was down this EUR 10.4 million, so that Vita was down EUR 7.5 million and Fiskars was down EUR 1 million. The rest is from other operations there. Focusing first, what we have here on the right, i.e., Fiskars BA. So you can see that underlying gross margin was quite significantly up there and only partially offset by tariffs. For the actions we have put in place there, as we said after Q2, are now impacting positive results there and are mitigating the tariff impacts in Fiskars BA. Same what I mentioned already about SG&A, you can see here. So Fiskars BA, SG&A slightly up versus last year, but that's also mainly phasing. On the middle, you can see Vita bridge, which is down to EUR 7.5 million, as I said. Here, you can see the impact of the supply chain challenge, what Jyri explained. So that was one biggest -- big driver there. And also in Vita, it's mainly SG&A phasing what we have there, showing quite strong negative numbers in Q3, but we assume based on what we have seen that that will be somewhat offset in Q4. Overall, when we are talking about SG&A here, I would say that year-to-date SG&A, which is flat versus last year, it's a better proxy for full year than just looking our Q3 numbers. And then, of course, the group as a summary of those 2 BAs down this EUR 10.4 million so that even at the group level, our underlying gross margin was improving. But then as a total, it was more than offset by those tariffs. Moving then to cash flow. As I said, cash flow was negative EUR 10.2 million here. Even though it improved from last year, it was still negative. And of course, this is the topic we are not very happy with. The actions we have been put in place or already put in place or Jyri also explained here are the ones we are focusing now also for the rest of the year 2026 to get cash flow back on track. Here, you can see the impact. I would focus more on year-to-date cash flow here to avoid this kind of seasonal volatility. The challenge what we have is well illustrated here. Inventory is up some EUR 46 million, whilst last year for the same first 9 months period, it was down similar type of number. So we had significant delta, negative delta there when it comes to our inventory situation. And then quite naturally being a component of net debt and EBITDA, the net debt continued increasing due to this negative cash flow as a main single reason there and then that we are behind last year with EBITDA. The fact is that net debt EBITDA went up from last year being now 3.7x. Our target maximum 2.5x is still valid and we remain committed to this target. And therefore, this is one example why we have initiated those actions to mitigate inventory inflow and make sure that actually we get back on track with this net debt EBITDA. But with that, giving back to you, Jyri, on BAs. Jyri Luomakoski: Thank you, Jussi. And briefly on our 2 business areas, starting with Vita, which is approaching its annual high season, which is the fourth quarter. And here, we've seen, as earlier mentioned, a broad-based net sales growth. So if 10 out of the 12 top brands are growing, that I think we can call a broad-based and geographically also broad-based. It's not just one market which is booming and the others not performing. And the inventory-related actions, we've touched quite much upon. And when we look at the growth, and Jussi mentioned, it's several years back when the group was reporting this magnitude of growth numbers and I think it's over 2 years you need to look back till you saw a growth quarter in Vita. And this is extremely important for us driving our performance that we have the underlying growth, have used the kind of a comparison or parallel to steer a ship that does not have any propulsion is very difficult. And the same applies to company growth being kind of the propulsion for the business too. Actions that we started to look upon in the summer already recognizing the inventory levels that the only way to solve the 2 big inventory issue is really to curtail the inflow and, of course, start to boost the outflow. When you look at the comparable EBIT margin, really the big delta is coming from the supply chain aspect and the phasing-related SG&A. The underlying -- preempting maybe a very logical question that would be arising out of the numbers, the underlying gross margin or in terms of pricing, we do not see anything that would be alarming us, and that's extremely important. So when we have the propulsion, i.e., growth and the brands are loved by the consumers, then I think we have the ingredients to improve our position. And that's what the guidance also implies. A few highlights, leveraging our assets -- production assets in the more complicated glass production, which economically industrial logic is more of a process industry logic. Royal Copenhagen, one of our biggest brands, very successful brand has now actually next to the hand-painted porcelain launched also high-end glassware with crystal and mouthblown glass. And those are manufactured in our crystal factory in Rogaska in Slovenia and in our Iittala factory in Finland. So good both for the supply and complementing the offering towards our consumers to have a complete Royal Copenhagen tableware and glassware set. Iittala has expanded now to the scented candles. And when you look at those before you even light them up, you see a form or shape that we all can recognize. So it's the Aalto silhouette. And this is something that appeals as a decoration item and now getting into the darker, less light time of the year, what is then nicer to than have a beautiful scented candle lighted up and you can enjoy all the effects. And actually, the fire is bringing one of those, it's the elements of glass that are the 3 scents, water and sand and air that are in this offering. When we talk about desirable brands, you might recall that historically and I still read in many reports about luxury. We have actively dropped the word luxury. We recognize that to be luxury, there are certain characteristics that many of our brands actually would fulfill, but not all of them. But our brands are very desirable. And one of the kind of manifests to that desirability, Moomin Day in the early August time frame. It was a few days -- a few hours online. We actually sold out the Moomin Day celebration mug. When the sales started, there were about 50,000 people queuing online. And interesting, when I bypassed our store at the Helsinki Airport at the Schengen side, the store opens at 5:00 a.m. Normally, our stores open at 9:00. And at 5:00 a.m., according to our colleagues there, actually there was a queue outside of that. So there were some happy ones who got 4 hours before others their Moomin Day mug. So I think that's a clear manifest to the desirability of a brand, but describes what we have in many of our brands. Moving over to Fiskars business area, relatively stable top line. And as you saw in the bridges, EBIT bridges Jussi just showed, the gross margin improvement and the tariff cost, the incremental tariff costs have been pretty well matching each other, which is a remarkable achievement by the team in terms of managing the situation, which is complicated. It's still fluid situation, as we know. Tariff announcements are still in the air and how those -- some of them will settle, we don't know yet. But a decrease of 0.9%. And when I look at many peer companies who have recently published their numbers, I think we've been weathering this storm extremely well and implicitly indicates -- and I don't have the proof in any formal statistics, but indicates that we've been actually able to capture some market share and have remained definitely relevant to our consumers. In terms of how to capture the market share, there are a few keys, but one of them is also continued distribution gains, which we also see that we still have a clear pipeline of distribution gains coming for this business. Looking at the highlights, many know Fiskars as either the scissor or the axe, or the garden business. Now here highlighting the latest generation, the Fiskars Ultra axe range, which is, again, how the world's best axes have been made even better. And there is a established heritage and know-how and this is a product family now we all are proud of having been able to launch it. Innovation focus. As I mentioned earlier, our Fiskars business area has more than doubled its innovation pipeline in the last 20 months. And this is not only nice picture and promises on November 11, actually, we are arranging for institutional investors and analysts an investor event that will be then broadcast or webcasted, get to know business area, Fiskars. Last spring, we had a similar event in Copenhagen for our BA Vita and the feedback from analysts covering us, some fund managers attending that was very positive that we really show what we are doing, who is doing it, and we are proud to show what will be there available soon also in the stores coming out of the innovation pipeline. So it's not only talk, but there will be a chance to get a look and feel and the touch of these new products that are coming partly later this year, partly in the coming year. Our sustainability targets, we take them extremely serious and continue our commitment there. And when we look at certain environmental criteria, circular products and services, we've been able to grow the share by 300 basis points from last year's September level of last year's first 9 months, but there is still a way to go towards our 2030 target that half of our sales comes from circular products and services. What might not look too ambitious currently is when we have reached minus 61% on our Scope 1 and 2 emissions from our own operations, 7 percentage points improvement year-on-year. The target was 60. So it looks quite favorable that we are reaching -- actually have now reached that target. Then how to tackle our -- the fact that our Scope 3 emissions is defined by us as a percentage of suppliers spend, how many percent have spent to vendors who have committed to science-based targets. And there we've been moving sideways and still have some way to go towards our target. So we are currently at 65%. And in our H1 reporting, in that context, we also flagged out that the rebasing of some of the sourcing for our U.S. business might actually take us a small step back short term before the new vendors can be qualified and submit their science-based targets. But it's not a target that we want to give away. On the social side, the zero harm target remains in force. We have 3.5 as our lost time accident frequency per million hours worked. It is a notch up from a number of a year ago, which is very unfortunate, but the work continues. Health and safety of our people is extremely important to us. And then finally, inclusion experience. We have a target in a comparison with global high-performing companies of 80 and we are currently kind of moving sideways, just shy of that 80 at 77. So not yet there. The split of our businesses, our BA, so separation into subsidiaries is advancing. The legal entity structure will be in our current assessment, finalized by the end of first quarter '26. The operational structure has been in force since last spring, but that's kind of the relatively easy part of it. We are operating in about 30 countries, have had more than 30 legal entities and then having those split and put under basically subgroups for the Fiskars BA and for the Vita BA under the holding company, which is Fiskars Corporation, i.e., the parent company. So that work is ongoing. We had the first wave of a number of countries that went well because that has to do also with IP things, et cetera. The next one is beginning of November. And this step by step, we will get there by the end of the first quarter. What do we want to achieve with this separation? Of course, full business accountability. So we have 2 colleagues who are running these 2 business areas and they have operational end-to-end accountability for their business. So there is no scapegoat of a group supply chain. They could say that, yes, we would have sold, but the factories didn't deliver, et cetera. So it's all under one hat, which improves flexibility. It improves the speed of decision-making. The closer to the consumer we are making decisions, I think the more relevant they are and more timely they are. The independent legal entities as subgroups under the holding company, that's very self-evident. Then when we talk about the transparency and measurability, once this is completed, we have already committed to the financial markets that we can provide and we will provide more transparency into the numbers. Currently, we have the income statement pretty well already covered by BA, but not the entire balance sheet. So there is potential. And by transparency, we hope that these individual businesses are also getting with their different type of characteristics in terms of financial dynamics and asset utilization, et cetera, the fair valuation, which then is reflected into the aggregate, basically some of the parts as Fiskars Group's valuation. And when we have this structure, there is definitely a different level of dedication and this is to accelerate, of course, to tap to the growth opportunities into which these 2 businesses have available to them. In terms of the guidance, already addressed it in the very beginning, we narrowed down the range. And also openly pointed out that we have the most important quarter of the year ahead of us and the current visibility indicates more towards the lower end of the range. I know that many analysts have calculated what does it imply in terms of growth in the fourth quarter that is needed to achieve these numbers. And I'm happy to share that while we do not share regularly kind of mid-quarter or monthly business updates or anything like that, but as of today, having the visibility, how sales has progressed also in October, i.e., the fourth quarter has started, that has been well consistent with the expectations and projections that are needed to get there. Consumers make the decision. And actually, it will be after New Year's Eve when we close the stores, when we actually will, in the end, know how the fourth quarter been. Our D2C share increased a notch in the third quarter. And traditionally, the fourth quarter is more direct-to-consumer heavy. So both our own e-com and our stores play a relatively seen bigger role, which means that the visibility is really at the point of sale that takes place. We have in the background, certain assumptions and definitely actions also and those relate to the supply chain variances, which we have addressed. Those 2 published factory curtailments or mothballing as somebody would call them, are both related to 90 days furloughs and that means that they will span also into the fourth quarter. The tariff impacts, direct tariff impacts are way easier to calculate. Of course, the indirect impacts on demand is very much then visible again on the point of sale. And we expect this Vita's positive net sales trend to continue in the fourth quarter. And as I mentioned, we are on track on that. And the tariff mitigation efforts continue as some parts of the tariff landscape are still effectively open. So in brief summary, what is really delightful here is that we've returned back to growth. Especially the Vita part and this is the year -- time of the year where that growth is relevant and super-needed. And the U.S., where we've had certainly many aches and pains with the very volatile tariff situation, we've remained relevant and been able to remain relevant also to our customers, i.e., the distribution and gain some more traction on that side. The actions to reduce inventories, they continue. It is not acceptable from my perspective to see inventory numbers as we currently have and that's something we need to fix. Innovation pipeline, more on that in a few weeks and guidance I already touched. And relating to a guidance longer-term topic, last spring when I took over as interim CEO, there was a date penciled into the calendar in this autumn for a Capital Markets Day. We all know that our long-term financial targets are basically expiring end of this year. That's clearly recognized. But at that time, I personally felt that it would not be right to go out and make promises about the future and then somebody else might be then bailing out those promises. That's not the style we want to kind of enforce in our company. In H1 '26, we will arrange a Capital Markets Day. The timing is still open. And in that connection, we also plan to issue then our new long-term financial targets. So this as a promise and now being able to bail out those promises, it feels way better to be standing here and announcing this and we will be back on the timing of this. That concludes my part of the presentation. So thank you for your attention so far and we are shifting to the Q&A session, I guess. Essi Lipponen: Yes. And let's first take questions through the phone line. But if you want to ask questions through the chat, just please write your questions in and we will take them afterwards. But let's see if we have any questions through the phone line. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Calle Loikkanen from Danske Bank. Calle Loikkanen: And first off, congrats, Jyri, on the new appointment. Then starting on few questions, if I take them one by one. First, in Vita, the inventory-related actions and the scaling down of production, for how long will this continue to impact profitability? Jyri Luomakoski: As I said, the current announced furloughs are 90 days furloughs. And with regards to Barlaston, that's a 90-day block kind of a mono block, I would say. And with respect to Iittala, it's phased and part of that is in '25 and part of that will be in the winter season of '26. And we are, of course, continuously looking at do we see the development. We had a notch of inventory reduction now in Vita already in Q3 with the bigger demand anticipated in Q4. Of course, we expect more. And it is very much a steering where we want to clear the baggage from the past, have a clear slate forward for the business and manage the cash flow and implicitly through that also the indebtedness or the net debt position. So timing, difficult to say, but it's not ending in Q4 already based on what we have announced with respect to Iittala. Calle Loikkanen: Okay. But you're not expecting a similar kind of impact on EBIT anymore from these actions as we saw in Q3? Jyri Luomakoski: Into our guidance, we have certainly factored in what we know for the actions for this current year. And at this stage, we are not yet going to guide any income statement or any other element of '26. So we are managing that situation diligently and carefully balancing between the cash flow optimization. And of course, we are in the business of making profits and delivering profits and that's even our legal obligation to do that and manage the situation between these 2 aspects. Calle Loikkanen: Yes. Okay. Got it. And then secondly, I mean, now looking at year-to-date adjusted EBIT, EUR 46 million roughly. So you need about EUR 44 million in Q4 to reach the lower end of the guidance. And last year, you did EUR 43 million of EBIT in Q4. So in practice, you need EUR 3 million more now in Q4. And so I was just wondering, I mean, you mentioned that you expect Vita to continue to grow top line in Q4, which should, of course, help. And -- but I was wondering, I mean, if you have these -- still these kind of inventory-related actions ongoing, probably a bit of negative EBIT coming in from those then or at least negative impact on EBIT. So can you elaborate a bit perhaps more in details on what levers there are for you to grow EBIT in Q4 to really reach the guidance? Jyri Luomakoski: Two critical aspects. Of course, the top line growth, as indicated, is vital for that. That's the prerequisite. With respect to the cost side, SG&A, where we had a uplift in Q3, which relates to phasing relates to some accruals. So they were accrued last year comparing year-on-year and some accruals when like with respect to variable compensation, short-term incentives, et cetera, apparently, and I was not there in this role, but as a former audit committee chair, you remember some of the facts from the history when the visibility went a bit sour last year, some of those were reversed, creating a benefit into last year's Q3, which makes the current comparison also somewhat unfair in terms of the Vita Q3 EBIT performance and that type of a ugly comparison doesn't reoccur in Q4. So that's -- so it's revenues and costs, which I know sounds like a very simplistic answer, but there are very targeted items. And of course, we are careful and very cautious in terms of other costs and expenditures in the fourth quarter. Calle Loikkanen: Okay. That's very helpful. And then lastly, before handing over to others. And I know there's still plenty to do this year, but what sort of initial thoughts do you have for 2026? Anything that you kind of are looking forward to or expecting from next year? Jyri Luomakoski: Next year, we hope that there will be a kind of stabilization of the tariff situation because now it's been waking up in the morning and checking the social media, what is the new situation, and that's been keeping our organization extremely busy. That's also time off the consumers and customers. It's time that has been spent in rebasing our sourcing and relates now to the U.S. Fiskars business predominantly. The team has done a tremendous job in terms of finding new sources, qualifying them, testing them and negotiating that we can move and base our sourcing into already settled down tariff environments and so forth. So that's the only part actually, given that we will issue our '26 guidance in early February in connection with our Q4 full year reporting that I can share at this stage. But that remains like a wish that we could concentrate on some more productive or progressive topics instead of fighting the situation here. Operator: The next question comes from Maria Wikstrom from SEB. Maria Wikstrom: Yes. Maybe continue a bit with the soft topic that Calle raised as well. So I mean, just getting a little bit of more color, I mean, as Q4, I mean your guidance, I mean, reaching the low end of the range indicates that you need to record some 8% growth in the EBIT, which in light of, I mean, today's results, I mean, something needs to change. But I mean, is the thinking right that, I mean, given that it seems that in the Fiskars BA, I mean, you have been able to get these price increases through and the EBIT is stabilizing -- more stabilizing year-over-year so the lift that we are going to see -- we would need to see is coming from the Vita segment? And then here, I mean, you think that the Q3 was somewhat extraordinary, so it should be better in the high season. Is that, I mean, rightly summed up? Jussi Siitonen: So Calle's math worked well. So if you take our year-to-date numbers here, you can see that we are EUR 25 million behind last year when it comes to EBIT on the first 9 months, making our guidance, we need to be roughly EUR 5 million better than last year in Q4. What I said in my part here is that we have some technical tailwind there coming from SG&A phasing. So therefore, I would say year-to-date change in EBITDA would be better proxy to give direction there for full year SG&A. So you can figure out how much upside we -- technical upside we are expecting there. And then exactly like Jyri said here, we do need demand, which as of today looks pretty good there for Vita that we are following the plans what we had in place. And then when we are prioritizing the cash flow here, so the decisions are very much ours here, what to do with production to ensure that we can continue improving cash flow. So these are the items what we have in place. This time, Q4 is a bit different from last year. So you might remember last year, we were struggling with demand when it comes to Q4. I would say, at the very moment, we have one problem less versus last year. And then we have this kind of technical tailwinds. But as said, all this needs to work very much with in plans what we currently have to make a guidance. Jyri Luomakoski: And your analysis on BA Fiskars' role in the fourth quarter is also correct. It's not really the gardening season. Yes, some craft things happen for the holiday season. And of course, from our perspective, we wish a lot of snow to the Nordic countries. The snow season is always something we are cheering while the traffic in the cities is kind of not happy about snow. Maria Wikstrom: Perfect. This is very helpful. And then wanted to touch upon -- on the geographical sales development as it seems that, I mean, the demand is better in Americas as well as in the Asia segment versus, I mean, Europe is still lagging behind. Is there any like lead indicators or some bright spots, which would indicate that Europe would join the crowd what comes to the demand? Or do you see that Europe is likely to remain muted also for the last quarter? Jyri Luomakoski: Of world economy, Europe does not currently have a big contributing factor to world economic growth and consumers in Europe are typically more cautious than in many other geographies. In the Nordics, we've had good tailwinds with our Vita business. So when we commented broad-based, both brands and market-wise. So Nordics, we have been able to remain very relevant and very much a desired way to bring some joy and making the everyday extraordinary with our products. But your analysis is correct that it's both North America, U.S., especially and Asia where the consumers are more happy to consume. Maria Wikstrom: And then finally, touching upon the tariff situation and your mitigating actions. I mean, personally, I was very surprised, I mean, how well, I mean, you were able to, I mean, to get the price increases through for the Fiskars segment, I mean, during the Q3. So would you say that, I mean, the tariff risk has now winded down? Or is there still, I mean, many unknowns that we should consider as a risk going forward? Jussi Siitonen: Yes, we are very pleased with the Fiskars BA team here, how they have succeeded to mitigate those tariffs. As you might remember, we got some extra burden there late August when those steel tariffs came in and we are still -- we are still mitigating also those there. We are now leaving the last 2 weeks, if I'm right, this last 90-day extensions, which is given to Chinese tariff. So let's see where it goes after 8th of November there. So no one knows at the moment. So we are, as Jyri mentioned, following on a daily basis what's the current mood when it comes to tariffs and trying to tackle it. More fundamental-based, the actions we have put in place, price increases are only part of the story, mainly focusing on our own footprint, what we have in sourcing there to find alternatives for those high tariff countries, how we are able to make some re-footprinting in that sense. So can't promise that we have tackled all the problems because we don't know them. But as the ones we know at the very moment, we are very pleased with our BA Fiskars execution capability. Jyri Luomakoski: And with respect to the re-footprinting that implies basically products that we have historically sourced out of China, we have qualified suppliers, brought tooling into some of the neighboring countries, which already have settled down tariff deals with the United States. And those tariffs are clearly at a lower level than the current China tariffs are and gives a kind of a planning horizon for us going forward. Maria Wikstrom: And then I had one more question in mind, which reflects to the Gerber division as I recall that Gerber was the one that had faced some difficulties or faced lower demand during the summer period. So what are currently the trends you are specifically seeing for the Gerber brand in the U.S.? Jyri Luomakoski: Gerber has been hit in some geographies by restrictions, whether you can advertise knives or multitools, which are then qualified also as knives because they are in some jurisdictions like weapons. And from that perspective, the push towards the consumers has been a more difficult struggle. Our efforts, and I visited in the summer Portland and the Gerber team, similarly as in the rest of Fiskars BA, innovation and remaining relevant to the consumer is extremely important. And I think it's fair to say that we have neglected that. It's been a few years where we haven't had too much of innovation flow, new products and happy to see that that pipeline is also well equipped with new ways to charm the consumer, to have the outdoor people, the fishermen and the women and the hunters and campers and all those with new need stuff equipped and that is the key to tackle this issue. So what we can't advertise in public or what needs to go beyond a locked cabinet in a outdoor store in some states in the U.S., we have now other ways in the pipeline to make us relevant and again, wanted. Jussi Siitonen: Yes. Maria, when I said that 10 out of 12 brands were growing in Q3, Gerber was one of the growing ones there in Q3. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Essi Lipponen: Yes, we do have questions in the chat. Thank you, Calle and Maria, for the questions through the phone. But maybe if we start with the question related to top line. And Jyri, if you take this one. Was there any impact of timing between quarters supporting the top line development in Q3? Jyri Luomakoski: Not that I'm aware. We have potentially between Q2 and Q3, we have the load-ins for the back-to-school season in North America. That's traditionally been something that either happens last week of June or first weeks of July and then you get big swings. But we are not here in that type of phasing the holiday season load-ins, which holiday season as reminding for Vita, less than half of our sales is through distribution, more than half, clearly more than half is through our D2C channels. Those load-ins are happening now in October anyhow. So those have not been moved forward to September. No signs of that. Essi Lipponen: Great. Let's see what we have next. Related to production, maybe Jyri, if you can continue. Given the current demand situation and production curtailments, how do you view the current production footprint, especially in Vita? Are you considering any adjustments? Jyri Luomakoski: A prudent and careful manager of a business always considers adjustments. I know this is kind of a rounded answer, but that's our obligation to see how we can best perform and serve our customers and in the end, make money for the company. Those always being in the background, but now here in terms of some concrete that there is a site that we would need to kind of permanently mothball or so, such plans are currently not on the table. And of course, demand situation is dictating. We are here for the customers, for the consumers. That's dictating in the end the footprint, how we are set up and how we operate that. Essi Lipponen: Thank you. Maybe, Jussi, related to working capital and inventories. How large working capital release are you expecting in Q4? Have you considered other actions than reducing inventories? Jussi Siitonen: Yes. Well, following our historical pattern, what we typically have had in Q4 is that working capital is coming down. And typically, cash flow has been improving versus Q3 and Q4 is happening now, we can't confirm it yet. The actions we have put in place at the moment are exactly ones Jyri already explained there with a high priority target of continue reducing inventories. This inventory challenge is very much on Vita side, less on Fiskars side. Essi Lipponen: Yes. And maybe to both of you, but maybe if Jyri starts. When comparing Q4 and Q3, are you expecting higher under-absorption of fixed costs in Vita related to the inventory? Jyri Luomakoski: We have implicitly guided for Q4, the EBIT or comparable EBIT number, not individual line items and not individual line items within our cost of goods sold where the supply chain variances would be ending. Certainly, we have our plans how and we will operate our different production sites during the fourth quarter. And based on that calculated and factored in into the mathematics, how we have arrived at our forecast, which are supportive of our guidance. Essi Lipponen: Great. Then about tariffs. And Jussi, if you start. Given the U.S. tariffs and additional steel tariffs, how much headwind are you expecting for 2026? And how much of these have you been able to mitigate as of now? Jussi Siitonen: Yes. Steel tariffs, as said, is something new there started or announced in late August. So there the steel tariff impact is mainly in 2026, whilst the other tariffs what we have for country-specific, they have been already since April this year. So there, this kind of year-on-year change is not expected to be significant. So it's mainly the new one, i.e., steel tariffs impacting more in 2026 than in 2025. We haven't announced any specific numbers how much they are impacting, what's the direct impact of tariffs on our gross margin, only say that when it comes to direct impacts there, we do have toolbox to mitigate them, including this re-footprinting what we are referring prices and the likes. And of course, we are now looking for category expansions there when it comes to offering what we have, which will also help to create new demand and therefore, tackling it not only by cutting costs, but also expanding our portfolio and top line there. So toolbox is quite broad. How much still left for 2026, that we haven't yet commented. Essi Lipponen: Yes. We still have a couple of questions and let's see if there are any new ones coming. It might be that we have already covered this, but maybe just to remind, how quickly can inventory levels in Vita be normalized? If you want to comment on that? Jyri Luomakoski: It is not a sprint. It consists of 2 factors. One is the one which is more really in our control, and that's curtailing the supply or the input into the inventories, both relating to sourced items and own manufacturing. And those we can tackle and those we have started to tackle very clearly. At the same time, the output from inventories, so clearance sales type of topics, that's also needed. Now we are heading to the seasons where you have, as we know, the Black Fridays of this world, they are, to some extent, also created for clearing some inventories and -- but it's definitely not done in the fourth quarter of this year. It's -- if not a marathon, but it's still long distance activity that we have there. So working on both ends, input and the output. And as we progress, the output, of course, requires always the willing purchaser, consumer or distributor. And once we have more to share on that front too, not only those actions that are under our control, we will, of course, be back and updating on those. Essi Lipponen: Thank you. And then maybe the final question for Jussi. With net debt at over EUR 600 million and leverage at 3.7x, what is the deleveraging plan for 2026? Jussi Siitonen: Very good point. First of all, it's just an outcome, what Jyri just explained. So that's the main driver there what we have on short term and then I'm moving to 2026. Typically, historically, we have come down when it comes to net EBITDA towards the end of the year after Q3. So that's our historical pattern there. More important than how much we are now coming down is to turn the trend. So we need to get a declining trend there when it comes to our net debt EBITDA and then impacting on both components there, net debt and then improving our EBITDA. I'm not expecting any rapid overnight improvement there. As I said, more important is now to have fundamentals in place to turn the trend, getting it on the lowering trend there. And then what we said that this max 2.5x net debt to EBITDA remains our target. It might take a bit more time than probably someone might expect to get it there, but it clearly remains our target. Jyri Luomakoski: And we work in a very determined way on both elements of this EBITDA -- Jussi Siitonen: Yes. Yes. Jyri Luomakoski: -- and the net debt where really the main lever is inventories. Jussi Siitonen: Yes. Essi Lipponen: Thank you. It seems that we are out of questions. So thank you for the active participation, and I wish you all a nice end of the week. Jyri Luomakoski: Thank you very much for joining, and happy shopping in the year-end holiday and gifting season. Jussi Siitonen: Thank you.
Operator: Hello. My name is Megan, and I will be your operator this morning. I would like to welcome everyone to the Garrett Motion Third Quarter 2025 Financial Results Conference Call. This call is being recorded, and a replay will be available later today. [Operator Instructions]. I would now like to hand the call over to Cyril Grandjean, Garrett's Vice President, Investor Relations and Treasurer. Cyril Grandjean: Thank you, Megan. Good day, and welcome, everyone. Thank you for attending the Garrett Motion Third Quarter 2025 Financial Results Conference Call. Before we begin, I would like to mention that today's presentation and earnings press release are available on the IR section of Garrett Motion's website at investors.garrettmotion.com. There, you will also find links to our SEC filings, along with other important information about the company. We note that this presentation contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of the U.S. federal securities laws. These statements, which can be identified by words such as anticipate, intend, plan, believe, expect, may, should or similar expressions represent management's current expectations and are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause our actual results to differ materially from such expectations. These risks and uncertainties include the factors identified in our annual report on Form 10-K and other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission and include risks related to the automotive industry, competitive landscape and macroeconomic and geopolitical conditions, among others. Please review the disclaimers on Slide 2 of our presentation as the content of our call will be governed by this language. Today's presentation also includes certain non-GAAP measures which we use to help describe how we manage and operate our business. We reconcile each of these measures to the most directly comparable GAAP measure in the appendix of our presentation and related press release. Finally, in today's presentation and comments, we may refer to light vehicle diesel and light vehicle gasoline products by using the terms diesel and gasoline only. With us today are Olivier Rabiller, Garrett's President and Chief Executive Officer; and Sean Deason, Garrett's Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. I will now hand the call over to Olivier. Olivier Rabiller: Thank you, Cyril. Thank you all for joining the call today. I am pleased to report that Garrett delivered another set of strong financial results in the third quarter, thanks to increased sales in a more stable production environment and disciplined operational execution. Net sales for the third quarter were $902 million, up 6% at constant currency. This growth reflects outperformance over the industry in light vehicle turbo sales for both gasoline and diesel applications. In fact, our gasoline sales grew by 10% in the quarter, driven by our share of demand gains. Thanks to continued productivity and higher volumes, we achieved another quarter of very solid operating performance. Adjusted EBIT was $133 million, and our adjusted EBIT margin was 14.7%, which includes a 20 basis point dilution of the margin rate from tariff recoveries. We also delivered strong adjusted free cash flow of $107 million for the quarter. These results, combined with an improved forecast for the automotive industry for the second half of the year, has enabled us to raise our 2025 outlook midpoint. In addition, we continue to allocate capital in line with our stated framework and our commitment to delivering value to shareholders. During the third quarter, we accelerated our share repurchase activity, buying back $84 million of common stock. We also paid a $12 million quarterly dividend. Moreover, our Board of Directors just approved a 33% in our dividend raising it to $0.08 per share for the fourth quarter. Now let me move to Slide 4 to share more about Garrett's continued success across our differentiated technologies. We continue to see growing interest in developing turbochargers for hybrids and range-extended electric vehicles. This quarter, we secured several additional awards for these technologies. In addition, we obtained several awards for commercial vehicles and industrial turbochargers in various regions including over $40 million for products supporting stationary power generation or gen sets. Demand for subunits continues to grow, fueled by the global expansion of data centers in which gen sets are installed for backup power generation. Sales of these products are expected to exceed $100 million in 2025 and represent an important growth opportunity for Garrett. This quarter, we also continued to make progress in developing our differentiated 0 emission products. We secured additional proof of concepts with 2 OEMs in Japan and China for our high-speed 3-in-1 E-Powertrain. In addition, on the E-Cooling side, we progressed with the development of our oil-free centrifugal high-speed compressor technology for industrial and mobility applications. We see strong momentum with customers for our E-Compressor technology, which is driving significant efficiency gains when tested against current industrial technologies. All in all, I'm extremely pleased with our ability to deliver strong financial results while continuing to position the company for years of growth. I will now hand it over to Sean, who will provide more details on our financial results and outlook. Sean Deason: Thanks, Olivier, and good morning, everyone. I will begin my remarks on Slide 5. As Olivier highlighted, we delivered strong financial performance in the third quarter. Our net sales were $902 million, driven by new gasoline launches and ramp-ups across key regions, favorable foreign currency impacts and tariff recoveries, partially offset by continued weakness in aftermarket. We delivered $133 million of adjusted EBIT in the quarter, equating to a 14.7% margin. This represents both a year-over-year and a sequential increase resulting from ongoing operational productivity gains that help to offset an unfavorable product mix. And finally, adjusted free cash flow was $107 million as the business continues to convert earnings into cash. Now moving to Slide 6. We show our Q3 net sales bridge by product category as compared with the same period last year. In the quarter, net sales increased by $76 million versus the prior year or 9% on a reported basis and 6% on a constant currency basis, reflecting favorable foreign currency impacts. We continue to experience strong gasoline growth, outperforming the industry. This growth is driven by continued share of demand gains and new launches and ramp-ups across Europe, China, India and Brazil. Within diesel, we experienced strong performance in both Europe and North America. This was partially offset by lower demand for aftermarket applications, primarily in North America. Additionally, we recovered $12 million of tariffs within the quarter. Turning to Slide 7. During the quarter, we generated $133 million in adjusted EBIT, representing a $16 million increase from the same period last year. This represents a margin rate of 14.7%, which is a 50 basis point improvement year-over-year. The increase in adjusted EBIT was primarily driven by increased volumes and the continued benefits of sustained fixed cost actions and variable cost productivity taken in the current and prior year. These increases were partially offset by an unfavorable mix driven by the strength in light vehicle gasoline applications. In the quarter, the impact of newly implemented tariffs drove a 20 basis point decline in the margin rate. Additionally, we benefited from a $9 million contribution or 60 basis points from favorable foreign currency impacts year-over-year. Turning now to Slide 8. I'll walk you through the adjusted EBIT to adjusted free cash flow bridge for the quarter. We delivered a strong adjusted free cash flow of $107 million. This was due primarily to increased volumes and efficient conversion of earnings into cash, which was partially offset by changes in working capital, driven by timing of payables and higher inventory due to increased volumes. Cash taxes, capital expenditures, depreciation and cash interest were all in line with our expectations. Now moving to Slide 9. We ended the quarter with a liquidity position of $862 million, consisting of $630 million in undrawn capacity from our revolving credit facility and $232 million in unrestricted cash. I am pleased to report that during the quarter, both Fitch and S&P have upgraded Garrett's ratings by 1 notch for their corporate family rating considering not only our reduced net leverage but also acknowledging the substantial reduction in private equity ownership due to recent sell-downs by some of our top equity shareholders. Additionally, as announced today, we made an early voluntary repayment of $50 million on our term loan, reducing gross leverage. Moving to Slide 10. In the third quarter, our strong cash generation allowed us to repurchase $84 million worth of shares, including 5 million shares directly from Oaktree, our largest shareholder. We continue to target distribution of 75% of our adjusted free cash flow to shareholders over time through dividends and share repurchases. The latter of which will vary over time and will depend on various factors, including macroeconomic and industry conditions. As Olivier mentioned earlier today, given our strong financial position, our Board approved an increase to our quarterly dividend for the fourth quarter rising 33% from $0.06 to $0.08 per share, which will be payable in December of 2025. I'll now transition to Slide 11 to discuss our 2025 outlook. We are raising our midpoint outlook for 2025 to reflect the improved forecast for the automotive industry in the second half and the impact of tariffs on sales and adjusted EBIT margin net of recovery. This revised outlook now implies the following midpoints. Net sales of $3.55 billion, flat to plus 1% at constant currency, net income of $280 million, adjusted EBIT of $510 million, net cash provided by operating activities of $415 million and adjusted free cash flow of $385 million. With that, I'll now turn the call back to Olivier for his closing remarks. Olivier Rabiller: Thanks, Sean. Now let's turn to Slide 12. Our strategic priorities remain clear and consistent. We aim to identify and deliver on customer needs by leveraging our capabilities to develop differentiated, high-speed and highly efficient technologies. In doing so, we generate robust returns for our shareholders. Let me wrap this up on our final slide, Slide 13. First, we delivered strong Q3 results, fueled by share of demand gains in gasoline outperforming the industry, and this coupled with disciplined operational execution. We also generated $107 million of adjusted free cash flow in the quarter and $264 million year-to-date. This strong cash flow generation allowed us to invest in growing our turbo and zero-emission technologies. To date, we continue to win greater than 50% of our new Turbo business awards as we have done over the last 5 years. Additionally, we see increased interest in stationary power generation, and we are expecting over $100 million of sales this year from these industrial applications. I am also very pleased with the progress we have made this year on our zero-emission technologies with the first series production award for our high-speed E-Powertrain, which demonstrates the substantial potential of this technology. Momentum and interest continues to build for our high-speed oil-free e-cooling centrifugal compressor with customer testing, demonstrating significant efficiency gains compared to current technologies. This year, we refinanced and repriced our term loan, lowering our interest by 75 basis points and repaid $50 million of this debt this month. We also initiated a quarterly dividend of $0.06 per share in Q1 and announced an increase to $0.08 per share for Q4. In addition, we repurchased $136 million of our common shares through Q3. These actions demonstrate our continued commitment to return capital to shareholders. I am very proud to highlight these achievements, positioning us extremely well for the remainder of 2025 and beyond. Thank you for your time. And operator, we are now ready for Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions]. Our first question comes from Edison Yu with Deutsche Bank. James Mulholland: James Mulholland on for Edison. Congrats on the good quarter. Just looking at the volumes for the quarter, they were good, but they were fully offset by the mix. I was wondering if you could double-click on what you're seeing in there? Is it geographic based? Or is it something you're expecting to continue as diesel penetration falls relative to gas? Is there anything we should be specifically thinking about there? Olivier Rabiller: So let me pick that up. That's a very good question. It's an opportunity for us to clarify. The mix that we see the impact is much more coming by 2 things. First, commercial vehicle versus growth in gasoline and gasoline turbos. And second, some weakness we keep on seeing on the aftermarket. So let me explain that. We are seeing, as we have said, a huge growth on the gasoline side, 10%. Obviously, we know that those products, especially when they come from China. When they go for China are not exactly at the same margin as the rest of the business. So this is the first mix impact. We are -- we keep on seeing continued weakness on the commercial vehicle side in some regions, although I would say it's stabilizing, we are seeing some green shoots which makes us a bit more confident for the future. And last but not least, we said that aftermarket was also subject to some weakness. And in aftermarket, the piece that so far has been weak this year is commercial vehicle off-highway aftermarket, where there is some destocking going on at some of our customers. And as the activity stabilize, we expect that this will still go on for some time and then at some point, recover. So these are the 3 drivers. The first driver at the end of the day is a very good driver for us because it's meaning that we have -- we are quite successful versus the rest of the industry, especially in a region that is extremely demanding in terms of competitiveness. The 2 others, obviously, for us, it's much more cyclical effects that are impacting ourselves. And obviously, like any cycle at some point, they will recover. James Mulholland: Got it. Okay. And then just as a quick second question, and then I'll hop back in the line. On that commercial vehicle green shoots comment, is that going to be geographic based? Is it -- are you seeing some strength in certain areas or on off-highway versus Class 8? Is there any more detail that you can give there? Or is the outlook still pretty soft broad-based? Just some high-level thoughts on that, if you wouldn't mind. Olivier Rabiller: It's pretty sub broad-based. But we have seen some signs of stabilization in China, which is a big region for us. And we should expect some stabilization, although at a low level. And then at some point, I guess it's marking the bottom of the cycle on off-highway and when I say off highway, it's mostly agricultural and construction equipment. Operator: Our next question comes from Nathan Jones with Stifel. Nathan Jones: I'd like to talk a bit about the 0 emissions technologies and the progress there. I know you guys have targeted $1 billion of revenue in 2030. Obviously, that number is quite low these days or today as you're in development. Can you maybe talk about the path that you're expecting to take from here to that $1 billion of revenue in 2030? And how we should think about kind of you announcing project wins that actually turn into the platform revenues and just kind of how we view the path of that over the next few years? Olivier Rabiller: So that's a good question and giving me an opportunity to one more time to explain what we do there. First, we have 3 technologies that are counting towards that goal of the zero emission technology revenue. The first one is fuel cell compressors. So although the fuel cell compressor industry is impacted by the slowdown that we've seen on fuel cell compressor in terms of ramp-up, that's already something that we are doing. Quite frankly, it was not the major part of the $1 billion that we had announced and therefore, the slowdown that we have seen so far is just having a marginal impact on that. Most of the $1 billion is coming from the 2 other technologies, the first one, E-Powertrain. As you have seen, we have announced wins and the biggest one being the -- and I say Hande and not Hande for some people that would make the confusion. Hande is a commercial vehicle player that belongs to the Weichai Galaxy. It's the biggest maker of axles and electric axles, not only for China but also for exports. In China, the industry already exists for electric trucks and is growing. So we are not subject to the slowdown of BEV passenger vehicle that we have seen in North America, and the slowdown of the growth that we have seen in Europe. So we are pleased with that. It keeps on growing. We have more to come for both passenger vehicle and commercial vehicle, knowing that the first launch, which is associated to the first award will come in 2027, ramp up from there. From the beginning, we've said that on E-Powertrain, we would start into 2027 and ramp up from there. So we are fully aligned at this stage with the trajectory that we had laid out. Obviously, we are monitoring very closely the developments of penetration in countries subject obviously to the end markets in which we are playing. And then the last one, which is E-Cooling compressors, which we are quite positive about. At the beginning, we are really betting a lot on what we call mobile application, which is equaling compressors for electric vehicles, mostly commercial vehicle for both battery cooling and also vehicle cooling. When you think about buses, we are still seeing a strong traction there. But what we have seen over the last few months, that's what we wanted to highlight in our earnings today is that we have seen an increasing interest from the industrial world. So think about air conditioning systems that are on rooftop, up to some of the systems that are used in some data centers, where we have demonstrated that the technology we bring is having superior performance to what is existing and is using some innovation that are quite unique for us because we leverage the maturity that we have achieved on fuel cells to address fuel cell compressor to address a new vertical. So we are coming with the strength of the size of the auto industry and we are coming from the strength of the maturity that you need to achieve in auto industry when you start production. So I'm extremely positive about this one, which is getting us into the industrial world out of the automotive world. And we cannot say much more than that at this stage, but results are extremely promising, and the interest of customer is quite high. Nathan Jones: In terms of the predevelopment contracts that you've got going on there, is there any color you can give us on timing of when you expect those to become actual awards and what the timing might be on the start of production on those kinds of things? Olivier Rabiller: Usual timing, when you start on preproduction, yes. It's about I would say it depends on the customer, but it can be a few months to 1.5 years, 2 years before we decide to go into production. You may remember that we've announced already some preproduction award already some time ago. So obviously, there are some of them that are getting now much more mature. Although we are not ready to announce any yet. And obviously, for the rest, it will come later on. What's important is that when customers get into these programs with you, they are already committing energy, resources and money to help you assess and develop the technology. So that's already first, a very good sign. Nathan Jones: And then maybe just one more on that. The margin profile for these products as they ramp up, do they start off maybe below corporate average and as volume improves, you get them to a higher level? Or will they be immediately accretive to the company? Just any color you can give us on the margin profile of the 0 emission products. Olivier Rabiller: So the way we measure that is what we call material margin. So the margin we make between the material cost of the products and the price. And what we have always said and we'll keep on repeating that because we have more and more proof points around it, that on average, it's about the same or accretive to what we have on the turbo side. Operator: Our next question comes from Hamed Khorsand with BWS Financial. Hamed Khorsand: Could you just elaborate on the recovery you saw in diesel, please? Sean Deason: So yes, that was a year-over-year recovery, mainly in Europe and North America. But again, diesel overall is trending down slowly over time, but not nearly to the magnitude we saw back a few years ago. So diesel still is a very strong business for us. And again, we will be last man standing on the turbos for diesel. It's a vertical that has basically 100% penetration on turbo. And it's a business we like very much. Olivier Rabiller: But let me add to what Sean is saying. The big decrease we've seen on diesel was basically linked to the shift on passenger vehicles from diesel to other technologies like gasoline and hybrid. We are more and more as we have been reducing that share of the business. We have been more and more coming to the end of it and with volumes of diesel remaining much more focused on what I would call light commercial vehicle application. So think about delivery vans, pickup trucks, especially in Asia, all these vehicles are diesel, even in China. And today, the trend is that most of it will stay in diesel for the long run due to the specifics of diesel, which are associated with range gas consumption as well as I would say the truck that you need to move diesel. Hamed Khorsand: Okay. And then, Olivier, if I heard you right, you said there's about $100 million this year from industrial use. Is that going into data center? If not, when does that get implemented and helping your sales? Olivier Rabiller: So that's a good one because we introduced that information for this quarter. So let me explain what we mean by that. Even before we launched the main line of turbochargers, the big line that we launched about 1 year, 1.5 year ago, we were already doing a lot of very big turbochargers according to our range that we are fitted on gen set. And what we've isolated this quarter is this number to give people a little bit of a view that already today, even at the start of the GEM ramp, the mag ramp-up. We are already doing $100 million in that field, supplying those turbos that are ingested that most of them are going already today to the backup power for data centers. So we are not just venturing into something from scratch. We are extending our range with bigger turbos, but we are already doing a significant business in that field to our customers, whether in China, Europe or the U.S. by way. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from Jake Scholl with BNP Paribas.. Thomas Scholl: Congrats on a great quarter. I appreciate you guys providing the color on your stationary power revenue. So as that business continues to ramp for you guys and especially as we see more demand in things like data centers and you roll out the potential industrial applications of E-Cooling compressor, what could that business look like if we out to 2030 or even 2035? Olivier Rabiller: That's a very good question. I may not give you right away and I'll start with the number on this one. But let's keep in mind that first, it's growing and it's growing fast, obviously, from a smaller base. We've mentioned the $100 million for stationary power application. It's already a significant increase. It's already a double-digit increase versus last year and more to come. And including that's also a little bit premature to tell you exactly the numbers as we are really working on that with our customers. But if we were consuming, we expect it to be significant. I don't think it will represent 50% of the sales of the company by any means, but that will be significant in the bond scheme up since. Thomas Scholl: Yes. Got it. And you guys delivered some very impressive capital returns this quarter, between dividends and buybacks totaling nearly $100 million. Is that what we should expect to see going forward, obviously, with some quarter-to-quarter variability? Sean Deason: Yes. Again, as I highlighted in my prepared remarks, we remain committed to 75% or more over time. But again, that will vary, as you noted, especially on share buybacks quarter-to-quarter depending upon macroeconomic and industry conditions. But that's -- we continue to focus in on returning the cash that we're generating to shareholders. That's a core part of our financial framework. Operator: Our next question comes from Eric Gregg with Four Tree Island Advisory. Eric Gregg: Tremendous quarter, everyone. Two questions. One is on the E-Cooling technologies for data center and industrial. What are the performance or form factor potential pricing attributes that you think will make this technology potentially very appealing to potential customers? And the second question is forgive this, but a little bit more on capital allocation. I echo the points made by the prior caller about how strong a quarter it was. But this year, you're down a little bit year-to-date on stock and purchase versus last year and you have a lot more liquidity than you did last year. So should we be looking forward to potentially another very strong quarter in stock repurchase specifically or more weighted towards debt payback even with the $50 million debt pay down? Olivier Rabiller: Yes. So Eric, I'll answer your first question, and I'm sure Sean will answer your second one. So back to E-Cooling question, what makes our product differentiated versus what already exists. A few things. First, we are using high-speed electric models. We are compressing at a high speed. With high speed in compression comps efficiency. We have an expertise into high speed and our concept shows extremely low level of noise. So at the end of the day, weight, efficiency, noise, and we are leveraging a technology. Now I'm getting a little bit technical where the system rotates on the cushion of air that we call air foil bearing that we have developed for the automotive industry. We have developed that for fuel cell compressors and we are uniquely positioned in the industry because we have the scale of the automotive industry. We have the maturity from a manufacturing standpoint. It's a very complex, high-volume manufacturing to achieve that. So from a design, from a manufacturing standpoint, we have an edge with the system. So if you think about the capabilities of the company, high speed, high-speed electric motors, and then everything that revolves around rotating technology, in this case, this famous air cushion bearing are key points for our product that has to provide the benefit to our customers at the end and back to what I've said, it's weight. Sometimes these systems are on the roof of building. So weight is important. More importantly, efficiency. Any kind of percentage you can save on electric consumption, especially nowadays with the pressure that everybody has to reduce their energy consumption is a bit and the maturity of our product versus some others, putting all that in the context of the world that is evolving when it comes to low global warming refrigerant that needs to be used moving forward. So we are coming at the right point in time where the industry is looking for improvements in the face of a change that is driven by this low global warming refrigerant and it shares the benefits that we bring to mobile applications are obviously extremely applicable to the buildings and the industrial applications as well. Now on the question about capital allocation. Sean Deason: Okay, Eric. So look, as everyone knows, there are some -- it's a volatile industry that we're in right now with new news every day, both from governments and the supply chain. But we are committed to returning capital to shareholders. But we're not going to commit to any specific number. But again, we've just raised our dividend, we had a very strong quarter of share buyback, and we repaid a little bit of debt. So those are the -- those are our 3 levers, and we expect to continue to use them going forward over time. Olivier Rabiller: And to get to our goal on average to return 75%. Sean Deason: Correct. Operator: Thank you for joining Garrett's Q3 earnings call. This concludes today's session.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to West's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this call may be recorded. I would now like to turn the call over to John Sweeney, Vice President of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. John Sweeney: Good morning, and welcome to West's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call, which has been webcast live. With me today on the call are West's CEO, Eric Green; and CFO, Bob McMahon. Earlier today, we issued our third quarter financial results. A copy of the press release, along with today's slide presentation containing to supplement information for your reference has been posted in the Investors section of the company's website located at investor.westpharma.com. Later today, a replay of the webcast will also be available in the Investors section of our website. On the call, we will review our financial results and provide an update to our business and outlook for FY '25. Statements made by management on the call and the accompanying presentation contain forward-looking statements within the meaning of U.S. federal securities law. These statements are based on our beliefs and assumptions, current expectations, estimates and forecasts. The company's future results are influenced by many factors beyond the control of the company. Actual results could differ materially from past results as well as those expressed or implied in any forward-looking statements made here. Please refer to today's press release, as well as other disclosures made by the company regarding the risks to which it is subject, including our 10-K and 10-Q. During the call, management will make reference to non-GAAP financial measures, including organic sales growth, adjusted operating profit, adjusted operating profit margin, free cash flow and adjusted diluted EPS. Limitations and reconciliations of non-GAAP financial measures to the most comparable financial results prepared in conformity to GAAP are provided in this morning's earnings release. I'll now turn the call over to our CEO, Eric Green. Eric? Eric Green: Thank you, John, and good morning, everyone. Thanks for joining us today. I'm pleased to report we delivered solid third quarter results with revenues, margins and adjusted EPS coming in above our expectations. Revenues of $805 million were up 5% on an organic basis. The adjusted operating margins were 21.1%, and adjusted EPS of $1.96 was up 6% compared to prior year. As you will hear today, our business momentum is steadily improving, and we expect this trend to continue. As a result of this strong performance, we are increasing our guidance for 2025. I want to especially thank our West team members for their efforts and continued focus in achieving these results. Before getting into the details of our Q3 performance, I want to highlight two notable appointments, which further strengthened our executive leadership team. In August, our new CFO, Bob McMahon joined West. Many of you know Bob, and he has done an exceptional job transitioning into his role, already visiting several of our websites and meeting with many of you. I'm excited to have Bob on board and partner together to lead the next phase of West grow. I'm also extremely pleased to welcome [ Davis matter ], our new Chief Technology Officer, who also joined West in August and is tasked with accelerating our innovation and new product introductions. Our team looks forward to benefiting from his industry experience and expertise. Now back to the Q3 financial results. Let's begin with a review of the Proprietary Products segment. Revenues of $648 million were up 5.1% on an organic basis. These results were driven by HVP components, our largest and most profitable business. We have a strong market position because of our trusted reputation for high-quality scale and reliability. This business has continued to strengthen each quarter, and revenues increased 13% organically in Q3. Several factors drove the strength of HVP components. First, elastomers for GLP-1 has strong growth and now account for 9% of total company sales. We benefit from our long-standing relationships as we partner with our customers in this market, supporting them as they expand their GLP-1 franchises. We're also collaborating closely with customers who are launching a pipeline of new GLP-1 molecules and generics. And we expect this market to continue to evolve as there are a number of new early-stage trials seeking to expand the range of indications and treatments using GLP-1s. Second, in biologics. We're encouraged for their underlying market demand as ordering trends are returning to normal. Less participation rate for biologics and biosimilars is trending above our historical levels year-to-date of greater than 90%. The third driver is HVP upgrades, including Annex 1. Given our strong market position with our elastomers portfolio, we are well positioned to benefit from what we believe is a long-term opportunity. We are tracking ahead of our expectations, and we currently have 375 ongoing Annex 1 upgrade projects. With the robust pipeline of new projects and our ability to partner with customers to convert current projects into commercial production, we anticipate Annex 1 and related HVP upgrades to deliver 200 basis points of growth this year, up from our previous expectation of 150 basis points. We expect Annex 1 to drive continuing demand for higher-quality products as European regulators now require pharmaceutical companies to demonstrate their culture of continuous manufacturing improvement. West is well positioned to support our customers with HVP components and technical documentation to meet those requirements. We continue to work through our constraint at our HVP manufacturing site in Germany. During the quarter, we made good progress hiring and training employees in installing new equipment to expand capacity. These efforts, in addition to product tech transfers, will allow us to further leverage our investments made in our global HVP components infrastructure and balance production across the network, enabling enough to drive future growth. Moving to the HVP Delivery Device business. Revenues declined compared to prior year as expected, driven mainly by the $19 million incentive payment we received last year. With respect to Smart [ Gild ] 3.5, which is less than 4% of the total company revenues were improving profitability every quarter by driving down costs and remain on track to go live with automation in early 2026, even as we continue to evaluate options to maximize the value of this business. Lastly, our Standard Products business increased 3.6% on an organic basis this quarter. Converting standard products to HVP components over time serves as an important funnel for our business by generating revenue and expanding margins. Turning to Contract Manufacturing segment. This business performed well in the quarter, delivering revenues of $157 million, growing by 4.9% organically. Moving forward, we are now utilizing our Arizona CTM footprint to consolidate operations from less efficient locations. We continue to expect the second CGM contract to conclude at the end of Q2 2026. The future available space is in an attractive location with strong operating team that is resulting in a number of promising discussions with multiple customers. Turning to our Dublin site. We continue to ramp production of delivery devices for the obesity market. We are currently validating and testing the equipment installed for the commercialization of our drug handling business in early 2026. GLP-1s is in the Contract Manufacturing segment accounts for 8% of total company sales. Overall, I'm very pleased with the performance of both the proprietary products and contract manufacturing segments along with the trends that we are seeing in our business and in the markets. Now I will turn the call over to Bob. Bob? Robert McMahon: Thanks, Eric, and good morning, everyone. It's great to be here, and I'm pleased to be part of the West team. West team. West's Injectable Solutions and Services business is second to none, and I'm excited about the long-term growth potential of the company. Now before getting into the details, I wanted to highlight that we have revamped our quarterly presentation to provide some supplemental segment information, which we may find useful going forward. Now on to the quarterly results. In my remarks this morning, I'll provide some additional details on revenue as well as take you through the income statement and some other key financial metrics. I'll then cover our updated full year and fourth quarter guidance. As Eric mentioned, third quarter revenue was $805 million, above the top end of our revenue guidance, beating our expectations. On a reported basis, total revenues increased 7.7%. Currency had a positive impact of 2.7 percentage points, resulting in organic growth of 5.0%. Of note, the incentive fee reduced organic growth by 280 basis points. So a solid result overall. I'll now go through each of our businesses in more detail. Within the proprietary segment, HPV components, our largest business, accounting for 48% of total company sales was the standout. Revenues of $390 million increased 13.3% organically. This was driven by robust growth in GLP-1s, HVP upgrades, including Annex 1, improving performance in biologics and a normalizing demand environment. We are very pleased with the continued momentum in this business this year. In our HVP delivery devices business, which accounted for 12% of the company's net sales in the quarter, revenues were $99 million. This was down 16.7% year-on-year organically, but roughly flat sequentially as we expected. In Standard Products, revenues of $158 million increased 3.6% on an organic basis, even as we saw Annex 1 accelerate. Standard products accounted for 20% of total company net sales this quarter. Now looking across our end markets for proprietary. Biologics revenue was $329 million and up 8.3% on an organic basis. Growth in products using our laminated technology and strength in Westar and Envision offset the headwind from the incentive fee in the prior year. Pharma revenue rose 1.4% on an organic basis to $183 million, with growth in RU seals, stoppers and plungers. And generics revenue increased 2.6% organically to $136 million, also driven by growth in seals and stockers. Now finishing up revenues. Our Contract Manufacturing segment delivered $157 million, growing 4.9% on an organic basis. Segment performance in the quarter was driven by an increase in sales of self-injected devices for obesity and diabetes, partially offset by a decrease in sales of health care diagnostic devices. Contract manufacturing accounted for 20% of total company net sales in the quarter. Pricing was a positive 1.7%, and we are tracking at roughly 2.4% for the first 9 months of the year, right in line with our 2 to 3 percentage point expectation. Now let's take a closer look at the rest of the P&L. Gross margin was 36.6% in the quarter, up 120 basis points as compared to the prior year. This strong result is due to the positive mix of HVP components, as well as good execution in our supply network. Adjusted operating margins of 21.1%, while down 40 basis points compared to the prior year were ahead of our expectations. And below the line, our net interest income was $4.5 million. The tax rate came in at 19.8%, slightly better than expected, and we had 72.6 million diluted shares outstanding in the quarter. Now putting it all together, Q3 adjusted earnings per share were $1.96, up 6% versus last year and $0.26 above confident of guidance. Moving on to a few cash flow metrics. Year-to-date, operating cash flow is $504 million, up 9%, while free cash flow of $294 million is 54% higher than last year as capital expenditures are down 23%. To date, we have invested $210 million in capital expenditures and remain on track for $275 million for the year. In summary, we had a very solid third quarter operationally that exceeded our expectations. And as a result, we're increasing our full year guidance on both revenue and earnings per share. For the full year, we are now anticipating our reported revenue to be in the range of $3.06 billion to $3.07 billion. This represents reported growth of 5.8% to 6.1% and organic growth of 3.75% to 4% for the full year. The foreign exchange environment has remained relatively stable since our last guide and so currency is still expected to be a $59 million tailwind for the year. We are also increasing our full year adjusted EPS range to $7.06 to $7.11 representing year-on-year growth of 4.6% to 5.3%. A few more items to help you modeling. This assumes flat other income and expense, a 21% tax rate in the fourth quarter and 72.6 million diluted shares outstanding. In addition, we continue to anticipate $15 million to $20 million in tariff-related costs this year and now expect to mitigate more than half of those costs in 2025. For 2026, we expect to fully mitigate the impact based on the current tariff landscape. Our updated full year guidance translates to fourth quarter revenue of $790 million to $800 million. This is a reported increase of 5.5% to 6.8% and an organic increase of 1% to 2.3%. And as a reminder, we also had a $25 million incentive fee in Q4 of last year, which we do not expect to repeat this year and is reducing our expected Q4 organic growth by roughly 360 basis points. In fourth quarter, adjusted earnings per share are expected to be between $1.81 and $1.86. Before turning the call back over to Eric. And while we're still going through our planning process, I did want to share a few thoughts on 2026. We are exiting 2025 in a good place. We believe destocking is largely behind us and demand will continue to improve for our key growth drivers. That said, our end markets remain dynamic, and we could see a range of outcomes. So we will be prudent with our planning. Our HPV components business will lead the way given the multiyear growth drivers of GLP-1s and HVP upgrades, driving our biologics end market. We are anticipating the remaining CGM contract will continue to run at full capacity until exiting in mid-2026. This is roughly a $40 million headwind for the second half of 2026. We are actively working on refilling that space with higher-margin business with the expectation of the pacing and ramp, the pipeline coming in better view by the end of the year. Lastly, we are building out drug handling in our Dublin facility, and this is expected to add roughly $20 million in revenue for next year, which will help offset the CGM contract. And we will get back to expanding margins. So while early, I believe 2026 is coming into better focus, and I look forward to giving specific guidance on the next earnings call. Now I'd like to turn the call over to Eric for closing comments. Eric? Eric Green: Great. Thanks, Bob. To summarize, we had a solid quarter, resulting in an upward adjustment to our guidance. We believe the positive trends in our business are sustainable due to strong execution, improving market conditions and our ability to respond to the evolving needs of our customers, our reputation for high-quality and services paramount. West has key competitive advantages that allow us to protect our business model long term, especially in our highest-margin HVP components franchise, and we continue to make progress improving our margins. This is why I'm confident that we are well positioned for Q4 and into 2026. Operator, we're ready to take questions. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Paul Knight with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Paul Knight: Congrats on the quarter. As you think about your long-term construct of 7% to 9% growth, are we heading there in 2026 in your opinion in terms of the momentum you're citing here in 3Q? Eric Green: Yes. Thanks for that, Paul. And I'll start and then maybe ask Bob to join us in the conversation. But as we think about the key drivers to be able to deliver the long-range plan and long-term construct it really -- the thesis is really around the HVP components and driving into double-digit growth consistently year-over-year. And as you know, the key drivers of that for us are biologics or biosimilars, it's also the driver on Annex 1 and also GLP-1. So we feel good that we have the foundation laid that allows us to drive in the right direction to get to that LRP long term. Bob, do you want to give more color? Robert McMahon: Yes. Paul, thanks for the question. As Eric said, the biggest growth driver we're seeing really nice momentum. As I mentioned on the call earlier, we've got some puts and takes here in 2026. But we feel good about the long-term growth of the business. We have to work through the puts and takes of some of the contracts that are coming in and out. And right now, I would say the street is in a good place. Operator: Our next question comes from Michael Ryskin with Bank of America. Michael Ryskin: Maybe just to follow up on that. The HPV components, as you said, a big part of the story. Really good growth in 2Q, continued that in the third quarter. Obviously, on GLP-1 and Annex 1 part of that. But could you talk about the sustainability of that being over double -- the double digits. You talked about hitting in the fourth quarter as well, but then going beyond just confidence in that trajectory? And then if I could throw on just a quick second part on the margin comment you made, Bob, about expanding margins next year. Can you talk about the new pieces of that between gross margin and volume leverage or your cost actions? Eric Green: Thanks, Michael. And you're absolutely correct on the HVP components, I mean, the growth is starting to sequentially get stronger from the beginning of this year as we as we were looking at how the order patterns are becoming more normalized. So we're seeing the markets become more in line with what we would expect long term. We're seeing that with the order trends through our discussions with our customers. And another precursor for us, we keep a cool sign on as the bioprocessing space. As you know, that's a key indicator of what we should see and expect more near to midterm. We also are -- so we're confident in our position in biologics and biosimilars, particularly of the products in market but also new approvals that are in pipeline. And then Annex 1 is another key driver that has multiyear growth algorithm conversion from standard to high-value products, which is a -- it's a good opportunity for long-term growth to get us to that growth algorithm we talked about double digits for high-value product components. And Bob, do you want to? Robert McMahon: Yes, Mike, thanks for the question. Maybe to add on the first question about HVP components. Certainly, we're feeling good about the momentum here. We're actually building to our Q4 guidance is low to mid-teens. So that momentum we're expecting to continue. Obviously, as we get into next year, there's some more challenging comps in the back half of the year. But that being said, the long-term growth drivers of GLP-1s and Annex 1 and the HPV upgrades are there. And that actually leads to your second question around the margin expansion. One of the things that I think we saw here in the quarter was just the beauty of that business being upgraded. The power of being able to drive more efficiency through the -- through the factories with the investments that we've made over time here as well as being able to provide more value-added products to our customers. I would expect that to continue next year. So when we think about opportunities, I do expect gross margin to be an area of opportunity for us to expand margins. But we're also looking at how do we ensure that we're also driving efficiencies kind of below the gross margin level as well. So I'd say it's both. But certainly, as HVP drives the growth that's -- we generate a mix benefit as well. So very nice from that standpoint. Operator: Our next question comes from Patrick Donnelly with Citi. Patrick Donnelly: Maybe one quick one on the CDM contract. It sounds like -- kind of the exited mid-'26. I appreciate the commentary there, Bob, on the $40 million headwind. I guess in terms of the visibility and fulfilling that with high-margin business, it sounds like -- what are the conversations there? What would the timing look like in terms of the backfill? How big of a gap would there be? And then maybe secondarily, just following up on Mike's question there, Bob, I know you spent a lot of time thinking about the margin opportunity here, where there's opportunities, whether it's footprint, higher utilization when you dug into the company here and look at the margin opportunity, can you just talk about some of that long-term stuff that you see and what opportunity you see on the margin, not only the mix to high value but also just more efficient operations? Eric Green: Yes. No, it's a great question, Patrick. Let me -- I'll cover the first, and then Bob will address your second question. But in regards to contract manufacturing, specifically the CGM manufacturing we have in Dublin, we have a number of customers we're engaged with today that late-stage discussions to identify what would be appropriate business to replace the CGM business that we be exiting or finishing the current agreement until the end of June of 2026. So we feel good about the prospects. We do know that the economics of the future business. The expectation is to be stronger than what we currently have in that facility. And secondarily, there will be a transition period the second half of 2026. But usually, what you'll find is, as we extract the equipment for our previous customer and install new equipment, there's engineering fees that we incorporate into our revenue for contract manufacturing. So there will be revenues to replace the gap. And I won't say it's going to be 1:1, but healthy revenues and margin. And we expect to have commercial operations up towards the end of 2026 if it is a pretty straightforward process. So I'm feeling good about the prospects and now the conversations have been ongoing and very, very attractive business that we could put into that location. Robert McMahon: Yes. And Patrick, on your second element of the question around our supply network. I think one of the things that I would say first off, is as we look at the footprint our ability to be local for local is a big opportunity and advantage for us for our customers. That being said, I think there's an opportunity in the medium and longer term to really optimize our footprint. And we're actually going through that analysis right now given the investments that we've made to kind of not only level load and fill those factories with check transfers across, but also the ability to actually drive more efficiency within the existing footprint. And I think that there probably is more opportunity to consolidate certain areas to drive even more efficiency as we go forward. That's not a 2026 element time frame. That's more of a longer term, which actually makes me feel good that there's not only some near-term opportunities to drive cost efficiencies, but also longer-term opportunities. Operator: Our next question comes from Daniel Markowitz with Evercore ISI. Daniel Markowitz: Guys, congrats on the print and welcome, Bob. Robert McMahon: Thanks good to be here. Daniel Markowitz: Awesome. So Eric and Bob, I had a 2-parter for you. First, I'm curious on high-level headwinds and tailwinds to high-value components in 2026 as you see it today. As I think about it, I see a few tailwinds. One is that you're comping the destock, especially in the first half. Second, you have GLP-1s growing off of a larger base. Third, Annex 1 is accelerating following the uptick in project growth through 2025. And then lastly, you have this unique one-off customer situation that I think was about 150 basis point headwind to 25%, but should benefit $26 million. So wrapping up on this first one, is there anything else I should be thinking about as a headwind on the other side or anything I'm missing? And then the second question, zooming in on one of those on GLP-1 elastomer growth, it was mid-single-digit percent of sales in 2024, and now it's been climbing pretty steadily to now about 9% of total revs. That implies a pretty healthy growth for GLP-1s in 2025. Is it right to think it's more than like 50% growth? And if so, what's causing that, should we expect sustained over 20% growth over the next few years? Thank you and sorry for being long-winded. Robert McMahon: Yes. I'll verify your math, Dan. We've been very pleased with the growth in GLP-1. And I'll turn it over to Eric to actually give some of the color commentary on what's been driving that. But I think it's important to understand that we expect that GLP-1s, while they may not be growing at that level, given the law of large numbers coming into next year, we are expecting very healthy growth in GLP-1 next year given the kind of underlying market dynamics there, Eric? Eric Green: Yes, that's an excellent question. So as we think about the key drivers for other product components, you're absolutely correct that GLP-1s will continue to grow over seeing even -- as you think of long term with the potential introduction of orals into the equation, we do think the market itself will be a healthy blend of injectables and orals with injectables continue to be the larger portion, but the overall market continues to grow quite nicely based on what we are hearing from our customers, but also other sources. So we're very well positioned with GLP-1s. As you remember, this is -- this is leveraging our high-value product manufacturing plants. We have five across the globe. And it's -- so we do have scale. We do have the portfolio that supports our customers in that area. You commented about the timing of potential headwinds. I think the one area I would say is on Annex 1 while we have really good momentum in our contamination control strategy, working with our customers is really resonating. And as you know, this is really converting our standard products that are on drug molecules in commercial today to high-value products. And the economics for us is very attractive. As you know, our averages for standard products are margins in the 20% to 30% range, while the HVP is 60-plus percent. And so it's -- but the timing on how these projects roll off into commercial revenues do vary from client to client. And so that -- I wouldn't say it's a headwind. It's more of a timing from quarter-to-quarter, but we're really optimistic and confident in the pipeline that we're currently working on, but also know that we're only touching a fraction of the 6 billion components, we believe, is the market opportunity here. I think the other area is just, again, timing of new drug molecules approved in market. If you kind of look at last year to this year, a number of approvals by the FDA might be a little bit lower for various reasons. But as we are planning with our customers of future launches, the timing might be a little bit on certain launches. Now saying that, the growth levers that you mentioned earlier about biologics, biosimilars, GLP-1s and Annex 1 are very favorable. And those are the tailwinds that we're moving to the balance of this year and into next year. Robert McMahon: Daniel, just maybe one other thing to follow up on your initial question around GLP-1s. Obviously, we watch that very closely and feel that our growth is largely in line with the growth that the end market is seeing as well. Operator: Our next question comes from Dan Leonard with UBS. Daniel Leonard: Thank you and Bob, you might have addressed my question right there, but I have a follow-up on GLP-1. It does seem like from the script data for Novo and Lilly that you're growing a lot faster than the market is growing. I wonder if there's a way to reconcile that. Could there be a compound or element here? Is it the clinical trial participation you alluded to? Any thoughts would be appreciated. Eric Green: Yes, Dan, this is Eric. You're touching on exactly the areas. So if you think about we're starting to see an increase in vials. So therefore, our stockers and seals are necessary. So that's a factor when we think about our volumes and also the pipeline of new molecules being looked at and gone through clinical. So there's other factors that we're working with several customers. And also, there's a couple of geographies. There's an element around generics that were also able to support. So overall, it's -- I would say it's a little bit broader than just the scripts data of our two customers. Operator: Our next question comes from Justin Bowers with Deutsche Bank. Justin Bowers: Good morning everyone, and first, I appreciate the increase detail and transparency on some of the disclosures this quarter. So a 2-parter for me. One, I just wanted to follow up on Annex 1. There were some updates earlier this year. And just curious how that's impacting customer decision-making and some of the conversions. And if that's been a catalyst for some of the acceleration we're seeing. And then part 2 earlier in the prepared remarks, you talked about liquid handling in Dublin, being about a $20 million opportunity, plus or minus. Is that sort of the peak opportunity? Or is there room for growth there in that facility beyond 2026? Eric Green: Yes, Justin, thank you for that. First of all, touch on the Dublin real quick. On the $20 million that we communicated. As we ramp up a new site, it does take time to get to full utilization. So I would consider this as early stages. And as we move into 2027 and a little bit beyond, that's when we get into our peak volumes and revenues. So the $20 million is really just kind of the ramp-up stage and then move through efficiencies through a few quarters, you'll start seeing the utilization significantly go up. So I would not look at $20 million as the peak revenues of that site for the drug handling. On the Annex 1, it's -- there are different factors. We do know that there are more conversations with the EU regulators with our customers as they are auditing and discussing about the regulations. Therefore, there is an interest to continue these projects on an accelerated pace. But again, as I mentioned earlier, there's a tremendous amount of opportunity of drug molecule that goes into Europe that we believe this is just really early stages out of the $6 billion components, it's a small fraction that we are currently converted to commercial at this time. Operator: Our next question comes from Larry Solow with CGS Securities. Lawrence Solow: Great. I echo the appreciation on the transparency, and I also welcome, Bob. I guess I want to just follow up on the -- just on the gross margin, really strong this quarter. Just curious if you guys are actually seeing, and I think this has been part of the team too, just an improvement in mix within HVP and getting more towards the -- up and to the right until the NovaPure and higher-margin HVP components. Are you seeing that dynamic continue as well? Robert McMahon: Larry, I appreciate the feedback. And to your question on gross margin, yes, that certainly is an element of it. When you look at our gross margin despite the incentive fee, we were actually up year-on-year 120 basis points. That was up almost 300 basis points. If you take that out kind of on a like-for-like basis and really the proprietary business, our HVP component business drove that. So what we're seeing is not only the investments that we made over the last couple of years being able to be filled and that capacity driving and you can imagine with the fixed installed base, the incremental margins are quite nice from that standpoint as it goes through the factory. But then as you're having these higher-value products there, you're driving higher ASP products through the facilities. And I think you see that, that's a very positive mix standpoint. The team has also done a very good job of driving down costs and driving up efficiencies. If I think about scrap and our yields, those are also areas of focus that the teams are really driving and I think as we talked about earlier, I think that we've got a multiyear opportunity from that standpoint. And then also, one of the areas is around also being much more focused on some of the raw material input costs. We're building out capabilities in our sourcing organization, working closely with our supply chain as well as streamlining some of the production traveling of our -- some of our products before they get to customers. So there's a number of elements, I think, that are in the next several years that I feel that we have an opportunity to continue to drive that gross margin opportunity Operator: Our next question comes from Doug Schenkel with Wolfe Research. Douglas Schenkel: Two quick topics I want to touch on. One is just a question on Q4 guidance and then one is on really visibility heading into next year. So on the fourth quarter, I want to confirm that you essentially bumped up guidance by the magnitude of the revenue beat. And if so, were there any timing dynamics in the third quarter that held you back from bumping up guidance more? Or was this just trying to be conservative in a period of continued uncertainty. So that's the first topic. The second is risk and visibility as a topic. So part of the attraction for a long time of West for investors has been that this has been a great sleep at night story, a steady compounder last year, with that in mind, I think the company and certainly the investment community were surprised by the roll-off of the incentive payments and drug delivery and also the changes in contract manufacturing. How would you characterize anything resembling that category of risk heading into year-end? I would guess you feel pretty good about it, but I just want to give you an opportunity to kind of tell us where we should all feel better about this getting back to be in the old West again? Robert McMahon: Yes, I'll start, Doug, and on the Q4 guidance, don't read anything into that. We don't believe that there was any material pull forward when we look at it, actually, if you look at it on a 2-year stack basis, Q4 is actually an acceleration but there's also an element of prudence that even given the market dynamics outside that we want to make sure that we feel good about that, and we do. And so we've got some good momentum there and I'll just leave it at that. Maybe I'll start with the second piece and then turn it over to Eric as well. I think this is an area that I'm focused on intently. And I don't want to declare victory just yet in terms of that. And we -- but we do feel good about some of the trends. I would say we have -- in our -- we're committed to improving and providing more transparency, which we'll continue to do over time. But the market is still dynamic. I think we are improving our visibility. But the market still has some variables that we're working through our business planning process right now, and that's why we wanted to provide some puts and takes to what we know today for next year. And I think the long-term trends are positive. It's the pace of when we get back there. And I'll turn it over to Eric to maybe add anything. Eric Green: Yes. No, thanks, Bob. And Doug, it's a great question because that's critical for historically what has been consistently from a demand profile perspective, pretty consistent of the market -- the injectable market space. We believe, based on the work that we have been doing and Bob did touch on this, is that going deeper in the different segments with clear accountability and ownership has given us better line of sight of our markets, obviously, engage with our customers, getting closer to them, which we observed during the pandemic period, we needed to do more of. And I'm confident we're making good headway and traction in that direction. The underlying market conditions continue to improve, considering where we were a while back. But your point is we are laser-focused on making sure we are reducing those risks and increase in visibility. And also providing more of that lens as we engage in these conversations. Operator: Our next question comes from Mac Etoch with Stephens Inc. Steven Etoch: Just one on delivery license, relatively flat year-over-year, excluding the incentive fee. And I think you highlighted some improving economics ahead of the automated line coming on in 2026. So, can you just highlight some of the various aspects driving performance during the quarter and the variables that you're seeing on the top line of margins as well? Eric Green: Yes. No, absolutely. Thanks for the question. When we look at the direct delivery device business, the area look at it holistically, the entire portfolio, we have administration systems in that category. We have Crystal Zenith and obviously, injectable devices like SmartDose. And I'm really pleased with the progress we're going to have throughout the year for our Crystal Zenith and also our admin systems. The area of focus has been on SmartDose to drive two levers with urgency. One is to drive down costs and improve efficiencies. And that -- the progress the team has made is on track with our expectations for this year, and we're seeing an improved margin performance or profitability quarter-over-quarter. There's more to come. With the automation that we are -- kind of being commercializing in early 2026, we're just going through the validation process as we speak. And we're confident that we'll be able to drive even more cost out of the -- out of the product itself. The second is to continue to look at alternative options to create even more value. with that product. And we will communicate once we can, but the final decision, but we're making progress in both areas. Robert McMahon: Yes. And I would just add, Mac, on that. If you look at it on a quarterly basis sequentially, is it where we expected it to. So we feel good about that and that work that Eric just talked about, we're looking at both of those paths with urgency and focus. And so I feel good that each quarter, the economics have improved in delivery devices, as we said in our prepared remarks, and there's more room to go, but we're also making sure that we're looking at this for the long term and evaluating what's the best value for shareholders. Operator: Our next question comes from Matt Larew with William Blair. Matthew Larew: Kind of a 2-part question around your manufacturing network. So after a couple of years of pressure on free cash flow and obviously an elevated CapEx spend for you, you've had a significant improvement in free cash this year as CapEx has normalized down to around 9%. So Bob, you referred a couple of times the opportunity for network optimization, but there's then the balance of obviously customers thinking about regionalization of manufacturing, some of the policy dynamics and obviously, still significant investment in HVP. So just as you think about maybe that balance of network optimization versus making sure you have capacity available for customers. But how are you thinking about the levels of CapEx needed to support growth, that'd be the first part. The second part is there's been a number of recent headlines around pharma tariffs and MFN. And I realize your business is tied to commercial volumes, not necessarily earlier-stage R&D how tuned in are your customers to those headlines in terms of influencing investment decisions versus sort of -- the train has left the station in terms of realization of their manufacturing. Eric Green: Yes, Matt, thanks for the question. Let me start with the CapEx that we are -- we have spent. But you're absolutely correct. Our focus really is on the high-value product components with our five center of excellence that we have, obviously, in Asia, Europe and U.S. Fortunately, over time, we have built the capacity and the capabilities to be able to support our global customers from multiple sites. So as you think about being more regionalized, we will support our customers in all markets. We're very well positioned from an infrastructure perspective. You're correct. As volumes increase, we will need to layer in additional capital, but we do feel comfortable that we're going to be back to the 6% to 8% of sales corridor for CapEx, but heavily weighted towards the high-value product components part of our business. And again, the concept of the center of excellence giving us that network capability, but also more of a campus site perspective versus doing more greenfield. I'll talk a little briefly on the -- on the second question you posed, and I'll turn it over to Bob to add any comments. But you're right. That conversation is active with our customers in the sense of what can we do to support our customers to drive down costs to support them. One is continue to leverage our global network. So there are a few cases where we could do tech transfers to move from one location to another geography to be more co-located with their end market. That's one opportunity that we are working with, but those do take around 12 to 18 months to complete and then to commercialize. But also I just want to comment. The products that we provide, the elastomer components that we provide are critical to the drug molecule, and they are less than 1% of the COGS of the drug. And so therefore, our focus is how can we help our customers drive better yields and efficiencies of their fill/finish process by providing more of the HVP services. So in that sense, we are working with our customers to provide additional services to improve the yield output from our -- for our customers. So it's an active dialogue. But for us, we're seeing less discussion about price, but more about making sure we're balanced from our global manufacturing perspective. Bob? Robert McMahon: Yes. Matt, I'll just add a couple of things. Obviously, that's one of the areas that's pretty dynamic when we talk about kind of the MFN here in the U.S. just recently, we haven't seen any change in our customer buying behavior. That's something that we'll continue to watch. But -- and on the other side, I actually think that, that's a potential lift of an overhang so that they can now move forward. And then the investments here that we're seeing in the U.S. we are seeing that -- we believe that's real. That's a multiyear kind of investment. But as we think about we're talking about kind of level loading, we've made a lot of investment in the U.S. for the COVID capabilities and capacity a couple of years ago. And so we're working very closely with those -- as those customers are building out additional capacity in the U.S. about this tech transfer that Eric was just talking about. So I think we've got good relationships with those customers. And I think we're well placed to be able to continue to invest. And I'll just want to reiterate what Eric said. We do think that we're going to continue to drive down our capital spend as a percent of revenue. but disproportionately invest behind our highest growth opportunities, which is an HVP. Operator: Our next question comes from Tucker Remmers with Jefferies. Unknown Analyst: I had another question on Annex 1. So talk about 2% contribution this year from Annex 1 projects. Can you break down how that split between those projects that are in a development or validation phase versus switches that have already been put in place and sort of hitting what I would call commercial production? Eric Green: Yes, great question. I would say if we look at the entire -- at the end of Q3, the number of open projects that we're currently working on, and the number of projects that convert into revenues are less than 40% with having converted since the duration of this project or this move towards Annex 1, so that kind of gives you a feel of as we ramp more new projects and they're rolling up. And we did mention earlier that some projects could be 3 to 4 quarters and a few others could be a 6 to 8 quarters. So it does depend on the scale of the project and the speed that our customers want to convert. Operator: And our next question comes from Luke Sergott with Barclays. Luke Sergott: Just wanted to ask here about the capital allocation. The first one of the hat tip to the transparency on the -- and the deck is beautiful. So given that you guys have like a pristine balance sheet right now, producing a lot of cash margins going the right way. Free cash flow seems to be picking back up. So update us on your capital allocation priorities, favoritism towards maybe a repo versus more bolt-on M&A? Robert McMahon: I appreciate the feedback. This is Bob. And you're hitting on one of the key priorities that I've got and talking with Eric and the rest of the team and actually just spoke with our Board about this I think there's an opportunity for us to better define and establish a capital policy. And to your point, with being blessed with such a strong balance sheet and our cash flows to be more active in using those cash flows to really drive the business. And so what I would say is stay tuned, but it is high on the list of opportunities that will help continue to grow the business over time. Operator: I'm showing no further questions at this time. I'd like to turn the call back over to John Sweeney for any further remarks. John Sweeney: Thank you all very much for joining us today on the call. An online archive is available at our website at westpharma.com in the Investor Relations section. That concludes the call. Thank you very much, everybody, and have a great day. Operator: Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Welcome to the conference call. [Operator Instructions] Now I will hand the conference over to the speakers. Please go ahead. Jonas Gustafsson: Good morning, everyone, and a warm welcome to this 2025 Q3 release call for Hemnet Group. My name is Jonas Gustafsson, and I'm the Group CEO of Hemnet. With me here on my side today at our headquarters in Stockholm, I have our Chief Financial Officer, Anders Omulf; and our Head of Investor Relations, Ludvig Segelmark. As usual, we will go through the presentation that was published on our website this morning during today's session. I will kick it off with a summary of the main highlights during the third quarter and a few exciting updates regarding strategic initiatives and planned product launches soon to come. Thereafter, Anders Omulf will cover the financial details before I will come back in the end to wrap up this session. As always, there will be opportunities to ask questions at the end of the presentation. Today's session will be moderated by our operator, so please follow the operator's instructions to ask questions through the provided dial-in details. So with that, let's get started, and let's move on to the next slide, please. Despite a continued challenging property market, Hemnet demonstrated strong ARPL growth and resilience in the third quarter. Net sales decreased by minus 1.5% on the back of low Q3 listing volumes. ARPL, average revenue per listing grew by 21% in the third quarter, driven by a continued increasing demand for Hemnet's value-added services, where conversion towards Hemnet premium continues to be the main driver. Paid published listings were down with minus 19.2% in Q3, reflecting a challenging Swedish property market with continued high supply levels, extended sales cycles and continued pressure on the housing prices. Around 4 percentage points of the volume decline was attributed to a new business rule introduced in Q1 2025, allowing sellers to change agents without buying a new listing that is impacting the year-on-year comparison negatively. EBITDA declined by minus 5.9% to SEK 195.4 million as the low listing volumes lead to lower net sales and lower fixed cost leverage. Today, we announced new strategic product initiatives to strengthen Hemnet's role throughout the sales process. The aim with these new initiatives, which include a new commercial proposition where you pay only when you sell is to help sellers and agents to fully realize the value of Hemnet, which we think leads to a better chance of a successful property transaction. I will come back to these initiatives later on in the presentation. Now let's turn to Page 3 for a quick look at the financial performance. Net sales amounted to SEK 367 million, down with minus 1.5% compared to the same period last year, driven by a significant decline in listing volumes during the quarter. EBITDA decreased by minus 5.9% to SEK 195 million. The decrease was driven by the lower listing volumes, which drove lower net sales and reduced fixed cost leverage. The EBITDA margin amounted to 53.3%. We are pleased that we're able to deliver a high margin despite low volumes. Anders will break down these profitability dynamics in more details as we move on in the presentation. Now let's turn to Page 4 for a look at the property market and the listing volumes. On the left-hand side on this slide, you see a combined chart showing published listings per quarter and yearly as well as the year-on-year change between quarters. Published listings decreased 19% year-on-year in the third quarter, reflecting a property market with high supply, longer sales cycles and continued price pressure, leaving many customers hesitant to enter the market. The most recent buyer barometer from Hemnet gives further support to the sentiment, indicating that more consumers now expect prices to fall compared with last month. At the same time, lower interest rates, stabilizing inflation and the easing of mortgage regulations planned for April ‘26 could gradually help increase activity. Listing duration, the average time it took for a property to sell on Hemnet during the last 12 months increased by 18% to 52 days compared to 44 days in Q3 last year. Anders will break down the financial effect of the longer listing duration later on in the presentation. Around 4 percentage points of the volume decline was attributed to a new business rule introduced by 1st February 2025. This new business rule allows sellers to change agents without buying a new listing. It's important to remember that our published listing number follows a specific definition and differs from general market numbers. The negative listing development is challenging, but it's more important to remember that property market can be volatile, and we've been through the similar development in the past years. Just look at 2023. Let's move on to the next slide and provide some additional color on the supply situation and how that impacts the current state of the market. We do get a lot of questions on the state of the property market and how new published listings relate to transactions and total supply. Therefore, I wanted to take this opportunity to provide some color on what we are seeing and visualize it in a few graphs to eliminate some misunderstandings. We continue to see a high supply on Hemnet, but the growth rate has started to come down during the past few months. In September, in 2025, our supply grew by 2% year-on-year compared to 22% the same month last year. With that said, we're still at aggregated supply levels on the platform that is 50% higher compared to 3 years ago. The supply of Hemnet and how it moves is a function of a number of different factors. The supply increases with new listings as new listings are down the last 12 months compared to the previous year, that has a negative effect on the supply. The supply decreases with transactions as transactions are up during the same time period, that also has a negative effect on the supply. The supply follows the sales duration as average days on the platform increases, so does total supply. Average listing days on a last 12 months basis in Q3 were 18% higher compared to last year, which obviously has a significant impact. In addition to these fairly straightforward effects, there are other factors like renewals, like relistings and where we are in the new property development cycles that also impacts the overall supply levels. Now let's look a bit on how this has looked over time on the next slide. The number of new listings have exceeded the number of market transactions on Hemnet since 2022, which has built up a large supply of unsold properties during this time, which is visible on the top graph. As you also can tell clearly from the same graph, that trend has started to reverse during 2025. This is a natural correction after a few years of increasing supply. Looking at the history, we've seen the same similar patterns historically. You can also see from the bottom graph that listings and transactions over time follow the same seasonal patterns, but that the relationship between the 2 can differ quite a lot in the short term. To summarize, supply coming down from aggregated levels is positive for the property market. Lower supply signals a more healthy market where more transactions are taking place, while it is also supportive for the price development. Now turning to Page 7 to look at the ARPL development in the third quarter. ARPL grew by 21% in the third quarter. The ARPL growth was mostly driven by a strong demand for our value-added services. The conversion rate to higher tier packages continued to increase during the quarter and 3 out of 4 sellers on Hemnet now shows either Hemnet Plus, Hemnet Premium or Hemnet Max. This highlights the strength of our offering and that our customers see clear value in investing for increased visibility and impact. Our newest package, Hemnet Max, introduced earlier this year is a natural step for sellers seeking maximum exposure. The product is showing strong performance per seller. So let's look a bit on the performance on Hemnet Max. So please move to Slide 8. As mentioned, Hemnet Max continued to show strong product performance, while adoption is still at low levels. In Stockholm County, for example, homes advertised with Hemnet Max that were sold between April and August received more than 70% traffic compared to homes advertised with Hemnet Premium. Moreover, the Hemnet Max homes also got more engagement on the listing and on the average generated a much higher bid premium. We have launched a number of key initiatives to drive Max adoption going forward, including further enhancement of product features and scaling up the marketing of Hemnet Max towards agents and property sellers. We continue to work with the product, and we look forward to it being an important growth driver for Hemnet in the coming quarters and years. Now turning to Page 9 for some other exciting news. Today, we are very happy to be able to announce a set of new strategic product initiatives to help sellers and agents to fully leverage Hemnet's potential. Looking at property transactions in Sweden, we have a large opportunity as Hemnet to increase the value of the Hemnet investment for agents and sellers. We know that ensuring visibility throughout the entire home selling journey is an important part of achieving the best possible outcome. For example, data shows that listings visible on Hemnet from the start of the sales process have a higher chance of a successful sale with homes published as upcoming on Hemnet on average, selling 5 days faster than those listed as directly for sale. To help sellers and agents fully leverage Hemnet's potential, we're announcing 2 strategic initiatives today. First of all, a new success-based product offering. Since 1st of October, we have had a live pilot where we are testing a new commercial model where sellers pay only when a property is sold. Second to that, we're also announcing new strategic partnership with franchisers and brand owners that want to recommend Hemnet as part throughout the entire sales process. Now let's move to Slide 10 to talk a bit more about the ongoing pilot. So we're announcing a new commercial model to further lower the threshold for sellers to list on Hemnet. We launched a pilot test for a new commercial model on 1, October, where sellers pay only when the property is sold. The new model aims to lower the barrier for sellers to advertise on Hemnet from the start and will be a part of our strategic partnerships, and I'll elaborate a bit more on those on the next slide. This is a highly demanded model from both sellers and agents as it becomes a risk-free for the seller and easier for the broker to recommend the most suitable package for the client. We share the risk with the seller to maximize the chances of a successful sale. And we do this because we know that Hemnet works. It is still early, but the initial response and the initial feedback and collected data from the pilot has been very supportive and very strong. with sellers showing increased willingness to list on Hemnet with the new model. We plan to roll out the new model as part of the strategic partnerships during 2026. Now let's move on to Slide 11 to elaborate a bit more on the strategic partnerships. The second exciting announcement that we have to make today is our new strategic partnerships. Hemnet will offer all franchises and brand owners that want to recommend Hemnet as partner throughout the entire sales process, the opportunity to enter into a strategic partnership agreement. The aim of the strategic partnership is to help home sellers and agents to fully realize the value of Hemnet to enhance the chance of a successful property transaction. It is also a way for Hemnet to strengthen the relationship on an HQ level, meaning headquarters. The new commercial model will form a part of this strategic partnership, along with increased visibility, increased brand exposure, increased traffic and increased lead generation and new product features. We very much look forward to being able to speak more about these news and what they will mean for Hemnet and our partners as they are being rolled out over the coming months. Moving on to Slide 12 for some additional launches and product news. We continue to accelerate the pace of our product innovation. Within short, we're launching Hemnet Insights, a new AI-powered analytic tool providing agents with valuable market data as part of their Hemnet business subscription. We're confident that this will be a very useful tool, and extremely appreciated tool for agents across the country, and we're excited about the launch. During the quarter, we improved our CRM functionality, which makes it possible for us to strengthen communication and add more value to both homebuyers and home sellers on the platform. Moreover, by the beginning of next year, we will also launch a new enhanced offering for property developers that is better suited to their needs. We have also launched a marketing partnership with hitta.se, where both our listings and valuation tools are now being integrated. Lastly, our increased marketing investment during the year have begun to show results. We are seeing positive development in key brand metrics with spontaneous brand awareness increasing 11 percentage points year-on-year in Q3. And according to Orvesto survey data covering May to August 2025, Hemnet remains Sweden's third largest commercial website, reaching close to 2 million unique visitors per week with a slight year-on-year increase of 0.4% compared to last year. This is particularly encouraging given the weaker market conditions. All in all, we continue to accelerate product innovation, invest in marketing and build for the future, and it's yielding results. With that, I will hand over to Anders for the financial update, starting with Page 13. Anders, please take it away. Anders Ornulf: Thank you, Jonas. Let's turn to Page 14 directly and the financial summary. Let me begin with an overview of the third quarter of 2025. Net sales for the third quarter were SEK 367 million, a decrease of 1.5% year-over-year. This demonstrates strong resilience. We managed to maintain revenues despite published listings dropping by almost 20% in the quarter. It's a testament to our business model holding up across market conditions, much like we saw in the first half of the year 2023 before bouncing back the second half year. Key driver, of course, sustaining revenue was ARPL growing 21% year-over-year. This was supported by continued strong demand for our value-added services for home sellers, Hemnet Plus, Premium and Max. This underlines the value our platform delivers to home sellers also in a challenging housing market. In addition, our B2B segment had a strong quarter with a growth of 1.5%. We will discuss the B2B segment in more details on the next slide. Another noteworthy point is the average listing time, which on a rolling 12-month basis increased from 44 days in Q3 2024 to 48 days in Q2 2025 and now 52 days in Q3 2025. The year-on-year effect of a longer listing time is negative SEK 9 million in revenue and the sequential effect of 4 additional days from Q2 to Q3 is also SEK 9 million. To smooth out seasonal variations, we recommend tracking ARPL growth on a rolling 12-month basis as shown on Page 4 of the presentation. Turning to profitability. EBITDA came in at SEK 195 million, down 5.9% development in more detail later on. The EBITDA margin for the quarter was 53.3%, which is 2.5 percentage points lower than the margin in Q3 2024. This decline is mainly due to fixed costs that cannot be fully adjusted to offset the 9% drop in listing volumes. One important component in the margin development is compensation to real estate agents. When expressed as a percentage of property seller revenue, this ratio increases quarter-on-quarter from 30.1% in Q2 to 30.9% in Q3, driven by further improvement in both recommendation rates and actual conversion to value-added products. Looking at the effective commission compared to Q3 2024, it rises from 29.4% to 30.9%, higher commission reflecting a substantially stronger underlying improvement of our [ VAS ] products. And as always, the effective commission is a variable component and tends to fluctuate somewhat between quarters, making it more suitable to measure over longer periods. Free cash flow last 12 months was SEK 808 million, a 36% increase year-over-year. This robust cash generation underscores both the scalability of our business model and our strong profitability even in a very soft housing market. Our operations continue to convert a high portion of revenues into cash, highlighting the quality of the earnings. We continue to uphold a strong financial position. Net debt leverage ended the quarter at 0.5, an improvement from 0.6 in Q3 last year. This low leverage provides us with flexibility going forward. The reduction is particularly encouraging given our active capital allocation strategy. As you know by now, we expanded our share buyback program from SEK 450 million to SEK 600 million this year following the mandate approved at the AGM. We have been returning capital to shareholders while still maintaining a conservative balance sheet. At first glance, the headcount increase of 13 may appear notable. However, it is important to take into account the technical nuance that helps explain the development. A higher number of employees were on parental leave during Q3 '25 compared with the same period in 2024. In addition, the organization has been selectively strengthened primarily within product and tech. With that overview, let's turn to the revenues by segment and take a closer look at the Q3 figures. Moving into Slide 15, which breaks down the revenues by customer group. Since we focus the seller -- very much on our seller revenue so far, let's turn the attention to our B2B segment, which grew by 1.5% despite the continued challenging and cautious market environment. Revenues from real estate agents increased by 2% to SEK 26 million and property developers contributed SEK 13 million, up 14% year-on-year. These gains reflect strong engagement for our prioritized customer segment, and it's particularly encouraging to see both an increase in listings and an uptake in VOS products for property developers, leading to a double-digit growth. However, advertising revenues from other advertisers declined by 8% to SEK 16 million, reflecting a softer display advertising market. This was again driven by broader macroeconomic headwinds and lower impressions as a result of reduced listings volumes on the platform. Overall, an uplift for the B2B segment, marking it the strongest quarter this year. With that, let's move to the EBITDA bridge to dive deeper into the Q3 figures. On Slide 16, we show the year-on-year development of EBITDA. We have already covered what has driven the top line for the quarter, so let's turn to costs. As mentioned, EBITDA declined by 5.9% compared to the third quarter of 2024. Agent compensation increased in absolute terms, driven by strong recommendation and commercial levels despite net sales declining by 1.5%. And again, remember, ARPL grew 21% in the quarter. Looking at costs, expenses were higher than last year, mainly driven by increased marketing investments. We continue to raise our ambition in external brand building activities, and we have also increased tactical digital marketing efforts. In addition, higher pace in product development resulted in higher consulting costs. In total, fixed OpEx, excluding personnel costs increased by SEK 9 million. Personnel expenses increased somewhat, reflecting wage inflation and larger headcount. However, this quarter was -- we also benefited from a reversal of a bonus provision, which explains why personnel costs as a total were slightly lower compared to last year. The other cost category remained fairly stable, although slightly higher capitalized development costs reflect the higher product development activity. Overall, the minus SEK 19 million listing effect naturally mirrors our revenue and profit development and puts pressure on the margin. That said, taking a step back, it's encouraging to see the resilience of the underlying earnings capacity. We're not afraid to continue investing in marketing and product development, even though the total cost increase remained relatively modest at around 9%. In total, this adds up to an absolute EBITDA decline of minus SEK 12 million year-on-year. Moving on to Page 17 and some spotlight on the cash flow. Starting on the left-hand side, our rolling 12-month free cash flow continued its upward trend and exceeded SEK 800 million. Cash conversion remains strong, supporting both reinvestments in the business and capital returns to shareholders. In the middle, you can see the development of our share buybacks. During the third quarter, we repurchased shares worth approximately SEK 149 million. In volume terms, we acquired 560,000 shares, reflecting the lower share price during the period. This is part again of the SEK 600 million mandate approved in May. And finally, on the right-hand side, our net debt stood at SEK 427 million, corresponding to 0.5 leverage, well below our target of 2x. In summary, continue to accelerate investments in marketing, product development while delivering strong cash flow, gives us the flexibility to keep executing on our strategic priorities and maintain attractive shareholder returns. With that, I want to hand over to Jonas for a summary on Page 18. Jonas Gustafsson: Thank you, Anders. Let's move to the summary slide on Slide #19. To summarize the third quarter and the news that we announced today. First of all, we saw continued pressure on new published listings in Q3. The weak volumes negatively impacted both net sales and EBITDA. Second to that, we had a strong ARPL growth of 21%, and we continue to show resilience in a difficult property market. Thirdly, we announced 2 new strategic product initiatives that will aim to help sellers and agents to fully leverage Hemnet's potential, and I'm extremely excited about the impact this will have on our business in 2026 and onwards. All in all, we continue to act decisively. We're working faster. We're working smarter, and we're working with a continued focus on innovation. By doing so, we're strengthening Hemnet's position for the benefit of buyers, sellers and agents alike. With that, let's open up for the Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Will Packer from BNP Exane. William Packer: Three from me, please. Firstly, could you help us think through the strategic rationale of pivoting your revenue model now? You had a very strong track record over the last 5 years. Paying a bit later does bring in new risks such as arguably low inventory quality and revenue recognition headwinds. Can you just help us understand why now? Secondly, thanks for the initial details on the agent partnerships. Would you consider listing exclusivity as a part of that partnership? Or do you think the regulator wouldn't allow it? And then finally, as has been well flagged, inventory is down significantly in the quarter, 19%. Could you help us understand what cyclical market dynamics versus inventory share loss? So for example, Boneo claimed Q3 listings and the market were down high single digit for Q3. What do you think market listings are down? Jonas Gustafsson: So we'll take them one by one. And on the split ship in, and I'll start. So with the sort of the new model from a commercial perspective that we now are piloting, I think this is, to a large extent, based on discussions and feedback that we've had with agents that we've had with sellers. And it's especially sort of important, the reason for testing this out right now is the fact that we have a -- the market dynamics have changed, and we've seen them gradually changing driven by a few different factors. I mean one is related to the high competitive situation that you see on supply. Number two is driven by the fact that you have longer sales periods that we also spoke about. And I think it's one dynamic that is important and that has changed over the last 5 years is that you now see a pattern where a seller of a property typically sell before you buy. That is creating a different market dynamics. What we want to achieve is to ensure that you use the full value of Hemnet. And a way of ensuring this is that we're now testing this new model, and it's conditional to the fact that you would list directly on Hemnet. We know that we have a model that works. We know that we have an extremely efficient platform. We're the market leader. But at the same time, we need to adopt to the changing market conditions. And I think this is something that will be highly appreciated. It will help us to drive volumes. It will help us to strengthen the relationship with the agent industry that is so extremely important. So that's number one. Number two, related to the agent partnerships. We elaborated a bit on the different components as part of these strategic partnerships. And as it goes, by definition, this is a partnership. So obvious when you go into a partnership is that you want to find mutually beneficial wins. So this is a win-win partnership where we see an upside, but we're also going to help our friends out there who wants to be a part of this agreement to help them to sell more properties and help them to gain market share. And when it comes to exclusive listings, I think having exclusive listings totally depends on how you would do it, but it's obviously something where you would need to look at the regulatory dimensions very closely. And that's something that we will explore going forward. Thirdly, when it comes to volumes, so I think -- the sort of -- if you start with the minus 19%, which is our starting point, I think we clearly laid out both in the CEO letter in the presentation that we conducted earlier that parts of this 4% is driven by a business rule change that is impacting the year-on-year figures from a Hemnet perspective negatively in Q3. And it's important to remember that the numbers that was published by Boneo without knowing them in detail, I think if you look at the market and how it defines sort of the volume development, it is not like-for-like compared to Hemnet. The business rule change, I'm pretty sure that the numbers from a market perspective would not capture the relistings and the effect that the 4% had on our numbers. So that is also explaining it. Then I think there's a number of different factors, right? And it is the low demand in general. It is the duration of the sales cycles that is impacting. And also, the way I understand those numbers is not taking into consideration impact from new property developments. So there's a lot of different factors. And the most important thing for Hemnet is to ensure that we remain as the #1 player in Sweden. We want to ensure that the listings end up on Hemnet. And eventually, they do. We've seen that in 2024, and you know the numbers that we published in July, we had 89% market share in 2024. That has moved up and down. In 2023, it was 90%. In '22 and '21, it was 86%. In '20, it was 90%. So market shares tend to move with the market dynamics. So it's difficult to make a full assessment, and there are so many different type of market shares that you could define, whether it's content market share, whether it's new published listing market share, whether it's sold market share. For us, it's most important to ensure that the properties end up [ atonement ] eventually. Anders Ornulf: I can just -- maybe it was a good overview, Jonas. Maybe I can just add that of course, when it comes to our dominant position that we will -- we take that into a very deep consideration before signing any contracts. So as we have always said around that question, it's a very important question it has to be with the position we have. Operator: The next question comes from Yulia Kazakovtseva from UBS. Yulia Kazakovtseva: This is Julia Kazakovtseva from UBS. I have 2 questions, if that's okay. So my first question would be about volumes. So you said that 4 percentage points of the 19% decrease in Q3 was driven by the change in the business terms. Could you please give us the estimate of this impact for Q2? And my second question would be about the new pilot scheme where sellers only pay once the property is sold. So just thinking about the process and the mechanics of this. So if a seller lists their property, but it remains unsold after, let's say, a few months, and they decide to eventually remove it from Hemnet, will they still be required to pay for this listing? And then in this situation, if this happens and then eventually if the property is transacted somewhere outside of Hemnet after this, what's your position here? Would they still need to pay for this or not? Jonas Gustafsson: I'll start off and then Anders, please fill in. So when it comes to the volumes, you're absolutely right, Julia. 4% is connected with the change in terms of the business rule. The 4% that we saw in Q3, if you look at Q2, that number was also 4%. So you should sort of consider the same levels in Q2 as in Q3. So hopefully, that covers the first question. Second to that, when it looks -- when we look at the new product proposition, First of all, we're testing right now. So we don't know the exact scope, the exact terms and conditions of this pilot. We're extremely satisfied with the initial results that we've seen, the reception that we've had from both sellers and especially from agents, it's been very, very positive. When it comes to the specific case that you asked for, obviously, something that we need to detail out. But the current hypothesis and that hypothesis is very strong, is that if you take one listing as an example, you would use this new business opportunity, meaning that, first of all, you would list directly on Hemnet with this new proposition and just play with the thought that it would not be sold for 3 months or whatever period you decide, and it would be taken down. If it's then selling on off Hemnet, if the property has been taken down, you would still need to pay for it. So we will track individual properties and ensure that we get the money for it. The terms and conditions would be that you have used and you have leveraged the marketing power of Hemnet being the most or the leading and the strongest property platform in Sweden. So therefore, you should pay for it. So that's the hypothesis. With that said, it's one of the things that we're testing. But I think otherwise, it would be a way too large risk, and we don't want to cannibalize on our core business. That is a key component in deciding this new proposition. Operator: The next question comes from Georg Attling from Pareto Securities. Georg Attling: I have a couple. So just starting with this new initiative with success-based product offering, how is that going to work with the other product that you have, which is pay when listing is removed because that doesn't seem to make much sense anymore if you go live fully with this. Jonas Gustafsson: Obviously, just repeating the same message that we said before, this is a pilot we're testing. And as part of this pilot and making the full assessment of this new product proposition, we would also look at the totality and the full scope of our portfolio. Current hypothesis is that the pay later if removed, that product would remain. However, and I'm sure there will be questions going forward around this as well, is obviously what price point we would price this new proposition at. And that's something that we're testing and you could expect potentially a differentiation from PL when it comes to the new product. Hopefully, that's helpful, Georg. Georg Attling: Yes, it is. And just second question on the ARPL slowdown here. It's 14 percentage points lower than Q2. if you could just help with the components to this. I mean the price effect should be similar, if not higher than Q2. So I guess mix is really the main reason for the delta helpful for -- with any details would be helpful. Jonas Gustafsson: Please take it. Anders Ornulf: The main explanation is actually tougher comps. So last year, 1st of July, we launched a new compensation model. So a very high uptick to [indiscernible] and now we are lapping and meeting those. So remember, ARPL growth is a growth figure year-on-year, right? So -- and we called out on the call that [indiscernible] is actually growing, continue to grow. So even though we continue to grow, the ARPL growth actually slowed down, as you called out here. So the main reason to answer your question is actually tougher comps. Georg Attling: Yes. And then tougher comps in terms of mix, right, because of the steep increase in premium in Q3 last year. Anders Ornulf: So the uptake between Q2 and Q3 last year was a lot higher than Q2 and Q3 this year. Operator: The next question comes from Giles Thorne from Jefferies. Giles Thorne: The first question was back on the PO sale new commercial model. And the elephant in the room for Hemnet for the past 6 months, maybe 12 months has been buy in the free-to-list model. So it'd be interesting, Jonas, to hear you talk on how the pay on the new commercial model will directly deal with that competitive threat. The second question was a bigger picture question, and it's on agent compensation. And I suppose, Jonas, it'd be useful to hear your case with this new partnership model as to why that amount of capital being allocated to the agency base is still the best thing for Hemnet's long-term interest. I appreciate that's a much bigger, harder question to answer, but it's certainly something on a lot of people's minds. And then the final question was on the open letter that we all saw over the summer from one of your largest shareholders, which called out many things, but in particular, how you're allocating capital your shareholder remuneration. So maybe Anders, some comments on any changes you intend to make on the back of that pressure. Jonas Gustafsson: Thanks, Giles. I'll start, and we'll take them one by one. And Anders, please help me, and I think you are the best one to ask the last question, but let's take it off. So when it comes to this pay on sale, I think the most important reason for us elaborating and testing this pilot now as we speak is that there are -- the market dynamics have changed. And I think I've been repeating this message over the last months since I've had the privilege to be the CEO of this company is that there's a few market dynamics right now where you have an all-time high supply where competition in the supply segment and in the own sales segment is tougher than it's ever been before. Second to that, it takes much longer time to sell a property today than it used to do 3 years ago. If you just look at the average sales duration, that was hovering around 25 days 3 years ago. Now on the last 12-month basis, it is 52 days. That has changed the sales process, the way the agents work and the way the sellers think. Thirdly, which is important is the fact that you now sell before you buy. So what we see right now with the data is that roughly 70% of all property transaction happens in sort of in a way where you sell before you buy. That used to be the opposite. So that used to be 30%. So the market dynamics have changed. This means that we want to ensure that we adopt our product proposition towards the market rather than the competitive situation to ensure that we become relevant, we remain relevant throughout the entire sales process. We know that we have a platform that works. We know that if you list on Hemnet from the beginning, the likelihood of a successful transaction and successful transaction covers everything from finding the right buyers, ensuring that you get reduced sales cycles and maximizing the bidding premium. Those 3 factors are improved when you use Hemnet the entire way. So that is a way -- and that's our hypothesis of using this. And given sort of the market situation, we want to lower the entry barriers for the sellers. We want to help the agents from the beginning. And we think that this product is going to make the difference here. We think it's a very strong proposition that will get listings earlier on Hemnet, more listings and it will help sellers to make better transactions. I think that should cover the first question. When it comes to the second question, it was a bit difficult for me to hear. But I think the question is around agent compensation and how that is related to the new strategic partnerships. But please clarify if I misunderstood it. Giles Thorne: Yes. It was -- it's at heart, a very simple question, albeit probably quite a difficult answer, which is you pay away a lot of your value to this large pool of important stakeholders. And for a very long time, that served you very, very well. But now there are open questions about whether that is the best use of your capital. So it was a question for you, Jonas, to make the case of why this is still the best use of your capital and perhaps use the new strategic partnership as a way of illuminating that case. Hope that's clear. Jonas Gustafsson: Yes. Perfect. So I think when it comes to the agent compensation, I think that has served us well. I think it continues to serve us well. It's strengthening the relationship with our most important ambassadors in the market, and that's individual agents. I think it's fair. And I think I fully understand where you come from, it's a substantial part of our P&L on the cost side that is related to compensation, but it's also helping us to build very strong relationship and mutual beneficial opportunity for both Hemnet and for the agents. When it comes to the way you understand this, Giles, but I think -- I mean, the agent compensation and the compensation model, that is a contractual and transactional relationship between Hemnet and the franchise owners. We see large opportunities of also strengthening our relationship with the HQs, the ones that has a central role and in many cases, a very important influence. And creating opportunities also on HQ level is important. And what we haven't spoken too much today about is also the individual agents. I think Hemnet in the past has been very strong with the franchise owners. We need to remain strong there, but we should also strengthen the relationship with HQs, and we should become better friends and become more supportive to the individual agents. So it's the full slate that we're thinking about. Then thirdly, the open letter from GCQ. Anders, would you like to elaborate around our view when it comes to the capital allocation? Anders Ornulf: Sure. Of course, we saw the letter and the shareholders' input is very important for us. It's one very important piece of the puzzle. But we stick to the current capital allocation strategy that we will continue to distribute excess cash through buybacks on an arm's length basis via Carnegie. On a personal view, I think not, I think it's a good success story for Hemnet since the IPO to be consistent with the buybacks and not taking bets on share price from time to another. So that's the answer. Giles Thorne: So Anders, you won't change the cadence or the pace of buybacks depending on share price moves? Anders Ornulf: No. Operator: The next question comes from Thomas Nilsson from Nordea. Thomas Nilsson: What development do you expect for staff costs and other costs at Hemnet in 2026 and 2027? Jonas Gustafsson: Anders, would you like to take that? Anders Ornulf: Sure. We don't know since we haven't decided, but what we said in the beginning of the year is that we will continue to grow this company. We will invest in marketing and talent and the product, and we will continue with that. Last year, we had a fixed OpEx growth of 30%. We said then that you will not see that this year. And now after 9 months, we are at around 15%. So all else being equal, you should expect us to continue that. But to be fair, the details has not been decided and the best way to look at it is to look at the current run rates. Jonas Gustafsson: And I think just to kick in an open door, we like operational leverage, and that's what we're going to plan for also for the next year and after that. Thomas Nilsson: Okay. And one second final question, if I may. Looking at your growth targets of 15% to 20%, how much do you think this will come from structural price raises and how much will come from promoting higher-priced packages? Jonas Gustafsson: We remain committed, and we think that the growth ambition of 15% to 20% is important. I think what we've said is that in the past, I think the largest price hikes days for Hemnet, those days are over, and we need to work on value-based pricing. And when I talk about value-based pricing, we need to ensure that we deliver products that the customers are willing to pay for. And I think this quarter, Q3, but also what we saw in Q2 and Q1 is a testimony of that. We do see that the product mix and the BOS penetration is the main driver. It is not prices. Operator: The next question comes from Ed Young from Morgan Stanley. Edward Young: Two questions, please. First of all, you've mentioned about further enhancements of Max. Should we read that as small sort of iterative additions to the Max package or perhaps a bit more of a rebalancing of the relative benefits across the package structure, so potentially including elements like free renewals? And then you've also talked about increased Max marketing. How receptive do you think agents have been able to be to these messages about the value of Max in a sort of difficult market backdrop? Or do you think their interest and ability to upsell packages will also be reliant on picking up when the macro also picks up? Jonas Gustafsson: So on the first one, I think when it comes to the enhancement of Max, I mean, Max is still a baby. It's been around for 6 months. So it's still young. We are continuously testing new features. We're elaborating with the price point. We've been running different campaigns. There are campaigns live now in the larger cities to just learn. So we're still in data collection mode. I think we need to look at a few maybe potentially bigger things as well going forward. And per your point, classifieds. So it's all a relative game comparing the features of Max also towards premium and others. But I think -- I mean, I don't think that you should continue to decrease the proposition of premium and Plus. This is all about ensuring that you improve features when it comes to Max. So that's something that we continuously work on. Anders Then I think, would you like to take the second one? Anders Ornulf: I didn't get that to be fair. Jonas Gustafsson: Sorry, can you take it again, Ed? Edward Young: Sure. I was just saying you're talking about increased marketing behind Max. I was just wondering, do you think that agents have been receptive to those messages? Or do you think ultimately that in sort of in the difficult macro backdrop? Or do you think that you need macro to pick up for them to sort of have more space if they're under pressure? Is it really a priority for them to push that? Is the macro impact an important part of the backdrop there? Jonas Gustafsson: Thanks, Ed. I can take it, Anders, and then you can fill in sorry. So I think -- I mean, it's a very good question, Ed. I mean, I think if you look at the actual product performance, and we showed a few highlights with 70% more traffic, 50% higher premiums, 50% more lift, things and engagement up. So I think those are fantastic results. I think that when it comes to Max, obviously, it is priced at a 50% premium versus Hemnet premium. And I think that has been part of the challenge in getting a quick adoption given these current market conditions. The key -- the sort of -- the way this business works to a large extent, is the fact that conversion follows recommendations. So it's all about ensuring that the individual agents recommend Max to a larger extent. That's really the main lever that we have to pull. And I think these marketing investments that we refer to is to a very large extent, B2B marketing, so investing in communication, investing in roadshows, investing in getting the message out there. But I think the sort of the Max adoption to some extent, is held back given the current market conditions. Operator: The next question comes from Eirik Rifdahl from DNB Carnegie. Eirik Rafdal: I got a few at the end here. Just to start on the strategic partnership. Are you configuring or looking to configure the commission model as well to kind of drive more agents to push this offer with pay when sold? Jonas Gustafsson: Simple answer is no. We're not looking to adjust the compensation model. Obviously, kicking an open door, everything, you would understand this. But obviously, I mean, we would pay a commission towards the agent if the property is sold and only so. So that's the part of it. But that's also one thing that we're obviously testing. Eirik Rafdal: That's very clear. And Jonas also you stated that the initial feedback and data from the pilot has been supportive and sellers showing increased willingness to list on Hemnet with the new payment option. Have you also seen increased willingness to jump on Max on the back of this? Jonas Gustafsson: What we've seen is that I wouldn't comment on Max specifically because the numbers are still quite low, but we see that there is a willingness to recommend higher tier products and higher than we have today. So that has been part of the reason why we see a very positive response. Perfect. Eirik Rafdal: And just a final question for me, which is a bit more big picture. What's your overall thoughts right now on AI risk, particularly on the back of the Silo ChatGPT integration announced a couple of weeks back? Jonas Gustafsson: I mean if you look at AI, and I'll take the big picture answer. I mean we're actively looking at how to best integrate AI into our operations to enhance user experience and internal efficiency. Up until today, our efforts internally, we focused a lot on our valuation pool. But obviously, we follow and see what is happening. And I think the -- so and the ChatGPT integration last week are very relevant and interesting. So we continue to look at that, and that's something that the team is looking at it, and we're exploring those opportunities. We want to be part of this when this takes off and when it gets to Europe. Operator: The next question comes from Annabel Hames from Deutsche Bank. Annabel Hames: Just one from me. Can you give more color on why the Max package uptake hasn't accelerated given the data that you have on product performance and investment? Is it purely just a lack of understanding from sellers? Or is it something you eventually consider having part of the commission model for agents to help uplift that uptake? Jonas Gustafsson: I think I mean taking a step back, Hemnet Max is something that would help us in '26, '27 and '28 and will be an important component to continue to drive ARPL growth. We're still in the learning phase. Please remember the last time the Hemnet launched a new product was back in 2019. So this is not something that we do on a sort of on a quarterly basis. And I think -- I mean, sitting here today and being a part of this earnings call, the key driver of what is actually driving ARPL growth in Q3 2025 is Premium and Plus, and that was introduced in 2019. So this is a long-term bet. I think when it comes to why the adoption has not picked up faster, I think parts of it is sort of related to what Ed asked about before. There is tough market conditions right now that I think has been holding back the MAX penetration. That's just a fact. And second to that, I think the awareness, this is the numbers that we show to you guys today are very, very strong. Now it's -- we have a lot of things to be done at our communication department. We need to be out there and spread the dos. Operator: The next question comes from Nicola Kalanoski from ABG Sundal Collier. Nikola Kalanoski: So firstly, interesting news regarding the new model. I appreciate that this is just in pilot mode so far, of course. But just to understand the mechanics of this. Will the cost of the listing ad be automatically deducted during the settlement with the banks when a home transaction closes? Or will the seller have to pay as they've done previously, that is just paying a regular invoice to Hemnet? Jonas Gustafsson: So the simple answer is that what we're testing right now is that the payment method and the payment flow would be very similar to our current products, meaning that would be a separate bill. However, I mean, if you look ahead, and that's a question about product development and integration towards our partners, I think sort of having the Hemnet cost being deducted in the overall settlement, that's also an interesting opportunity. But what we're piloting right now is the first stage. Nikola Kalanoski: Yes, that's crystal clear. And just another thing to clarify. I believe you mentioned earlier during this conference call, some changed market dynamics, which I'm sure we're all familiar with. But I reacted a little bit to you saying that competition in the supply segment and -- or sorry, competition in the on sale segment is tougher than it's ever been before. I just want to make sure, does this refer to there being competition among home sellers trying to sell their home or competition between Hemnet and other marketplaces, right? Jonas Gustafsson: Thanks for allowing me to clarify that if that was unclear. What I meant and clearly meant is that if you look at the on sale segment, supply levels are at record high levels, meaning that if you're a home seller, the competition to sell your property is very, very high. So it's a question about supply/demand to put it simple. Do you follow me, Nikola? Nikola Kalanoski: Yes, absolutely. I was just looking for a clarifying Operator: The next question comes from Julia Kazakovtseva from UBS. Yulia Kazakovtseva: Just one small follow-up for me. What's the current penetration of the pay later feature at the moment? I mean, the number of new listings. Anders Ornulf: It tends to fluctuate a bit, and we've commented before that it's been around 40% to 50% since launch, and it might be -- I haven't looked at it today, but it might be a little bit lower today. Jonas Gustafsson: Hovering around 40% but it goes with seasonality. So around 40% to 50%. Operator: The next question comes from Eirik Rifahl from DNB Carnegie. Eirik Rafdal: It's Eirik again. Just a quick follow-up question because we've been kind of discussing the perception of the max value and the perception of the value you guys create overall. And one thing is the perception that the agents kind of know of your value. But do you have a feeling that they understand the relative value between you and for instance, [indiscernible], I mean, on the numbers we're tracking and looking at, you guys are reporting all-time high time on site today of 52 days, but [indiscernible], at least on our numbers, is north of 120 days, so more than 2x what you guys can deliver. Do you feel that the agents kind of understand this in this market that it doesn't really help them to go there and kind of try to avoid going on Hemnet? I mean I think obviously, it's a mix. I think we have we have more work to be done and continue to educate the market around that. And you're absolutely right. I mean Hemnet is a much more efficient and much stronger property portal when it comes to ensuring that you sell your property quickly and fastly. With that said, I think this is something that we're continuously work on. And I think I've been talking a bit about how we invest in our sales force. The main reason for investing in our sales force is that we need boots on the ground to be out there, help the individual agent to understand the fantastic value that Hemnet is delivering. And also what we did in Q3 was to lift up Marcus to become my management team. And I think becoming closer to the agent, becoming closer to the industry is it's a strong rationale of why we're doing that and not only because Marcus is a fantastic salesperson. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Jonas Gustafsson: Thank you, everyone, for joining the call today and for a lot of good questions. We ran slightly over time. But with that said, we'll conclude today's session, and I wish you a fantastic day. Thanks.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, welcome to the STMicroelectronics Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Release Conference Call and Live Webcast. I am Myra, the Chorus Call operator. [Operator Instructions] The conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions]. The conference must not be recorded for publication or broadcast. At this time, it's my pleasure to hand over to Jerome Ramel, EVP, Corporate Development and Integrated External Communications. Please go ahead. Jerome Ramel: Thank you, Myra. Thank you, everyone, for joining our third quarter 2025 financial result call. Hosting the call today is Jean-Marc Chery, ST President and Chief Executive Officer. Joining Jean-Marc on the call today are Lorenzo Grandi, Creditor and CFO; and Marco Cassis, President, Analog, Power & Discrete, MEMS and Sensor Group and Head of ST Microelectronics Strategy, System Research and Application and Innovation Office. This live webcast and presentation materials can be accessed on ST Investor Relations website. A replay will be available shortly after the conclusion of this call. This call will include forward-looking statements that involve risk factors that could cause ST result to differ materially from management expectations and plans. We encourage you to review the safe harbor statement contained in the press release that was issued with the results this morning and also in ST's most recent regulatory filings for a full description of these risk factors. Also to ensure all participants have an opportunity to ask questions during the Q&A session, please limit yourself to 1 question and a brief follow-up. Now I'd like to turn the call over to Jean-Marc Chery, ST's President and CEO. Jean-Marc Chery: Thank you, Jerome. Good morning, everyone. And thank you for joining ST for our Q3 2025 earnings conference call. I will start with an overview of the third quarter including business dynamics. I will then hand over to Lorenzo for the detailed financial overview, and we'll then comment on the outlook and conclude before answering your questions. So starting with Q3. We delivered revenues at $3.19 billion $17 million above the midpoint of our business outlook range with higher revenues in Personal Electronics while Automotive and Industrial performed as anticipated, and CCP was broadly in line with expectations. All end markets, but Automotive are now back to year-on-year growth. Gross margin of 33.2% was slightly below the midpoint of our business outlook range, reflecting product mix within Automotive and within Industrial. Excluding impairments, gross recurring charges and other related phase on costs, diluted earnings per share was $0.29. During the quarter, we managed to work down inventories, both in our balance sheet and in distribution and we generated a positive $130 million free cash flow. Let's now discuss our business dynamics during Q3. In Automotive, during the quarter, we grew revenues about 10% sequentially, in line with expectations, driven by all regions, except Americas. Our book-to-bill came above 1. We expect to grow mid-single digits in the fourth quarter compared to the third quarter, which would be the third consecutive quarter of second During the quarter, we continued to execute our strategy for car electrification. We had with both silicon and silicon carbide devices for electrical vehicle applications, such as traction inverter and onboard charger designs. On new application where we see silicon carbide being used is investors for full active suspension. Here, we have a design win with a module solution for our key Chinese electrical vehicle maker. Another key event is a switch to electronic fuses to support the land and domain architectures, both in 12 volts and 48 volts. Here, we added to our pipeline of designs for our IFUs controller with leading electrical vehicle makers and qualified our products for volume ramp up. Other wins in the quarter included microcontrollers for DC/DC management in electrical vehicle powertrain, body control modules and HVAC systems across multiple vehicle models. In car digitalization, we are executing our micro color product road map with a strong lineup of new solutions across both our Airbus Stellar and STM32 product families. Design-in activity continues globally with engagement from both large-scale automotive OEMs and Tier 1 suppliers. In legacy application, we have several significant wins based on our smart power technologies in application where we lead such as airbags, Steele and braking solutions. With our automotive brake sensors, we continue to see strong designing momentum and growing opportunities. Wins in the quarter included MEMS sensors for road noise constellation and door control and both MEMS and imaging sensors for in-cabin monitoring. Shortly after our results announcement in July, we announced that we entered in a definitive transaction agreement for the acquisition of NXP's MEMS sensor business, for a purchase price of up to $950 million in cash, complementing and expanding our current leading MEMS sensor technology and product portfolio. The transaction remains subject to customary closing conditions, including regulatory approvals and is on track to close in H1 2026. In Industrial, revenues were in line with expectations, showing increase of 8% sequentially and 13% year-over-year, back to year-on-year growth for the first time since the third quarter of 2023. Importantly, inventories in distribution further decreased. In Q4, we expect to grow value low single digits sequentially, as we continue to decrease inventories in distribution. During the quarter, we saw strong designing activity for our Power and Analog portfolio across a range of applications. These included factory automation over system medical equipment, motor control, white goods, solar inverters and metering. We also continue to expand the use of our industrial sensors in robotics, including robots and cobots and robots, an area where we see demand for significant number of sensors. We also had wins in medical devices like insulin pumps and full detectors. In Embedded Processing, we continue to win designs with our STM32 microcontrollers for a wide range of industrial applications with products from all parts of the portfolio from high end to wireless to specialized functions. This included power supply and optical modules for AI servers, industry automation and robotics, energy storage, metering and goods. We have a full pipeline of new products and software coming to market in the next quarters, and you will hear more about this during our STM32 summit in November. For general purpose microcontroller, we grew revenues both sequentially and year-on-year and we are on the right trajectory to return to our historical market share of about 20% -- 23%, sorry. For Personal Electronics, third quarter revenues were above our expectations, up 40% sequentially, reflecting the seasonality of our engaged customer programs, but also increased silicon campaigns, which also translated into year-over-year growth. Further strengthening of our unique position as a sensor supplier with both MEMS and optical sensing solutions, we signed a new license agreement with This new agreement broadens our capability to produce advanced meter leveraging ST's 300-millimeter semiconductor and optics manufacturing capabilities. This opened up new opportunities from smartphone application like biometrics, LiDAR and camera acids, robotic, jester recognition and object detection. Revenues for communication equipment and computer peripherals were broadly in line with expectations and up 4% sequentially. For AI data centers, we had multiple wins with silicon and silicon carbide devices for high-power solution. Although last quarter, we announced that we are working closely with NVIDIA, a new architecture for 800-volt DC AI data center, leveraging our power By combining silicon care, guided nitride and silicon-based technologies with advanced custom design at both chip and package level. I am pleased to underline that we recently completed the full power testing on a prototype social successfully demonstrating over 98% efficiency. Silicon photonics is another key technology for future data center and AI factories. ST now has the collaborative R&D programs across the full value chain with key suppliers and customers to develop high-speed optical solutions for data center, AI, telecommunication and automotive, from the substrate to the final product. During Q3, we have seen an increased demand for photonics IC prototypes to be launched in the next quarter and beyond in our 300-millimeter wafer fab. This confirms that photonic ICs will be a revenue growth driver for ST in the detail. In low earth orbit satellites. We have further strengthened our leadership position in the rapidly growing low broadband market by beginning shipment to a second global customer, leveraging our combination of biosimilars technology for front-end modules and paddle level packaging for user terminals. Our business in this segment is well positioned for steady growth delivered by several satellite constellations. Now over to Lorenzo, who will present our key financial figures. Lorenzo Grandi: Thank you, Jean-Marc, and good morning, everyone. Let's start with a detailed review of the third quarter, starting with the revenues on a year-over-year basis. By reportable segment, Analog Products, MEMS and Sensors was up 7.0%, mainly due to imaging. Power & Discrete products decreased 34.3%. Embedded Processing revenues grew 8.7%, mainly due to general Marconi. RF and optical communication declined 3.4%. By end market, Industrial increased by about 13%; Personal Electronic by about 11%; Communication Equipment and Computer Peripheral by about 7%. Automotive was still decreasing by about 70% and by showing some improvement in respect to the 24% decline recorded in the second quarter. Year-over-year sales to OEMs decreased 5.1% while revenues from distribution increased 7.6% back to year-over-year growth for the first time since the third quarter 2023. On a sequential basis, Power & Discrete was the only segment to decrease by 4.3%. All the other segment grew led by analog products, MEMS and sensor up 26.6% with Embedded Processing up 15.3% and RF and Optical Communication, up 2.4%. All our end markets grew, led by Personal Electronics, up by about 40%, followed by Automotive, up by about 10%. With Industrial and Communication Equipment and Computer and Peripheral up, respectively, by about 8% and 4%. Turning now on profitability. Gross profit in the third quarter was $1.06 billion, decreasing 13.7% on a year-over-year basis. Gross margin was 33.2%, decreasing 460 basis points on a year-over-year, mainly due to lower manufacturing efficiencies, negative currency effect lower level of capacity reservation fees and to a lesser extent, the combination of sales price and product mix. Total net operating expenses excluding restructuring, amounted to $842 million in the third quarter, broadly stable on a year-over-year. They were better than expected. Preferably, notably our continued cost discipline with the first benefits of the resizing of our global cost base. For the fourth quarter of 2025, we expect to stand at about $950 million, increasing quarter-on-quarter due notably to calendar base effect. This will lead the net OpEx for the full year 2025 to decline by 2.5% compared to 2024 despite unfavorable currency effect. As a reminder, these amounts are net of other income and expenses and exclude restructuring. In the third quarter, we reported $180 million operating income, which included $37 million for impairment restructuring charges and other related phase-out costs. This reflects impairment of assets and the restructuring charges predominantly associated with the previously announced company-wide program to reshape our manufacturing footprint and resize our global cost base. Excluding this not recurring item, which is partially not cash, Q3, non-U.S. GAAP operating margin was 6.8%, with Analog Products, MEMS and Sensor at 15.4%. Power & Discrete at minus 15.6%. Embedded Processing at 16.5%, and the RF Optical Communication at 16.6%. This quarter, to 2025, the net income was $237 million compared to $351 million in the year ago quarter. Diluted earnings per share were $0.26 compared to $0.37. Excluding the previously mentioned nonrecurring items, non-U.S. GAAP net income and diluted earnings per share were respectively, $267 million and $0.29. Net cash from operating activity decreased 24.1% on a year-over-year basis in the third quarter to $549 million. Third quarter net CapEx was $401 million compared to the $565 million in Q3 2024. Free cash flow was a positive $130 million in the third quarter compared to the $136 million in the year ago quarter. Inventory, at the end of the third quarter, was $3.17 billion, a reduction of about $100 million compared to the end of the second quarter. These sales of inventory at the quarter end were 135 days, slightly better than our expectation and compared to 166 days for the previous quarter and 130 days in the year ago quarter. Cash dividends paid to stockholders in the third quarter totaled $81 million. In addition, ST executed share buybacks of $91 million. ST maintained its financial strength with a net financial position that remained solid at $2.61 billion as of the end of September 2025, reflecting total liquidity of $4.78 billion and total financial debt of $2.17 billion. It is worth to mention that in the course of the third quarter, we repaid fully in cash, $750 million for the first tranche of our 2020 convertible bond. Now back to Jean-Marc, who will comment on our outlook. Jean-Marc Chery: Thank you, Lorenzo. Let's move to our business outlook for Q4 2025. So we are expecting revenues at $3.28 billion, an increase of 2.9% sequentially, plus or minus 350 basis points. We expect our gross margin to be about 35%, plus or minus 200 basis points, including about 290 basis points of unused capacity charges. This business outlook does not include any impact for potential further changes to global trade tariffs compared to the current situation. The midpoint of this outlook translates in full year 2025 revenues of about $11.75 million. This represents a 22.4% growth in the second half compared to the first half, confirming signs of market recovery. Gross margin for the full year is expected to be about 33.8%. Finally, to optimize our investments in the current market conditions, we have reduced our net CapEx plan, now slightly below $2 billion for full year 2025 compared to a range of $2 billion to $2.3 billion previously. To conclude, in the fourth quarter, we expect to report further sequential revenue improvement. With revenues now broadly stabilized on a year-over-year basis as well as an increased gross margin while continuing to decrease inventories in distribution. We are on the right path to improve our gross margin in the medium term through the reduction of unused capacity charges, the reshaping of our manufacturing footprint and definitively our product mix improvement. In a context marked by signs of market recovery, our strategic priorities remain clear, accelerating innovation executing our copay program to reshape our manufacturing footprint and resize of our global cost base, which remain on schedule to deliver the targeted savings, and strengthening free cash flow generation. Thank you, and we are now ready to answer your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from the line of Francois Bouvignies from UBS. Francois-Xavier Bouvignies: My first question is on the top line. I mean, you guided plus 3% quarter-on-quarter, 2.9% to be precise. It seems to be below your seasonal at plus 7% quarter-on-quarter, if I'm not wrong. I mean you can remind us maybe the seasonality. Can you explain us as to why you are a bit below seasonal in Q4 for the top line and the drivers? And then secondly, on the gross margin, I mean, it's nice to see this improvement of 180 basis points quarter-on-quarter, how sustainable it is this gross margin? I mean, if you have any seasonality, product mix, should we extrapolate this dynamic of 35% into the first half of '26? Just trying to understand the work you have done on gross margin, how sustainable it is at least in the first half of '26 would be great. Jean-Marc Chery: So we'll take the revenue seasonality and Lorenzo, the gross margin. No, on the revenue seasonality of Q4, basically, there is 2 effects. The first effect is on automotive. Because in automotive, even if we will grow on a quarter-over-quarter, but year-on-year, it is still minus 12%. And why? Because, okay, 80% of this performance gap is explained by 2 reasons. It is a decrease of our capacity reservation fees compared to last year. And you know it is overall volume of one important customer of ST in the field of electrical vehicle. So this is what is explaining why in Q4, we are below the seasonality. The second explanation to be below the seasonality in Q4 is because in Industrial, we continue to decrease inventory in distribution. So our POP revenue recognition is significantly below the POS. However, on the other, let's say, verticals like Personal Electronics, Communication Equipment, Computer Peripheral and other legacy on Automotive or Industrial in the field of power, energy; basically, okay, we are at the seasonality we expect. Lorenzo Grandi: About gross margin. In Q4, the gross margin, the main positive driver, let's say, when we look at the sequential increase of our gross margin moving from the result of Q3 and the expectation of Q4 is clearly improved manufacturing efficiency. That is -- if you remember, let's say, in the first half and also in Q3, we were impacted by a significant negative impact on the efficiency -- manufacturing efficiencies that was due to the very low level of production that we have, especially in the first half of the year. There is also some improvement in terms of new charges. When we look, let's say, to how we will move moving in the first half of next year, but we have to remind that clearly, there are negative effect that we will impact moving forward. One effect is related to the fact that there will be some reduction entering 2026 of capacity reservation fees. And definitely, you know that in the first half of the year, there is some seasonality in terms of our revenues, let's say, in respect to the second part of the year. And then don't forget that there is also the negotiation of the pricing that will impact even if we see to a significant drop. We think that it will be something in the range of low single digit, mid-single-digit decline. On the positive side, we will have, let's say, still continued positive impact on manufacturing and reduce -- continue to reduce level of saturation. At this stage, it's a little bit to difficult to size, let's say, the level of gross margin because it will depend also on the level of the revenues. But this is directionally the trend that we will have moving -- entering in the next year. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Joshua Buchalter from TD Cowen. Joshua Buchalter: Maybe to follow up on that last one. Could you maybe spend a couple of minutes talking about how you're thinking about managing utilization rates right now? It seems like you're taking things back up. Are you at the point where you feel comfortable building a little bit of inventory downstream and/or on your balance sheet given the comments. You mentioned you're going into some negative seasonality into 1Q, but it sounds like utilization rates are going to be up in the fourth quarter and the first quarter. Could you maybe just spend a couple of minutes talking about what you're seeing there? Lorenzo Grandi: Now for the inventory, clearly, let's say, as you have seen, we try to keep control on the level of inventory in the current quarter, we think to stay substantially stable in number of days. This is our expectation in respect to Q3. But the positive point is that entering in the next year, clearly, let's say, as I said, there is our seasonality, the normal seasonality that means that, in general, the inventory in the first half of the year is a little bit higher also in number of days in respect to the second part of the year. Then you have to consider that entering next year, let's say, we start to have some decrease in terms of overall capacity, linked to the fact that we started to have some benefit coming from our reshaping of the manufacturing infrastructure. This will somehow mitigate the level of unused moving in 2026. This is, let's say, one of the drivers that we see in terms of progressively improve in terms of the utilization rate, together, of course, with some growth in Joshua Buchalter: I was hoping to ask about the Industrial segment. So it looks like book-to-bill went back to parity. Anything major going on there? Any geographies that are better or worse? And maybe how would you categorize the health of the general purpose microcontroller business underneath there? Basically, should we assume sort of shipping back to normal now? Jean-Marc Chery: No. In industrial, we see a different dynamic when we grow on some segments. We see a growth and dynamic more pronounced for power energy, basically all subsegments, okay, of this one are growing. And it is growing more definitively than the smart industrial, it means the factory automation. We can say that robotics is so far good, but overall, the factory automation is really, really soft. More than all the industrial, which are volume-driven, means consumer-driven, the hub cycle is pretty soft. So the takeaway we can have on the Industrial is what is related power energy infrastructure and robotics is now upcycle pretty solid. What is related volume and consumer is a very soft upcycle. It looks like inventory are digested, but the visibility is pretty short, it's pretty low. So that's the reason why the customers are still putting order on short term. But here, our decision is to continue to manage the distribution very closely and continue to adjust our POP below their POS forecast to continue to decrease inventory. Inventory and general purpose microcontroller came back what we classified normal, means a level of months of inventory that enable short-term business. Well, we have still some pockets of other inventory on some specific products like Power & Discrete or sometimes general purpose microcontroller, but we are going in the right direction. So this is a dynamic, okay, we are seeing on the industrial market. Operator: The next question comes from Tristan Gerra from Baird.. Tristan Gerra: I wanted to see how linear is the reduction in capacity reservation fees that you expect in '26 from the $150 million, $200 million reduction that you're looking at for this year. Is there a big drop in Q1? Or is it going to be pretty linear throughout all of next year? Lorenzo Grandi: In terms of capacity reservation fees, it works in this way, let's say, substantially, the capacity reservation fees that are ruled by contract with the carmakers quite constant over year the in term of million dollars. But yes, you can have a little bit higher, a little bit lower during the various quarter of the year, but they are not linearly going down. Let's say, they are substantially quite flattish, I would say, quarter after quarter. Clearly, when the contract expires, that is, at the end, for instance, of 2025, many of these contracts are expiring. But then, yes, you have a decline. And then the decline remains the level that you get in the first quarter will remain substantially similar all over the other quarters. So this is the way that it works. So what we will see in Q1 will be this reduction? And then that after that, we will stay stable, more or less stable during the course of 2026 at the level of capacity reservation. Tristan Gerra: Just a quick follow-up. Of course, it's going to depend on end demand, but any sense of -- or when you think POP can get back in line with point of sales in Industrial next year? Jean-Marc Chery: Globally, POP will be aligned with the POS each time our product line reach the target of inventory, we didn't want to exceed. This is okay, a lesson we learned from the past. And now, we are really disciplined on this point. So you cannot see the POP overall. We have to look the POP in detail by product line. And I repeat our microcontroller is pretty well aligned. So our POP is really driven by the end demand POS and by region, I have to say. While China, APAC, America are pretty okay, but Europe is still soft. And for the other product line, okay, we are still in a mode where the POP is below the POS; however, we expect to go back normal in H1 2026, most likely Q2. Operator: Next question comes from Stephane Houri from ODDO BHF. Stephane Houri: Yes. I have a first question about the CapEx budget because you're adjusting downward the CapEx for the end of this year. I guess this is in the course of managing your capacity by the end of the year and so an expectation of 2026. But what are you reducing at the moment? And how do you look at 2026 in terms of CapEx at the moment where you're transforming your tool from 200-millimeter to 300-millimeter? Jean-Marc Chery: We reduced the CapEx. In fact, there is 2 dynamics. There is a dynamic driven by where you know we want to close the 200-millimeter, so And of course, okay, we need to put the CapEx to increase the capacity at the right level in 300 and in coal 200. But here, we have not especially limited the dynamic because the demand is pretty solid. But then the other main important action is the CapEx for 200-millimeter conversion on silicon carbide because we will close the 150-millimeter. But here, we have limited the CapEx delivered by the demand, which is below what was -- we expected 1 year ago. So the main impact of the capacity limitation is on, let's say, silicon carbide. But then after it's more spread across test assembly, where we clearly adjust the capacity of what we need and no more. And generally speaking, is more adaptation to mix rather than volume increase. Stephane Houri: Just to ask you, with the Nexperia situation, you do receive phone calls or kind of rush orders from your customer? Or you see nothing for the moment? Jean-Marc Chery: No, I mean, we are sure that the carmaker and the Tier 1 of the automotive industry have clearly taken the lesson of the previous shorter period, and they have enabled many source to prevent such issues. And of course, okay, as the other semiconductor player, STMicro is part of this process. More than that, I have no comment. Operator: Next question comes from Didier Scemama from Bank of America. Didier Scemama: I have first question maybe on your inventory and related to that. on what you're thinking about in terms of factory loadings for the first half, I think, one of your U.S. peer already announced last week or earlier this week that they would reduce factory loadings to reduce inventory, especially in the context of a shallow recovery? So I think it looks like your inventory are tracking about 30, 40, 50 days above where they used to be. So are you thinking about taking down further factory utilization in the first half, I guess. Lorenzo Grandi: In terms of inventory, I would say that, yes, you're right, it's a little bit higher in respect to what was our historical ending of the year, that is a little bit higher. But at the end, I think that when we look next year, I think the dynamic of our -- we will continue to keep under controlling that. The dynamic of the inventory will, let's say, be, as usual, a little bit increasing during the first half of the year to go back and to decrease in the second part of the year. In terms of that, let's say, unloading factory utilization I think that moving in 2026, there will be an improvement. Notwithstanding, we will continue to keep the control our inventory. This improvement that I was saying before is due to the fact that we do expect some, let's say, increase in terms of our revenues, so looking at the evolution of the market. And the other element is that we start to, let's say, reduce capacity in some of our fabs. The one that we aim, let's say, to progressively close in the course of the -- by the end of 2027. So we will start, of course, to move out some equipment, and this will reduce the capacity, and this will reduce the level of unused then. Didier Scemama: Got it. And then I think last quarter, you said that the gross margins were impacted by, if I remember correctly, roughly 70 basis points of the 140, at 70 basis points of FX headwinds on and 70 basis points of related basically the manufacturing transition from 6 to 8 and 8 to 12. Is there any of that in Q4? Lorenzo Grandi: No, no. Let's say, moving from Q2 to Q3, let's say, the FX was overall an impact of 140 basis points. Q2, Q3, let's say, related to the combination of these 2 effects, but very different. Let's say, something in the range of 120 basis points was the FX and around 20 basis points was the impact of these extra costs, let's say, related to our programs. Now, let's say, in this quarter, clearly, the FX is a minor impact. This is quite stable. It's a little bit negative because we moved from 114 to 115 is ranging in the range of 20 basis points negative impact. It's not so material, while these extra costs related to the activity to reduce the capacity and to start to move products from one side to the other is impacting our gross margin expected for Q4 between 30 to 40 basis points. This is -- so the turnkey impacted by something ranging between 30 to 40 basis points of extra cost. Didier Scemama: Understood. And just a clarification, because it wasn't clear, your OpEx guide for Q4 is 915, right? It's not 950? Lorenzo Grandi: No, no. It's 915. And this is driven by the fact that we have a negative calendar days impact for 2 reasons. The calendar is longer. And the vacation in Europe is, let's say, less than what we benefit in the course of the previous quarter. On the other side, we will continue with our, let's say program to reduce account in expenses, and this will bring us some benefit. Operator: The next question comes from Sandeep Deshpande from JPMorgan. Sandeep Deshpande: My question is regarding the trends into the first quarter. I mean, you normally have a weaker first quarter. And thus would you expect the utilization rate to go down? And given all the other factors you've talked about in the earlier factors, which are there, there is a downtick associated with the capacity reservation fees. Should we expect that your gross margin in the first half of the year to be weaker than where it is at the moment? And I have a quick follow-up after that. Lorenzo Grandi: Yes. In terms of gross margin, it's true that in the first half, the seasonality is not favorable. And yes, there are the lower capacity reservation fees. On the other side, in respect to where we stand today, our expectation is that the level of a new budget will decrease. The decrease is not due to the fact that we aim to increase our inventory. There is some seasonality in our inventory, but the decrease, as I was trying to explain before, it's mainly driven by the fact that we start to reduce the capacity. So it means that we will start to some transfer of equipment. And this or, let's say, not utilization of equipment due to the fact that we progressively in some fab, we started to reduce the capacity aimed, at the end, let's say, to move to close the spec. So we will start, and this will progressively impact our capacity and, for some extent, our unused capacity. Sandeep Deshpande: I mean, a follow-up to that essentially -- quickly on that would be, is the number of days in Q1 [Technical Difficulty] you have any new engaged programs with your customers, which will improve revenue significantly either in first half or into the second half, particularly? Lorenzo Grandi: No, I confirm, Sandeep, that in Q1, Q1 will be shorter in terms of number of days, than Q4, Q4 is longer in terms of days than normal 91. And the calendar next year, Q1 will be shorter than the normal 91. It's a little bit the same trend that we have seen this year, let's say, in terms of calendar. So yes, I confirm that there is a shorter calendar in Q1. Jean-Marc Chery: Well, first of all, okay, about next year 2026, Q1. With the current visibility, we have for the loading of the backlog we have seen in Q3 and we are seeing today. But we don't see a specific reason why we will not be at the usual seasonality of Q1 revenue versus Q4. This is generally speaking, really slightly above minus 10%. Well, then moving forward, of course, we will -- but it's depends on the market dynamic. But I would like to say that for 2026 Well, first of all, okay, in the second half, we will clearly see the normalization of inventory everywhere. We really expect that in H2 2026, we will have no other inventory, point number one. Point number two, next year compared to 2025, the silicon carbide will be a year of growth because 2025 is a year of transition where basically, okay, we have cumulative headwinds related to one specific customer, some program not going at the expected speed in Europe. And you know we are not specially still present in China. But next year will be a -- but then after we have our exposure to fast-growing segment. Clearly, that already give us a sign of growth like ADAS with our main customers that already provided some let's classify upside and MEMS as well. And definitively, one point is our increasing content in terms of value and silicon in our main customer. So all in all, we do believe that Q1, we have no sign that the seasonality will be impacted by other factors that we do not control. And in H2, we will be as well as the usual seasonality of growth H2 versus H1. Do we grow more like here because this year, we grow at 23% and the usual seasonality, 15% H2 versus H1. Well, here, we need to have a little bit more booking in Q1 and in Q2 to confirm. So my takeaway is, yes, we will have, let's say, idiosyncratic growth driver on top of the, let's say, up cycle of the market that we are seeing today even if this up-cycle market of automotive and industrial should be classified at this stage, soft, okay? And with subsegment pretty dynamic like the one related to infrastructure. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Janardan Menon from Jefferies. Janardan Menon: I just wanted to go back -- go to the Power & Discrete business where your margins are still very weak at minus 15% in the third quarter. So what can be the drivers to improve that? You talked about silicon carbide improving in Q3 -- I'm sorry, in 2026. But would that revenue come mainly from your Sanan JV to Chinese customers? And will that help your overall profitability given low utilizations in Europe? And do you need to take any further action to try and improve the profitability there Power & Discrete, given the kind of competitive environment in that industry? And then my follow-up is just a small clarification on a previous answer. Your 30 to 40 basis points of manufacturing inefficiency from the conversion and shutting down, et cetera, does that continue until you reach the end of that journey, which is when you fully close down your 200-millimeter transition to 300 millimeter? Or does that drop off before that? Jean-Marc Chery: So Lorenzo will comment about the improvement driver on Power & Discrete profitability. While Marco will comment on the dynamic of Power & Discrete revenue because as I have already anticipated, in my last answer, clearly, silicon carbide for us in '25 is a transition period. And Lorenzo, on Lorenzo Grandi: Yes, I can take it. Clearly, well, I will let Marco to explain what are the drivers. But at the end, let's say, clearly next year, we do expect a recovery in terms of the top line that is this year, we were impacted by a significant inefficiency in our manufacturing environment for the Power & Discrete in general and for the silicon carbide, in particular, due to the fact that we were working a very old level of saturation for these steps. Clearly, there are the following drivers that we expect to recover in term of profitability. Having a higher level of revenues clearly will help to better load our infrastructure. Then don't forget that silicon carbide, it will be the first to move, let's say, in the course of next year from the 6-inch to the 200-millimeter to the 8-inch, and this will bring clearly, let's say, some positive in the medium term in terms of profitability. Moving up in terms of revenues will improve significantly our expense to sales ratio that today clearly has been impacted by the fact that revenue are quite depressed. So at the end, these are the main drivers that we see together with the fact that we are improving, and we are moving to the next generation of silicon carbide that give also some benefit in terms of performance for what concerns, let's say, the profitability. Before to give the -- to pass to Marco, I just clarify the point of this extra 30 basis points on gross margin. Yes, this is mainly related to the duplication of mask related to the, let's say, qualification of processes. But this will continue, the amount will be more or less this range over, for sure, the next part of 2026 and probably also in the second part because we will continue with this program. This will be probably peaking in the first half 2026 then it will go down. But yes, this is something that we need to expect to have -- as we have this activity, let's say, to migrate our products from one fab that is going to be close to another fab. Marco Cassis: Okay. So we take on the dynamics. So we'll have basically 2 dynamics in 2026 that will help to start to grow. First of all, well, as Jean-Marc said, during the first half of 2026, we will keep reducing and will be clean in terms of inventory in Power & Discrete; here, speaking mainly about the noncedarbide portion. And this will allow the market dynamics next year to restart having year-over-year growth. Specifically, on season carbide as Jean-Marc has already anticipated, 2025 is a transition year, meaning is that we are experiencing lower volumes and inventory collection from our main customers. I would like to underline, this is happening while we still are maintaining stable our commercial contractual level of market share. This is happening since the beginning of 2025. And during 2025, we are -- this dynamic is not yet offset by Europe and China. So there is yet no strong contribution from the rectification programs in Europe and China. During the next year, we will start seeing growth in these 2 regions that will help the 2026 overall growth of the silicon carbide versus 2025. I hope that this answers your question. Jerome Ramel: Thank you, everyone. This is ending our call for this quarter. So thank you for being us today, and we remain here at your disposal should you need any follow-up questions. Sorry for the one that you don't have time to ask a question there. Thank you very much. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, the conference is now over. Thank you for choosing Chorus Call, and thank you for participating in the conference. You may now disconnect your lines. Goodbye.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to the investor and analyst call for LSEG's Third Quarter 2025 Trading Update. [Operator Instructions] I would like to remind all participants that this call is being recorded. I will now hand over to David Schwimmer, CEO of LSEG, to open the presentation. Please go ahead. David Schwimmer: Good morning, everyone. Thanks for joining the call. I'm here with MAP and Peregrine as usual, and we are also joined by Daniel Maguire, our Head of Markets, to talk about the Post Trade transaction that we announced this morning. For this quarter, we're going to take a slightly different approach from a normal Q3 given the intense debate in recent months around our business and AI. I'll cover some key aspects of our AI strategy and the excitement we have about the current opportunities, before MAP goes through the Q3 numbers, and Dan covers the Post Trade transaction. Then, of course, we'll be happy to take your questions. It has been a really busy quarter with great progress on several fronts. Group organic growth continues to be very healthy at 6.4%, with D&A growing at 4.9%, similar to the first half. ASV growth came in at 5.6%, a little better than expected, and we anticipate it being better again in Q4. We're raising our margin guidance to the top of the original range at around 100 basis points of improvement, reflecting strong operating leverage and cost control. As you may have seen, we've launched a number of AI-related partnerships involving our data, which is valued and relied on by partners old and new as industry standard. We've announced an important transaction today that creates a strong partnership and aligned incentives for the adoption of Post Trade Solutions while also increasing our revenue share from SwapClear and extending the profit-sharing arrangement with our partner banks by 10 years. More on this in a few minutes. And on the share buyback that we announced at our half year results, the original intention was to complete that by mid-December, but we've taken advantage of a lower share price and accelerated the GBP 1 billion buyback to finish by the end of this month. And we're today announcing a further GBP 1 billion buyback to be completed by our full year results in February of next year. Our strong cash generation gives us the firepower and the flexibility to invest organically to make important strategic moves and to be active in returning cash to our shareholders. On the next slide, we have summarized our LSEG Everywhere AI strategy under 3 key pillars: trusted data, transformative products and intelligent enterprise. We'll talk more about those second 2 at the Innovation Forum in November. But let me take a minute or 2 to dive into our data and the critical and valuable role it plays now and will play in an AI-rich world. The easiest way to think about our data is that the content itself and access to it is effectively financial markets infrastructure, something we know a lot about. It is industry standard, deeply trusted, embedded in highly regulated customer workflows and supported by processes and infrastructure that are extremely hard to replicate. And we are and always have been open. We deliver data to wherever our customers want it, their screens, their servers, their cloud and, of course, through third-party providers. Let's unpack this over the next few slides. Data & Feeds accounts for a little over 1/5 of group revenues. On this slide, we've broken down these by data type. But before we get into that, I want to remind you of the scale of our data. It is the largest pool in the industry, both in terms of breadth and depth. We have over 33 petabytes of data. That is over 3x the so-called common crawl, the data set formed from the public Internet, which is used to train many LLMs. Let's begin with the 45% of our Data & Feeds revenue derived from real time. This is a business built on physics, not probability. We've built connections to 575 exchanges and execution venues globally with our own infrastructure. In the blink of an eye, we standardize and translate the exchange outputs into a single common language and deliver them directly into the world's financial institutions. Millions of hard facts per second, not probabilistic algorithms. In a nutshell, AI cannot replicate or replace our real-time data. Then we have 25% of our Data & Feeds revenue, which is specialized and enhanced by our own enrichment. By specialized, we mean proprietary. Think Tradeweb fixed income pricing or exclusive like the Reuters News agreement or contributed like our deals database. So an LLM could not access these data sets through public sources. And then on top of that, we are enriching this data with value-added enhancements and augmentation by our data experts. That is our additional value add. And then that all comes with the LSEG curation standards, accuracy, normalization and tagging. So think of this data as protected by 3 moats. It is either proprietary or exclusive. It is enriched by our own intellectual property, and it is curated, applying the LSEG standards, which have often become the industry standard. Let me give you an example to bring this to life. Our deals league tables are highly valuable to banks, advisers and law firms. These league tables are widely considered the industry standard with LSEG data obtained daily from thousands of sources co-mingled with data sourced from nearly 2,000 financial and legal advisers actively contributing their deal flow. We get up to 25,000 of these contributions per month. This input, which is from humans, is crucial to the quality, accuracy and completeness of this data. These contributions clarify and correct deal details that appear in the press. They also add additional information to public deals and supply information on other deals that are not reported anywhere. So a data set built solely on public disclosures would be both inaccurate and incomplete. We further enrich this data with our proprietary calculation of rank value, which sets the standard for deal comps, market share and pitchbooks around the world. We refine this methodology each year through roundtables with advisory firms. So in case anyone is missing the point, no LLM can gather this data from public sources, 3 moats, LSEG proprietary or exclusive data, enriched by LSEG IP and curated by LSEG, applying the LSEG standards. Let's move on to the next bucket, representing 10% of Data & Feeds revenues. It is almost exactly identical to the previous bucket. It is specialized data, proprietary, exclusive or contributed, with LSEG standards applied. So not accessible by an LLM through public sources, our aftermarket research, for example. And to carry on the analogy with the moats, this is data protected by 2 powerful moats. Next is another 10% of revenue from data that is indeed public, but to which we apply our enrichment and analysis, similar to what I was talking about with customer contributions on the league tables. And we also applied the LSEG curation standards. Examples here would be earnings estimates and sentiment analytics applied to earnings calls and other sources. So can an LLM access it? Yes, but the data will be incomplete. Here, it is 2 moats applied on public data. So 90% of our revenue is from data that is nonreplicable by an LLM. That leaves us with the last 10% of Data & Feeds revenue, which represents the data derived from public sources for which we apply LSEG curation standards, data like company filings or economic metrics. This data is rarely sold on a stand-alone basis. Here, there is still one moat, a powerful and important one, and that is our standards, which I will cover on the next slide. Now that we've established that 90% of Data & Feeds revenue is from data that is simply out of reach or inaccessible to an AI model trawling for public data. Let me take a minute to explain very concretely what I mean by that third moat, the LSEG data curation standards. There are 5 major processes in the curation of LSEG's high-quality trusted data, which are simply nonnegotiable for our customers in regulated activities. These 5 processes are the foundations of what we call the LSEG standards. Let's look at them in a little bit more detail. We do not build our data sets on probabilistic models. We have constructed them from decades of hard data, much of which is no longer retrievable. We source them from our customer community with over 40,000 customers contributing regularly. And in many cases, our own analysts and experts generate them internally. So that is sourcing. We then extensively cleanse and validate this data to ensure quality, for example, verifying its accuracy and completeness. Publicly sourced data is not reliable without this step. The third step, normalizing and mastering means creating a single source of the truth, consistent from year-to-year and from security to security, factoring in corporate actions, for example, or restatements or perimeter changes. And then concordance and tagging, which is a critical and differentiated step. This is where the universal symbology of the RIC or Reuters Instrument Codes and our use of perm IDs to tag each piece of data are so powerful. They allow full interoperability across the data estate and create logical semantic relationships between related data, for example, between a company and its directors or a bond it has issued. And the fifth step, distribution. Irrespective of technology platform, data format or channel, the data we distribute to customers is consistent and authoritative. I'll talk more about our distribution strategy in a couple of minutes. So to summarize, for those who think AI models can scoop up so-called public data from the Internet and displace us, that just does not reflect how this industry works and fundamentally ignores the nonreplicable nature of the vast majority of our data. There's also been a lot of focus on our Workflows business. We have driven a lot of change here over the last 4 years and now have our customers on a modern, modular, customizable platform where we enhance functionality week in and week out, and we're doing more and more. As we said at H1, it is not AI or a desktop. It is AI in the desktop, fully embedded in financial markets workflow. Workspace is now integrated with Microsoft Teams. We'll be launching Open Directory in the coming weeks and the full Workspace AI platform in the first half of '26, with Agentic tools coming as well. You'll see all of this at the Innovation Forum in a couple of weeks. So let's look at our Workflows revenue, the same way we did for Data & Feeds. 50% of workflows revenue comes from traders who are deeply engaged with the platform to execute their roles. They need real-time data, a network community and integration with a range of pre- and post-trade tools. Further 20% of Workflows revenue comes from ancillary trading services, such as trade routing and order execution and management. Another 15% comes from investment banking, where we have specialized content across deals, corporate actions and research, as well as integrated productivity tools. That leaves 5% of Workflows revenue from wealth and 10% from investment management. These customers benefit from our unrivaled data, exclusive Reuters News and portfolio analytics. But in these groups, there are lighter users who are mainly doing desktop research and basic charting, perhaps like many people on this call. Whether someone is a power user deep in trading workflow or a lighter user, all Workspace users will benefit from the significant AI and collaboration enhancements coming over the next few months. They will have the full functionality of some of the newer applications out there, but embedded in their existing workflow and based on data they can trust. Now over the last couple of months, you can see the pace of execution on LSEG Everywhere, delivering our data to where our customers are working as the partner of choice for financial markets data. This is no change in strategy. We have long provided data to and distributed data through our customers -- I'm sorry, our competitors and partners. For example, we are the #1 data provider to Aladdin. The industry now has new entrants, building new applications and functionality, which we believe can expand our reach and drive additional consumption of our trusted high-quality data. The economics of these deals support our growth aspirations through data licensing, new channels and the potential for usage-based revenue over time. Rogo is a specialist provider of applications to investment banking and private equity. Customers with Workspace licenses can access certain LSEG data sets through Rogo. The construct with Databricks is similar. These are attractive new distribution channels for our data. Just last week, we took a major step forward in our partnership with Microsoft, introducing certain data sets into Copilot for any Copilot subscriber, and more valuable data sets, both into Copilot and Copilot Studio for LSEG licensees. This will allow customers to build their own agents working with our data. You should expect the list of partners to continue to grow as we look to distribute our data through other major channels. That's the fundamental premise of LSEG Everywhere. A key part of many of these partnerships has been our ongoing build-out of MCP servers as we make more and more data sets available over time. Before I hand over to MAP, it has also been a very busy quarter in other parts of our business. Just to highlight a couple of significant developments. With Microsoft, we have fully replatformed our trade routing network, Autex, in Azure with Autex now connecting 1,600 brokers and asset managers via the cloud. As a result, it's faster, has much greater capacity and is even more resilient. And we have executed the first transaction on our Digital Markets Infrastructure, which is positioned to become an important new capability for trading and settlement. We're preparing to launch our Private Securities Market. More on that at the Innovation Forum. And in Risk Intelligence, we have launched World-Check On Demand with all our critical data and insight now updated in real time. That takes me appropriately to our innovation forum in a couple of weeks. In the first part of the event, MAP and I will cover our unique positioning, our end markets and execution to date. Irfan Hussain, our CIO; and Emily Prince, our Head of AI, will cover our AI strategy and engineering transformation. And then Ron Lefferts and Gianluca Biagini will talk about product strategy and monetization in DNA. We'll then have specific product walk-throughs and demos across the group. We're looking forward to showing you both the present and the future. And just to be clear, this is not a traditional Capital Markets Day. Don't expect any new guidance or anything along those lines. So with that, let me hand it over to MAP to talk about our Q3 performance in more detail. Michel-Alain Proch: Thanks, David. So just a few words on our financial performance. We have delivered another quarter of strong growth across the group. Organic growth for the quarter was 6.4% with all divisions contributing well. We had a benefit of 30 bps from the ICD acquisition of last year and a headwind of 190 bps from FX, which together translates into our reported growth of 4.8%. Within D&A growth of 4.9%, Workflows and Data & Feeds saw very similar growth to Q2 with only a slight impact from the new UBS contract that I mentioned at the H1 results. Analytics continued to grow strongly. The competitive environment is stable, and we are excited about the product pipeline. Our expectation for pricing into 2026 is for the yield to be similar to the last 3 years in the 3.5% range. FTSE Russell, as I indicated at H1, saw slightly slower growth in subscriptions with fewer account reviews in the period. But on the other hand, asset-based fee growth was strong as we lap the loss of a contract last year. Risk Intelligence had another strong quarter, driven by both World-Check and Digital Identity & Fraud. So overall, the subscription businesses delivered 6.5% growth in Q3, ahead of our expectation of 6% for the second half of the year. ASV growth came in at 5.6%, a bit ahead of the 5.4% we had anticipated. Good sales momentum partially offset the expected impact of the final Credit Suisse impact wrapped into the new long-term partnership with UBS. As I have said before, I expect this to pick up again to 5.8% as we exit the year. The Markets business continued to grow well, though at a slightly slower pace than H1 as volatility was lower and comps got tougher. Looking at the 2 main lines, OTC derivative was up 9.2%, driven by continued strength in client clearing volumes in SwapClear, and fixed income was up 9.9% as Tradeweb continued to drive growth through its innovative trading protocols and an uncertain macroeconomic outlook. Elsewhere, we have seen the IPO pipeline pick up in the Equities business with more to come heading into 2026. And we are seeing the final headwinds to growth in Securities & Reporting from the Euronext exit. Moving now to our delivery against guidance. We are absolutely on track and in some respects, ahead of our original plan. Year-to-date organic growth is 7.3%, comfortably within our guidance range, and this remains unchanged. On margin, the natural operating leverage in our business gives us confidence to raise our margin guidance to the top of the range at around 100 bps improvement year-on-year. This is a big step-up for a GBP 9 billion revenue business, and it factors significant ongoing investment in AI and new products. We are very confident of hitting our 2026 guidance of 250 bps over 3 years, taking us to 50% plus, obviously, before the impact of the Post Trade transaction, which I will cover in a moment. On CapEx, we will invest at a rate of 10% of revenue this year as planned and expect that intensity to come down in future years. One or 2 in the market have asked whether we will need to invest more in an AI future. The answer is clearly no. We have been investing at a double-digit CapEx intensity for several years, and we are now switching the mix over time from technology debt payback towards more investment for growth, obviously, including AI. And finally, we have good visibility of hitting our free cash flow guidance of at least GBP 2.4 billion. And finally, let's look at how we are allocating this cash flow. Overall, we are deploying more this year than what we are generating. That reflects the opportunities we see in front of us. So we expect to spend around GBP 3.5 billion versus free cash flow of GBP 2.4 billion. We are financing the difference with new borrowings of GBP 1.1 billion. Total dividends for the year are just over GBP 700 million, representing a 35% payout of adjusted earnings. In addition, we are deploying GBP 700 million net on the Post Trade transaction announced today, where we expect returns to be very attractive. And finally, as David mentioned, you may have noticed that over recent weeks, we significantly accelerated the GBP 1 billion buyback announced with the H1 results, and we have nearly completed it. Given our strong cash generation, low leverage and the enhanced returns we believe we will generate at this share price level, we are today committing to a further GBP 1 billion. This will start shortly and complete by the full year result in February 2026. We plan to execute GBP 500 million of this GBP 1 billion in year. This is a further demonstration of the flexibility and optionality our strong cash flow generation gives us and our very active capital allocation decision-making. Taking all this together, our leverage at the end of this year should be around 1.9x EBITDA, so in the middle of our 1.5x to 2.5x net debt-to-EBITDA range. Let's now look at the rationale of the transaction in our Post Trade business that we announced this morning. First, a group of 11 leading global banks is taking a 20% stake in our Post Trade Solutions business. The perimeter of PTS includes the recent acquisition, Quantile and Acadia, plus businesses we have grown organically, mainly SwapAgent. This transaction deepens our partnership with institutions that can benefit significantly from PTS services and allows them to help share its future and share in its growth. Second, we have agreed to alter the terms of the revenue share paid to the partner banks from SwapClear. Historically and up to 2024, this sat at 30%, reflected in our cost of sales. We are taking this down to 15% for 2025, applied across the whole year and 10% for 2026 and beyond. And finally, we are extending it from 2035 to 2045. Again, this is strategically important, and it improves our economics at a fair valuation and extends the deep relationship with our partner banks into the long term. Daniel will cover the strategic value in more detail in a moment. But the financial effects of this transaction are very positive. The impact of reducing the revenue share from 30% to 15%, which again is retroactive across the whole of 2025, will add around 250 bps to the Markets' divisional EBITDA margin and 100 bps to the group margin this year. While obviously, there are some financing costs, overall, this transaction is 2% to 3% accretive to EPS this year onwards. But beyond these financials and even more importantly, we expect this transaction to accelerate the long-term growth in PTS. Let me hand over to Daniel to recap on the playbook that has been so successful. Daniel Maguire: Thank you, MAP. So I just want to take a couple of minutes now to highlight how and why SwapClear has grown over the last 15 years, and touch on the opportunity we see forward in Post Trade Solutions. So through partnership, both through the shareholdings a number of our key members have held in LCH and the revenue share in SwapClear that continues, we have built a deep and wide global network that delivers significant value to all of its constituents. The scale shift in 15 years is extraordinary. The number of members, i.e., the banks has increased by 3.5x and the number of clients, i.e., the buy-side firms has increased by 200-fold, clearly demonstrating the network effect. Notional value registered per annum is up 10x at nearly GBP 2,000 trillion. And we have become the global destination of choice for interest rate swaps in all currencies for clearing. And this is why we are now inviting our partners into Post Trade Solutions, because we believe we can do the same again, but for the uncleared market. We built a near GBP 1 billion annual revenue business based on cleared OTC instruments across SwapClear, ForexClear and CDSClear, all of which are leaders in their markets and all of which are built on the strong foundations and the model of industry partnership. The uncleared opportunity is basically the same size as the cleared space. Our members and our clients want to manage the whole book in one place, bringing efficiency to their capital, the margin requirements and materially simplifying and standardizing processes. We are uniquely placed to do that given the assets that we've built and brought together under one roof and with our proven track record of delivering real value through long-term partnership. Acadia and Quantile give us collateral and margin workflow tools and compression tools, respectively. And SwapAgent and TradeAgent, both developed in-house, complete the current suite of services we call Post Trade Solutions. And we've got very good momentum to build on. Revenue in PTS is growing at double-digit pace. Volumes are up 70%, and the network is expanding at pace. So bringing these 11 major partners closer and giving them a role in shaping the business as well as a share in its growth sets us up for long-term success. I'll now hand back to David. David Schwimmer: Thanks, Dan. So just to recap, we have had another strong quarter of growth with year-to-date organic growth at 7.3% and all of our businesses performing well. We're executing at pace on our AI strategy of LSEG Everywhere as the AI partner of choice for financial markets data. And we are allocating capital effectively and proactively with an attractive strategic deal in Post Trade and a further big step-up in our buyback program. And now MAP, Dan, and I are happy to take your questions. Peregrine? Peregrine Riviere: Thanks, David. [Operator Instructions] And with that, I'll hand over to Pauly to manage the queue. Operator: Thank you, Peregrine. [Operator Instructions] And your first question comes from the line of Arnaud Giblat of BNP Paribas. Arnaud Giblat: Could I start with the Post Trade Solutions? So banks are paying over 50x EBITDA, 9x sales for their stake. Clearly, as you said, that comes with a significant commitment to put more business through that division. I'm just wondering, I mean, you gave a bit of detail, but if you could flesh out a bit more what sort of commitments, the time frames, what specific milestones we should be looking at for that business to grow, and what perhaps give us an indication of the potential size of that business in the medium term, from a revenue perspective? And my follow-up would be on the distribution agreements with third-party providers. Quite a lot going on there. I'm just wondering how we should think about this? Because clearly, there is a bit of a usage model you've talked about. So probably this increases significant usage and therefore, gives revenue upside. At the same time, if clients are accessing your data through a third-party vendor, then how does pricing in the long term look like if you're being -- I mean, if it interfaces somebody else? David Schwimmer: Thanks, Arnaud. Let me turn it over to Dan to answer the aspects of your first question. We're not going to get into a lot of detail on what the revenue looks like over the medium or longer term, but you can talk a little bit about how we're thinking about the construct. And then I'm happy to talk about the distribution agreements. Daniel Maguire: Okay. Yes. Thanks, Arnaud. Look, we're very strong believers in the industry partnership model, as you know. We've been using that, building that for a number of years on different services, and I think you can see the outcomes of that. Ultimately, we build core critical infrastructure for our major customers here over a long-term basis and around the basis of trust. So we're very, very pleased that we've got our major partners around the table with us and aligned not just on economics, but also on the product road map, the governance and the product adoption, of which we have a pretty high rate of adoption for all the products we build because of this model. I can't really be drawn on revenues. What I can point to is when you look at the -- which we shared in the slide that the gross market values, which essentially is a proxy for the scale of market risk and derivatives, if you look at the -- these numbers come from the BIS independent annual surveys, the gross market value is about [ USD 17.6 trillion ] and just over half of that is in the cleared space, but over half of that is in the uncleared space. So if you think about the level of risk of derivatives being transacted and risk transferred, they are very similar size. So we see the size of this opportunity very similarly as a result of that. And then in terms of milestones, we've got, as you can see from the press release, 11 major firms and important people at those firms making clear commitments to work with us to build out and deliver and adopt those services. So I can't be drawn on specific road maps and revenues today, but very confident that we've got the right support from the right firms and the right people. And the network is much bigger than those 11, and we've already got very good momentum in that. So pretty confident on that. David Schwimmer: And then your question around these partnerships or distribution arrangements. And the first point to make is that we've been doing this for years. And we have been providing our data through partners, and in some cases, as I mentioned, competitors for many, many years. And it's key when we do that, and this is a practice that we will, of course, maintain is that we protect our own relationships with our customers. And so in these kinds of partnerships, basically, the way they work is that although the initial origination of the relationship might come through one of the partners, the customer is then directed to us to establish the direct customer relationship with us. And we do that in a number of different situations and circumstances. So that protects us from being disintermediated through these kinds of arrangements. The other really important aspect that we're very focused on in these kinds of partnerships and distribution arrangements is protecting our data and making sure that our rights, our IP are protected even through any of these distribution channels. So obviously, the AI world is a little bit different, but we're still in a position to protect our data. And let me just give you one specific, I'll say, technical example. When we're distributing our data through an MCP server, because of that construct, we can control and monitor the access to our data. So in that construct, we're not at risk of a customer downloading all of our data, training their models on our data and then not needing us anymore. This MCP server construct allows us to control that in a very successful manner. So maintaining the relationship, protecting our data and data integrity, these are the kinds of relationships that we have managed very successfully for a long time, and it's great to see these new entrants and these new ecosystems, because we think it will actually expand the market and the customer base that we will be able to access our data. So we're really looking forward to this and excited about it. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Andrew Lowe at Citi. Andrew Lowe: Thanks very much for the color on the revenue split by product in Workflow and Feeds. My question is on the Data & Feeds business. Specifically, how much of the historical revenue growth has been driven by pricing versus volume? Could you please also comment on the historical pricing trends across these different groups? So for example, it would be great to know how pricing growth in real-time data compares to the other segments, including the 10% from public data sources. And it would be great if we could hear a bit more about how much visibility you have on future pricing? And I've got a follow-up, but I'll wait until you've answered. David Schwimmer: Yes. Thanks, Andrew. So I'm not going to break it down product by product. But as we've been pretty clear over the last few years, you've seen our pricing yield on an annual basis be in that sort of 3% to 3.5% zone. And then you've seen our Data & Feeds business grow usually more than twice that. So that gives you a sense of what's going on here in terms of pricing relative to just volume growth. And we've been doing a lot of innovation in this area as well in terms of new products, new distribution channels as well. But hopefully, that gives you a sense on that. Andrew Lowe: Great. Okay. And then as maybe a follow-up to that. So are you seeing a pickup in demand for your tick history now that you've got sort of LLMs which are cheaper and more widespread? And how important is that when you're sort of selling your forward-looking real-time pricing data? David Schwimmer: So interesting question. and tick history, for everyone's benefit, is a great data set that we have that goes back to the '90s and has tick-by-tick history for millions and millions of securities and no one else has it. It was all public data when it was released by the exchanges, but we are the only ones who have stored it, maintained it and made it easily consumable. I would say the technological changes make it easier to consume and access now than it has been over the last 20-plus years. And we certainly expect to continue to see it being a very valuable content set. Historically, it has been mostly used by quant shops back testing their algorithms. But your question is a good one in terms of recognizing that with these models, you could see a lot more potential users accessing this huge data set to look for historical correlations and help that inform their trading on a go-forward basis. Operator: Your next question is from the line of Russell Quelch of Rothschild. Russell Quelch: I'd also like to focus these questions on the Data & Feeds business. Thanks for the extra disclosure on the revenue breakdown. So you disclosed that 55% of the Data & Feeds revenues come from pricing and reference services. And I believe you've gone from #6 player there to #3 player in the last couple of years, just behind ICE and Bloomberg. So my questions are, firstly, number one, how have you done that? And what's your view on the main points of differentiation in your offering, which is helping you to take share? My second question is, do you believe you can be a #2 player here? And if so, how? And the third question is a bit of a follow-on from Arnaud's question, but asked in a bit more of a direct way. Can you talk to your expectations of the size and cadence of the growth uplift from the recent and future data distribution partnerships that you mentioned relating to LSEG Everywhere? David Schwimmer: Sorry, can you say the third part again? Russell Quelch: Yes. Sorry, a bit of a mouthful. So I was thinking about the data distribution partnerships relating to LSEG Everywhere, both the current ones you disclosed and then you said about future partnerships. So I was wondering how we should think about the size and the cadence of the growth uplift that comes from those partnerships, both the ones that have been announced and potential future ones. David Schwimmer: Got it. Okay. So your first question, how have we moved from #6 to #3. It is investing in our content and investing in our distribution. And you have seen us over the last few years do a number of, I would say, pretty significant steps in a number of different areas. So for example, when we took on the Refinitiv business several years ago, it was very clear to us that, for example, talking to customers, they made it clear, fixed income evaluated pricing was a weak area. Corporate actions was a weak area. We have invested meaningfully in both of those areas and addressed those gaps, and we're now highly competitive in those areas. And so that has helped us move up the ranks. We have added new content in terms of a number of different areas, ranging from -- I guess, a good example is our inclusion of Dow Jones content alongside our exclusive Reuters News alongside thousands of other news sources. So constantly investing in content in a number of different areas. And then on the distribution side, over the last few years, we have made our content available through a number of different distribution channels. And whether that's in different cloud providers, whether that is -- there are some of our data sets, for example, they were only available in the U.S. for technology reasons. And we have now made those available on a global basis. So it's a number of things like that. But really, if I boil it down, content and distribution. Could we be #2? Sure. And we aim not to stop there. We're continuing to invest in this business. We have great data, great content, adding to that content, expanding our distribution capabilities. And then in terms of -- I'm not in a position to give you any specific guidance on the growth uplift. What I can say is that we're not done yet in terms of the different partnership arrangements. We think this is a really exciting time in terms of new ecosystems, new AI functionality that will provide lots of distribution opportunities for us. And as I mentioned earlier, into customer segments that might not have otherwise accessed our data. And for those customers that have historically accessed our data, this AI functionality enables them to access it in a, I'll say, a much deeper way. I mentioned earlier the 33 petabytes of data that we have. Historically, our customers have really only scratched the surface of the data and the content that we have. And the AI functionality is much more powerful in really consuming substantial amounts of our data. And then as we shift further down this road, we've talked in the past about evolving our model more towards usage-based and consumption-based pricing. So you put all that together, we are excited about what this opportunity holds. Russell Quelch: Okay. And maybe just as a follow-up to that, you've just seen S&P buy With Intelligence. You've seen BlackRock buy Preqin. You've seen MSCI buy Burgiss. So just wondering how you're thinking about your competitive position in private markets data? And is this something you might look to add inorganically to the offering? David Schwimmer: Yes. So we already have a lot of private market data, and that includes what we have ingested organically. It includes what we provide from Dun & Bradstreet. The Dun & Bradstreet data, by the way, currently available on the Workspace platform, but soon will be available through a feed, which I think is unique in the industry. We have our partnership with StepStone, which is enabling us to create, again, unique private asset product in our index business. And maybe the last thing I would say is we are not done in this space, and there's more to come in terms of our ability to provide incremental value-add and, in some cases, unique private markets data. So I can comfortably say watch this space. Operator: Your next question is from the line of Ian White of Autonomous Research. Ian White: Well, there's been a lot of discussion around the accuracy of general intelligence LLMs in financial services applications. And I guess sort of what advantage can you derive here from your privileged access to your own data when it comes to the training and development of more accurate models? Or kind of put differently, is it realistic that general intelligence tool can match a model that has been trained on your specific data set when it comes to generating accurate results derived from your data? That's essentially my main question. And just as a follow-up, on the Workspace rollout, which is now complete, what's the latest evidence you have regarding levels of customer satisfaction with Workspace versus the legacy desktop products, please? David Schwimmer: Yes. Thanks, Ian. So on the accuracy question, there has been a lot of discussion in the industry about a bunch of the product that is out there really maybe having some nice user interface, but not being remotely close to what this industry demands in terms of accuracy. And so I think that's probably right at this point for a bunch of the products that are out there that we have seen. We expect them to get better over time. I think in terms of our own approach, the advantage that we have is that we have the data. We have the highest quality and broadest data set that allows us to do the necessary training. It is scrubbed data. We're not training our capabilities on the Internet. And so we avoid the garbage in, garbage out problem that you see with a lot of these other models. And this gets back to the point I was making earlier that through the MCP server construct, we are able to control the access to our data. So we sometimes get questions from people worried about the fact that our data will be made too available and others will be able to, without compensating us, train their models on our data. That's not the case in terms of the way that we make this data available for AI usage or AI consumption. In terms of the Workspace rollout, we are very pleased with the outcome there, and this was a big exercise over the past couple of years. So we are seeing really good views on the simplicity, on the kind of change in the user interface, on the speed. And there are some aspects in terms of making some of the charting even better. There are a few different things that we're continuing to work on, as I mentioned earlier, sort of week in, week out. And this is going to continue. And it's one of the advantages of this product and the technology stack that we have moved on to. We've talked about how we've implemented 500 or so changes in each of the last 2 years, and that pace is continuing. So even though we have basically completed the migration, we still have more releases coming. I think we have 2 more releases coming, big broad releases coming this year. Yes, more coming early next year. So it's a continuous improvement exercise, which I think is a great opportunity to continue serving our customers better and better and better. Ian White: Got it. If I could just sort of playback and make sure I understood the first point. If anybody wants to sort of train a model on your data, that's kind of a licensable activity that you can kind of control through MCP and a model that's not trained on your data specifically probably won't be very effective or will be less effective than something that's been specifically curated for that purpose. Is that a fair reflection? David Schwimmer: I think that's fair. I don't want to claim that we have exclusive financial sector -- in other words, I don't want to claim that in the financial markets, we're the only ones who have financial markets data. There is other data available out there. Ours is the broadest, the deepest, the highest quality. And so we are in an advantaged position. But you've seen companies train their models on public data coming off the Internet. That's on the other end of the spectrum in terms of quality and accuracy. And then there are other data sets out there that you can use. They're just not as extensive and high quality as ours. Operator: Your next question is from the line of Mike Werner of UBS. Michael Werner: And just 2 questions here, one main one and then one follow-up, please. I was just wondering, I mean, you talked a lot today and very helpfully about the new partnerships and LSEG Everywhere. Just stepping back and when we think about the partnership with Microsoft and OpenAI and what you guys are doing there, what's the level of that engagement today versus 12 months ago? I think you used to talk about the number of software engineers that were operating on site on LSEG's premises that came from Microsoft. I was just wondering if you can give us an update there. And then as a follow-on to a couple of my colleagues' questions. When we think about these partnerships, particularly with the new ones with the AI engines and AI partners, is there any delta or any difference in how you think about the pricing? I know you said you protect the IP, but when you're thinking about these new partnerships, is there any change in the way that users who want to consume that data, would they see any difference in pricing than your traditional customers? David Schwimmer: Yes. Got it. Thanks, Mike. So in terms of our partnership with Microsoft, if anything, the level of engagement is higher, and I would say meaningfully higher today relative to where we were a year ago. I know what you're referring to. We've talked in the past about having hundreds of our people embedded with their teams and vice versa. That continues and, if anything, higher level of engagement. And we talked today about a few other things that the market hasn't really focused on, but that we're building with Microsoft, our Autex Routing Network, our Digital Market Infrastructure. These are not the areas that the market has really focused on, but we are actively building them with Microsoft. And then, of course, our Data as a Service, our analytics, Workspace being embedded in Teams, all the interoperability with Excel and PowerPoint. We have lots of teams working across a lot of different areas with the Microsoft team. So couldn't be happier about the level of engagement there. And then just with respect to the pricing, in some cases, it's really simple. So for example, we talked about the partnership with Rogo. If you want to access our data in Rogo, you have a Workspace license. It's very straightforward. It can be a little less straightforward if we are providing our data sets, our Data & Feeds data sets through some of these channels, but we have standard pricing for a lot of these. There may always be some negotiations around particular data sets or things like that, but we have standard contractual arrangements for these and standardized pricing for these. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And your next question comes from the line of Hubert Lam from Bank of America. Hubert Lam: I've got a couple of questions. Firstly, on D&A, how should we think about revenue acceleration in the next year? So just given the upward momentum on ASV, should we think 6% or more could be achievable for revenue growth in D&A next year? Second question is, I guess, last results, there was concerns about intensifying pricing competition from a couple of your biggest competitors. Just wondering if you've seen any normalization in terms of pricing? Or was the competition we saw a few months ago a bit of a one-off? David Schwimmer: Sure. MAP, why don't you take the first question? I'm happy to take the second one. Michel-Alain Proch: Yes, sure. So on D&A, we indeed forecast a revenue acceleration next year. We haven't given precise numbers, but we have given one precise number, which is for our subscription business altogether, reaching 6.5% -- circa 6.5% next year. And obviously, D&A in this number is playing its part, and it will be accelerating '26 and '25. David Schwimmer: And then on your second question, Hubert, first, just to remind people, when we talked about some of the competition dynamics at the half year, that was a very small number of cases, a couple in each of the different business areas. And I would say where we are today, we're not seeing that kind of dynamic. It feels a very stable market environment at this point from a competition perspective. Operator: Your next question is from the line of Ben Bathurst of RBC Capital Markets. Benjamin Bathurst: My questions are on Post Trade. Firstly, could you help us better understand how interrelated the 2 transactions announced this morning are, if at all? For instance, how different is the list of the founding members of SwapClear from the investing banks in Post Trade Solutions? And then secondly, how significant is the decision to extend the revenue surplus share from 2035 to 2045? Was there always a presumption that, that would be extended? Or was that kind of an incremental sweetness in the deal? Daniel Maguire: Thank you. Yes. So in terms of the construct of the overall deal, there are 13 banks involved in the swap business today. And in the investment in PTS, there are 11 investing banks, just to be clear around that. Decisions to invest in the new business ventures very much down to sort of individual circumstances of each of the banks there. So not really appropriate to speak on behalf of those in the 13 that aren't in the 11. But what I'll say is super strong engagement across the industry, level of participation in this and interest is very material from all the material players there. So we're very, very happy with that. And in terms of the extension that you asked about, yes, I think may be different opinions on whether that would have been extended or not, but the fundamental point is this is something that's been in place since 2001. We're here in 2025. It was rolling to 2035. And as part of the overall structure, those 11 banks that are investing in PTS will be extended for a further 10 years to 2045. So a 44-year enduring partnership between the major players in the OTC derivatives space on the sell side with ourselves there. So I think it's part of the overall construct rather than breaking it down into the exact sort of elements of the negotiation. Benjamin Bathurst: Okay. Great. So if I understand it rightly, it's just those that are participating in Post Trade Solutions that will have the extension for 2035 to 2045? David Schwimmer: That's correct. Daniel Maguire: And just to be clear, '25 to '35 remains already existing 13. So existing 13 until the maturity of the existing arrangement and the extension of 10 years is to the 11 that are also investing in the Post Trade Solutions franchise business. Operator: Your next question is from the line of Julian Dobrovolschi of ABN AMRO. Julian Dobrovolschi: I have 2. Maybe the first one regarding the Microsoft product development such as Open Directory and Analytics API and some other things that you're trying to roll out together with Microsoft. Just wondering, are they offered broadly across all the tiers or restricted to premium users and as such as an upsell vector? And then the follow-up is on ASV growth. Just wondering how confident are you regarding the, let's say, reacceleration of this in the Q4? I think you've been hitting towards 5.8%. And can you please elaborate on the impact of the UBS multiyear contracts and the Credit Suisse revenue crystallization? And perhaps if you can see some leading indicators suggesting a bit of a rebound in ASV growth in the Q4. David Schwimmer: Thanks, Julian. So I'll take your first question, and MAP can touch on your question on ASV. So on each of these different products, some of them -- the different products that we have built in partnership with Microsoft, some of them are separate products that have separate pricing, separate licenses, separate arrangements. Some of them are embedded in existing products. And so if we talk about Open Directory and we talk about what's coming in Workspace, you'll see us charge for that over time really through price realization in the core product. I think then in some of the products that we have rolled out in analytics, the Analytics API, for example, that's a new product, and there's separate charging for that. And we've seen some of that in the uptick in the growth rates in analytics, for example. And let me just -- I'll mention one other example where you can see this very clearly. The arrangement that we announced with Microsoft 1.5 weeks, 2 weeks or so ago, where we are making our data -- we are making some of our data sets available to all users of Microsoft Copilot. So if you have a Copilot license, you can be outside the financial services sector, you have a Copilot license and you're doing something in Copilot, you will get access to certain of our data sets. And that's an arrangement that we have with Microsoft. And then we have other data sets that you can license directly with LSEG and then have access to them through Microsoft Copilot and Copilot Studio, if you are building, for example, agents using our data. So that gives you an example where some of them are embedded -- some of the pricing arrangements are embedded in existing products. Some of them are new, and we are charging incrementally for them. Let me turn it over to you, MAP. Michel-Alain Proch: Yes, sure. So first of all, before addressing your question, I'd like to point out that we have outperformed our previous guidance on ASV. And remember, in H1, we were expecting that the Q3 ASV would fall to 5.4% with 40 bps of impact of UBS. So excluding UBS 5.8%, so comparable to Q2, and we posted 5.8% in Q2, 5.4% was what we were expecting in Q3. We actually outperformed this to 5.6%. So ex UBS, 6%, an acceleration from the 5.8% we were at the end of Q2. And when I look forward for the end of this year, we're very confident into accelerating again to 5.8%. And here, it's the same thing. It's 5.8%, including of the 40 bps for UBS. So actually, excluding it, 6.2%. So 5.8%, 6%, 6.2%. That's basically the message today. Operator: Your next question is from the line of Enrico Bolzoni of JPMorgan. Enrico Bolzoni: I wanted to ask you, you now revised your EBITDA guidance a couple of times, even excluding the newly announced deal. So I just wanted to ask you, what are you doing particularly well or better than you expected that basically drove the consecutive revision in guidance? So that's my first question. And partially related to that, just some small clarification. So one, you are clearly now spending just over GBP 1 billion to in-source this additional revenue from SwapClear. Can you just clarify whether this will be capitalized and whether the amortization of that will be above or below the line? So that's one question. And another related question to numbers. You're clearly issuing some debt, you're guiding for EPS accretion in 2025. What about 2026? I know you talked about margin expansion for EBITDA in 2026. Can we say that we will also see a similar EPS uplift for next year? Michel-Alain Proch: All right. So I begin with EBITDA margin. So yes, just to remember for maybe those of you who didn't see it, we began with 50 to 100 bps of EBITDA margin guidance for this year, we then improved it to 75 to 100 bps. And finally, we are now confident to reach 100 bps. It's really an acceleration. So what we have implemented in the last 2 years at LSEG is a full cockpit of cost discipline, addressing all the different components of our cost base. So mostly people, we're talking a lot of people, obviously, but it's true for cloud costs, on-premise costs, travel expense and so forth and so on. And basically, this acceleration is coming from the fact that what we have put in place is more efficient and is producing more results and quicker, if you want, than what I expected at the beginning of the year. The second reason, which is maybe -- so that's an acceleration. Second reason which is more structural is -- and maybe you remember what I was telling you at the earnings of 2024, the different automation solution that we have put in place at different places in the company. So in QAS, meaning our customer service, in our content ingestion, we were putting it in place, and I was expecting to see the first materialization into savings next year. And actually, it's happening as early as this year. So that's the combination of the 2. Now to answer your second question about the GBP 1.15 billion, that represents the alteration of the SwapClear revenue share. So we're considering this as an acquisition. So we are creating an intangible asset exactly as we would do as a traditional acquisition. And we are going to amortize it over 10 years below the line as the rest of our acquisition. And then your final question, which is the accretion. So accretion of 2% to 3% in 2025, because I want to be clear on the fact -- I hope I was clear in my script that this revenue share alteration is retrospective to the 1st of January of '25, okay? So it means that we benefit from the full accretion in terms of EBITDA margin that I have mentioned of 100%. And in terms of EPS taking into account the financing cost. We said 2% to 3% in '25, and we'll have pretty much the same thing, 2% to 3% in '26. Operator: And your next question is from the line of Tom Mills of Jefferies. Thomas Mills: I think we've skirted around it a few times on the call. I just wanted to clarify that you are sort of reiterating you're expecting to deliver around 3.5% price increase on the 1st of January is kind of [indiscernible]. Michel-Alain Proch: Absolutely. Absolutely. We've just sent -- the price letter was sent in September. On the basis of the first reaction from this price letter and our experience, we are confident we will derive the same type of yield around 3.5% in '26 as the one we had this year in 2025. Operator: And your next question is from the line of Oliver Carruthers of Goldman Sachs. Oliver Carruthers: Oliver Carruthers from Goldman Sachs. Thanks for a lot of the incremental KPIs around D&A. I just have one quick modeling question on the FTSE Russell subscription revenues. I think you're calling out the more modest growth in subscription growth here in Q3 was to do with this mandate renewal cycle that you think is going to normalize next year. So just what's reasonable to assume in terms of the pickup in growth rate? I think you're running at around 5% on a constant currency basis year-over-year for Q3. And the reason I ask is if we go back to 2024 levels of around 10%, on my math, this adds something like 70 basis points to your ASV. So just any parameterizing of that would be very helpful. David Schwimmer: Yes. Thanks, Oliver. So you're right. This year, a much quieter period in terms of renewals during which we would typically see incremental revenue associated with either regular price rises or bigger, broader business relationships and broader engagement. I think hard to give you specific numbers as to what that's going to look like in '26 and beyond. You've seen how this business has performed in years past in that kind of higher than mid-single-digit zone. So I think I'm probably pretty comfortable, and MAP, feel free to weigh in here as well. I think we're pretty comfortable in that zone, but I don't want to be giving you any sort of specific guidance on what that looks like at this point. Operator: And there are no further questions on the conference line. I will now hand the presentation back to David Schwimmer, CEO of LSEG, for closing remarks. David Schwimmer: Great. Well, thank you all. Thanks for joining us today. As I said upfront, a little bit more substance in this one rather than a typical Q3 update. We hope you all have found it useful. And if you have any questions, you certainly know where we are. We'd be happy to take any further questions through Peregrine and the team. Thanks again.
Operator: Thank you for standing by, and welcome to the Regis Resources quarterly briefing. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to hand the conference over to Mr. Jim Beyer, Managing Director and CEO. Please go ahead. Jim Beyer: Thanks, Darcy. Good morning, everyone, and thanks for joining us this morning for the Regis Resources September quarter results. Joining me today is our Chief Financial Officer, Anthony Rechichi, and our Chief Operating Officer, Michael Holmes; and our Head of Investor Relations, Jeff Sansom. As usual, we will refer to some figures in the quarterly report released earlier this morning. So please, it might be helpful just to keep it handy as we step through the results. So firstly, starting with safety, as we always do. Through the quarter on a 12-month moving average basis, our lost time injury frequency rate actually got down to 0. However, unfortunately, towards the end of the quarter, we saw a single LTI occur, which pushed out LTIFR, lost time injury frequency rate, to 0.36, which was in line basically with our performance last quarter. Now while still below the industry average, as always, we should never be satisfied with any injury. And the team, I know, is driving hard as we are diligent and continue to build a strong disciplined safety culture for our teams across all our operations. Now on to production performance. The September quarter marked another period of consistent operational delivery and a resultant strong cash generation. Group production totaled 90,400 ounces at an all-in sustaining cost of AUD 2,861 an ounce. And I note that this also includes a noncash charge of just under $200 an ounce, and that relates to drawdown on historic stockpile inventories. Now we are comfortable with the performance in our first quarter, and we're well positioned to deliver within our FY '26 guidance ranges. From a financial perspective, this quarter has seen another period of unprecedented gold price movements. Spot gold during the quarter increased over 15% from just over $5,000 an ounce to just under $5,800 an ounce during the quarter. And during that time, we sold at an average price of $5,405 an ounce. Of course, since the end of the quarter, gold has risen another $500 an ounce, will actually rose more than that, and we have seen this slight correction in the last couple of days, but the fundamentals are still there, and it is a great time to be producing gold. This meant that we grew our cash and bullion position by $158 million for a balance at the end of the quarter of $675 million. That's another record for Regis and highlights the ongoing strength of the business and really continues to demonstrate the significant cash-generating capacity. We remain debt-free with significant balance sheet flexibility. From a growth perspective, we saw first ore from our underground development projects at Duketon, and these both remain on target. Now with that, I'll hand over to Michael for more detail on the operational rundown, followed by Anthony, who will cover more on the financials. Over to you, Michael. Michael Harvy Holmes: Thanks, Jim, and good morning, everyone. As Jim mentioned, it was disappointing that we had 1 lost time injury in the quarter, which continued our 12-month moving average frequency rate of 0.36. We are working on numerous initiatives within our operations to reduce the occurrences of safety incidents and injuries. Operationally, the quarter was steady across both sites with results consistent and in line with plan. At Duketon, we produced 58,400 ounces at an all-in sustaining cost of $2,832 per ounce, which includes a noncash charge of $238 per ounce. This is a few hundred dollars lower than the previous quarter on stronger production and reduced total material movement with lower open pit waste movement. During the quarter, open pit mining commenced at King of Creation, recommenced at Gloster and continued at Ben Hur open pits. Our open pits contributed 14,400 ounces at a grade of 0.92 grams per tonne. Underground mining at Garden Well and Rosemont delivered 31,800 ounces at 1.9 grams per tonne with development totaling 3,990 meters for the quarter. Milling throughput was 2.08 million tonnes at 0.99 grams per tonne with an 88.3% recovery. Importantly, as Jim mentioned, during the quarter, first ore was mined from stopes at both the Garden Well Main and the Rosemont Stage 3. The first ore contributed to the increased underground ore tonnages compared to the previous quarter. These 2 underground developments are key contributors to our long-term growth strategy, and Garden Well Main is progressing well towards commercial production in H2 of this financial year, so we should see growth capital from the development roll off towards the end of the year. In light of the ongoing strong gold price environment, the team continues to identify and evaluate options for organic growth across Duketon. At Tropicana, production was 31,900 ounces at an all-in sustaining cost of $2,821 per ounce, which includes a noncash charge of $198 per ounce, reflecting solid delivery and grade improvement. Open pit mining delivered 16,100 ounces at 1.6 grams per tonne, with material movement and grade in line with expectations. Total material movement was elevated related to the previous quarter related to the planned waste mining in the Havana open pit. Over the coming quarters, waste stripping in the Havana pit will ease, and we expect the strip ratio will moderate, and this will be particularly apparent in the second half of FY '26. Our share of what Tropicana underground delivered was 15,200 ounces at 3.12 grams per tonne and 983 meters of development with a recovery steady at 89.7%. Growth capital was moderate at $3 million with development of Havana underground progressing to plan. With that, I'll now pass to Anthony for the financials Thanks, Michael. Anthony Rechichi: We're continuing on from a really impressive financial performance that we reported for the full year ended 30 June 2025, with a great start in the first quarter of FY '26. We sold just under 83,000 ounces in the quarter at an average realized gold price of $5,405 an ounce, generating $447 million in revenue. Operating cash flow was $290 million, including $186 million from Duketon and $104 million from Tropicana. As an aside, when we were selling the gold in and around that $5,500 an ounce mark, the team was ecstatic. But as Jim mentioned, what a difference of a few weeks makes, noting that while those gold prices were impressive, the recent few weeks of gold sales have been in the $6,000, which is just incredible. It's an amazing time to be in gold really. Moving on to capital expenditure. We spent $114 million, including $70 million at Duketon, $19 million at Tropicana, and we spent $20 million on exploration. Within the capital spend amount, $66 million of that was growth capital, with $63 million at Duketon and $3 million at Tropicana. The majority of this spend was related to the underground growth projects. At Duketon, Garden Well Main is expected to commence commercial production later in the financial year. And therefore, the capital spend in that area from then on will report to sustaining capital, not growth capital anymore. With this in mind, in the absence of any new organic growth we create along the way, we expect to see the growth capital spend rate reduce as the year goes on. But again, that's on the basis that we don't find anything extra across Duketon that's worth pursuing. So for cash and bullion, in the end, we closed the quarter with $675 million, which is another record for Regis and the $300 million revolving credit facility remains undrawn. I'll just circle back now to all-in sustaining costs, and Michael mentioned the noncash charges across Duketon and Tropicana, and I want to talk some more about that. At Duketon, there was a noncash charge of $238 an ounce related to stockpile inventory movements. And at Tropicana, we had a charge of $125 an ounce for the same reasons. At a group level, that's a charge of $198 an ounce for the quarter. Focusing in on Tropicana, this quarter's all-in sustaining cost per ounce was higher than last quarter. If you cast your mind back, in the June quarter, Tropicana reported a significant noncash credit related to stockpile survey adjustments. If we net off the noncash stockpile movement impacts for Tropicana, then the all-in sustaining cost per ounce becomes similar across the 2 periods. On another topic, and as you now know, with the business high profitability and impressive cash generation, the directors declared a final fully franked dividend of $0.05 per share, totaling $38 million off the back of the FY '25 results, and we paid that earlier in this month of October. And as I've mentioned before, due to that strong profitability, Regis will return to a cash tax payment position and is expected to pay approximately $100 million in the third quarter of this FY '26. So that's all for me. Thank you all, and back to you, Jim. Jim Beyer: Thanks, Anthony, and thanks, Michael. At McPhillamys, we're progressing the dual-track strategy to return the project to an approvable status. And I want to very quickly go over some of the details of the project and remind or highlight why we continue to pursue this line. Look, we released the DFS at McPhillamys back in the middle of last year, and that highlighted a resource of 2.7 million and reserves of 1.9 million At the time we released the DFS, as I said, the reserves were about 1.9 million, which, of course, isn't a reserve anymore, thanks to the Section 10, but the key fact is it's still in the ground and quite valuable at the moment. As expected, it was to have a mine life of around 10 years, so an average production of 185,000 ounces per annum, at a capital cost of $1 billion and a life of mine average all-in sustaining of something like $1,600 an ounce. Now I do have to say that as a result of the Section 10 declaration, of course, the project is no longer viable in its current form, and we were through the DFS. However, if you benchmark the project on those metrics I just mentioned and look at the spot gold price today where it's sitting around $6,300, that gives nearly 3/4 or gives well over $2 million a day, $3.5 billion in pretax cash flow each year on average. Now that's the value to our shareholders. But there is also other stakeholder value in addition to this such as the value that it represents in New South Wales. And this would be significant. It takes the form of 300 steady-state jobs over -- well over now with this price $366 million in royalties along with millions in local rates and taxes. The list of benefits goes on as it always does when we have a grown-up conversation about the real contribution mine makes to our Australian economy and the quality of life, but that's a topic for another time. So with these multiple value benefits for many stakeholders, we are committed in our drive towards a positive outcome for the McPhillamys Gold project. And to that end, we continue to prepare the legal challenge of the Section 10 declaration, and we expect that to be in mid-December. And in parallel, we're also investigating alternative waste disposal options and concepts. This dual-track approach aims to put Regis in a position where we could conceivably return the project to an approvable status and positioned to proceed under either outcome, albeit with probably different time lines. Now back to our current operations. As Michael and Anthony have discussed, the quarter was in line with expectations. And as we sit here today, we are very comfortable with our FY '26 guidance range and see no changes required there. We'll maintain capital discipline focused on generating strong margins for our core assets while positioning the business for future growth. As also noted by Michael and Anthony, we continue to seek out organic opportunities that make good economic sense in this new gold price environment. Our exploration team continues with their focus on conversion and extensional drilling to build long-term optionality. And I haven't said anything -- I won't say anything more on that, but I do note that we will be providing a midyear exploration update later on this quarter. So to summarize, our team has delivered another quarter of consistent performance that has enabled us to capitalize on the exceptional gold price. Cash and bullion is up $158 million to a record $675 million. First ore mine from Garden Well Main and also Rosemont Stage 3, and we continue to ramp up both of these underground projects. Ongoing development at Havana Underground. We continue to seek out and evaluate organic growth opportunities within Duketon. McPhillamys is progressing through both legal and technical pathways. And finally, but very importantly, our FY '26 guidance is reaffirmed. So thanks for this morning. I'll now open the floor up to questions and back to you, Darcy. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first question comes from Hugo Nicolaci from Goldman Sachs. Hugo Nicolaci: Obviously, as you said, a great time to be in gold. Just first one for me, just a clarification on the McPhillamys project. Just with the hearing in mid-December, do you have a rough time line for when you'd expect an outcome after that hearing? Jim Beyer: Yes, sometime after that hearing. I mean, unfortunately, these -- as we know, the courts run to their own beat. We would like to think that we would get a result back sometime in the first quarter of next year, but that's not certain. Remembering and understanding the legal process here, it's not actually an overturning of the decision. It's a process of going through and convincing the judge that there were elements of the process that we felt we were significantly disadvantaged over. And as a result, of that, the judge sort of says, well, the decision is set aside. The minister, who is a new minister now, of course, presumably asked the department to correct the injustices, for want of a better description, or the correct the flaws in the process. And then the minister will make a new determination. How long that takes, there is no time line to that? It could easily be out to the end of next year. Hugo Nicolaci: Got it. That's helpful color. And then just the second one for me just at Tropicana, just observing that your partner there had put in and then recently got an environmental approvals for a power plant expansion and a new pace plant there to support the Boston Shaker. Could you just provide a little bit of color around the need for the paste plant? Has there been a change in geological conditions what you expected? Or was it more around cost and greater ore recovery that you're putting that in? And then just any comments around sort of timing and cost benefits there? Jim Beyer: No. I mean the power thing is pretty obvious. We'll need more power. And the paste fill is really, it's a trial at the moment, and it's driven by the potential to improve overall economics by increasing ore extraction ratios. Hugo Nicolaci: And in terms of timing of having that trial up and running? Jim Beyer: I mean there's a trial in the first instance and then there will be -- have to be a decision, and that's on the -- on when it would -- a full approach will be implemented, and there's no timing on that, but I would consider that to be a least a year. Operator: Your next question comes from Levi Spry from UBS. Levi Spry: Just exploring a little bit more of the returns piece of the big cash pile you built and building in the context of these growth options. So how are you thinking about it? Is there a scope to formalize some sort of returns policy? Or do we really need to wait for McPhillamys or potentially something from inorganic [indiscernible]? Jim Beyer: Yes. Look, I mean, it's -- you're the first person who asked that question lately. Look, the first thing -- and I guess, historically, what we've done is we've pointed to the fact that the company and the Board has always had a strong view on returning returns to shareholders via dividends. And it's great and very pleasing to see that as we've moved our way through all the recapitalization and the hedge books over the years that we've been able to return and the debt, of course, for Tropicana, we've been able to return to a position to be able to pay dividends. And our view has always been where we've got the capacity to do it and it makes sense, we will look at that ongoing process very favorably. But as you pointed out, we don't have a policy. That is something that we are under consideration at the moment. And I would imagine as we work our way through that, we'll make some decision on that over the coming months. The next key time for us to make any another decision on whether a dividend is payable or not. And obviously, it's a pretty favorable environment at the moment, but I wouldn't want to preempt anything, but the next time to be making any decision would be the half year results because we look at it on a half year and full year basis. So yes, no, we don't have a policy. We've always said that where we've got the money and the -- it's an important part of our reason for being is to return -- make a return to our investors via dividends as well as regular growth. So -- and that's what we plan to continue to do. We just don't have a locked-in policy at this stage. Operator: Your next question comes from Andrew Bowler from Macquarie. Andrew Bowler: Just a question on the McPhillamys study just looking at the dry stack tailing options. Just wondering on the timing of those studies? And will that be affected by the judicial review? So for example, if it falls in your favor, are we likely to see that study a bit sooner maybe as you sort of -- or should I say, if it falls in your favor, we likely never to see that study? Or if it falls against you, are you like to see it a little bit sooner as you try and get it out to market as quickly as possible? Jim Beyer: Look, our intention is, as I said, we're running a dual track. I think our preferred scenario because it's probably a little bit more timely and requires less additional approvals is -- and test work is to return to the original DFS concept, i.e., what I'm saying there is we much prefer to win the -- we much prefer to be successful in the challenge of the Section 10 and then follow that through with an appropriate decision by the minister after his review. That's the way we prefer it to go. But we don't want to sit around in hope, so we've also planned to find and prove up this alternative method. Probably the reality of that is that it's going to take, at this stage, it could take considerably longer for us to work that through. But the initial test work that we've done is encouraging. It's really a timing issue and making sure that we understand all the risks that this now introduces that we didn't have before and have we got everything in place. So the short answer to your question is we prefer the Section 10 to be successful, but we'll continue to pursue the other one. And if the Section 10 is successful and that's great because it means we've probably got a better time line as well. Andrew Bowler: Yes. Sorry I was on mute. Yes. No, sorry, I was on mute. And just a follow-up. I mean I know you're working through the study, and it's very early stage, but is it the intention for these dry stack tailings studies to retain the relative scope and scale of the old plan at McPhillamys? Or are you -- or is there some tinkering to be done with the dry stack tailings studies that might see a [ biggering ] of the project or a bit of a trimming as well? Or is it roughly the same with the dry stack scenario [ bolted ] on the back end? Jim Beyer: In terms of footprint, it's probably a little smaller. So it's not actually -- the concept that we're working on is not so much a dry stack. It's an integrated waste landform. So we -- there's -- obviously, in terms of what can move as much as I'd like to, we can't move the ore body. The process plant probably stay roughly where it is. There's a big waste rock dump that's already there. It's already part of the approval. But obviously, if we co-mingle the tails in that, then whatever we don't put in the tailings because we won't be able to which has to go under the waste rock dump. And that's why it's sort of, that's why it's called an integrated waste landform. And that would need to be bigger. And so there's a few things that we have to go through and get, work on to see whether that requires extensive changes or reasonably modest modifications. And so that's all part of the work that's kicking off at the moment. Andrew Bowler: Apologies. I wasn't very clear. I mean as in sort of, I guess, the processing capacity scale. So the project itself would be on a similar scale. Jim Beyer: Yes. No, it'd be a similar scale. I mean basically, the concept is you put -- it's not unusual. It's reasonably common certainly in South America, where water is exceptionally at altitude where it's scarce. And there's a couple of operations here in Australia, one over here in WA that uses a form of it. So it's not uncommon, but it is something that involves more equipment. But our plan would be to maintain the scale of the operation as it currently isn't just changed the back end of it. Andrew Bowler: No worries. That's very clear. Operator: Your next question comes from David Coates from Bell Potter Securities. David Coates: Just more on observation. I suppose it sounds like McPhillamys, understandably, is getting quite a bit of attention from you guys. Is that because sort of [indiscernible] the inorganic opportunities that are a bit sort of thinner on the ground and I guess, sort of harder to find value in the current market and McPhillamys obviously has those really compelling metrics that you mentioned -- referenced before? Jim Beyer: Yes. Good question, David. Look, I don't think what -- I guess the question don't misinterpret the fact that we only talk about McPhillamys as we're only inwardly focused. We do talk about it because I do genuinely think that the market doesn't recognize the value that's there. I mean, basically, what we're saying is one way or another, this thing is going to be developed. It's really just a question of when. And if you're sitting down and trying to work out what the value is -- in this new price environment that we see gold in, and frankly, this is not a flash in the pan. This is, you can see that there are global fundamentals that have driven us to this new level from where we were 18 months or 2 years ago. So it reminds us that we need to -- our team needs to keep pushing on and make sure that, that becomes approved in one form or another, and then we can develop it. The thing is the time line. So that could be a couple of years out. And so that we put our effort into it and you can see we're spending not an insignificant amount at the moment on an annual basis on that works under the McPhillamys guidance that we've given, but that doesn't mean that we're not looking for near-term opportunities to sit between now and then either, which is definitely on our agenda and probably everybody's at the moment, but then we're no different. David Coates: Cool. And then just sort of sticking with the organic opportunities. You mentioned with this price that everyone's out sort of looking hard and reviewing the at Duketon in particular. Can you give us a bit more detail on some of the opportunities that might be emerging up there? Jim Beyer: Look, we've -- at the moment, the exploration side of things is pretty interesting and getting exciting again for us, but we haven't really got anything material to sort of hang our head on there yet, although, I guess, we'll keep an eye for whatever it is those time. And -- but if you look at what else and what Michael and Anthony were talking about is where there's no doubt about it that this at this new price environment, we can go back to some of our old pits, be they big or small. And sometimes it's a small ones that are actually the opportunity or back to -- even back to some of our old oxide stomping grounds. We look and go, well, hang on at $5,000 or $6,000 an ounce. This stuff is actually quite viable. And so they are the things that we're looking at. I don't really not in a position, really, I don't really want to go through the nuts and bolts of the individual items. But when we get something that is material, we will certainly update the market on that so that what you can add to our model and add to your valuation work. So we are doing plenty of it at the moment. We're just not in a position yet to strike it into a gold bar. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I'll now hand back to Mr. Beyer for any closing remarks. Jim Beyer: Thanks, Darcy. And thanks, everyone. Thanks, especially for the folks that asked questions. Thanks for joining us and enjoy the rest of your day. Take care. Operator: Thank you. That does conclude our conference for today. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.
Natalia Valtasaari: Good morning, everyone, and welcome to KONE's Third Quarter Results Webcast. My name is Natalia Valtasaari. I head up the IR function here at KONE, and I'm very pleased to be joined by our President and CEO, Philippe Delorme... Philippe Delorme: Good morning, everyone. Natalia Valtasaari: And our CFO, Ilkka Hara. As usual, we'll start by walking you through the financial highlights of the quarter, what we're seeing in the business and what we're seeing in the markets, then we'll move on to your questions. [Operator Instructions] but with that, over to you, Philippe. Philippe Delorme: Thank you. Thank you, Natalia, and good morning, everyone. I'm very pleased to be presenting our third quarter results today. And let me start by saying that Q3 was, in many ways, a strong quarter. Order development was, of course, a key highlight. Nearly 8% growth is an excellent achievement, and I'm happy that growth was broad-based. We delivered again on our target to consistently improve profitability towards our midterm margin corridor. Not only did we grow earnings, but we also had healthy cash conversion in the quarter. For me, a key point worth emphasizing is that over 60% of our sales is today coming from service and modernization. This shows that our pivot towards a more resilient business model is proving successful. And last but not least, we continue to drive our strategy forward with precision and speed. I will share a few concrete examples of strategy progress, but let's first take a look at our financial performance in more detail. So as just mentioned, order growth was strong this quarter. We saw over 10% growth in all areas except China. The biggest driver was modernization, where orders were up double digits. And I'm also pleased that our efforts to strengthen competitiveness in the residential segment paid off. This supported good momentum in New Building Solutions, especially in Europe and in the Americas. Sales grew by 3.9% at comparable currencies. Modernization delivered another excellent quarter with sales up 15.5%. Our Service business also performed well outside China, while in China, development was more stable. Adjusted EBIT margin expanded by 75 basis points from a low base. And the main driver was the growth in our largest profit pools, service and modernization. And finally, cash generation was strong with operating cash flow increasing by roughly EUR 100 million year-over-year. Let me now share some highlights from the quarter. The first one, and you see the smile on my face, is a very exciting milestone where we secured the contract to equip the Jeddah Tower in Saudi Arabia, rising to over 1,000 meters. This will be the world's tallest building once completed. It will be equipped with solutions from KONE next-generation high-rise offering, including our superlight UltraRope hoisting technology. I'm very proud of this win. It showcases not only our unique innovations, but also our capacity to deliver highly complex projects in a reliable way. With this win, 5 of the world's 10 tallest building will feature KONE technology. I see this as an excellent recognition of the work we've done to reinforce our leadership in the high-rise segment. As you know, our strategy focuses on making KONE an even more resilient business with service and modernization as the key drivers of growth. And I'm pleased with the progress we've made in accelerating this shift during the year. Let's start with services. We began the year with roughly 35% of our maintenance base connected, and we are now approaching 40%. At the same time, our field service technicians are leveraging productivity tools in 41 countries, and we're enabling remote service in 35. These advancements are critical to deliver greater transparency, improved predictability and more efficient service for our customers. Let's now turn to modernization, where customer response to our partial modernization offering has been very positive. This is the fastest-growing segment within modernization and accounts for the largest share of modernized units. For KONE, partial modernization provides scalable growth and enable us to address market opportunities more broadly. For customers, it offers easier installation and improved energy efficiency at a more attractive cost. I see this as a true win-win. Let's now move on to sustainability, where we have lots of good news to share. Let me highlight a few components of our sustainability index, where we've made particularly strong progress. First, we have continued to scale our solution to drive energy efficiency. A good example is the growth of our partial modernization business and the fact that regenerative drives are now included in more than 60% of our deliveries. We have also improved our [indiscernible] rating, which is how we measure progress in cybersecurity, a key priority for us. We're actually now in the top 10 percentile of the engineering peer group. On the people side, I'm proud to share that KONE was recognized for the 6 years in a row on Forbes and Statista's list in the World's Best Employer. This is a fantastic acknowledgment of our commitment to being the #1 choice for employees, fully aligned with our strategic ambition. Finally, we announced a partnership with UNIDO. Together, we will conduct training programs for our suppliers to promote sustainable practices and human rights across the supply chain. Now let me hand over to Ilkka, who will go through the market development and financial in more details. The floor is yours. Ilkka Hara: Thank you, Philippe. And also a warm welcome on my behalf to this third quarter result webcast. As usual, let me start talking about how we are seeing the markets developing in the different regions over the past 3 months. Overall, the trends were broadly similar to what we've seen earlier this year. In terms of New Building Solutions, as I'm sure you are well aware, market conditions continue to be difficult in China. In all other areas, we actually saw increasing market activity. If we move East to West, demand continued to be strong in Asia Pacific, Middle East and Africa. In Europe, activity picked up from Q2, growing slightly compared to last year, and we also saw some growth year-on-year in North America, despite trade policy-related uncertainty. Then looking at Service and Modernization, we continue to see healthy growth in all regions. Next, let's go through our financial development in the quarter in more detail. As usual, I'm starting with orders received, which, as Philippe mentioned, was a highlight of this quarter. 7.8% growth at the comparable currencies is a great achievement. Interestingly, China New Building Solutions was the only soft spot. Modernization continued to grow strongly in all areas, and we had a good quarter also in New Building Solutions outside of China, both in volume business as in the major projects as well. Order margins were stable overall with China still under pressure and more stable development in other areas. Turning into the sales, which grew 3.9% at the comparable currencies in the quarter. Looking at the development by business, it was great to once again see the strong order book rotation in modernization. Sales increased by 15.5% overall. And more importantly, all areas contributed with double-digit growth. In New Building Solutions, continued low delivery volumes in China was the main driver behind the 5% decline. In Service, we grew by 7.3%. Outside of China, growth was very much in line with our targets. In China, we have taken deliberate actions to prioritize margin and cash flow over volume in all of our businesses, including service. This means being selective and sometimes walking away from contracts that are not meeting our performance criteria. Pricing and revenue uplift from digital services solutions continued to contribute positively to service growth. The repair business also performed well in the quarter. This is actually a great example of the benefits of accelerating digital. As Philippe said, connectivity enables productivity. And when we perform service more efficiently, we release time that we can use, for instance, more proactively drive repair sales. Then moving to adjusted EBIT and profitability. Margin expansion in the quarter was 75 basis points year-on-year, which is a good outcome despite the lower -- low comparison point. This took adjusted EBIT to EUR 341 million. Looking into the details, we saw again some negative impact from higher investments into R&D and our strategic growth areas. That said, the main headwind continued to be the new equipment market in China, more than offsetting was the positive mix impact of services and modernization growth. So overall, good delivery of our 11th consecutive quarter of profitability improvement and especially good to see also sequential improvement, which is not always the case for Q3. Then turning to cash flow, one of my favorite metrics. Cash generation was strong in the quarter, supported by growth in operating income and by changes in working capital. Cash flow from operations increased to EUR 364 million, bringing year-to-date cash flow to EUR 1.3 billion. The contribution from working capital came mainly from advances received, which, of course, related to a strong growth in orders. And although not a big contributor this quarter, our focus on collections continues and it's progressing well. Then looking at the whole year '25. First, we have made a small update on our market outlook. We now expect the New Building Solutions market in North America to grow slightly, as activity continued to trend upward in Q3. Of course, the business environment in the U.S., in particular, remains fluid. Our view on other areas is unchanged. China continues to be the main challenge. In Europe, we expect some growth. And in Asia Pacific, Middle East and Africa, we expect clear growth. For Services and Modernization, our outlook continues to be positive with growth opportunities in all areas. Then to our business outlook. With 3 months left in the year, we have specified our guidance slightly. We now expect sales to grow 3% to 5% at the comparable exchange rates and the adjusted EBIT margin to be in the range of 11.9% to 12.3% this year. FX is expected to be a headwind. If it remains at the October levels, we estimate a roughly EUR 30 million negative impact to EBIT. China continues to be burden to both volumes and margin. We also expect some small impact from tariffs. But as we discussed already previously, most of the impact is recoverable in our view. We have already made good progress in mitigation actions. In terms then on tailwinds, service and modernization growth is the main positive. We also expect some support from the ramp-up of performance initiatives. Then Finally, let's look at how we're currently thinking about year '26, starting with challenges. China construction market is not yet showing any signs of leveling out. So this will continue to be a burden, less than in '25 as our exposure continues to come down. We also expect similar inflationary pressure on wages, as we have seen this year. On the positive side, we continue to see opportunities to grow our service and modernization business, which will contribute positively to the earnings mix. We also expect meaningful contribution from our performance improvement measures. And we have made it very -- and we have made very good progress in our product cost reductions this year, which will also be supportive. So those are our initial thoughts. And of course, we will provide more color when we report the Q4. Let me now hand back to Philippe to close the presentation before going to the Q&A. Philippe Delorme: Thank you, Ilkka. So to wrap it up, let's make -- sorry, changing slides. So let me first take the opportunity to thank all the KONE teams for their great achievements and for delivering a strong Q3. We had yet another quarter of good momentum in service and modernization, which shows that the transformation we are driving is well underway. I'm also very happy with the progress we are making in executing our Rise strategy, and we continue to move full steam ahead. And finally, our performance this quarter shows that we are on track to delivering on expectations for 2025 and building solid momentum towards reaching our midterm financial targets. Thank you all for your attention, and I suggest now we move on to your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from the line of Andre Kukhnin from UBS. Andre Kukhnin: Maybe actually, I'll start with a quick follow-up on what you mentioned on China exposure coming down during this year. Maybe could you help us to calibrate that a little bit? I think we talked about China New Equipment margin being clearly below group average in 2024. Is it fair to assume that it has come down substantially further in 2025 in sort of more mid- to low single-digit range? Ilkka Hara: It's always difficult with these objectives substantially, like you said, but what I would say that our margins in China in New Building Solutions have come down in '25 further. Andre Kukhnin: Got it. And the main question really for me is on the performance improvement initiatives that you talked about and we've been kind of tracking and talking about since the Capital Markets Day last year. Can you just walk us through what has been done during 2025 and what will be delivering those kind of meaningful contribution, as you mentioned, in 2026? And is there any way we can start sort of quantifying that already for 2026? Ilkka Hara: Well, if I start, I think you're quite passionate about this, Philippe, yourself. So what we outlined in Capital Markets Day is that we see an opportunity for us to improve our profitability by 150 basis points by year '27. And then, of course, we need to make a decision that we invest some of that back to growing the business further. In that progress, we have started to now execute those programs. The largest ones which are contributing to the profitability are focus on our procurement, how we source both at the factories as well as in the local operations and as well as how we perform at the regional level or the lowest level where the KONE teams come together, and we call it sales and operational excellence. On sourcing, I'm very happy how we've been able to drive our product cost down this year. We have yet another record in terms of product cost reductions as a result. We have more work to be done on the local sourcing part, and that's because it's touching more teams, and we need to then just lower to get that executed. So good progress in where it's more centralized, more work to be done and good opportunities in there. And then sales and operational excellence, we are seeing that the teams are really now able to drive better and better outcomes, and we have more and more consistent execution. But also there, we have plenty of work to be done on that one. Maybe you want to comment? Philippe Delorme: Yes. I mean those things take time. I'm rather impatient as a person, but you -- I mean, you don't -- the company is not a light switch. So when you drive things at a branch level with much stronger sense of execution, timely, weekly, tactical and things like this, it takes some time to spread within the company. I think we've said during the Capital Market Day that we would start to see the impact of most of these actions by the end of 2025. Nothing has changed on that front. The only thing I can say that we've been extremely diligent in '25 to ramp up our actions, be extremely systematic. And I feel much better about, let's say, the level of detail and scrutiny and capacity to execute we have on this work. And I would say on procurement, the arrival of Michelle Wen, who came with a very strong automotive background, and she just came in actually in August. So it's not yesterday, but it's a few weeks away, is giving me confidence that we can actually intensify the work we want to do on the procurement side. Operator: The next question comes from the line of James Moore calling from Rothschild. James Moore: I wondered if I could talk about your service growth. Would it be possible just to give us a flavor for the speed of the unit growth in maintenance base versus the price behind that and other topics is the first question. Just to understand whether the speed of maintenance base growth is broadly stable or accelerating or slowing for any reason and whether price is broadly the same behind that? Ilkka Hara: Yes. So overall, on the LIS growth, and I guess I commented that already during the presentation. So the LIS component of that is growing in Q3 a bit less than we've seen as a trend line. And the main reason for that is 2 things. One, which is that in China, we clearly focused more on lining up the business to focus on cash flow and profitability. And in some cases, also in the service business, we've actually decided to let go some of the customer contracts, as they're not meeting our performance criteria. And then it's more of a quarter-by-quarter, there's fluctuations. So it happened to be that in Q3, we had a bit less acquisitions than we've seen in the recent quarters as a result. The good thing is that both pricing including digital as well as repair sales are actually progressing quite well. So in that sense, we are making very good progress on that front. And then lastly, I think it's also that given what I said, so we had very close to the targeted level of 10% growth or close to 10% growth in services in 3 of the areas, whereas really the slowdown in sales was more related to China actions we've taken. Philippe Delorme: Which is a clear choice. And actually, I'm very happy to see the result, which is our cash generation in China and our profit improvement in China on that front is according to plan. So I would say we are executing what we want to execute. And it's a bit of 2 way of doing things, which is China on one side, where we've always said cash margin and moving to more service and modernization versus elsewhere where clearly our -- the way we are executing is different because the markets are different. James Moore: Could I just follow up on that? I mean, over time, I felt that the maintenance base grows with a lag after the first service period from the unit deliveries, but also your win-loss ratio and your conversion ratios. And you always had a very high U.S., European conversion ratio, 80%, 90% and a more muted 50%, 60% conversion ratio in China. I'm just trying to understand, is it that the conversion ratios are broadly staying the same across the 3 regions and that it's the active choice on the win-loss ratio to effectively proactively lose? And is the intensity of this change, which slows your maintenance base growth at the moment? Is that something that's going to intensify yet further going into '26, if you like, with more proactive contract management? Ilkka Hara: No, I don't think that's something which will continue going forward. It's been more of a targeted efforts right now. And it's good to note, so first, your comments on conversions as well as retention. So they are quite stable. And for example, in Europe, where the NBS market has been now for a few years, been down, we've been able to actually quite nicely grow the services business, as I've noted in previous quarters. So we've been able to mitigate with good retention, win-loss ratios improving and some acquisitions as well to drive growth in a market where there's less conversions. Philippe Delorme: And talking about our service business, we -- you've probably noticed that we talk quite a bit about our repair business. Actually, we've done quite some work to make sure that we would optimize that part of the business. It's actually significant in our service figures, both top line and profit. And when trying to understand how the service business work, I would encourage you to really look at, yes, the pricing and the service base but also the repair business, which for us, at least is very important. Ilkka Hara: And actually, the repair business grew really nicely, almost double the speed of our service business in the quarter. Philippe Delorme: Yes, absolutely. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Daniela Costa calling from Goldman Sachs. Daniela Costa: I'll ask just one and it's regarding modernization, obviously, very strong 10% organic order growth there. Can you give us some light on how sort of your installed base age has evolved? I know you talked about the mono elevators being very important for that modernization. So can we see this 10% plus as sustainable going forward when you look at sort of how the curve of age of installed base is? Any light there would be helpful. Ilkka Hara: Well, I guess, first, good to note that the modernization growth was actually on a quite close to the 15% target that we talked about in the quarter. So very good numbers. Then on this aging of the portfolio, so I think there's 2 topics I would highlight. So first, there are so many elevators in the world that need to be modernized that we're not yet making a dent onto the aging as a whole. And most of the elevators that are old are actually outside of our own LIS base. So for us, the growth opportunity, we've been working and targeting previously our own service base. But really, the big blue ocean is the elevators that are not in KONE maintenance. And there, I think we're increasingly making good progress in identifying those and having the right go-to-market to really get to those customers. So at this rate, we're still -- the elevator base is aging more than we're able to modernize as an industry and also, I guess, for KONE as well. Philippe Delorme: Maybe to illustrate a bit more, Daniela, the topic, and I'm going to quote some figures that I think I have listed in the Capital Market Day, but there is 25 million elevators in front of us, of which 10 million are more than 15-year-old total in the world. This 10 million will become 13 million by 2030. So whatever happens every year, whatever happens to real estate market in China, outside of China, there is growth because elevators are aging, whether our elevators or the elevators of competition. With that in mind, today, when I look at our figures -- and we are happy with our figures, and we'll try to do our best to sustain that growth. We are actually modernizing tens of thousands of units versus 10 million units in front of us. So we've said it many times, but we'll repeat and we'll repeat and will repeat, this market is growing structurally because elevators are aging. And today, we have good figures, but we are not -- I mean, there is still a lot more that could be done with innovation, with better execution and so on. So we are confident in our capacity to drive scalable growth in that field. Operator: The next question comes from the line of John Kim calling from Deutsche Bank. John-B Kim: Could we just go back to wage inflation for a second. Can you give us a sense of quantum of growth there as a growth rate and how that compares to what you maybe were seeing earlier in the year? And how should we think about the cadence of the price ups that are in the contracts versus this inflation? Ilkka Hara: So twofold. We are seeing -- I guess, I've said also earlier that our wage inflation this year is around about 5% on average for KONE as a whole. And yes, our escalation in contract prices for services have actually been quite close to the inflation level. So we've been able to continuously now drive not only the CPI level inflation, which is continuously coming down, but actually representing the inflation we are seeing and then we have the productivity as a separate item. So pricing, yes, we can escalate service contracts. But of course, then also we see broadly outside of the service operatives, also the wage inflation impacting our cost base as such. John-B Kim: Super helpful. One follow-on, if I may. Can you give us any color on how you're driving better penetration of connectivity? Ilkka Hara: I think that's for you. Philippe Delorme: Discipline. Discipline and it looks like -- it's not easy. I mean, in every, let's say, original industrial company, I think it takes some time to make sure that our people understand the value of connectivity. And on the few things that I'm really happy with, when I look at the step-up that has happened in the company for every one of us to understand, especially in our service business that service will have to be digital. I think we've been good at discipline. And we'll be even better at discipline. And we've been -- I've been very clear to the people in KONE. We want by 2030, 100% of our installed base to be connected. And we're going to be very disciplined and focused on driving that goal and it makes sense for customers. And actually, I've been on the road for 3 weeks in North America, meeting many, many customers. The great news is -- the feedback from our customers is we execute well. They see the value of our connectivity around transparency, around predictive capabilities, around from time to time remote services, and they really like it. And the feedback we get is we seem to be executing pretty well on that front. So we'll keep doing that. Operator: We are now going to take a question coming from Martin Flueckiger calling from Kepler Cheuvreux. Martin Flueckiger: Two questions. The first one is on China and particularly the property market there, where July, August data seemed to suggest that there was a steepening of the decline. And yet when I look at your data on the Chinese property market, it looks like NBS orders were relatively -- in real terms were relatively stable in terms of dynamics. So just wondering, is that because of rounding? Or -- what do you see on the ground in the field? Was there a worsening in the NBS market actually maybe towards the end of Q3? That would be my first question. The second question, if I just may add on, is on the financial income that you've reported for Q3. If I saw this correctly, you've posted a negative financial income for Q3. If you could just elaborate on the reasons for that, that would be helpful. Ilkka Hara: Okay. I'll take them in reverse order. So the financial income is related to hedging. And if you look at the 9 months year-to-date, that gives you a better picture. So Q2, Q3, you see the opposite direction there. So in 9 months, you see the real underlying performance there. Then on China, so I think as I've said during the last few years that a lot of the KPIs fluctuate somewhat. And whether it's better or worse around that volatility, our view of the market has not changed. So we are seeing the market to decline this year in units and value double digit and more in value than in units. And I would say that during Q2 Q1, Q2, there was a bit some signals that were better, but I would not say that the Q3 has been something where we've seen a big change overall. And it's important for us to also note that, yes, we want to be a meaningful player in China and want to go after the service and modernization opportunity. But as Philippe already said, and I said, I guess, as well that we are optimizing the business to cash flow, profitability and the pivot to services and modernization. So we'll take the business that we see supporting those priorities in NBS then in the market. But I don't see that the market has dramatically -- or there's been a bigger shift during the Q3. Philippe Delorme: And the repeat on the China market, maybe it's clear for everyone, but I will repeat. The market today is 50 NBS, 50 modernization and service. So if there is any change, that is that over multiple years, what was NBS-dominated market, now it's coming 50-50. I'm not having any crystal ball, but it's pretty obvious that, that trend will continue, meaning the share of modernization and service will likely keep increasing if we see what's happening because the country is aging. We see growth and actually pretty healthy growth in modernization. We are driving our service mix first with cash and margin, but there are still opportunity in service. And we are clearly adapting our forces in NBS to take into account that market reality. And I would say on that front, I want to compliment the team for reducing their cost very aggressively, both product cost and the fixed cost we have to adapt ourselves to a market reality, which indeed is going down, on NBS. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Vlad Sergievskii calling from Barclays. Vladimir Sergievskiy: Two questions from me. Can I please start with the follow-up on modernization growth opportunity ahead? To what extent it is driven by the market growing? Or it is actually KONE creating the market for itself by addressing installed base, perhaps in a more proactive way or opening new market niches for themselves? Because I hear your comment that fleet -- the installed base is aging, but it probably has been aging for forever. And KONE modernization growth was almost never as impressive as it is today. Philippe Delorme: I think it's a mix of both. The market is growing, and you have the data on our assumption of the market, but the market growth is good. And we believe that we are gaining market share in that space because we are focused and because we try to drive the right innovation and be customer-centric, which is when you have an elevator in your premise, the last thing you want is having any OEMs coming and say, okay, for months, your elevator is not going to work. So what we are doing is we are listening to our customers and say, you know what, we are going to make it shorter, simpler so that actually we do what's strictly necessary to start with, which very often is electrification upgrade. And then we'll go in a life cycle discussion with you to make that improvement over multiple years with smaller chunk that will be less risky. That's not -- I'm not reinventing the wheel here, but we are executing in a very focused manner, trying to have modular offers in front of this, and it's working very well. So we are gaining share in that regard, and we're really trying to push our team to be very customer-centric on a growing market. And the result is a double-digit growth, which is very consistent, which is driving value for the company, and we are very happy with that. Vladimir Sergievskiy: That's great. And a quick housekeeping question, if I may, to Ilkka. Interest income line was negative about EUR 15 million this quarter, which I think is almost the first time ever when this line was actually negative. Is there something to do with hedging practices? Has any hedging practices changed to drive this change? And where in the P&L, there could be an offset to this line if there is one? Ilkka Hara: So actually, the previous question was on the same one. I said, yes, it's on hedging. And the year-to-date picture gives a better picture of the real underlying income and expenses. So between Q2 and Q3, we had an opposite development on there. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Panu Laitinmäki calling from Danske Bank. Panu Laitinmaki: I have 2 questions. Firstly, on China NBS, just on the margin. So was it still positive in Q3? And going forward, do you expect to kind of protect the margin with the actions you mentioned reducing fixed costs and so on. So that is why you gave the comment that it's a smaller headwind going into '26. Ilkka Hara: Well, yes, on both of the questions. And I guess I was also in the smaller headwind, meaning that the size of the business relative to the size of the rest of the business is smaller. Panu Laitinmaki: Okay. That's clear. Then the second question is on modernization. So how much is parcel modernization out of orders and sales roughly? And then how has the margin of modernization developed? I mean, a year ago, you said at the CMD that it's close to the group average. So is it still there? Or has there been changed so far? Ilkka Hara: We see on the parcel modernization, it continues to be a bigger and bigger part of the modernization. I don't think we've been very clear on exactly how big part of that is. And on modernization, we continue to see, as it has been during the last years that the profitability continues to be improving as we are scaling up the business on modernization. Panu Laitinmaki: Okay. And is it fair to assume that the parcel modernization is more profitable for you than the kind of traditional modernization? Ilkka Hara: Yes, it is. It is focused on the most important components of the elevator and there's less construction work related to that as well. Philippe Delorme: That's what we call the benefit of being modular and standardizing work, which actually for the customer is better value for money. And for us, it's better execution, less time lost in the field. So it's a win-win for everybody. Operator: The next question is from Ben Heelan calling from Bank of America. Benjamin Heelan: I just had one, which was on M&A. Now you've obviously said in the past that you want to be a consolidator of the industry. I just wondered if you -- is that still where your minds in terms of the future of the business? You see consolidation as a focus? And when we think about leverage ratios, is there any sort of framework that you can give us in terms of the leverage that KONE would be willing to go up to? And any framework there? Is it based on credit rating, et cetera? Ilkka Hara: I don't think the comment on the consolidation making sense in the industry has changed. We've said it for a very, very long time. Lately, actually, we've been doing consolidation more on the smaller maintenance companies on an increasing speed. So that's also then that we want to be a driver of the consolidation. Then on leverage, so I guess we don't -- we're net debt negative right now. So it's not been an issue. But I've said previously that we want to continue to be an investment-grade -- strong investment-grade company going forward. Operator: The next question is from Rizk Maidi calling from Jefferies. Rizk Maidi: Just to follow up on M&A and more specifically transformational M&A. Can we maybe just chat around whether you would be considering issuing equity, if you were to pursue a larger acquisition? And then maybe geographically, what are the regions where you feel you have a little or perhaps where we would like to add sort of more exposure? I'll start there. Ilkka Hara: Well, I guess on the first one, so I wake up every morning, and I guess, Philippe as well as somebody who sees that there are bigger companies in the industry. So we're a challenger. We want to grow faster to be the leader in the industry. So that's clear. I don't think it's one geography per se. I think it's a general statement where we want to grow faster than our competitors to make that happen. And as such, then on other things on capital structure, capital raising, I don't think it makes much sense to speculate on that. Rizk Maidi: Okay. And then the second one that I had is just covering the industry for quite some time, and this question is specifically on China maintenance. I think we've seen historically that whenever new equipment business being weak for an extended period of time, we saw that basically spread to the maintenance side of things. I'm just wondering why this should not be applicable. I mean I remember this happening to Europe back in 2013, '14 after the European debt crisis. Just wondering why you think this should not happen in China, whether it's -- you compete with different players, structure of the market different and whether the slowdown in maintenance has anything to do with this? Ilkka Hara: Well, first on China maintenance, I don't think I've ever said it's easy or something where there's not a competition. It is like we see it it's -- half of the market is service and modernization. So of course, everybody knows the same thing. And among the world's fragmented, so i.e. most competitive market in service is China by far. So I think that's a starting point. And then when you have less new elevators enter into the market, then, of course, it makes it tougher. What I'm very happy about is that how our team has been able to address it. And now I call it out because we made conscious decisions now in Q3 that impact the outcomes. And it's not a market-wide comment. It's rather our focus on profitability and cash flow. Philippe Delorme: And maybe to build on your point on China market. When we benchmark across the world, clearly, the China market is more fragmented. And we see at the lower part of the market, companies that are doing the very minimum of what they should do in terms of safety. We see on the other side, the China government being conscious that safety standards should move up, also seeing an opportunity with digital. So my point is not about next quarter, but when I look at a longer time period, I would expect some further concentration because on one side, the lower part of the market would have a hard time to survive with a standard that I would expect would increase with more digital technology that would make it less accessible for, let's say, lower cost, low-value player to deliver a value, which is more and more essential in a country that's being more and more modern and more and more asking for top safety standards. And we have work to do as an industry to help the industry move to a higher level of digital safety and so on. So this is upside. How fast it will materialize, we'll see. We have our role to play here. We are very active on digital to be a digital driver in China. It's taking some time. Rizk Maidi: Perfect. And I promise the very last one, so apologies if this was tackled before because I joined late. Section 232 and its extension to more than 400 products in August, maybe how you're thinking about the direct, but also more importantly, the indirect impact on the business. Ilkka Hara: It is first question on tariffs, and I think there is a reason for it because we don't see that meaningfully impacting our results. We are, number one, of course, working with our own supply chain on what we produce in U.S. and what do we ship to U.S. And actually, the export -- sorry, import to U.S. is less -- about 10% of our business. So it's actually quite small. And then secondly, we're protected by our contracts. So we are actually moving the cost of tariffs largely to our customers. And then, of course, we need to continue to drive product cost actions and efficiency in our supply chain going forward. Operator: Moving on to our next question from John Kim calling from Deutsche Bank. John-B Kim: He just took my question. Someone was strong. Ilkka Hara: Okay. That's good efficiency in action. Operator: And the next question is from Vivek Midha calling from Citi. Vivek Midha: Hope you can hear me. I just have one follow-up really on the questions around service growth with one eye on the quite ambitious aims for midterm growth here and the building blocks there. Is there also any material contribution at all from the strong modernization growth that you've been seeing in adding to the service installed base? Is there expected to be some over the midterm, helping you achieve your targets there? Ilkka Hara: You're seeing me smiling because that's actually a really important topic. And I was talking about the modernization. So the focus and the volume of the opportunities outside of our own maintenance space. And indeed, once we partially modernize an elevator, it becomes a digital modern elevator for us to maintain. So increasingly, that will be a driver for unit growth. And of course, already now with this modernization growth, we're starting to see increasing impact coming from that. And the more mature the markets are the bigger driver for unit growth is modernization in the long run. Philippe Delorme: And those, as you call, modernized connected elevators, actually, we are more efficient in delivering the right output with our customers because we use all our capabilities. So it's playing very positively in the mix. But that's a great point. Vivek Midha: Understood. Just a quick follow-up -- as a quick follow-up on that -- I don't know if you have data, but in terms of the conversion rate of, say, one of these partial mods, for example, compared to NBS, I mean, how does it compare in terms of driving the service there? Ilkka Hara: Well, twofold. So the relative conversion rate is quite high. So it's a very good level. Then still on the absolute volumes, it's still a smaller contributor. So we need to scale up the business, but it's a very good way to increase our LIS base. Operator: There is a follow-up question from Andre Kukhnin from UBS. Andre Kukhnin: So firstly, on the service adjustment in China that where you decided to let go some customer contracts, can you just confirm that, that's a one-off? Or should we think about that for Q4 and then maybe into 2026 as well? Ilkka Hara: I guess I already said it's not a long-term action. But of course, we continue to monitor the business. So let's see now how Q4 develops, but it's not something we expect to continue for years. The priorities don't change, but I think it's more of a discrete focus on this. Andre Kukhnin: Got it. And if I were to think about it, I'd probably think about it being more margin focused than cash as such, as probably some of these units are in fairly sort of spot locations, not really helping density. Is that the right sort of avenue? Or is it cash driven as well? Philippe Delorme: I think it's both, but it's driven by margin, but we've been really very clear with our China team, cash, margin rebalance the business. And there -- I mean, China is seeing some cash tension across the board. So how much is margin and cash? Usually, the 2 are related actually, but it's a bit of both. Andre Kukhnin: And if I may, just one more on China... Ilkka Hara: A follow-up on follow-up. Andre Kukhnin: Yes. Triple follow-up. Is modernization still the highest margin business for you in China? And is there -- well, I think there is scope, but are you also implementing a kind of modular approach there given that you've got a substantial and sort of broader universal installed base there? Ilkka Hara: Yes. So we plan to drive this more modular approach in China as well. And if you think about the size of the buildings, the time to execute the modernization is even more critical for the customers. And we have actually progressed really well be, I guess, fastest in the world in China in terms of driving modernization, is a fair statement. So kudos to the team on that one. And yes, modernization continues to be a good margin business for us in China. Operator: There is another follow-up question coming from James Moore from Rothschild. James Moore: I just wanted to follow up on service and NBS margins at a global level. You mentioned that China's margin is now in a loss in NBS in new equipment. Is that such a loss that the whole global NBS profitability is now a negative one? And the second question is on service margins. Are we at an all-time high in terms of service profitability? And if not, could you say when that was and how many bps or percentage we are below the all-time high? Ilkka Hara: On the first comment, I absolutely did not say that we are making a loss in China in NBS, neither did I say that we're making a loss in NBS globally. So it is clearly a lower-margin business compared to the other 2, but I have not said that we're making a loss. Then second, on services, I'm sure that in the history of 115 years, we've had margins that are peaking due to many reasons in services as well. But I would say that directionally, we continue to see margins improving in services, as we're digitalizing the business and driving productivity and the actions we talked about in pricing and more repair work. So it's directionally continuing to develop quite positively. Operator: Well, ladies and gentlemen, there are no further questions so I will hand you back to your host to conclude today's conference. Thank you. Natalia Valtasaari: Thank you, and thank you, Philippe and Ilkka, for the answers. Thanks, everyone, online for the plentiful questions, lots of varied ones. Really good to have active dialogue. Thanks for everyone who just listened in as well. I know it's a busy results today, so we appreciate the time. And as usual, if you do have any follow-ups, please reach out to me or the team. We're here for you. With that, have a great day. Philippe Delorme: Have a great day. Thank you so much. Ilkka Hara: Thank you.
Operator: Welcome to the PowerCell Group Q3 2025 Report Presentation. [Operator Instructions] Now I will hand the conference over to the CEO, Richard Berkling and CFO, Anders During. Please go ahead. Richard Berkling: Good morning, and a warm welcome to this quarter 3 report on what is a very busy day on the Stockholm Stock Exchange with a lot of companies making their presentations. So we're extremely happy to see that many joining us at PowerCell. So we have closed quarter 3, and we are quite happy with the outcome. Previously, in quarter 1 and quarter 2, we reported with the headlines of steady pace through rough waters in quarter 1, which actually gave a good description on how quarter 1 played out. Quarter 2 had the headline steady pace through improving waters, really showing that we saw improvement in the market. And now the third quarter, what is describing the headline is the steady growth and solid margins, which actually described the company quite well where we are at the moment. We saw good growth in quarter 3 compared to 2024, up 90% compared to last year. Year-to-date, it is up over 50%, which is quite encouraging. Gross margin is continued to improve, although not on record levels, but we have talked about this before that we see volatility over the quarters. Also encouraging to see that the rolling 12 months revenue remained over SEK 400 million, which is the top line momentum we want to have in the company. Also encouraging that we protected the EBITDA in a way that we are still positive overall [Technical Difficulty]. Can you hear me? Anders During: Yes. Go ahead, please. Richard Berkling: I was kicked out for some reason. So continued positive EBITDA on rolling 12 months, also very encouraging. This is one of the focus areas we had for PowerCell. I would say, since the beginning, we need to show a breakeven level also in the early stage of this technology shift. So this is quite interesting. Anders will go more into details on this. We managed to leverage on the fixed cost base and drive growth and then despite having a slightly lower quarterly volume. So we're really happy with this progress that we can now show. Also some orders in quarter 3, although I would have expected or hoped for more, but it's also quite volatile in this market. What is encouraging is that we are continuing to see more OEM orders in the marine sector, where we now broke into the bulk carrier segment with the first -- world's first bulk carrier to GMI Rederi in Norway. So quite encouraging to see how the quarter was playing out. What we are in is a time of very focused execution where we also see then a quite good tangible process. I would say that the middle section here, where we talk about the operational resilience, is what is most important to me. We managed to provide a positive EBITDA on rolling 12 months because we are now in delivery mode. We are now actually tomorrow shipping the final shipments to our large Italian marine OEM, which means that we have completed deliveries of all those orders. And now in quarter 4, we are ramping up the final production assembly and will complete delivery to Torghatten up in Northern Norway with a large 2x 6.4 megawatt ferry installation, which means that we have now actually managed to build a company that is industrially stable. Starting production as we did in April this year is always something that you need to ramp up and industrial stability doesn't come for free. So the fact that the organization has been able to pull this off, deliver high quality on time or even before time, is something that is a very important quality mark for PowerCell. So the focused execution is something that I think that we should talk more about the PowerCell. Quite often, we talk about growth and we talk about the innovation of the company. But being an industrial credible partner is something that is going to win the orders going forward because with the OEMs that are placing the trust in new technology, they also need to place the trust in a very, very stable partner. So this is something that we're quite happy to be able to provide and also report. We also see, as we said, repeated demand around the Marine System 225 that we introduced last year in June. And that has been a very strong commercial success based on the fact that it is world-leading when it comes to performance, when it comes to energy density and when it comes to the value it creates for the customers that put this into operation. And then for PowerCell, once again, the operational resilience that we were able to start production and work on productivity, efficiency protecting the gross margin, which is extremely important for PowerCell going forward. So the combination of this is something that I'm quite happy to be able to report. With this, I would like to hand over to Anders on the numbers, and then I will come back and talk more about the outlook and how this connects into the broader context. Anders During: Thank you, Richard. I will take the opportunity to just run through the numbers. I think these numbers, after having listened to Richard, are in a way that, of course, the 19% growth is something to notice. I remember us saying in the beginning of this year and even at the quarter 4 report last year that we would find some more stabilization between quarters. And I think the third quarter is another evidence for that the more even, let's say, turnover in each quarter is there to stay for the future. Gross margin is slightly up. That is -- I mean, to the volumes we have and to the product mix we have when we sell, the variation of 6 percentage in a single quarter is not for us anything that is unexpected. It's more important to look at it when we get to the accumulated numbers and understand why the changes are there. EBITDA, I think, it goes without saying that we are happy with only being at minus SEK 2 million, given that we have taken SEK 5 million in provisions for the reorganization that we have announced. And I think the burning platform, and that what everyone is more concerned about listening to us today, is the operating cash flow. I think we have been quite explicit in the report describing what has happened in the first 3 quarters this year. I think that having listened also to now Richard saying that we're in final deliveries of immediately one of our larger orders ever and then continuing final deliveries of the second one, everyone can understand what that will do to cash flow as we progress into the future quarters of this year and the beginning of next year. So we go on to the accumulated numbers. We look at this point basically on the gross margin. Everyone recognized from the second quarter that we had a large deal with Bosch that brought in a lot of gross margin to us, given the fact that we were selling IP. And of course, for the remainder of this year, we will still see, on an accumulated level, a very high gross margin based on that deal. That is a level that, if I would guide anyone on this thing, may not be contained over the near future. We hopefully get back there later on. But short term, in each quarter, that level will not be maintained. I think it's important to also see that if we look at -- Richard mentioned operational leverage, you can claim a lot of things about what different things derives from. But one thing is certain that given the turnover we had last year, given the turnover this year and the change, excluding for all unusual items in the different accumulated book numbers are about SEK 88 million. And that for us feels very strong, acknowledging that at least half of it, when you make comparison, derives from the deal we made in Q2 with Bosch. But still, it's a very impressive for us at least change in how we manage profitability and earnings in the company. And as I mentioned and as I've highlighted to the right in this picture, background being given and everything that we feel completely comfortable about is that we have passed a lot of what has been described as the reason for building up working capital, and we also come to a stage where we can see that we are delivering and what follows with that. So moving on to the next one. It is basically saying that we feel comfortable having a stable path. We grow 30% plus in our industry. If you went back 5 years, I guess, that would be viewed as very humble. If you flip it around and say that this is an industrial company in an earlier stage of the market, it's a number that I feel that we are very comfortable with. And also that we have brought on rolling 12 months EBITDA to a positive number of SEK 21 million, and that makes us feel comfortable for the future as well. Having said so, I will leave it back to Richard for the continuation of the presentation. Richard Berkling: Then also reminding you on the upcoming reports, quarter 4 report February 4, 2026, and then quarter 1 report in 2026 on April 23. So then if we look at the segment highlights and what is building up the result and the business at the moment, we see good commercial traction in Marine, all subsegments. We saw the order from GMI Rederi, which was quite encouraging because that is, as we said, the first break into the bulk carriers. We need to mention then the IMO decision or postponement of decision last week. It was a disappointment to the industry. Many put their trust in the fact that the IMO would regulate the net zero tariffs on a global scale. However, in Europe, we already have in place even stricter regulations. So to me, I'm not too surprised that they delayed it because it takes time to change industries in a technology shift. So you will always have resistance. So hopefully, a year from now, they will have a resolution that is signed that is perhaps a bit more easy to adapt for the operators. But in the meantime, we continue to see a strong demand from especially Europe, but a lot of interest globally as well. Power generation, we were quite happy to yesterday report that Zeppelin Power Systems placed an order for 2 different systems implemented in Europe. The fact that they are now exploring to different applications is quite interesting because power generation, as we have pointed out, we believe that power generation will be the largest segment going forward. The difference from marine is that we have still not seen a trigger where an OEM is putting a stick in the sand and said, now we do this. But we are seeing a more clear commercial landscape emerging for backup power and peak shaving applications. There is a lot of discussion on data centers. Of course, we have a quite close collaboration with parties out there. But as I said, we have not seen the trigger where somebody is really putting a stick in the sand and say, now we do this. So we try to contribute with that. We try to challenge the industry, and I will have later on in the presentation some more news on what we will do in that segment. In aviation, we continue the certification process with ZeroAvia and other aerospace partners. They're not the only one who are in certification process. What is quite encouraging is that now ZeroAvia actually have delivered their first systems to customers, and they will be put in operation in 2027. So now we have a deadline on that one, which is really, really encouraging. This is the first information we have seen from them on when this will be put into operation. What we also have seen is that we have now industry validation that our strategy with the medium temperature PEM, which is our next-generation fuel cell stack is the good enough step for larger turbo aircraft in the next generation. So more interest in our collaboration together with Honeywell on the Newborn platform, which is already materialized in the commercial agreement in marine. But for aviation, the fact that we can do with the medium temperature is a technology step that is really valuable to PowerCell because that's where we have invested our position from a technology perspective. Going once back to the operational leverage. One reason why we are able to show this rather good underlying progress when it comes to operational leverage is that we have had for 2025, a strategy to consolidate. And we have consolidated to be able to accelerate. We have consolidation of product platforms. Previously, it was a bit fragmented, which was a risk for a company like PowerCell because you might end up in doing projects everywhere. Now since the introduction of MS 225, we have seen now a serious delivery, which you see in the bottom there. Start of production in April. We now have more than 100 systems in order and in the pipeline. As we said, we are completing the delivery to our Italian shipyard this week, tomorrow, which, of course, is one of the reasons why we have been tying up working capital to the extent that you have seen in the report. Now when we move on to delivery to the Norwegian ferries up in Bodo that is just one more proof point on how well the consolidation strategy have worked, which is also seen in the gross margins of PowerCell. But then in quarter 3, we also reported a change in the management group, which is also a consolidation of the organization. When building up a company like PowerCell, we changed more or less everything in the last 4 years, building up technology portfolios, product portfolios, operations, marketing, sales. I wanted to have a large management group to be able to cover all the aspects of PowerCell. Now we are more mature. We now see a more clear path towards growth. And then we need to have a more streamlined operational management team, which is also why we have consolidated the organization. So this is to increase speed and acceleration and also clear out more accountability now when we actually will speed up everything we do. Anders talked about this before, the fact that we have growth without cost base inflation, I think, is really, really important. Many companies like PowerCell when they grow, they tend to overinvest and always scale up with more and more resources. We are actually going to run 2026 on a lower overhead cost base than we have had before, which is also one proof point of this consolidation strategy, which is also then, I would say, a mitigation to make sure that we can defend both EBITDA and EBIT breakeven on lower levels than most of our colleagues in the industry. So the strategy is, of course, being profitable and scale through discipline. This is something that is in the DNA of the company, but you always need to be there and protect it, especially when you grow. But we see now that we maintain a breakeven level at around SEK 400 million of top line revenue. So then looking at the product strategy and next-generation platform. This is now something we have had in the reports a number of times, but it's worth reiterating. We see that the Marine System 225 platform that was introduced in June last year has been very successful. I would say the most dominant product in the marine industry for fuel cells. Now we are complementing it with a CE marking in quarter 4, optimized for power generation segment, which is a very important proof point and a quality stamp for PowerCell. We continue to see interest in the methanol reformer, both cruise ships, service vessels [indiscernible] and but we also see a growing interest from power generation. The main value there is that you get more energy on a smaller energy storage footprint. So where we have backup power for potential data centers with hydrogen, you need 1/6 of the size, if the energy is stored as methanol. So there is a large interest in this technology from the power generation segment as well. Also availability of methanol is quite good in different regions of the world at a low cost. So this could be something that is enabling growth in areas where you don't have access to hydrogen. And then power generation. In quarter 4, we will have an enhanced product offering in power generation, more optimized for that segment. It is built on the Bosch collaboration that we communicated in quarter 2, to be able to attract more price-sensitive applications. And this is something that is quite important in a technology shift that willingness to pay between segments are different. Marine commercial, for instance, have much higher requirements on performance, quality, robustness, et cetera, which makes the product there more expensive. For power generation, we need to have something that is a bit less expensive. It's a bit more price-sensitive segment, and this is where we now will introduce a new product platform in quarter 4. And then as we said before, we have a strong interest in our next-generation fuel cell stack, which is, I would say, our guarantee for future earnings, which is quite valuable to PowerCell. So reiterating what we said before, the building of the strategic foundations for PowerCell is that we have a platform system and product readiness, the ability to actually have industrialized components because right now, we see growth with a rather short from order to delivery. The demand is a bit volatile, but when we see an order, it's rather short delivery time. And this is really important to us that we are able to meet that. This is also why we have tied up a bit more working capital than perhaps we would have liked, but that is a trade-off that you have to do as both CEO and CFO in a company like PowerCell. It's also important to have the industrial partnerships because the OEMs will drive growth in the industry. They are the Tier 1 to the end user, and they need to invest and be the guarantee of technology, not just as a delivery but also over the life cycle as a service partner. We support with service to them as the second tier. And then, of course, the fiscal discipline. This is really, really important for PowerCell. And we will protect breakeven at low volumes, more or less regardless of anything. So if we then look back to what we set out to achieve in 2025, this was part of what we have said as the focus areas for 2025. So one focus was to reach breakeven on rolling 12 months. We can check that one. We also had an ambition to continue to grow with OEM contracts because we believe that, that is what we give the most sustainable growth. Also, those customers put products in operation. So they are proven and tested and actually validated that they generate value to the end customer. That one with the 2 recent OEM contracts that we have signed in quarter 2 and quarter 3 is quite encouraging. We have said that we need to scale existing product generation. And this is also what has now been generating the growth and also the fact that we reached breakeven. We are doing this, while still investing into the next generation. And I think that the last sentence there is quite important that we are proud of the ability to balance innovation, industrial stability and leverage growth. It's quite easy for a company like PowerCell to optimize on either/or. But the fact that the company has been able to provide this and also that we have had the support from the Board to pursue this sometimes complex strategy is something I'm really happy about because it is not just giving us the fact that we have breakeven today on low volumes. But with the next-generation products, we are now also well positioned for what will happen in future earnings. So that balanced approach is something that I'm really happy about, and I'm proud that we have had the support from both Board but also the commitment and the, I would say, brilliant performance from our team, both in operation and innovation and technology and sales and marketing. So really happy with that progress because it's -- we need it. It's difficult to do business in any technology shift, but we have proved that we can do it and we can actually breakeven on very low volumes. So with that, we open up for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Richard Berkling: Now I have to admit that I don't see the question. Let me see here. Here we are. Do you have any concrete initiatives in the data center area? We know that Bloom Energy and the situation in the U.S. is a question from [ Ari ]. Yes, of course, but as always, we cannot talk about things before they have materialized. There is a massive interest from the data center industry. And this is not only for CO2 emissions, but it's also for energy resilience. In many areas, the grid is full. So getting access to the grid, getting access to stable electricity is quite difficult. So replacing some of the old diesel generators with either fuel cells or something else is quite attractive for the data center operators. And they also have rather high margins on their own business, so they can do this. So we see a lot of commitments from the larger players. We met with some of them in New York during the New York Climate Week. But as I said, it is a combination of getting the whole value chain in position. You need to have supply of fuel, you need to have the grid access, et cetera. So finding the right balance point has been a bit tricky. But in quarter 4, as I said, we will come back with a more clear product offering and hopefully some clarity also in the potential that we see in this industry. So let me see here if we have more. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Richard Berkling: Anders? Anders During: Yes. Richard Berkling: Yes. We had a question, of course, on the cash position and how we see the end of the year and the beginning of next year, even though we don't make the detailed forecast, do you want to comment on that one? Anders During: I think it's without making forecast, which we will try not to do, but we would like to guide everyone reading the report as we understand that this is one of the key questions from a financial standpoint. And I think the efforts we have done in the first 3 quarters this year would -- either way you would have done it, accumulated more working capital. On top of that, we also spent money on those proceeds that we discussed during the share issue last year. And following what Richard just mentioned in the beginning of the presentation that we are in final delivery stages in 2 large projects. Obviously, those 2 large projects has terms and conditions included in them that indicates that once delivered, we get paid to not giving you any guidance, but with more stating that we feel comfortable about those dynamics. We are comfortable at this point in time. Richard Berkling: Very good. And then we had a question from [ Niklas Holmgren ] here. Once again, regarding the data centers, do you think you have the right product offering to make this a significant source of revenue for PowerCell over time? So far, it's been mainly SOFC manufacturers like Bloom Energy has been successful in this space. That is a very good question, and it requires some explanation. One reason why our technology, the PEM fuel cell complements the SOFC is that SOFC is a very stable installation. It doesn't take dynamic load well. So where we see a potential growing demand is for backup power and peak shaving because that's when you have the fast dynamic load that the PEM fuel cell is very strong with. The solid oxide fuel cell cannot do that because it takes a very long time to ramp up and ramp down. So there are different applications. So I think that the different technologies complement each other. And we believe that PEM fuel cells and the backup power peak shaving is a very relevant application for data centers because there are today very few areas globally where you can fully rely on grid access. So we believe that our technology will have a strong opportunity for the data center segment. With that said, as we presented here in the report in quarter 4, we will come back with a more clear product offering because we believe that the price point is slightly different from other segments. And we are now preparing an introduction of more targeted products to be able to capture that growth. So it's a very good question, and it gave us an opportunity to also explain the difference between our technology and the one that has been prevailing so far in this segment. Then also, we have a question on Torghatten. With Torghatten final delivery, can you comment on the service agreement with Torghatten? Yes, I can. Since we are completing delivery, we start delivery now in quarter 4 and will be completed in quarter 1. That means that for 2026, the service contract will be in place. It is a 10- to 15-year service contract that we will sign together with Torghatten. But the details of that contract, we need to come back to when it's signed because it's still under discussion. But of course, now when we are getting more large installations in operation with customers, the service side of PowerCell will be more interesting because now we will have a service revenue and a service opportunity that has been lacking before. And this is also one positive benefit of moving away from the early stages of project execution to more normal industrial applications and customers that put products into operational service. So it is both an opportunity for revenue, but also an opportunity to learn more and also show the industry how this works. So it's a good question. We had a question from Rakesh at Chevron Shipping. How do you expect the IMO Net-Zero talk failure to affect future orders? Well, since we didn't see any effects on the contrary that we had a positive effect because the IMO was not signed yet. This was just a proposal. It's been postponed now for 12 months. I think that the -- what we see now is that certain areas will wait. That is for sure, but I think that they waited anyway. So the segments and geographical areas where we see growth like Europe, that will continue because Europe already, as we said, have a more strict regulatory framework than what the IMO proposal was. So it's more likely that we see a continued hesitation in the U.S. for certain marine applications. But on the other hand, there are also those who want to accelerate because this is actually making business sense in certain areas already now. So we will continue to follow this and monitor, but we don't see any immediate impact on the order book or on the leads funnel that we are operating. I think that, that more or less concluded. We are now 1 minute past the deadline. So as always, thank you very much for listening in. We always encourage you to come and visit us in Gothenburg at the factory if you have time, regardless if you are a shareholder or if you are a financial analyst. So look us up, come visit us. And with that, have a nice day, and see you in February. Anders During: Bye-bye.
Stacy Pollard: Good morning, everyone. I'm Stacy Pollard. I'm here with Dassault Systèmes' CEO, Pascal Daloz; and the CFO, Rouven Bergmann. Unfortunately, our Head of Investor Relations, Beatrix Martinez, could not be with us today. She's out for a couple of weeks. So I have the pleasure of being in this room again. It's been a few years since I sat in the chairs beside you guys. So it's very interesting to be a different perspective on this side of the podium. Now let me move on and formally welcome you to Dassault Systèmes' third quarter webcast presentation. At the end of the presentation, we will take questions from participants in the room and online. Later today, we'll also hold a conference call. Dassault Systèmes' results are prepared in accordance with IFRS. Most of the financial figures in this conference call are presented on a non-IFRS basis, with revenue growth rates in constant currencies unless otherwise noted. For an understanding of the differences between IFRS and non-IFRS, please see the reconciliation tables included in our press release. Some of the comments we will make during today's presentations will contain forward-looking statements, which could differ materially from actual results. Please refer to our risk factors in our 2024 universal registration document published on the 18th of March. I will now hand over to Pascal Daloz. Pascal Daloz: Thank you, Stacy. Good morning to all of you. It's always a pleasure to be here in London and to have a chance also to interact directly with you. So we're going to review the Dassault Systèmes performance for Q3. Let me give you some -- at least my reading of the numbers. I think this quarter is a solid quarter with healthy margin, and I think Rouven will come back on this. And we -- with a strong EPS growth, and we continue to grow the recurring revenue part, which is, I think, the important thing because this is reflecting the strength and the resilience of our business model. Now if you look at the numbers, the revenue grew 5%, thanks to a strong demand across our core industries. Our subscriptions business is up 16%, accounting for almost half of the recurrent part of the revenue. If you remember, a few years ago, it was only 1/3. So this is growing extremely well. We hit a 30.1% operating margin, which I think is reflecting our focus on running profitable and efficient business. And finally, the earnings per share came at EUR 0.29 and growing at 10%. So behind this number, I think there are certain things I would like to highlight and which are our strengths. The first one is Industrial Innovations, especially Transportation & Mobility, we continue to expand our footprint. And despite the ongoing challenges in this sector, we have also a strong momentum behind 3DEXPERIENCE and SOLIDWORKS this quarter. The second thing is, I think our focus on accelerating SaaS adoption is starting to pay off this quarter, you will see. This is driving the revenue growth and the strong market traction. And to further support this momentum, we have established a new leadership at Centric to fast track the adoption of the SaaS business model. Lastly, in the field of artificial intelligence, I think we are shaping the future with a powerful combination between the industry most comprehensive data sets, the scientific rigor, the advanced modeling and simulations being combined with the real-world evidence, we call it the real-world validations. And AI for us is really not an add-on. It's embedded in the core of the 3DEXPERIENCE platform for a long time because you remember the 3DEXPERIENCE platform, this is really how we are managing the knowledge and the know-how for many of our customers. This quarter, we are coming with new category of solutions. And you remember the Virtual Twin as a Service, the generative experience and the virtual companions, and we will say more about this. And they are really transforming the way our industry, our customers, they are designing, producing and operating the life cycle. Now for the full year, we are confident enough at least to reaffirm the earnings guidance, and we expect the EPS to grow between 7% to 10%, with the total revenue rising 4% to 6% on an adjusted basis, and it's mainly due to 3 factors. The first one is the lower growth from MEDIDATA, which is in line with Q3, in fact, the impact of the SaaS acceleration for Centric and the volatility impacting some of the timing to close. Now let's dig into some details behind those results. Let's zoom first on the manufacturing sectors. As I was telling you, Transportation & Mobility has once again proven its resiliency. And to give you the numbers, this quarter, we are growing at 18%, one-eight. Why so? Because it's usually when it's a difficult time for our customers that they have to take radical decisions. And this quarter, we have some -- Ford took the decisions to go with us to expand outside of the engineering borders, and we have signed a contract with them for the next 5 years to use the platform across all the different programs. I will tell you more on this probably next quarter. But there is also another very important flagship customer we signed this quarter with Stellantis. And I know some of you were expecting us to move along this way, and I will come back on this. Why those companies are basically adopting widely the 3DEXPERIENCE platform, is because they are using our solution first to speed up innovation. And speed is becoming really one of the key topic. You remember a few years ago to develop the car, it was almost 48 months. Now we are talking about 16 months. So it's a little bit like fast-moving goods. And to master the complexity, you need a different approach, and this is where I think we are making a difference. Sustainability is also a topic. The electrification is driving the cycle. You know it. And more and more with the SDV, we are creating a personalized experience for the customers. And this is really the combo, if you want, of what we can provide with our solutions. We are also seeing a strong growth in defense. It's growing double digit this quarter, where programs are becoming more complex and collaborative. And I think our 3DEXPERIENCE platform, combined with what we call the model-based system engineering, MBSE, which is now a standard in the industry is more and more widely adopted, and this is really opening a new opportunity for us, not only in Europe, but also in the rest of the world. Life Sciences, the market remains unstable and challenging. I think Rouven will say more about this. We still see the new clinical trial start being contracted. Nevertheless, we landed with some big contract this quarter. And more importantly, I think we're also being encouraged by some large win backs. AbbVie is one of them. And you remember, it was one of the flagship customer of Viva a few years ago. They signed with us a contract for the next 5 years. And I think this is the proof that what we do is extremely critical. And I think also this is a proof that what we have built as a foundations is critical for them also for the AI-based programs, and I will come back on this. In Infrastructure & Cities, the demands keep growing, in fact, for autonomous and sovereign infrastructure, you remember, especially in the energy space. But we are more and more seeing new use cases or new opportunity emerging. One of them is the nuclear decommissioning. As you know, it's a big topic because you have many reactors around the world aging. And we are using our solution to do virtual twin as a service to manage the safety and the efficiency of this process and to manage the end of life of those nuclear reactors. So this space is really, again, a way for us to establish leadership in a domain where we are the challenger because in this space, I think we do not have the same footprint than the others. Now let me show you some key wins. Stellantis, for you know the company, I mean -- and you remember, we had a significant footprint with PSA, but the rest of Stellantis was much more in the hands of our competition. So what do -- they took the decisions to -- I mean, to standardize on 3DEXPERIENCE platform on the cloud, which is, I think, important for their system engineering backbone. And this is extremely important because, as you know, the system engineering is the foundation to do the SDV. And all the car players are moving along this way, and they are using our system approach, system-to-system approach as a way to standardize across all the domains to unify the bill of materials, but more importantly, against, they are building the foundation for their AI initiatives because one way to reduce the cycle of time to develop the car is to be much more generative and you need an infrastructure to do this. And that's what the 3DEXPERIENCE platform is ready for. So we are extremely proud to support this transformation. And it's a significant one because it's a ramp-up at the end with more than 20,000 users we need to equip with the systems. Moving to Life Sciences. I already say a few words. So AbbVie, it's a global biopharma. It's one of the top 10 global pharma. And it's a win back. And it's a win back of a win back, let's say this way, because again, a few years ago, they took the decisions to open some clinical trials with Viva. And now they are back with us. And there are a few reasons for that. One of them is the time. They were sharing with us that we are 10x faster in the way to run the processes and the clinical operations. It's also a big cost saving, which is an interesting takeaway because you remember one of the arguments which was used was this EDC is becoming a commodity and it's price sensitive. And the reality is the price is one thing, the savings and the efficiency is another one. And it's -- here, you have the proof. And the last argument, all the pharma sector, a little bit like the auto sectors, they are building their AI programs in order to automate, in order to use in a better way the data set they have. And they have seen through our platform, the ability to develop their own program on top of what we do. So those are the reasons, if you want, behind these win backs. Finally, from a customer standpoint, this is an interesting case also. Korea Hydro & Nuclear Power is the largest energy public enterprise in Korea, and they have launched the digital transformation to manage, I was telling you, the decommissioning of 26 reactors. So the reactors is first generation. They are progressively replacing it with a new generation. And to do this, it's a complex process. They have to decommission this large installed base. They showcased this example, this case in Koreans 3DEXPERIENCE forum a few weeks ago, and I was having the chance to participate to this. And frankly speaking, you should really look at it. It's amazing what they have been able to do because it's a very complex process. Safety is at stake. Compliancy is at stake. It's a very, very sensitive process because you have to manipulate the reactor when the reactor is still working. At the same time, you need to do it in a very precise manner. And to manage this complexity, to predict the complexity of the process to prevent the risk, to keep track of everything because you have to be compliant. They are using the platform and they are using the virtual twin in order to make this. So why I pick those examples? Because behind all of them, there is a clear pattern. We are not only the partner for them. I think in many cases, we are the game changer for them. We are the one allowing them to accelerate their industrial transformation, whatever it's in the mobility, life sciences and the energy sector. Now let's speak about 3D UNIV+RSES. So you remember, we announced it in Feb this year, and I was making this statement, 3D UNIV+RSES is not an extension of what we do. It's really a leap forward. And there are a few things I want you to keep in mind. What are our differentiations? The first one is we are building our AI engine on the large and the most structured industry corpuses. And it's the result of 40 years, having 400,000, almost 400,000 customers worldwide in a very different sectors, building the virtual twin of all the objects you can see on the slides. And this is a unique purpose to train our systems. So -- and remember, AI without having high-quality data is just only a noise. But if you have the right data, it's becoming game changer. The second takeaway is the data set is not enough for what we do. You need to build AI on science. And this is extremely important because if you are only relying on patterns matching and recognitions, it's not enough for what we do. The AI needs to be built on physics, biology, material sciences, engineering principles. And why so? Because when life are at stake, whatever it's -- when you develop a drug, when you fly in objects, when you have driving an autonomous car, you cannot take risk. The system should not guess, should not hallucinate. You need to understand how the parts fit together, how the materials behaves. And this is really what we have been able to build, which is an AI which is rooted in sciences. The third element is we are coming today, I mean, today, a few weeks ago on the market with the new category of solutions. So you remember, we presented it during the Capital Market Day. And now I'm really pleased to introduce you to our virtual companions. And in fact, it's a family of 3 for the time being. You have AURORA which is our business strategies, focusing on the outcome and efficiency. You have Léo for engineering experts, and Léo is really diving deep into design and simulations. And you have MARii is our scientific authorities handling the -- probably the most advanced questions on research. The interesting things, if you ask the same questions to all of them, you have different answer. So more than a long explanation, let's look at the video. [Presentation] Pascal Daloz: So as you can see, it's not just about AI. It's about having an AI, which is behaving like your team because you need -- when you do engineering activities, you need to assemble different domain expertise at the same time. And if you try to converge too rapidly to the solutions, at the end, you are letting some open opportunities untapped. And this is basically what we are doing with the virtual companions, which are a way to complement and to enrich the roles we have developed. Now this is also an interesting thing because you can use AI as a way to take smarter decisions and faster. And here is, again, a concrete example. It's AURORA. And AURORA is widely used by many industries for currently to deal with the tariff, with the trade policies, the supply chain issues. because this is changing so much that you need almost every day to reactualize your what if scenario. So AURORA, in this case, is not only anticipating but reacting. She anticipates the turnaround, the uncertainty. She try to manage with data-driven insights, the consequences. And this is important because for many industries, the margin is at stake. So to keep it you ahead, the system, if you want, is helping you to collaborate, is bringing you the right expertise, is telling you what are the different avenue you have in front of you in order to fix the problems at the right times. Now let's speak about SOLIDWORKS. This is an interesting -- this is a very important year for us. It's a milestone because we are celebrating the 30 years anniversary of SOLIDWORKS. And why this is important? Because if we step back, after 30 years, I think no one will debate that SOLIDWORKS is the undisputed leader in the 3D CAD. And I put some numbers on the slide just to give you the proof, 8 million users. It's by far the largest design community around the world, 1.5 million commercial license, which is truly addressing the large company, but also the start-ups and all the shakers. It's almost 300,000 clients worldwide and again, covering the large spectrums of all different industry we serve. So it's a lot of legacy of innovations that we are keep pushing from a product development forward. And I think now with SOLIDWORKS, we are also introducing the artificial intelligence to build the next phase to make it faster, smarter, easier to use, in fact. And the topic for us is not only to automate tasks, but more importantly, to give more time for the creativity. And we have some features we are introducing and some functionalities. The first one is obviously the generative design. Second one is what we call assistive features. which is an intelligent and pattern of recognition when you do, for example, an assembly. And all those kind of things are really helping the users to work smarter, but not harder. Behind this, I think if there is one message I want you to keep in mind is this AI approach is a way to do the docking bridge with the 3DEXPERIENCE platform. As you know, this topic is at stake for several years. And I think now I believe we have find the routes to connect the SOLIDWORKS' large installed base we have with the 3DEXPERIENCE platform. It's a way if you want to turn the SOLIDWORKS users into the lifelong experience partner. So I think -- and Rouven will come back on this, but you will see the performance of SOLIDWORKS this quarter is really extremely good. It's growing at double digits. Now to conclude, I think why everything I share with you matters. There are a few things. I'm sorry, I should not anticipate your presentation Rouven. The first one is 3D UNIV+RSES is giving a few and large advantages. The first one is, you remember, we are helping our customer not only to manage the full life cycle of their products but more and more to manage the life cycle of the intellectual property. And you should remember what I'm telling you. In this AI periods, the most important is assets is intellectual property because everything you built is leveraging the intellectual property. And if you do not have a way to manage it safely to take it as a real asset to manage your life cycle the same way you manage the life cycle of the products, you take the risk to be out of the game. And this is what we are bringing to our -- to mix the different knowledge coming from different sources, but at the end, still tracking will belong to what to. The second thing is, in many domains, we are turning compliance into a competitive advantage. If you take aerospace, if you take health care, if you take energy, those are extremely heavily regulated industry. And one of the answer to the tariff war is to put more regulations. That's the way to protect, if you want certain markets. The flip side of this, if you are an industrial company, you have to manage with this complexity. And AI is a fantastic tool to read millions of documents to extract 1,000 rules and us, what do we do with those rules? We do design -- we do compliance by design, if you want. The system is checking automatically that everything you do, every design you do, every decision you do are compliance by design. The third element, I think generative AI is really a game changer as soon as you can trust it. And your AI in many industry we serve needs to be certifiable. If you cannot certify the output of what you have produced with AI is useless. And the way to do it, if you remember, we are training our AI on very comprehensive data sets, which is pretty unique. And those are very high quality of data sets. And it's validated by the science, which is even more important. And we are deploying those artificial intelligence capabilities into a secure and sovereign environment, which is what we do with 3DS OUTSCALE. So this combination is pretty unique on the market. It's very differentiate -- it's a huge differentiations compared to many of our peers. And this is, in my view, a game changer in many, many customer engagements we have right now. The last but not least, I think we are coming on the market with a new category of solutions. You have seen this morning the virtual companions, AURORA, Léo and MARii, but you will see more and more the generative experience, the virtual twin as a services. We have a road map for this -- for '26, '27, and this will accelerate the contribution of AI in our revenue streams. So with this, I think it's time for me to hand over to you, Rouven to give more flavor on the numbers and probably the outlook for the rest of the year. The floor is yours. Rouven Bergmann: Thank you, Pascal, and also welcome from my side to our call today. Thank you for joining us online and here in the room in London. Let me start with 3 key messages. First, top line growth and margin expansion are our top priority. Second message, the 3DEXPERIENCE platform is driving our business model shift to subscription and recurring revenue growth. This engine is working well with 16% growth of subscription this quarter. The third message is we are mission-critical, as you saw in the examples to our clients. In fact, in 2025, we are winning significant contracts with many of the top industrial companies across the world, and this is laying the foundation to long-term value creation with cloud and AI. It is these powerful long-term partnerships that give us confidence in our long-term targets. Now before I dive into the specifics of the quarter, a few more things to summarize briefly for you. Our financial results for the quarter were solid with 5% revenue growth and an expanding operating margin, which is up 100 basis points and 10% growth in EPS. Industrial innovation is driving the growth of 9% in the quarter and 8% year-to-date, while MEDIDATA and Centric were softer than expected. As discussed previously, the repositioning of MEDIDATA is ongoing. The change of the model to reduce the dependency on clinical trial activity will take time as we are doubling down on the enterprise and the PLM opportunity in Life Sciences. And for Centric, we're accelerating the SaaS transition. And to this effect, we have promoted a new leadership team, as you heard from Pascal. Now looking at the full year, we adjust our revenue outlook to 4% to 6% ex-FX, in line with our current trajectory of 5% top line growth year-to-date. At the same time, we maintain our EPS growth target of 7% to 10% ex-FX. This is thanks to the strengthening of the operating margin driven by additional efficiencies we are generating in the business. With this in mind, let me take you through the details. In Q3 and year-to-date, total revenue software were both up 5% ex-FX. Recurring revenue was strong, up 9% in the quarter, and it highlights a very solid acceleration when compared with 7% year-to-date. Subscription revenue growth was 16%, and it was driven by new deals signed in the quarter and the increasing visibility from large contracts that are ramping. As a result, subscription revenue now represents almost half of the recurring revenue base. It's up 3 points from last year. And starting in 2026, subscription revenue will surpass maintenance revenue in absolute terms. 3DEXPERIENCE was the growth engine behind that, up 16% in Q3, and the signings of Ford and Apple contributed to the strength in subscription growth. Upfront license revenue declined 13% as our clients continue to adopt the subscription model at an increasing rate. The best proof of this is that recurring revenue now accounts for 84% of the total software revenue year-to-date. The operating margin improved 100 basis points for the quarter and is driving strong EPS growth of 10%, thanks to the productivity gains and cost discipline. In fact, OpEx was up 3.1% in the quarter, and we continue to rebalance resources to support our growth strategy. Now turning to the growth drivers. In Q3, we saw very good 3DEXPERIENCE revenue, and it's now representing 40% of software revenue year-to-date. The growth was broad-based, up 16%. Cloud revenue was 8% in Q3, 7% year-to-date. 3DEXPERIENCE cloud revenue grew 36% in the quarter and 29% year-to-date. The key wins for 3DEXPERIENCE cloud, such as Ford, [indiscernible], Dallara Automobili and Stellantis demonstrate the value of the platform for our clients where transformation is critical as is the need to leverage AI. Now let me review the Q3 actuals versus our objectives briefly. Total revenue came in at EUR 1.461 billion in the quarter, mainly affected by currency headwinds. Excluding currency, growth was 5% at the low end. Operating margin was 30.1% and above the objective to 60 basis points from performance and a negative currency effect of 20 basis points. EPS was EUR 0.29, driven by better operating performance against a small currency headwind. Now looking at the geographies and product lines. The Americas rose 7% in Q3 with good performance in Transportation & Mobility, High Tech and Aerospace & Defense during the quarter. Europe was a bit softer at 4% in Q3 with double-digit growth in Southern Europe, solid performance in France and also Germany. This was supported by subscription momentum, especially in Aerospace & Defense. Asia was up 4%. India had an outstanding quarter. Korea was up double digit. Here again, strong performance of Transportation & Mobility as well as Aerospace & Defense. China experienced softness in Q3, but also on a tough comparison base when looking at last year's number. Now let me review the performance of our product lines. As mentioned previously, Industrial Innovation delivered excellent results in 2025 across key domains led by CATIA, ENOVIA and DELMIA as well as SIMULIA, highlighting the value of the 3DEXPERIENCE platform is delivering to our clients. So it's broad-based across domains. We are mission-critical to the transformation of our clients with superior capabilities to generate virtual twins. Life Sciences growth was lower than expected. It was down minus 3% in the third quarter with MEDIDATA impacted by continued study start declines, but importantly, continuing to gain market share. Overall, from an industry standpoint, the volume business continues to face pressure. When we entered 2025, we had assumed that volumes would stabilize, helping to support our forecasted growth in the second half. Conversely, we observed a decline in high single digits in Phase III studies and mid-single-digit decline across Phase I and Phase II since the beginning of this year. While we are expanding our market share, the impact of the decline in study starts is not yet compensated by the growth from the expansion with our enterprise and mid-market clients who proved resilient. As you heard from Pascal, we had a major MEDIDATA platform win back, the top 25 pharma, AbbVie, after a brief period with a competitor, AbbVie decided to return to MEDIDATA for all clinical trials, leveraging AI everywhere. This validates the trust clients place in us and the value of the MEDIDATA platform. Additionally, in Q3, we expanded partnerships with Sanofi. You see the press release this morning and also expanding our business with IQVIA, including Patient Cloud. Looking at Life Sciences outside of MEDIDATA is the opportunity to win with PLM is our clear priority. For the first 9 months, growth is up double digit, highlighting the strong potential of our portfolio to address the challenges of this industry. Now moving to mainstream innovation. Growth in this segment was mainly driven by SOLIDWORKS, as you heard. The shift to subscription is well underway at SOLIDWORKS. Centric growth was slower than expected in the quarter due to some shifted renewals, and we saw an acceleration in the share of clients adopting the SaaS model. Now turning to cash and the balance sheet IFRS items. Cash and cash equivalents totaled EUR 3.910 billion as of Q3 compared to EUR 3.953 billion at the end of 2024. This decrease of EUR 43 million on a euro basis was driven by a negative currency impact of EUR 269 million. At the end of the quarter, our net cash position totaled EUR 1.321 billion, a decrease of EUR 138 million versus a net cash position of EUR 1.459 billion at the end of last year. Now let's take a look at what drove our cash position at the end of the third quarter year-to-date. We generated EUR 1.334 billion in operating cash flow for the first 9 months versus EUR 1.348 billion last year. The cash conversion from non-IFRS operating income was 97% for the first 9 months. Cash conversion is a top priority, and we expect the conversion to improve going forward. And starting Q1 2026, we expect working capital to support cash conversion reaching the 2024 levels with the potential to improve further. As discussed previously, 2025 operating cash flow is impacted by significant contracts that we signed in the quarter as well as higher payments related to tax and social charges as well as negative FX. For the full year, we now expect operating cash conversion -- for the full year 2025, we now expect operating cash conversion to be in the range of 78% to 80%. To sum up, operating cash flow year-to-date was mainly used for the -- for investments, EUR 581 million, of which EUR 240 million was for acquisitions, EUR 216 million for the purchase of the Centric noncontrolling interest with the remainder of CapEx of EUR 123 million to support our cloud growth. We paid EUR 343 million in dividends and made a net repurchase of treasury shares of EUR 186 million. For any additional information, you will find the operating cash flow reconciliation in our presentation that we published this morning. Now let's transition to our financial objectives for 2025. Net-net, our year-to-date revenue is up 5%. For the full year, we now adjust our revenue outlook to reflect this trajectory and expect growth of 4% to 6% ex-FX for both the total revenue and software revenue versus 6% to 8% previously. In absolute terms, we are adjusting the full year revenue outlook by approximately EUR 140 million to the midpoint. This reflects an impact of EUR 30 million from Q3 and an FX impact of about EUR 20 million. The remaining delta can be explained by 3 factors: a, the lower growth from MEDIDATA in line with the Q3 performance; b, the impact of the SaaS acceleration at Centric; and last but not least, we also factor in an increasing macro volatility with the potential to impact the timing to close large transactions. Please also remember that we had a high comparison base in Q4 of 2024. Now looking forward, the change of model for Centric is on -- sorry, the change of model for MEDIDATA is ongoing. And we are confident as well into the accelerated SaaS transition of Centric given its strong positioning in a very large market and clients are endorsing it. For Industrial Innovation, we have built a very strong foundation in 2025, where we signed significant contracts, and we expect in 2026 to expand on these partnerships, transforming with virtual twins and generative experiences. And last but not least, the SOLIDWORKS momentum is strong. Recurring revenue outlook remains stable. It's at 7% to 8% growth. And underscoring what I said at the beginning, we are implementing a sustainable recurring growth model with increasing visibility. Above all, I mentioned the strength of our operating model, highlighted by the margin improvement. As such, we are maintaining our EPS growth expectation of 7% to 10% growth or EUR 1.31 to EUR 1.35. To achieve this, we expect Q4 OpEx to continue to trend in the same range of Q3, delivering margin expansion of about 100 basis points, which is driven by ongoing productivity initiatives, having the right people at the right place to make it simple. So this is all based on FX assumptions for an average rate for the year of euro to dollar at $1.13 and euro to yen at JPY 166.7. Now briefly on Q4. As you can see, the revenue range of 1% to 8% is fairly large. This is predicated on potential uncertainties in the timing of deal closing, mainly for the upfront license business, while subscription growth of 8% to 12% is solid on a high comparison base. Operating margin is expected in the range of 37.2% to 38% and EPS growth of 7% to 17% ex-FX to hit EUR 0.41 to EUR 0.45 EPS for the quarter, reflecting the ongoing operating leverage. Now as I reflect on the performance so far this year, I want to highlight that our operating model is resilient, and we apply strict financial discipline to support our long-term growth. We occupy a unique leading market position in which that makes us mission-critical today and tomorrow for our clients. Profitable growth and improving cash conversion, as mentioned, is a top priority with clear objectives to show results starting 2026. AI and cloud are 2 main growth drivers. We are confident we will deliver on their ambitious growth targets. We are committed to continue to invest right for innovation, for clients and for shareholder value. Now Pascal and I look forward to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We pause for a brief moment and take questions from participants in the room first. Adam Wood: It's Adam Wood from Morgan Stanley. Maybe just to start off, you finished off even identifying that it is a reasonably large range for the fourth quarter in terms of revenue growth. Could you maybe just talk a little bit about what is in there at the bottom and top end of those ranges in terms of pipeline conversion assumptions on big deal closings? I mean, at the bottom end, are we assuming that none of the big deals close? Just to give us a little bit of a feeling for what's in there and how conservative that bottom end is? And then maybe just secondly, Pascal, you talked about the huge breadth of customer data that you have that you can train models on and use for AI. First of all, could you just talk about how challenged that is where customers are still on-premise? And then how much does that force them and accelerate the shift to cloud with the impact that has on the revenue transition? Rouven Bergmann: Thank you, Adam. I'll take the first question. The -- can you hear me well? Just working with microphone. Yes, there's a wide range on license. The recurring subscription part is fairly consistent compared to our performance year-to-date. I think that's important to note. On the range, the low end of the range is derisked with large transactions. We have a long list of large deals that we have all validated extremely detailed to see where they can fall and the size of those transactions in different scenarios. What I said, given that increasing macro volatility and the timing that -- and the impact on timing of closing this could create, we were prudent to reflect at the low end, a more conservative and prudent perspective of large deal contribution. So the midrange -- the midpoint requires some of those large deals, but we have the potential to do better because our pipeline is strong, but it's depending on the timing of closing of those large deals and the size of those large deals. Pascal Daloz: Coming back to your question about the transition from the on-prem to the cloud and how it is linked with AI. Definitively, AI is accelerating the trend, right? And there are a few reasons for that. One is because no need to wait to have transition everything before to start AI. And the way we do it, we do what we call supplemental. So when you have a large installed base or large deployments of the 3DEXPERIENCE platform on-prem, we come with an instance on the cloud in order to basically enable all this AI new category of services we are developing. And this is really accelerating the trend. And you have seen in the number, it's 36% growth this quarter, the cloud related to 3DEXPERIENCE platform. It's 30% since the beginning of the year. And it's extremely correlated also with the subscriptions acceleration with 16% this quarter. So in a way, this is helping the transition. And if you remember a few years ago, we were convinced the collaboration will be the catalyst for the people to move to the cloud. I think AI is the way to go. Mohammed Moawalla: Rouven, Pascal. Mo from GS. Firstly, just it's encouraging to see on the industrial business, there is pretty good momentum, particularly with Stellantis, Ford. As you look kind of into next year, as we think of some of the headwinds and the tailwinds, how should we think about the kind of growth across the different sort of segments of the business? Because obviously, in mainstream Centric has a transition still to navigate. On the Life Science side, it sounds like kind of visibility is still reasonably low, but the industrial business is ramping. So how should we think about the sort of puts and takes for growth next year? And then secondly, as we think about the Life Science business, have you sort of -- clearly, it's sort of behind plan. How do you think about the kind of strategic sort of view of this business over the medium term? You're willing to kind of write it out? Or is it something that perhaps maybe you need to kind of change the scope of to try to extract more of the growth areas that are probably better positioned? Pascal Daloz: Do you take the first one, Rouven? I'll take the second one. Rouven Bergmann: Okay. In terms of the building blocks more, when we look at the trend of 2025, Industrial Innovation up 8% year-to-date, 9% for the quarter, very much supported by the strong growth in 3DEXPERIENCE adoption. That's a very healthy and sustainable trend. That was always our objective to convert that growth into recurring revenue and subscription growth. As I mentioned that in year-to-date, there is -- and in Q3, there is always good contribution from new deals that we are signing, but also contribution from deals that we have signed in previous quarters that are ramping and are contributing to growth in the current quarter. With many of the significant deals we signed in 2025, this will be the case in 2026. So from an industrial standpoint, manufacturing industries, including for SOLIDWORKS because in SOLIDWORKS momentum is also favoring. I think we are fairly confident in our ability to continue to transform these huge industries. And in a way, many of the deals that we signed are a starting point for what's expected in 2026 and beyond. So without giving you guidance for 2026, but I think from that perspective, the 2025 trends are healthy and stable and sustainable. Related to MEDIDATA, the growth profile, yes, is very much affected by the volume business as we are changing the model to become more enterprise and more sticky by really looking at an enterprise solution to transform life sciences with the objective to generate evidence and outcomes faster for patients. And that's not just in the clinical trial, it's in research, in biology, but also in manufacturing and quality management and the whole life cycle of real-world evidence and trials and patients. So the opportunity is large, and we are making the changes to be in a better position in 2026 now. Now for 2026, I think we want to be cautious on the growth contribution from that part. We're not expecting a decline in 2026 from Life Sciences. I think we are in a better position in 2026 than 2025. That's our starting point. And for Centric, the situation is difficult in 2025, but it will improve in 2026. The SaaS acceleration is imminent. It's already happening as we are speaking, because customers are transitioning faster to the SaaS and cloud solutions than to the on-premise. And we expect around mid-teens growth for this business next year. And if you add all of that, I think we are -- we should enter 2026 with confidence. Of course, the macro standpoint is going to weigh, and we have to assess that. But the building blocks are in place and are shaping. That's the message to you. Pascal Daloz: The second part of your question, Mo, is if we do -- if we consider Life Sciences still being strategic for Dassault Systèmes, right? Ultimately, this is the question you ask. And the answer is yes. And there are a few reasons for this. One, if you look at who are the industry spending the most in research and development, Life Sciences and High-Tech are the 2. In the previous century, it was the auto and aerospace. In this century, they are the 2 spending the most. And if you remember, the core market we serve is really the innovation space, and we are obviously serving the one spending the most in innovation. So from market attractiveness, there is no doubt. The second reason is because we did not diversify in the life sciences only for the purpose to expand or to diversify the market. It was also a way for us to learn new scientific -- at least to develop new scientific foundation. Let me tell you why. If we want to address the sustainability challenge, we need to understand how life is generating life, right? This is -- it seems maybe a little bit far from the day-to-day numbers. But from a scientific standpoint, this is extremely important for us to crack how life is designing things. And my bet is the next generation of generative design will -- from a scientific standpoint, will come from this space. So this is the second reason why this is so important to continue to invest and to crack this sector in a good way. Now the question, what are we doing to change the game? Rouven already answered partially to these questions. The first one is we need to minimize the dependency on the volume of clinical trial. That's obvious because right now, the model is extremely sensitive to this. So when the market is booming, we are getting the full benefit of it. You have seen it during the COVID time and just after the acquisition of MEDIDATA. But when the market is shrinking, basically, you are penalized. And I know every quarter, I'm repeating this, the worst of the worst is, in fact, we are gaining market share. But you have hard time to figure out because you see the number decreasing. In a way, we are reinforcing our position into this space. So the way to do it, there are 2 different axes. One is to be more sticky and less dependent on the number of clinical trials, which is the enterprise approach, which is nothing more than the PLM approach we are applying to the sector. And we see a lot of traction downstream. All the topics which are related to the manufacturing, to the supply chain management, how to accelerate the transfer from the lab to the production system are extremely critical. Why -- the reason why we signed with Sanofi, the extension was they have 12 molecules in their pipelines. They need to basically put on the market in the next 3 years. They want to speed up the ramp-up for the production and to gain almost a year compared to what they used to. And the way to do that is very simple. You do most of the ramp-up production when the molecule is still at the lab level in terms of development. So you do what we do in other industries, except we do it specifically for the life sciences. So this is one axis to be enterprise-wide and to focus on the downstream and basically climb up, if you want, the value chain. The second one is MEDIDATA is a medical platform. The 3DEXPERIENCE platform is an enterprise platform, but MEDIDATA is a medical platform. And if you look at what kind of information we have into the systems, those are the medical insights for right now only the clinical trial and the intent is to expand the usage of this medical platform when the patient, they are under treatment. So this is what we call the patient centricity because there is no reason we cannot follow the patient when the patient is taking the drugs. And we can follow this, we can follow the adverse effect, we can follow -- we can make prescriptions, how to do -- to take the drugs, when it is the appropriate time, right? There are many, many services we could imagine around this way. And this is the strategy we are building around myMedidata. Those are the 2 axes we are using as a way to, if you want, be more sticky and less dependent on the volume of things. Now this is requesting to change the offer, right? And this is what we are doing. In the way we report the number, there is a little bit something which is hidden. In fact, you do not see the traction of the rest of what we do in Life Sciences because in the Life Sciences and Healthcare line, we are only reporting basically MEDIDATA and BIOVIA. But we are selling more and more DELMIA, ENOVIA, SIMULIA and also CATIA and SOLIDWORKS in the med device, and this is reported into the Industrial Innovations. So if you combine all those things, the picture is, in fact, better. Balajee Tirupati: I'll repeat my question. The first question is on MEDIDATA. How are you seeing the dynamics in the U.S. evolving? It would appear that some of the overhangs, regulatory overhangs have been reducing of late. And separately, we have also seen some of the CROs in IQVIA, ICON reporting decent booking numbers of late. So where are you seeing incremental growth headwinds for MEDIDATA coming from? And as we go in 2026, are you seeing a better visibility or some improvement in the decline in starts that we have seen in 2025? Rouven Bergmann: Yes, Balajee, thank you. I think the IQVIA and ICON outlooks were mixed, to be fair. So I don't think that anyone is saying we are yet through the decline in clinical trial activity. For sure, when we just look at clinical trial starts, Balajee, and the public available number that where all pharma companies are reporting their clinical trials that are starting, the numbers are down. And as I mentioned before, for Phase III, they are down significantly, and this is where the lion's share of value is concentrated for a software vendor as well, also for CROs because this is where there's the largest operation and there's -- most of the people are involved, and it is where the lion's share of the value is created. This is what's affecting us. And we have yet, to Pascal's point, to show that we can rebalance that headwind that we are facing from the volume decline with growth by creating a more sticky offering, connecting the dots across the life sciences enterprise to have that growth outweighing the decline just from the volume in terms of number of trials started. This is the challenge that we are facing. This is what we're seeing right now in our numbers reflected of minus 3%. At the same time, when I look just at the segment level from enterprise and mid-market, both parts are growing. But also for those 2 parts, they have less clinical trials in their portfolio than what they were doing in 2019, even before COVID. So we are already rebalancing, right, with our offering and improving our -- increasing our footprint with more value that we are creating for clients for which we are -- that we are able to monetize. But when you then include the pure volume part, still it overweighs and it reduces the growth in this quarter to minus 3%. I think regarding the U.S. regulation, right now, biotech funding is still not great, right? And that's also a reason why there's less trials started in the U.S. and in Europe. But we see an increasing trial activity, for example, in Asia, specifically in China. And that's a market opportunity that we are also addressing, but it's a different market with different economics. And now looking into 2026, it's difficult to predict what trial starts will be in 2026. I think what we should assume at this point is that our mix in 2026 is improving versus 2025 to be in a better position to offset that volatility. And offerings like clinical data studio are an enterprise offering. They are not clinical trial related. And this offering is going very, very well, and we are leading with this offer in the industry. One important part of the AbbVie announcement is the AI everywhere part. So when you are making decisions today as a company to go -- to think 5 years out, AI is at the center. And our AI strategy is resonating very well. And this is a catalyst for 2026. So I'm a bit -- you hear, I'm a bit more optimistic than what we're seeing in 2025, but it's too early to declare victory. Balajee Tirupati: Thanks for very comprehensive answer. If I can have a follow-up question. So following up on the AI debate that we have right now, and I appreciate it is a bit different for vertical software companies. But are you seeing your clients taking a pause in decision-making also on account of trying to understand what -- where the debate moves of software versus foundation model and also as your own 3D UNIV+RSES offering matures. So are customers also weighing decision and taking a pause in decision-making? Pascal Daloz: So it's a very good question. In fact, for many of our large customers, they started the AI initiative 2 years ago, in fact, by doing a lot of by themselves or sometimes partnering with start-ups. After 2 years, they are coming to the conclusion, it's promising, but you need to integrate this foundational model in the way you operate the company. And we are at this point. Let me give you an anecdote. I was with Ford a few weeks ago. And the CIO was telling me he stopped almost all the AI initiatives because now he wants to rationalize. But he want to rationalize in the productive way. He say, obviously, it's a lever for us. We have investigated many use cases. Now we need to focus on the one being more promising. And usually, the way to do this is very simple. You look at the moonshot, the one really changing the game. If you focus AI on the things which are making some improvement in what you do, you will never have your payback because AI is costly. However, if you focus on things you cannot do or you can do with a very different level of efficiency, the payback is there. And we are really at this stage. So for us, I will say it's driving against the adoption of the platform as the data lake. They are building more and more on the foundation because there is no need to redo the job. We have already done it. And more importantly, it's already integrating in everything they do. Because at the end, if you want to design the car, you still need CATIA. The fact that CATIA is driven by an AI engine is one thing, but you still need CATIA to produce the model, to produce the geometry, to produce basically the instruction for the shop floor. This is really where we are game changer. And this is extremely difficult to do without having our foundation, in fact. So to come back to your questions, I think, yes, there is a pause in a way people are doing less experiment -- but now they are taking the decision to focus on the core use cases, which are really productive and making the moonshot, I call it the moonshot, I mean, having a significant lever on the efficiency or opening new avenue. For example, this is what we are seeing in the material science. There are certain things you cannot do if you do not have an AI engine to do that. We are at this crossroad, but we are much more benefiting from this than something else. Charles Brennan: It's Charlie Brennan here from Jefferies. Apologies, 3 questions for me. Firstly, I'm struggling to match the narrative on to the actual numbers. You're attributing the weakness in the quarter to MEDIDATA and Centric, but MEDIDATA is a recurring revenue business and recurring revenues actually beat expectations. Centric is partially a license business, but it doesn't feel big enough to account for the size of the license decline. Is there anything else going on there, maybe a change in revenue allocation between the 2 lines? Or what else went wrong in the quarter to justify the shape of the numbers? Secondly, I'm hearing accelerating subscription as one of the themes coming across -- is that just Centric? Or is it more broad than that? And traditionally, it's tough to accelerate growth when you're moving to subscription. Do we need to think about a phase in '26 and '27 with accelerating license declines? And do we have to think about that in the shape of growth going forward? And then thirdly, I should probably sneak one in on cash flow. 84% conversion in 2026 is a surprisingly precise guide given the recent track record on cash flow. Are you confident that, that takes account of all of the working capital terms on deals that you're going to sign in 2026? Or is there scope for payment terms on deals in '26 to disrupt that 84% cash conversion? Rouven Bergmann: Okay. Thanks, Charlie, for the questions. Let's start -- go through this one by one. On the quarter, there's nothing else than what I outlined. I don't know where the disconnect is, but maybe I just reiterate it in simple form. Yes, MEDIDATA is a recurring business, but it also has a volume aspect of clinical trials that are starting and ending in a way they are not recurring, right? I think we were always clear about that. There's a subscription part where we contract over a period of time. And then there are studies that are starting and ending, and there is volatility to that. Charles Brennan: [indiscernible] Rouven Bergmann: Of course. But when studies are ending, they stop recognizing revenue. So there's a lot of studies ending. There's new studies are starting. If you're down minus 3% in a quarter on EUR 250 million, you can do the math in terms of how many this is, but there's a number of trials. We are running thousands of trials, Charlie. So in a market, as Pascal said, where the volume is stable, right, where we can gain growth through market share expansions, it's a solid generator of growth. And this has been the model of MEDIDATA for a long time. Now today, the volume part or the consumption business, you might say, represents about 30% of the overall business. And that business is down high single digits. And that's impacting the quarter, high single digit to low double digit for that volume business. Now it's offset by the increase in subscription contracts from deals that we are expanding and winning in the market. So that's to the MEDIDATA part. There is no magic to that other than this. On the subscription acceleration, as I said in my remarks, it's twofold. It's deals that we are signing in the quarter and ramps that are contributing to the growth from deals that we have signed in previous quarters. We are transitioning our installed base to cloud. But in many cases, it's not a 100% transition. In the case that Pascal mentioned in his -- in the presentation, the company, Stellantis, that's 100% for that part, right? It's not contributing to subscription this quarter. It will contribute over the period of time. But we have other deals where we have on-prem and cloud hybrid deals where there is a portion in the license subscription and a portion in the cloud subscription. And that has a higher impact on the in-quarter revenue in the subscription line. But it's still recurring and it's building over time. And this high structure of deals helps us to get away from the subscription license where the upfront portion is most significant and helps us to spread revenue more equally over time to create a more recurring base. And of course, when you look at our subscription on a quarter-to-quarter basis, it's -- I know where you're coming from, it's not sequentially up every quarter because of the on-premise part of subscription, which we well understand that depending on the start time of renewal or renewal dates, there is a fluctuation from quarter-to-quarter on our subscription business. You can go back years and you can see that. So rounding up the point, there is a contribution from deal signing in the quarter that are hybrid, where we have on-premise and cloud portion, where the cloud is over time and on-premise has more of a point-in-time impact. And then we are seeing ramping deals from deals that we have signed before. So also here, there's no impact from -- for the Centric part -- for the multiyear deals of Centric that we have recognized over the last quarters and last year specifically and before, that revenue is part of upfront license because it's a license subscription where you upfront revenue and it impacts the license part. So that's not driving the subscription business, Charlie. But going forward, as we are transitioning this business more to an ARR model to a SaaS model, it will support the subscription growth. And that's the whole point of what we are doing. From a cash flow perspective, Well, I think 2024 is an outlier in terms of several effects that we are facing related to tax impacts, social charges that are higher compared to 2024. That is all going to be in our base in 2025 compared to 2026. So we don't have those onetime effects any longer. At least they are not foreseeable at this point in time. And as it relates to the ramping deals that I talked about on the subscription line, they will generate significant higher cash in 2026 than in 2025. I have that level of visibility. Now that's the baseline for the assumption to be back at the 2024 levels. Now is there a possible variability? Yes. But the baseline assumption is the 2024 performance. Pascal Daloz: Maybe one additional comment I should make. Charlie, there is no trick. I think my commitment is very simple. I want to continue to gain market share in all the industry we serve. And I think quarter after quarter, I can -- I hope I'm proving to you that this is what we do, including in sector where it's extremely competitive. And the second thing is we are accelerating the transition to subscription and to the cloud. That's what we do. So my view, we are doing the right things. It's the appropriate time. Against, we were pushing this for a few years ago, but the market was not ready in our space for the cloud. Now it is, they are. And if you remember, the subscription used to be 1/3 of the recurring revenue 3, 4 years ago. Now it's 50%. And we are on a path in the next 3 years to be almost 2/3 of the recurrent part of the revenue. So I think we are walking the talk. That's what the commitment to do. This is what we are doing. We are redirecting the deal. And I think at the end, the numbers are reflecting this extremely, I mean, transparently, Charlie. Operator: We have an online question coming from the line of Laurent Daure at Kepler Cheuvreux. Laurent Daure: Yes. I have 3 quick questions. The first, if you could elaborate a little bit giving us an update on your pipeline of large deals by maybe verticals and your discussions with those clients, the long sales cycle, is it just the macro? Or is there anything else on the discussion you have with them? My second question is if you could give us a bit more color on the change in management at Centric and also on the 15% growth you're expecting for next year, the visibility you have on that, given that you will continue to move subscription? And my final question is, when you refer to a couple of years to rebalance the Life Science business, do you see a risk that maybe for 2 or 3 years that this business end up being kind of flattish? Pascal Daloz: Okay. So Laurent, I will take it, and Rouven, feel free to add whatever you want at the end. So the pipeline coverage is 2x, which is good. For Q4, usually, this is where we are. So -- and it's relatively balanced between the large deals and, let's say, the midsized deals, which is also important because when you have too much on the large deals, this is sometimes difficult to manage. In terms of industry contribution, it is relatively consistent with Q3. So you still have a fraction which is transportation and mobility centric. We have a large part also coming from aerospace and defense. And we also have a good visibility on industrial equipment. So that's for the core industry. And again, we -- the pipeline coverage is definitively not the topic. What we observe, and we have been explicit about this, sometimes 1 or 2 big transactions can shift from one quarter to another one, independently of us. And that's what Rouven is mentioning when he says the volatile geopolitic is basically putting some volatility on the time to close. But it's only a question of time to close. It's not a question related to the pipeline. Coming back to the Centric management change. In fact, it's very simple. You know Chris is turning 70. Chris, the founder of Centric, turning 70. For a few years, he was preparing Fabrice Canonge to be -- to take the positions. So we say it's the right time. We completed the acquisition of the remaining piece of Centric. So from basically a timing standpoint, it was appropriate to make the changes right now. And as part of the new setup, the new leadership, we have put this transition to the cloud as one of the objectives for the team and the EUR 1 billion threshold, which is the size of this business we want to achieve in the coming years, also one of the objectives for this new team. The last thing is related to Centric performance for next year. Rouven Bergmann: Life Sciences, the next 2 to 3 years. What is our expectations, the rebalancing of Life Science. Pascal Daloz: The rebalancing is already happening again. So except -- and this is what I was telling you, we are reporting in a line which is not making it visible for you. So probably something we need to change for you to have a visibility to understand how the momentum is going in order to basically balance between the volume-based business versus the enterprise-based business in Life Sciences. Now if we step back a little bit, I think the booking growth is good for Centric -- for MEDIDATA. So the topic is not the booking, it has to accelerate, obviously. But it's against this termination of studies and not having a new one starting again, which is the topic. I do expect we are reaching the bottom, frankly speaking. I told you this last year, I remember. And again, it was not -- it was based on facts because we were tracking all the pipelines. The way we do this, we look at how many Phase I, how many Phase IIs. We make some assumption about the move from one to another one. And this is how we are computing, if you want, the potential new studies starting every year. Now there is a big change, and you highlight it. We see Asia contributing to the trend, especially China, right, which was not the case in the past. And we were relatively dependent, as you say, on the U.S. dynamic for the creation or at least the most promising molecules coming on the market for the Phase III. Now we see basically this being much more balanced between the different continents. And this is also giving hope for me because we see -- and if you track it, we are seeing a lot of investment in the biotech in China, but also in Korea as well, Japan as well. So I do believe if we combine the 2 together, we will be in a much better situation. And Centric because that was also the question. Again, we have this massive renewal last year. That's the reason why we have the base effect this year. And if you combine this with the fact that we want to accelerate, I want to accelerate the transition to the cloud and the SaaS business model, this is creating the gap. But this basically, in 2026, we will be in a much better situation because we will not have the base coming from the big renewal. Anyway, the trend and the acceleration of the cloud is already happening. So that's the confidence I can share with you. Operator: Our next question comes from Frederic Boulan at Bank of America. Frederic Boulan: I've got 2 and a short clarification. Firstly, around AI, if you can spend a minute on your commercial model of the offering you've presented, any kind of attach rate you foresee on a midterm view? Second, coming back on the free cash flow side and your 84% conversion from next year. Any specific moving parts or action plans you want to call out to underpin your confidence in free cash flow acceleration? And then short clarification on MEDIDATA, can you confirm the comment you made on expect similar growth or similar revenue decline? Is this a comment about Q4 versus Q3 level of minus 3%? Pascal Daloz: So Rouven, I take the first one. For the cash flow. So the way it works for the AI new category of solutions is very simple. You remember the portfolio is structured around role, processes and solutions. So in front of the role, we have the virtual companions and the virtual companions are there to advance the role and to extend the roles. The generative experiences are there to basically automate the processes. And the solutions ultimately is what we want to do with the virtual twin as a service. So keep this in mind for the purpose of the clarity. Now how do we price each of them? The virtual companion is priced on a fraction of the cost of the people we are either augmenting it or basically substituting sometimes. That's how we price. For the generative processes, the generative experiences, it's a usage-based model. So it's a token base like many companies do. And why so? Because I really want to ease the adoption and to accelerate the adoption with this consumption model. And it's something we master relatively well because it's almost the same approach we have for simulation for a long time, right? And for the virtual twin as a services, it's an outcome-based model because at the end, you are not selling any more the tools, you are selling basically the end result of what the tool is producing. So it will be an outcome-based model. Now from an attach rate standpoint, it's still a little bit early because we came on the market with this. But we could expect that for many roles you have in the market being used right now, you will have an extension with the virtual companions for sure. You could expect that for processes, which are the most complex one, the generative experiences will be a way to accelerate significantly the time to market and the efficiency. This is true for the design. This is true for the manufacturing. This is also true for the compliance, as I was highlighting it. And virtual twin as a service, it's something we do specifically in the new industry because they are not equipped. Usually, they do not have all the skills, and we are gaining a lot of time by doing so. One example of what I'm saying -- in the Life Sciences, when we are speaking about the manufacturing systems and the production systems, more and more, we go straight with the virtual twin as a service, which is an easy way for us to deploy our solutions and to reduce the time for the adoption. That's how we are basically pricing and how we are planning. And you remember what Rouven say, say the contribution of those new category of solutions, we are expecting EUR 0.5 billion in the coming plan, which is ending in 2029. Rouven Bergmann: Okay. Thank you, Frederic. I'll go through the cash flow question. Regarding the 84%, what are the kind of puts and takes and level of visibility and action items that we have underway. I think first, important to mention is we have a certain level of visibility from large contracts that we have signed where there are clear payment terms that are going to drive cash in 2026, early 2026. So that gives us a clear perspective on the puts and takes between '25 and '26, which I call the timing effect that we had. So that's one part. We also have some other nonrecurring payments in 2025 that will not recur in 2026. We also have visibility to this. Now above that, -- when I look at our DSO and the impact of the DSO in context what we just discussed on Centric. Centric has been a big driver of the increase in DSO or has contributed to the increase in DSO, I should better say. And now as we are moving to a recurring model, we will see the benefit of that also in terms of better aligning revenue and cash. So the conversion from that perspective should also will benefit from this change that we have decided. And then the last point is we are applying strict discipline on cash management, and that will have an impact also in 2026, and I already see that happening in 2025. The last point regarding the MEDIDATA comment, yes, this was related to Q4. So the trend of Q3 to be expected similar in Q4 2025. Pascal Daloz: So this is concluding this morning's session. So thank you very much for the one being there with us in London and for the people being connected. Look forward to seeing you on the road, either Rouven or myself, we will do some roadshow in the coming weeks. And see you no later than early next year. Thank you very much.
Jutta Mikkola: Hello, everyone, and welcome to Stora Enso's Third Quarter Results Presentation. I'm Jutta Mikkola, Head of Investor Relations, and I'm joined today by Hans Sohlstrom, our President and CEO; and Niclas Rosenlew, our CFO. The theme for today is good progress in a challenging market environment, which indeed we have done. We'll start with Hans, who will walk us through the key highlights and strategic focus areas. After that, Niclas will take you through the financial performance, and we'll wrap it up with the main takeaways and key focus for the rest of the year '25. Once we are done, we'll open the floor for your questions. Thank you for being here with us today. Hans, over to you. Hans Sohlstrom: Thank you, Jutta. In the third quarter of 2025, despite ongoing challenging markets and subdued demand, we remain focused on the areas within our control, driving progress where it matters most. However, before looking more closely at the third quarter highlights, I would like to announce changes in Stora Enso's Group leadership team. Micaela Thorstrom has been appointed Executive Vice President, People and Legal, General Counsel, as of 1st of January 2026. Micaela has been part of our group leadership team since 2023, serving as Executive Vice President, Legal and General Counsel. Furthermore, Niclas Rosenlew, our Chief Financial Officer, will assume additional responsibilities and represent the Communication and Brand organizations on top of his current duties. I want to congratulate both Micaela and Niclas for their new and extended roles. Then we are ready to look more closely at the quarterly highlights. We have taken important steps to build a stronger and more competitive Stora Enso. A major milestone in the quarter was the completion of the divestment of approximately 175,000 hectares of forest land in Sweden, representing 12.4% of our total forest holdings in Sweden. The transaction with an enterprise value of SEK 9.8 billion, equivalent to approximately EUR 900 million and in line with forest book value, strengthens our balance sheet and improves our financial flexibility. The deal includes a long-term wood supply agreement to Stora Enso. This strengthens our cash flow and reduces net debt, which is a key priority for us. We also made progress on the strategic review of our remaining 1.2 million hectares of Swedish forest, including the assessment of a potential demerger and public listing. This review is central to unlocking further value for our shareholders, as well as strengthening our growth and business focus in both forest and renewable packaging businesses. We'll share updates as that process moves forward, aiming at Capital Markets Day later this year on November 25. On profitability, we continue to act proactively to improve margins. These measures are essential as we navigate challenging market conditions and subdued consumer sentiment. Adjusted EBIT for the quarter was EUR 126 million. Excluding the EUR 45 million impact from the Oulu consumer board ramp-up, profitability would have been comparable to the same quarter last year, reflecting a stable underlying performance despite persistent market headwinds. And finally, on sustainability, we launched a science-based framework together with IUCN to advance nature-positive forestry practices. This is an important step towards our long-term environmental goals. As we all know, market conditions have been challenging. Therefore, we have intensified our actions to improve profitability. But it's important to emphasize that these efforts are not new. We have been acting on these priorities for a good while now. Since 2023, we have been very clear on our strategic focus; improving profitability, driving performance and shaping the portfolio for long-term strength. This has been our new way of working proactive, not reactive, so we can stay ahead of market turbulence and rapidly changing global trends. On fixed cost reduction, we launched significant cost-saving programs in 2023 and 2024, totaling over EUR 230 million of savings. These include structural efficiency measures, site closures and divestiture across business areas and the group. Operational efficiency has been another key focus. We have implemented FTE reductions, cut external spend and driven value creation initiative across the whole company to streamline processes. Building a strong performance culture has been critical. More than 4,000 improvement measures have been identified with around 800 initiative team leaders, meaning that thousands of our employees are actively driving continuous improvement and cost savings initiatives across the company every day. We have also strengthened cash flow and working capital discipline, reducing operating working capital by about EUR 700 million and improving cash flow from operations. Going forward, we remain committed to disciplined capital allocation. Finally, on portfolio actions. On top of earlier closures and divestments, we completed the sale of 12.4% of our Swedish forest assets and continue the strategic review of the remaining assets in Sweden. At the same time, we are ramping up Oulu consumer board line and De Lier corrugated site to secure cost efficiency and competitiveness. This approach gives us resilience and flexibility. By acting early and decisively, we have not just reacted to market challenges, we are shaping our future and positioning Stora Enso to thrive in a rapidly changing world. And with that, let me give you an update on the Oulu consumer board line ramp-up. Stora Enso's new consumer packaging board line at the Oulu site in Finland has entered the production ramp-up phase earlier this year. While the project remains on track in terms of its original time line and the EUR 1 billion budget, the ramp-up process has progressed slower than initially anticipated, resulting in production volumes somewhat behind the original schedule. Nevertheless, we remain focused on reaching EBITDA breakeven by the end of 2025, which continues to be an achievable target. However, due to the slower-than-expected ramp-up, the EBIT impact for Q4 is now projected to be higher than previously anticipated, estimated at about EUR 15 million to EUR 35 million. Consequently, the full-year EBIT impact is expected to be in the range of EUR 120 million to EUR 140 million. It is important to emphasize that the Oulu investment is a long-term strategic move that will deliver substantial value for Stora Enso over time. This transformation of the Oulu site into a state-of-the-art consumer board production facility is a cornerstone of our strategy to lead in renewable packaging. This investment is not just about near-term volumes, it is about building a competitive platform for the next decade and beyond. As the ramp-up continues, we remain confident that Oulu will become a key driver of profitable cost competitive growth and a benchmark for sustainable packaging innovation. This year, we have seen some remarkable recognition for our design and innovation. Winning the Red Dot Design Awards 2025 underscores our ability to combine aesthetics, functionality and sustainability in everything we create. Our craftsmanship was showcased on the global stage at the World Ski Championships where we designed official medal boxes crafted from renewable materials, fully recyclable and even featuring braille for accessibility. This is not the first time we have been recognized by Red Dot. Earlier this year, we also received the award for our collaboration with Marimekko on a scalable, recyclable gift packaging portfolio. One of the most exciting milestones is our contribution to Atlassian Central in Sydney. Once completed, it will be the world's tallest hybrid timber tower, and the heart of this achievement is massive timber solutions. It's a powerful demonstration of how engineered wood can transform urban skylines while reducing carbon emissions. Closer to home, October brought us the Finlandia Prize for Architecture for our new headquarters at Katajanokan Laituri in Helsinki. This award celebrates not only architectural excellence, but also our leadership in sustainable building practices. Together, these achievements highlights how innovation and responsibility go hand-in-hand in shaping the future of construction. That concludes our review of the key highlights for the quarter. And I'll hand over now to Niclas, who will take you through our financial performance. Niclas Rosenlew: Thank you, Hans, and hello, everyone. During the third quarter, as Hans already mentioned, our own actions resulted in good progress in a market with subdued demand and low consumer confidence. Delivery volumes were relatively low, particularly in containerboard and biomaterials. Sales increased by 1% to EUR 2.3 billion, mainly due to the contribution of the Junnikkala acquisition and the consumer board line ramp-up at the Oulu site. While market conditions continues to be volatile with low demand, we focused on the areas within our control. On that note, adjusted EBIT for the quarter was EUR 126 million. And as Hans mentioned, excluding the EUR 45 million impact from the Oulu ramp-up, profitability would have been comparable to the same quarter last year, reflecting a stable underlying performance despite persistent market headwinds. This we can see clearly when looking more closely at the EBIT bridge for Q3. Overall, adjusted EBIT decreased by EUR 49 million compared to last year, primarily due to the ramp-up of the new line in Oulu. As said, Oulu had a negative impact of EUR 45 million. In the other bar, where you can see the Oulu impact, you can also see the absence of a EUR 10 million insurance compensation that was received last year in the Wood Products segment, along with some other smaller movements. Looking at the other components, the picture is relatively stable. Given how volatile the markets have been, we are quite pleased with this, as it reflects the result of disciplined execution of our strategy and profit improvement actions. Price/mix contributed positively with EUR 12 million, partly offset by a smaller negative impact from lower volumes. Variable costs were flat as higher fiber costs were offset by lower energy and chemical costs. Fixed costs decreased by EUR 30 million, driven by strong cost control and lower maintenance compared to last year. And FX had a negative impact of EUR 20 million. If we then turn the focus to cash flow, despite the challenging market environment, we managed to safeguard profitability and improve cash generation. Cash flow after investing activities turned positive as expected, following the gradual completion of the investment phase in Oulu. I want to note that in this picture, which shows the operational cash flow after investing activities, the proceeds from the Swedish forest divestment, so the 12% divestment are not included. These proceeds were received in Q3, but they are recorded further down in the cash flow statement under divestments. And on that note, let's take a look at the net debt. Net debt decreased by almost EUR 800 million to EUR 3.2 billion during the third quarter, reflecting the positive impact of the forest asset divestment. The ratio of net debt to the last 12 months adjusted EBITDA is now at 2.7x after being above 3 for most of the past 2 years. As the intensive strategic CapEx phase of the last 2 years nears finalization and profitability gradually improves, net debt levels and the ratio are expected to improve further. Operating working capital to sales was around 8%. That is at similar levels to the last few quarters. We intend to keep operating working capital at these lower levels and decrease it when possible. So, let's move on to the segment performance. Starting with Packaging Materials, where we continue to implement value creation actions during the quarter to mitigate the impact of the challenging market conditions. Sales declined mainly due to slightly lower consumer board prices and adverse currency effects from a weaker U.S. dollar. Adjusted EBIT decreased year-on-year by EUR 37 million, primarily due to the adverse impact coming from the Oulu ramp-up. In addition, fiber costs remained high and logistics expenses and trade tariffs increased, adding further pressure on profitability. These headwinds were, as said, partly offset by value creation initiatives. As order inflow weakened further during the quarter, we continued to manage capacity and cost levels in line with demand. In Packaging Solutions, we had a similar development, with market headwinds being offset by own actions. Sales increased slightly, with improved product mix offsetting a small decline in volumes. Adjusted EBIT increased year-on-year, supported by higher sales and improved margins driven by value creation initiatives. Despite persistent overcapacity, actions to enhance product and customer mix, combined with continuous cost efficiency improvements helped protect margins. So moving from packaging to Biomaterials. In Biomaterials, market conditions stabilized at low levels during the third quarter. Demand for hardwood pulp strengthened in both Europe and China, while softwood pulp demand in Europe remained weak. Sales decreased driven by lower prices and adverse currency movements, somewhat offset by higher volumes. Adjusted EBIT decreased year-on-year, primarily due to lower prices, but as said, stabilized at low levels. Cost reduction measures also helped mitigate part of the negative market impact. If we then move on to Wood Products, protecting margins has been a key priority mitigating the increase in raw material costs. Sales increased, driven mainly by higher prices and stronger volumes for sawn wood. However, EBIT declined, primarily due to increased sawlog costs in Central Europe and the absence of last year's EUR 10 million insurance compensation, which affects comparability. That said, price increases and value creation initiatives helped cushion the impact and protect margins. The construction market remained weak overall, but we did see improved demand for both traditional wood products and building solutions compared to the previous year. In Forest, sales increased, driven mainly by higher volumes and wood prices. However, EBIT declined slightly due to slightly higher costs. So in sum, Forest continued its stable and strong performance. I'll now hand it back to you, Hans, for the key takeaways and our focus for 2025. Hans Sohlstrom: Thank you, Niclas. Today, we have focused on profit, performance and portfolio, 3 pillars that guide our actions as we navigate a challenging market and position Stora Enso for long-term success and improved profitability. Profitability and cash flow remain top priorities, supported by company-wide initiatives in sourcing, operational efficiency, commercial excellence and cost optimization to ensure resilience and agility. We are finalizing the strategic review of our Swedish forest assets, including evaluating a potential separation and public listing to unlock value and sharpen our focus on core businesses. At the same time, we are ramping up production and leveraging the EUR 1 billion investment in new packaging board line at our integrated mill in Oulu, Finland, strengthening our competitive position in renewable packaging and advancing our ambition to lead in sustainable solutions. These actions are critical steps towards delivering shareholder value and navigating in tough markets. We look forward to sharing more at Capital Markets Day on the 25th of November in London. Thank you for listening. And we are now ready to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question will come from Cole Hathorn with Jefferies. Cole Hathorn: Could I start with the cost positioning that you -- well, the improved costs in the Biomaterials and Packaging Materials division. The cost per tonne has come down. You talk about efficiencies. Are we right to assume that this is your internal actions that have supported the lower cost per tonne rather than lower pulpwood or wood costs feeding through into the business sooner? So that's just the first question, if it's internal actions. The second one is around the Packaging Materials business and particularly consumer board. We've got a lot of oversupply in the market. And I'm just wondering how Stora Enso is thinking about that strategically. You are the market leader. How do you think about improving operating rates as you ramp up Oulu versus the price dynamics of the market? Are you still considering, or are you evaluating capacity out in the industry? Hans Sohlstrom: Yes. Thank you very much, Cole. So first of all, about the cost improvement actions, they are internal actions throughout the whole company. And we have started this very proactive systematic work on reducing our cost base, both variable as well as fixed cost since 2 years back. We are going to give some updates about this in the CMD on the 25th of November, some tangible examples of the way we are working, but it's significant cost reduction results throughout the whole company. And this is not a project. This is our new way of working. This is a continuous improvement work. It's our new culture where basically we have identified over 4,000 profit improvement actions throughout the whole company in every unit, every middle, every single part of the organization. And we have 800 project initiative team leaders working on these. So, we have thousands of people actually actively working on cost improvement actions and profit improvement initiatives as we speak. It's not a project. It's our new culture, and it's a continuous way of working. When it comes to your question, Cole, about consumer board, we know that there is in Europe alone, 1 million tonne of higher cost consumer board capacity than our most expensive, most highest cost line. We also know that we have in consumer board, the most cost-efficient capacities in Europe today. So currently, we don't have any plans to consolidate or close capacity. I'm sure there is considerations in our industry for those who have negative cash flow, for instance. Cole Hathorn: Then maybe just as a follow-up. I'd like some color on what are you seeing from a demand and order book perspective? And could you give some color between containerboard? And then within consumer board, what you're seeing the difference in kind of the traditional folding boxboard as well as your liquid packaging? Hans Sohlstrom: Yes. So first of all, year-to-date, we have increased our top line by 5%. So, we are growing as a company. And also in the last quarter where demand was rather subdued, we grew 1% and we are quite determined to continue growth. We have invested in growth in the Oulu consumer board line, as well as also we have the De Jong corrugated site, which is in a ramp-up phase still. So, thanks to earlier investments, we have cost competitive state-of-the-art capacity that we are ramping up in order to ensure also continued growth for the future. And when it comes to consumer board versus containerboard, I would say that our operating rates in containerboard are quite high. And as you also know, from a global supply and demand perspective, especially kraftliner, which is our strength, our core area in containerboard, that is actually a market where the global supply and demand situation is the best. The market is the tightest. And when it comes to consumer board, we have very cost-efficient, high-quality capacity that we are currently utilizing and then also ramping up in Oulu. Operator: Our next question will come from Andres Castanos with Berenberg. Andres Castanos-Mollor: Can you please help me understand why did you book a gain of EUR 140 million with the forest asset sale, if this was a sale that was done in line with book value? And also, what is your current view about the deferred tax liabilities associated to the historical appreciation of the assets that you sold? What will be the treatment in your view? Niclas Rosenlew: Sure. And it is a bit of a complex accounting issue, but the sale of the 12% was in line with book value. And there was a portion in the book value, which is deferred tax liabilities. As you said, the sale was tax-free according to local tax rules. We sold the company, not the assets. And therefore, from an accounting perspective, we then kind of canceled the deferred tax liability and that portion was then going into the P&L. So it's more of an accounting technical topic. Operator: Our next question will come from Charlie Muir-Sands with BNP Paribas Exane. Charlie Muir-Sands: There's been quite a lot of talk in the industry about falling pulpwood prices and some mixed messaging around log pricing. I just wondered what you're seeing specifically yourselves at the moment and how soon you would anticipate it manifesting, in your opinion, if there are movements? Secondly, I appreciate you're going to give us an update on the possible forest spin-off at the Capital Markets Day. But can you share any early thoughts on what you see as the relative pros and cons of making such a transaction? And then just on De Lier finally. The ramp-up there, you haven't quantified what the profit drag is unlike Oulu. I wondered if you could put any numbers around that? And also, is the constraint for the De Lier ramp-up technical? Or is it that it is constrained by market demand conditions? Hans Sohlstrom: Thank you very much, Charlie. So first of all, wood costs have come down in the Nordics, both in Finland and Sweden since the peak in the summer. However, before they are visible in our P&L, there is a time lag. And actually, in the beginning, there is a negative impact because the inventory values of our wood inventories comes down. But there will be with a time lag of a few months, there will be, of course, a positive impact of lower wood costs in the Nordics. Concerning the forest, the Swedish forest spin-off, 1.2 million hectares in total. I would say that the clear plus is -- and that's also one of the main objectives, shareholder value creation. I mean, we clearly see that now after the sales of 12% of our Swedish forest land, the total value of all our forest holdings is EUR 10.50 per share. And the whole idea here is to unlock value for our shareholders, as well as also being able to focus on the very different businesses of creating value and profits in a forest business, as well as creating value and profits in industrial activities, renewable packaging and biomaterials businesses. Regarding the De Lier markup, the bottleneck is the market. So it's demand. We are gradually increasing volumes there. But of course, in an oversupplied market, it takes time. Charlie Muir-Sands: Got it. So far, you've not identified any cons in terms of the possible price spinoff. Hans Sohlstrom: Can you think about any, Niclas? Niclas Rosenlew: I can't immediately at least. We'll think about it. Operator: Our next question will come from Pallav Mittal with Barclays. Hans Sohlstrom: Very quiet. Maybe we take the next question then. Operator: Our next question will come from Andrew Jones with UBS. Andrew Jones: Can you hear me okay? Hans Sohlstrom: Yes. Andrew Jones: Excellent. A few of my questions have already been answered, but just a bit of color on 4Q first of all. You mentioned that the fixed costs were down EUR 38 million in 3Q, mainly on seasonality. I'm curious like how much of that should come back in 4Q? And taken together all the other moving parts on costs, I'm guessing that the wood costs don't make that much of a difference in the 4Q given the lag. But can you talk us through like wood, energy, some of the other moving parts as to how you see costs evolving into the fourth quarter? And then separately, I've just got a question on FBB sales to the U.S. I mean, is that profitable now? Like how should we think about margins on sales there? Have you changed your sales mix as a result of the tariffs and the currency moves? Like how are you looking at the different markets for your boxboard at the moment? Niclas Rosenlew: All right. Andrew, I'll take the first one. So fixed costs, very much as we said and we've said before, I mean, we are working a lot on cost scrutiny. And this is nothing new. We've been on it for some time, but there's still a lot to do. So, not commenting specifically now on Q4, but even kind of further out. And that absolutely will continue. Specifically in Q4, we continue with the normal maintenance. Maintenance stops should be roughly similar cost to Q3. And then on wood cost specifically, very much, as Hans said, we have seen some downward trend. And now we talk about the Nordics, Finland, Sweden. It's different in Central Europe. But again, very much as Hans said, it comes with a delay and we talk about a quarter or 2 or so. When it first goes into the inventory valuation, inventory value actually goes down. It has a slight negative impact on the short-term result. But then, of course, over time, it should start to help the result. So in that sense, it takes a while and don't expect any major impact or positive impact in Q4. Well, I mean, logistics has gone up a bit, chemicals down a bit, energy down a bit. So it's a bit more of a mixed bag. Andrew Jones: So flattish sounds like the interpretation. Niclas Rosenlew: Flattish, yes. Well, again, not commenting specifically on Q4, but more what we've seen up until now and in Q3. Hans Sohlstrom: And when it comes, Andrew, to your question about folded boxboard and the U.S.A., I mean, we have been increasing prices in folded boxboard sales to the U.S. We have been able to compensate a clear majority of the 15% import duty. But on the other hand, of course, also, as we know, during this year, the U.S. dollar has weakened against the euro quite significantly. We are making positive margins on our business to the U.S., but very thin margins. That's where we are today. However, having said that, I do want to underline that if you consider our packaging materials, our board grades, our main board grades, so consumer board various grades as well as kraftliner and then I exclude recycled fiber-based testliner because that's a very local business. But if you look at consumer board and kraftliner, it's good to remember that the U.S.A. is a 4 million tonne net exporter around the world of these products. So if profitability of sales to the U.S. is challenged, there are also other opportunities around the globe to develop businesses. So, I think one of my favorite sayings is that every challenge is an opportunity. You need to also find the new businesses and the new opportunities, but we have not given up on the U.S. We continue to develop our business there. But of course, in order to improve margins, we need to increase prices further. Operator: Our next question will come from Linus Larsson with SEB. Linus Larsson: First, just to double check here, so we're not missing anything on Biomaterials. It was sequentially somewhat better in the third quarter, although prices were lower and I think your volumes were lower as well. So if you could just maybe elaborate just a little bit about what happened in the third quarter? I think we may have touched on part of it already. And just to make sure that we're not missing anything, any benefits which might not be there in the fourth quarter, please? Niclas Rosenlew: Yes, I'll start at least, Linus. And I mean, what we saw in Q3 was a stabilization at low levels and so stabilization. So, I would say no major movements there, volume, price that I can think of at least in terms of what to miss now going forward. Hans Sohlstrom: If I can build on that, Linus, so I think it's important when you consider our Biomaterials business. So, our market pulp business, we have -- the majority is cost-efficient eucalyptus from Veracel and Montes del Plata, as you know very well. And they are among the world's most cost-efficient pulp mills in the first quartile when you take, for instance, Safra's cost competitive -- cost capacity competitiveness considerations. So, great cash machines in every situation. And then the market pulp mills we have in the Nordics, so Skutskar in Sweden and Enocell in Finland. They are producing specialized niche pulps. So Skutskar, the majority is fluff pulp, where we are clearly the largest producer in Europe. Most of the fluff pulp in Europe is imported from the U.S.A. So it's a specialty pulp grade. And also in Enocell, we are gradually increasing the amount of specialized pulp grades, among others, unbleached kraft pulp for electrotechnical end uses and other special niches where you can get a better price compared to the volume grades. So, that perhaps also explains somewhat our position in Biomaterials. Linus Larsson: And if you compare the various units within Biomaterials, is there a material profitability difference in, say, the third quarter? Or are they all doing pretty well? Niclas Rosenlew: Again, we haven't really split out the profitability of every mill. I mean, as we've commented before, I mean, we very much look at -- I mean, each and every component, mill needs to be profitable, goes without saying, deliver positive cash flow. But of course, as Hans said, I mean, the South American operations are kind of absolute cost leaders. So no answer, Linus. No direct answer, at least. I hope it's okay. Hans Sohlstrom: Building on that, I would say that based on this product differentiation and specialization in the Nordics, I'm pretty sure that there are lots of pulp mills in the Nordics producing standard volume grades that are not doing as well as we are doing. Linus Larsson: That's helpful. And then just one more follow-up on Oulu. And maybe if you could just briefly touch on or give an update on your commercial plans for the output from Oulu, 750,000 tonnes, that's a big amount of paperboard. Where will you allocate those volumes? And have plans possibly changed from your original plans? Hans Sohlstrom: Well, Linus, first of all, I think it's important to remember that the line will be, as we have said from the beginning, fully ramped up and in full capacity in 2027. So also next year will be a year of gradually increasing production and sales volumes. Quality is good, really good. We have received very good customer feedback. It's also important to remember that that Oulu is not producing only folded boxboard. It's also producing CKB, for instance, where there are only 2 producers in Europe. We are producing CKB on 3 production lines, and then there is a competitor producing on only one small production line. So it's not only folded boxboard. We also have some other consumer grades in the Oulu production unit. Then also, I want to remind everyone that Oulu is not only for us an increase in carton board capacity because we are also transferring carton board volumes from our liquid packaging board mills, for instance, Skoghall into Oulu, which gives us an opportunity to grow in liquid packaging board. So basically, Oulu is providing opportunities for us to grow in all the product areas we have within consumer board, both carton board, liquid packaging board, food service board and so on. And when it comes to our sales plans, so, of course, I mean, our job is to maximize profitability. Our job is not to follow a certain plan, but to maximize profitability in every situation. And therefore, as we discussed before, it's clear that the margins in the U.S. because of the 15% import duties are thinner than what we anticipated before the tariffs came in place or the plans for import tariffs came in place. And we are actively looking to maximize profitability by optimizing our market mix and our customer mix as well as product mix. So, we really look to place those volumes wherever we can maximize profitability and value. Niclas Rosenlew: So it's not any board, it's the best board. Hans Sohlstrom: Well said. Thanks, Niclas. Operator: Our next question comes from Pallav Mittal with Barclays. [Operator Instructions] Pallav Mittal: Can you hear me? Hans Sohlstrom: Yes, we hear you, Pallav. Good to hear you. Pallav Mittal: Sorry about that. Some technical issues at my end. A couple of follow-ups on some comments that you've already made. So firstly, on Oulu, I appreciate all the commentary that you have made and clearly, volumes you have highlighted are currently running behind schedule. So, what gives you confidence that you are still on track to reach full capacity by 2027, especially given the overcapacity issues in Asia? And then secondly, in the third quarter, EBIT, you have almost 30 million-odd fixed cost savings, and these are your cost savings program over the last couple of years. Can you help us understand how much of those 2 programs is already in the numbers so far? And how should we think about further improvement in Q4 and also in 2026? Hans Sohlstrom: Yes. Thank you very much, Pallav. So if I take the first question and Niclas, the second one. So first of all, Oulu, I mean, we are ramping up. And I would say that especially the last months have been very encouraging in terms of optimizing the production processes there. And that gives us really confidence that we will be able to reach the full capacity from a production perspective in 2027 as we have forecasted. Then, of course, with a relatively weak oversupplied market that also, in a way, restricts the speed of ramp-up and ramping up the volumes. Then you mentioned China. We were just last week in China. We know that what is happening in China is that, for instance, there is a lot of the local folded boxboard, which is called Ivory board, taking market share from higher cost recycled fiber-based grades, so what they call Duplex there, which we call testliner in Europe. We can see similar trends in Europe, folded boxboard, virgin fiber-based top quality carton board, taking market shares from recycled fiber-based white-lined chipboard. You can, for instance, with our folded boxboard, you can basically with 30% lower basis weight, you get better characteristics, product folding characteristics, printing characteristics, a cleaner sheet, better looking board than with white-lined chipboard. So, we see also migration there from the European 3 million tonne annual white-lined chipboard market into carton board. And in China, there is a 6 million tonne of white-lined chipboard or Duplex market that is gradually being substituted with the local folded boxboard. So, we cannot only look at the specific product segments as such. There is also important movements happening between these product categories. But now over to you, Niclas, for the second question. Niclas Rosenlew: On the costs, so what comes to the previous programs, more than EUR 200 million, they are done. But as I said earlier, we are very active in terms of looking at our competitiveness, our cost base throughout. So, we'll continue with scrutinizing fixed costs. We'll continue with scrutinizing variable costs. We have, as discussed earlier, we have the programs with more than 4,000 initiatives, 800-plus initiative owners and they continue. And they are now -- it's not a program. It's more of a culture. And that we intend to keep up and if anything, speed up. At the same time, -- as you know, we made a big organizational change in the summer, 1st of July. We have 7 P&L responsible BAs, 22 P&L responsible BUs. And then we moved some of the functions to cut across the company. And now there, we are taking the next step and looking at how do we make this new kind of construction to make all it so more efficient. And there's been some articles or some press picking up on some of our actions we are doing across, but that's just some of the actions we are doing a lot under the hood. And that's the whole idea. These are not programs per se, but we are day in, day out looking at how we make sure that we are competitive and create value for our customers. Operator: Our next question comes from Lars Kjellberg with Stifel. Lars Kjellberg: I got thrown out earlier due to power cut. Not helpful, but back on again. So essentially, a couple of questions for me still. Coming back to wood markets. Obviously, there's been an exceptionally tight market now in the Nordics. Now the industry certainly from the pulp and paper industry is not running full. Prices are starting to get a bit. But what is your thinking in an upturn in this market again in terms of the wood supply that is available? And in that context, coming back to what you said earlier, Hans, about maximizing profitability. can you operate everything, including your new assets from a wood supply standpoint on a competitive level? The other thing that you mentioned earlier was disciplined capital allocation going forward. I just wanted to understand what does that mean? You put in a lot of money on growth. You continue to talk about growth. And if I'm looking at some of the markets you serve, in particular the consumer packaging, there's no growth in this market since 2016. The volumes are the same. So, how should we think in that context, your focus on growth versus what's happened in the market and in the context of capital discipline what does it really mean? And the final point then. Holmen earlier today talked about stable generally prices on consumer boards for the contract business. But if you try to go after new volumes, there's a tremendous amount of pricing pressure. So the question is, what are you finding on that incremental volume that you're trying to place relative to the contract business in terms of pricing pressures? Hans Sohlstrom: Yes. Thank you very much, Lars. I'll let you take the second question, but a couple of comments. First of all, starting from your last question about pricing, yes, we see consumer board prices or board prices in general, stable. When we are now introducing our own new volumes to the market, very much we gain business, we gain volumes with yield advantage. Our folded boxboard, for instance, from Oulu has a 30% to 40% yield advantage compared to white-lined chipboard or SBS, some of the other board grades. So also with a higher price point for folded boxboard, you can basically prove to customers that the total cost of ownership goes down when they move to our grades instead of what they are using currently. Then regarding -- and also one point on growth. If you look at Stora Enso during the last 10 years, you will notice that our core packaging business has been growing an average 5% per year. That's the growth we can demonstrate since 10 years back in our packaging business. So yes, our top line has been about unchanged, around EUR 10 billion, but we don't have basically any printing papers anymore and we have a significantly bigger packaging business. So, 10 years ago, packaging and printing papers were roughly equal size, representing almost 40% of our total turnover each. And today, packaging is representing 60%, whereas printing paper is almost 0. When it comes to the wood costs and the supply and demand situation for wood in the Nordics, I think that we have seen here this year that the wood costs have reached the pain point, the pain levels. There has been significant curtailments in pulp capacity without mentioning any names of our competitors, but there have been very long curtailments, showing that when you are producing standard volume bulk pulp grades, it doesn't make sense to run at these higher wood cost levels. So, I think the proof is in the pudding, and we have seen that these levels basically forces the volume producers of pulp to take curtailments and shutdowns, extended shutdowns. And as I said, since the summer, we have seen wood costs now moving downwards. But then over to you, Niclas, for the other part of it. Niclas Rosenlew: Yes. So Lars, on capital allocation, and this is something we'll come back to as well in the CMD, but as we all know, I mean, we've had over EUR 1 billion CapEx now for a couple of years. This year, we'll go down to some mid-700s and likely down from there somewhat. We've done a lot of work internally, thanks to great efforts by the team to kind of create -- really kind of categorize our assets, run for cash assets, key growth assets and so on. And we see that we can become more disciplined by just doing internally being very structured, having criteria, return criteria, of course, but also other criteria for where to allocate the capital when talking about CapEx. So, there has been a lot of work going on recently on this, and we'll come back and explain a bit more what it means in detail. But CapEx is now on a downward slope. And as Hans said here earlier and as you know, we have made quite significant investments. Oulu is one, of course. De Lier, De Jong is another. And now going forward, we, of course, need to show the results of these and reap the benefits of them. So, essentially kind of no major CapEx kind of initiatives here in the near horizon. We have what it takes essentially to -- sorry, we have what it takes to grow essentially. Lars Kjellberg: Yes. So in '26, what does that mean for CapEx? What do you think you're going to land roughly? Niclas Rosenlew: Let's come back to that. As you know, we are typically in the beginning of the year in connection with Q1. We'll give an idea of next year, but down from where we are this year. Operator: We have reached the end of the time for the Q&A session. I shall now hand back to Hans Sohlstrom and CFO, Niclas Rosenlew, for closing remarks. Hans Sohlstrom: Well, thank you very much for your attention. Thank you for joining this call. And just -- we are powering ahead. We are focusing on profit, performance, as well as our portfolio to maximize shareholder value. That's our ultimate goal to create the best possible value to our shareholders. Thank you very much. Looking forward to meet with you then in the next quarter. Bye-bye.
Operator: Thank you for standing by, and welcome the Lloyds Banking Group 2023 (sic) [ 2025 ] Q3 Interim Management Statement Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this call is scheduled for 1 hour and is being recorded. I will now hand over to William Chalmers. Please go ahead. William Leon Chalmers: Thank you, operator, and good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining our Q3 results call. As usual, I'll run through the group's financial performance before we then open the line for Q&A. Let me start with an overview of our key messages on Slide 2. We continue to make great progress on our strategy. In doing so, we are creating value for our customers and wider stakeholders through improved propositions, targeted growth and enhanced operating leverage. In Q3, we delivered a robust financial performance, supported by healthy growth across the business, driving continued income momentum. We maintained our cost discipline and strong asset quality, reflecting stable credit performance in the period. Taken together, this is driving strong capital generation. As you know, in the third quarter, we've taken an GBP 800 million additional charge relating to the FCA consultation process on motor commissions. Clearly, we are disappointed by this outcome, and I'll talk more about it later in the presentation. Accordingly, we've revised our 2025 guidance to reflect the motor provision. Excluding the charge, we are beating our prior targets. We remain highly confident in our 2026 guidance. Before turning to our financials, a brief update on 2 important strategic developments. Firstly, I'm delighted to say that we have completed the full acquisition of Schroders Personal Wealth to be renamed Lloyd 12. This is an exciting step forward for both our customers and shareholders. who will deliver full control of a market-leading wealth management business that has GBP 17 billion of assets under administration, more than 300 advisers and 60,000 clients. Embedding Lloyd's Wealth into the broader group will advance our end-to-end wealth ambitions, delivering clear benefits and proposition and journey for our customers. Secondly, we've taken significant steps forward in our digital asset strategy. Earlier in the year, we partnered with Aberdeen Investment to deliver a U.K.-first FX derivatives trade collateralized with tokenized digital assets. Alongside, we're co-chair and the U.K. finance project to deliver GB tokenized deposits. Retail and commercial pilot use cases in programmable digital money are due to deliver in H1 of next year. These developments will ultimately drive material customer opportunity and maintain our commercial leadership. We look forward to elaborating on this alongside other areas of our technology, digital and AI strategy in an investor seminar on the 6th of November. Let me now turn to the financials on Slide 4. The group demonstrated a robust financial performance during the first 9 months of the year. Year-to-date, statutory profit after tax was GBP 3.3 billion with a return on tangible equity of 11.9%. Excluding the motor provision, return on tangible equity was 14.6%. Looking at the full year, we now expect RoTE to be around 12% or around 14%, excluding motor. We are pleased with the group's continued income momentum. In the first 9 months, net income of GBP 13.6 billion was 6% higher than the prior year. This was driven by further growth in net interest income, alongside a 9% year-on-year rise in other operating income, led by customer activity and strategic investment. Within the quarter, net income was up 3% versus Q2. This was supported by a net interest margin of 3.06% and in line with our expectations for a gradual increase, again, alongside ongoing OOI growth. Looking forward, we now expect net interest income for the full year to be circa GBP 13.6 billion slightly ahead of our previous guidance. We remain committed to efficiency. Year-to-date operating costs of GBP 7.2 billion were up 3% year-on-year, in line with our expectations for this stage. Credit performance meanwhile remains strong. year-to-date impairment charge of GBP 68 million equates to an asset quality ratio of 18 basis points. Given our performance to date, we are upgrading full year guidance on the asset quality ratio to circa 20 basis points. Meanwhile, tangible net assets per share increased to 55, up 2.6p in the year-to-date and 0.5p in the quarter. Our performance delivered strong capital generation of 110 basis points year-to-date or 141 basis points, excluding motor. Our losing CET1 ratio is 13.8%. I'll now turn to Slide 5 to look at developments in our customer franchise. We have seen good growth across both the lending and the deposit franchises so far this year. Group lending balances of GBP 477 billion are up GBP 18 billion or 4% year-to-date. Focusing on Q3, lending is up GBP 6 billion or 1% versus Q2. Within this, retail lending grew GBP 5.1 billion. This was driven by an increase in the mortgage book of just over GBP 3 billion, reflecting both market growth and a completion share that remains at around 19%. So far, we are seeing no sign of a slowdown in mortgage applications ahead of the budget in November. Elsewhere in the retail business, we saw continued growth across each of our cards, loans and motor businesses as well as growth in European retail. Commercial lending balances meanwhile, are up by GBP 1.3 billion in Q3. As has been the case throughout the year, we saw growth in CIB across our targeted sectors, including in institutional balances. In BCB, balances were broadly stable with new lending in mid-corporates, offsetting the net repayments of government-backed facilities. Turning to liability franchise. Year-to-date deposits have grown GBP 14 billion or 3%. In Q3, we also saw a good performance, up GBP 2.8 billion quarter-on-quarter. Within retail, PCAs grew by GBP 1.2 billion, driven by income growth, subdued spend and lower churn during the quarter. Alongside the reduction in savings balances of GBP 0.9 billion, was largely due to some fixed rate savings outflows following our post ISA season pricing decisions. Commercial deposits are up by GBP 2.4 billion in Q3, driven by growth in targeted sectors across both CIB and BCB. Pleasingly, NIBCA balances were up in the quarter. Alongside deposit developments, we continue to see steady AUA growth in insurance, pensions and investments, with circa GBP 3.3 billion of open book net new money year-to-date. Let me turn to net interest income on Slide 6. Year-to-date and in Q3, we are seeing sustained growth in net interest income. And for the first 9 months was up 6% year-on-year to GBP 10.1 billion. This included GBP 3.5 billion in Q3, up 3% quarter-on-quarter. Income growth continues to be supported by positive momentum in the net interest margin. The Q3 margin of 306 basis points was up 2 basis points on Q2, driven by a growing structural hedge tailwind. Net interest income was further supported by average interest earning assets of GBP 466 billion in Q3, up GBP 5.5 billion versus Q2. The increase was driven by sustained lending growth, particularly in the mortgage book. Looking ahead, we now expect net interest income for 2025 to be around GBP 13.6 billion. This incorporates the healthy volume developments we have seen alongside a slightly more supportive rate environment. We remain very confident in the trajectory for net interest income growth. Let's turn to other income on Slide 7. We continue to demonstrate strong and broad-based momentum in other income. Indeed, our diversified franchise has supported consistent high single-digit growth over the last 3 years. Year-to-date OOI is GBP 4.5 billion, up 9% year-on-year. In the third quarter, OOI was GBP 1.6 billion, up 3% versus Q2. This was particularly driven by growth in motor and LPG investments. It also represents a good performance in protection, boosted by improving mortgage take-up rates. Other income growth continues to be supported by investment and strategic progress across the business. I spoke earlier about 2 specific areas of delivery, the slide shows a number of other proof points to testify to our progress, including, for example, the launch of the Lloyd's Ultra card in retail as well as further scaling of capabilities in our commercial franchise. Looking forward, the full acquisition of Schroders Personal Wealth will further support OI growth. We see an opportunity to meaningfully grow the business in the coming years as part of our integrated wealth proposition. Briefly turning to operating lease depreciation. The Q3 charge of GBP 365 million was up slightly, in line with growth in the fleet, driving other income. Moving to costs on Slide 8. The group continues to maintain strong cost discipline. Year-to-date operating costs of GBP 7.2 billion are up 3% on the prior year, in line with our full year expectations. Excluding growth in severance, operating costs are up 2%. Business growth and inflationary pressures continue to be mitigated by savings driven by strategic investment. Within the third quarter, costs of GBP 2.3 billion are down 1% compared to Q2. This is partly helped by investment timing. And looking forward, Q4 will see higher operating costs due to the usual seasonal factors and added costs from the full acquisition of SPW. We will meet our GBP 9.7 billion full year guidance, excluding these additional SPW costs or modestly above this, including them. Remediation was GBP 875 million in the quarter. This reflects low levels of non-motorbased charges alongside the GBP 800 million incremental motor finance provision. I'll now spend a moment on that on Slide 9. The additional GBP 800 million provision for the potential motor commission remediation costs takes our total provision to GBP 1.95 billion. The recent FCA proposals are subject to consultation and so the final outcome differs. However, as it stands today, they represent an outcome that is at the adverse end of our previously modeled expectations. Based on the proposals, there are a high number of cases determined to be unfair. Resumptions a unfairness do not apply the legal clarity provided by the recent Supreme Court judgment. And the address calculation is less linked to harm than it should be. We will, of course, be making representations to the FDA on our points of concern, and we look forward to engaging in a constructive dialogue. Our total provision of GBP 1.95 billion still using scenario-based methodology includes both redress and operational costs. It represents our best estimate of the potential impact of this issue. Moving on to asset quality on Slide 10. Asset quality remains strong. Neutral arrears are low and stable across our portfolios. Early warning indicators also remain benign and again, very stable. The year-to-date impairment charge is GBP 618 million equivalent to an asset quality ratio of 18 basis points. The charge of GBP 176 million in the third quarter represents an asset quality ratio of 15 basis points. This is the result of a low underlying charge, reflecting our prime customers, a prudent approach to risk and stable macro conditions as well as some one-off model benefits. It also incorporates a small MES charge of GBP 36 million in the quarter. Our stock of ECL on the balance sheet meanwhile, is GBP 3.5 billion, which remains around GBP 400 million above our base case expectations. Given the strong performance year-to-date, we now expect the asset quality ratio for the full year to be circa 20 basis points. Let me turn to our returns and tangible equity on Slide 11. Lloyd Group delivered a return on tangible equity of 11.9% year-to-date or 14.6%, excluding the motor provision. This benefits from strong business performance, cost control and low impairments. Below the line volatility and other items were GBP 157 million in the 9 months or GBP 109 million in Q3. The third quarter charge driven by negative insurance volatility and market developments and the usual fair value unwind. Tangible net assets per share at 55p are up 2.6p since year-end. This continues to be driven by profit build and the unwind of the cash flow hedge reserve partly offset by shareholder distributions. Looking ahead, we expect material TNAV per share growth in both the short term and in the medium term. Including the motor charge, return on tangible equity for the year is now affected at around 12%. Excluding Motor, the RoTE is expected to around 14% and upgrade versus prior guidance. Turning now to capital generation on Slide 12. Our business performance has driven strong capital generation in the year-to-date. Within this, total RWAs ended the quarter at GBP 232 million, up GBP 7.7 billion year-to-date and GBP 0.9 billion in the third quarter. This increase reflects strength in lending, partly offset by optimization activity. Q3 also saw the full reversal of the remaining GBP 1.2 billion of temporary RWAs that we have previously highlighted. Note that while we've taken no new additions for CRD 4 secured risk weightings in the year so far, we do expect to do so in the full quarter. Year-to-date, our strong banking profitability has driven capital generation of 110 basis points in the first 9 months or 141 basis points, excluding motor. Expected full year capital generation is now circa 145 basis points or circa 175, excluding Motor. Our closing CET1 ratio is 13.5%. This is after a 74 basis point accrual for the ordinary dividend. We still expect to pay down to around 13% by the end of 2026, with this year a staging post towards that target. I'll now wrap up on Slide 13. To summarize, group demonstrated a robust performance in the first 9 months of 2025. We are building momentum in income growth whilst retaining cost discipline and strong asset quality. Together, this is delivering meaningful operating leverage. The business is performing as we expected, if not a little better in some areas. While the motive provision is obviously unwelcome, the underlying business continues to drive strong, growing and sustainable capital generation. This financial performance results in improvements to our underlying 2025 guidance, including net interest income, asset quality and return on tangible equity ex motor. Alongside, we remain confident in our 2026 targets. Guidance for both years is laid out in full on the slide. Overall, the business is in good shape to deliver for all stakeholders. Third quarter represents another step in this journey. That concludes my comments this morning. Thank you for listening. Now I open the lines for your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first caller is Benjamin Toms from RBC. Benjamin Toms: The first is Motor Finance. The provision post top-up leaves you with the [indiscernible] just below GBP 2 billion. That's based on a weighted average scenario calculation. If the consultation paper does not get softened and the FCA is correct with their 85% claim rate, how material would the provision top-up be from here? Just some sensitivity around that would be useful. And then secondly, on NIM, I think before you said you expected NIM to build faster in Q4 than Q3. Is that still the case? And can you give us some indication about whether you'd expect NIM to continue to build through 2026. I think the hedge will continue to be additive and mortgage margin compression deposit mix shift should fade. So it's hard to see how NIM doesn't increase materially next year? Is there a missing moving part like asset mix shift that we need to consider? William Leon Chalmers: Thanks, indeed, Ben. Just to take each of those in order, the start point and perhaps the end point is to say GBP 1.95 billion in respect of motor represents our best estimate of the cost of this issue. It is, as you say, a scenario-based estimate and those scenarios or sensitivities, as you called them, represent what we think are reasonable FCA responses to the issues that we raise, and I assume the issues that others raised. And those will be principally around things like the calculation of dress, which is set, we think is best tenuously linked to [indiscernible].The termination of fairness, which we think is too broad. And these types of things will be part of our response to consultations. And when we look at scenarios, that's what's figuring into those scenarios, some slide amendment around those. But to be clear then, the FCA proposals, as currently proposed, represent the heaviest weighting in our overall scenario analysis. My script at the adverse end of our expected outcomes, i.e., they are all DCAs, most of the commission that we get -- that we received gets handed back, and it is a very high response rate. That all means that with the FCA being the heaviest weighted component in our overall provisioning analysis suggests that even if the FCA proposals come out exactly as they are today, then our overall position is not going to move by that much. So we are not far off then in short. On your second question, Ben, in respect NIM has said, has had a tick up in the course of Q3 by a couple of basis points. We're now at 3.06. And it is our expectation that we see continued, if you like, growth in that earn interest margin over the course of Q4. As I alluded to, I think at Q2 and possibly before that in Q1, we do expect to see a bit of a back-end loaded step-up in Q4, and that is predominantly because of the structural hedge contribution, which is slightly more heavily weighted in Q4. It is somewhat offset by the usual headwinds that is to say bank base rate and deposit effects, predominantly deposit effects as our -- rather our next bank beta is now not expected until next year. but then also at the mortgage point. So the mortgage headwinds, as you know, has a little further to play out, that includes quarter 4, and it includes '26. But summing all of that up, then you should expect to see that interest margin expansion in the course of Q4. There will be a step up there. And it will be a little greater than what we have seen Q2 to Q3. In respect to '26, Ben, your analysis is right. We should expect -- you should expect -- we do expect to see continued margin expansion during the course of '26. It is predominantly because of the factors that you've identified, that is to say the structural hedge makes a meaningful contribution, GBP 1.5 billion increase in structural hedge expected earnings for is what we've guided to earlier on this year, and that still remains more or less the case as we go into '26. And then there is some offset from that in the context of, again, base rate decisions and indeed some continued level of deposit churn off the back of a slightly higher rate environment. And then alongside of that, the playing out of the mortgage refinancing headwind. So those factors are still at play. But nonetheless, the net of it for 2026 is continued and reasonably meaningful margin expansion. That is our expectation. Ben, maybe I'll just finish off with the point. As you know, we have moved from kind of large AIA and nonbanking net interest income guidance to net interest income guidance in its totality. And we've upped that guidance for the remainder of this year, i.e., circa GBP 13.6 billion. We will be guiding to what that means for 2026 in due course, but it is the combination of net interest margin expansion as well as AIA growth that we expect will deliver meaningful NII growth in 2026. And that, in turn, is what will help us deliver our greater than 15% ROE. Thank you, Ben. Operator: Our next caller is Jason Napier from UBS. Jason Napier: Two, please. The first, I wonder if you could just talk about how Lloyd's sees wealth as a sort of a banking business in the U.K. the Schroders Personal Wealth business today, you might, as you read your slides, about the 300 advisers and the funds that they advise and look after but then the bullet point on scaling to mass affluent and workplace might suggest that this is really just an integrated mainstream client type offering. The backdrop for this is, as you recognizes that the market is quite interested in whether you might be interested in inorganic expansion in IFA led businesses. And so if you could just talk about what we can learn from the buy end of the half of the SPW business? And then the second, I don't want to steal the thunder from your upcoming tech event, but the slide on tokenized assets does, I think, invite further inquiry. At a very high level, I just wondered whether you could talk about the work that you've done so far and where you think things like tokenized assets and deposits. What that does to banking industry revenues in total. At a high level, people are somewhat concerned that we might see compression in things like payments and remittances and a bunch of the CIB revenue lines that we actually can't see from the outside as the sort of technology takes through. So any early thoughts you might have on the outlook for [indiscernible] William Leon Chalmers: Thank you, Jason. On both questions. First of all, in respect to the wealth question, a couple of comments there on SPW and then a couple of comments on how we see the wealth opportunity. it's worth me just repeating that we are really pleased to see the conclusion of the SPW -- now Lloyd 12 transaction. It brings us full control of what we think is a great business. So you've heard the statistics, but at the risk of repeating them, 17 million assets under management, 60,000 clients, 300 advisers. It is a really promising start, if you like, for a business that we hope to grow into, frankly, an awful lot more. So there is a great business there that we think we can really grow and help profit going forward. It is part of an integrated proposition as we see it. That is to say it will sit alongside our direct-to-consumer self-serve proposition. It will also sit alongside the building digital proposition that we are currently creating. But it is important to have alongside those more or less self-service facilities, an advisory capability. And that's really what Schroders Personal Wealth now Lloyd's Wealth will deliver for us. It is important in the sense that we can make our customer journey seamless with those other capabilities, EG, the digital direct-to-consumer offering. Likewise, we can, if you like, bring the benefit of the group to bear here, not just in terms of group infrastructure, cost synergies and the like, but also in terms of plugging it into our 3 million affluent customers, and then there's a third really important part of that integration, if you like, which is around the workplace proposition. At the moment, at least, we have a very strong workplace proposition in the context of our insurance, our [indiscernible] business. But at the same time, we really want to build the advisory component of that as people's pensions plans mature so that we can advise them properly on what to do with those proceeds, which at the moment, is a source of leakage from our perspective to other third-party providers, we'd much rather keep it within group. And that's what SPW now Lloyd's Wealth will allow us to do. So there is something with the Lloyd's Wealth acquisition, the SPW acquisition, which itself is in good shape as we speak today. And my statistics earlier on, then testimony to that. But hopefully, you can tell from my comments that we think it can be, frankly, a lot more going forward. You asked in that context about inorganic, Jason. I obviously shan't comment on that explicitly. Safe to say that we've got a lot to do with what we've just done. The acquisition of Lloyds Wealth is a tremendous step forward for us and the franchise. It enables us to develop and enhance our existing customer propositions in what we hope will be a very compelling way which in turn, most importantly, will create customer value, but in doing so, we think, create quite a lot of shareholder value, including benefits to our other operating income over the course of Q4 and looking forward into 2026 and growing thereafter. So I think for now, at least, we're very happy with what we've done. We're going to focus on the organic integration of it, and we're going to build our customer propositions and shareholder value as part of that. The totalized deposits topic is a very interesting one. It's a topic which I could probably talk for ever on, but I won't. I'll try to [indiscernible] my remarks somewhat. In essence, there's a couple of things going on right now. First of all, as you mentioned, in respect of our strategic update, I just mentioned that we've done what was a really exciting partnership with Aberdeen, where we effectively delivered an industry first tokenized assets use case, i.e., using tokenized assets as collateral for a market-based trade. That was the industry first. It was more or less a proof of concept, but it offers illustration of the potential. When we look at the landscape right now as it's developing, there are a couple of things going on. One is, obviously, the rise of stable kind, which is much commented on. And indeed, it seems to us that in the international sphere it may be that by virtue of speed of payments, for example, and by virtue of low costs, it may have something to offer in respect of international transactions. But actually, if you bring that back to the U.K., much of what is offered by stable coin is already effectively offered in the context of things like faster payments. That is to say they're instantaneous and they're very low cost. So really what excites us actually in the context of tokenized assets is an opportunity that goes well beyond stable coins, which is around programmable currency. And we're currently sitting at joint chairs with U.K. Finance, in a project, which is called GB tokenized deposits, GTD is the acronym. It used to be called regulatory liability network. But GBTD is essentially building of a programmable and exchangeable currency in the U.K. that is part and parcel of the existing commercial money framework. That is to say it is interchangeable between digital money and if you like, analog money. We think that has the potential to offer customers tremendous amounts of value in terms of programmable capabilities. And at the moment, we're running use cases in respect of wholesale use cases, particularly digital gilts, in respect of mortgage use cases, i.e., programmability around that capability and an exchange of effectively payment on receipt capabilities from a consumer point of view. So there's 3 use cases that will land in early part of next year. The reason for just briefly commenting on that detail, Jason, is because we see that as an example of tokenized deposits, digital assets, offering a tremendous customer opportunity. And if it can be brought in the sterling monetary framework, if you like, and be interchangeable with analog money and the way that we're proposing, I think there's a lot more that we can do with our customers to offer them value. And if you like, far from this being a threat, it's an opportunity. Operator: Our next caller is Perlie Mong from Bank of America. Perlie Mong: William, so just a couple of questions. One is on distribution. So it sounds like you're pretty comfortable with the motor finance charge or any top-up if necessary. So clearly, you've talked about paying down to 13% next year. But as you think about full year distribution at '25, would you think of it as there is no more uncertainty in your mind regarding to [indiscernible]? And then while we are on that topic, clearly, one of your peers have moved on to quarterly buybacks. You're still on annual buyback. So is there any thinking about maybe moving to a more frequent distribution cadence? And then secondly, on mortgage margins, again, your peer reported yesterday talked about 5-year mortgages rolling off next year. And that cohort had a relatively high margin. So I presume that is already in your guidance and in the way you think about '26 mortgage margins. But as we come into this period, do you expect competition or behavior of competitors to change in any way, given this is something that is happening across the board. William Leon Chalmers: Yes. Thank you, Perlie. There's -- perhaps 3 questions there, at least that's how I'll interpret it. And you'll have to let me know whether I'm responding appropriately. First of all, in respect of motor, as said, our current revision, GBP 1.95 billion, best estimate, to the extent there's a worst case, we can't be far off simply because, as I said, the FCA case is most heavily weighted in scenario-based planning. Alongside of that, the FCA case captures a pretty adverse outcome, all DCAs, for example, most of the commission will be received being handed back a very high response rate. Those 3 things tell us that the FCA case, the proposals, if currently enacted are, as I say, at the adverse end of the spectrum and most heavily weighted in our overall provisioning. So not terribly far off. When we look at distributions for 2025. A couple of points to make there, really. One is we remain very committed to distributing excess capital. Two is, as per the comments earlier on, we are generating strong capital generation over the course of this year. We put forward guidance now of 145 basis points, which that is post motor to be clear. When we look at our expectations for the full year in terms of distributions, we also have the reduction in CET1 ratio that we have previously advised you of and we expect it to reduce our CET1 ratio from about 13.5% end of last year to about 13.25% or thereabouts, give or take towards the end of this year before landing at circa 13% at the end of '26. So that is an additional 25 basis points of capital there, which if you add it to the GBP 145 million that we're guiding to is 170 basis points in total. Perlie, you'll be able to tell from our numbers today that the dividend will be about 100 basis points of that. We've accrued 74 basis points year-to-date. So therefore, a full year is about 100 basis points of that 170 that I just mentioned, which in turn, leaves about 70 basis points of excess. Against what will probably end up being about GBP 234 million, GBP 235 billion of risk-weighted assets, something like that. And all I'm doing is simply taking Q3 outcomes in RWAs and adding on a bit for our continued lending performance. and indeed a CRD4 add-on in the quarter of quarter 4. So that gives you an idea of 70 basis points against that GBP 234 million, GBP 235 billion of RWAs. It gives you an idea of the excess capital that will be available and up for consideration by the Board as to what it chooses to do with it towards year-end. Clearly, you asked about buyback and whether we should move to a more frequent buyback. The I guess what I'd say to that is, first of all, capital distribution, not just the quantum, but also the form, if you like, is always going to be an outlet for the Board. And we'll, of course, respect that. What we've done to date, of course, is once per annum. And our view is that, that has allowed clarity in terms of our guidance, number one, and it has been appropriate as we reduce our capital ratio, number two. As we look forward, there are some advantages from considering a switch. Lower CET1 over the course of the year is one of those. The timing benefits, obviously, from a shareholder point of view is another. There are also some considerations taken into account, which is to say a lower capital base implies a slightly lower level of flexibility either for dealing with contingencies or alternatively, take advantage of opportunities. So these are the types of things, probably that we'll have to consider when we look at the buyback. But every year, we consider not just the quantum, but also the form in which we make distributions. And this year, in that respect will be no different, and we'll have a conversation with the Board at the end of the year to that effect. The 1/3 of your topics earlier around 5-year merges, in a sense, it's welcome to the club. We've been talking about a mortgage refinancing headwind for about 2 years now. Our expectation was that, that will continue during the quarter of '25, and that it will continue into '26. And we said that before, and that remains the case. What I am pleased to say though is that our guidance in that respect has not changed. And when we've talked about in the past, our expected increase in net interest income, including in response to Ben's question later on, that incorporates our expected headwind from a mortgage point of view over the quarter '26. So we do expect continued growth in net interest income and indeed margin. And that does incorporate the headwind that we see from the type of 5-year mortgages with the spreads written at that time as they mature in '26. So yes, it is all integrated into guidance for sure. In terms of what effect that might have, it's obviously a little hard to say, but at the risk of speculation, maybe there is a chance that as these higher spreads roll off, people reconsider the spreads that they're currently writing business at today. And maybe, therefore, there is a marginal benefit to spreads being written during the course of '26. Partly, that is, of course, speculative. But as these higher spread mortgages come off, will that cause people just to reconsider the rate at which they or rather spread at which they write new mortgage business and cause them to revise up what I think an appropriate spread is for mortgage business? Possibly, yes. And if it does, we'll obviously welcome it. Operator: Our next is Jonathan Pierce from Jefferies. Jonathan Richard Pierce: Got 2 questions. The first is on structural hedge, again, some about that. I wondered if you could help us a little bit scale the contribution from Q4, you talked previously in that significant increase this year and the contribution to the movement has been was 4 basis points in the latest quarter and 10 basis points in the first quarter. Maybe you could put Q4 in the context of that for that would be helpful. And just a supplementary on the hedge. I wondered if you could -- just talk a little bit about what happens to '26 in terms of timing because I'm still entirely -- sure, I understand how are you thinking about that? I mean it's rose that the '27 tailwind is probably more about the full year impact of the '26 in the trend then we get as a lot of the [indiscernible] starts to roll through be helpful just to get a little bit more on that. [indiscernible] an idea what will be next year and how fast forward you will be looking in the sort of metrics you will be updating or distribution so on and so forth. But will this be sort of 2028, '29, look forward. William Leon Chalmers: A couple of questions there. First, on the structural hedge. Second on strategy and what we'll be talking about and where the next year. In respect to the structural hedge, maybe just a kind of a mark-to-market. The Q3 yield on the structural hedge is about 2.3%. As you rightly said, the contribution to the margin of the structural hedge in respect of Q3 was about 4 basis points. And we've previously highlighted and maintained still today that the contribution of the structural hedge going into Q4 will be meaningfully greater. We've put a precise number on that, but just maybe help the discussion. The expectation for the yield as a whole during the course of '25 will also be around 2.3%. I'll come back to '26 in just a second. . But the expectation is, as I said, is that the structural hedge contribution to the margin will meaningfully increase in the course of quarter 3 and I would expect in that context, Jonathan, again, without putting too precise number on it, the structural hedge contribution to the margin will more than double in quarter 4 versus what it was in quarter 3. And as I said, that all leads in combination with the deposits headwind and mortgages headwind to an expectation that the margin in totality will step up in Q4. Will step up in a way that is more significant than what we saw Q2 to Q3. So I know I'm not putting precise numbers on it, but hopefully, that gives you some steam. When we look at 26% on the structural hedge, the expectation for the yield in '26 is consistent with our previous discussions, actually, on average, about 2.9%. You cut that out, obviously, from the circa GBP 6.9 billion guidance that we've given you for structural hedge earnings off the back of about a GBP 244 billion structural hedge, you'll get to 2.9% through that path, too. But that gives you a sense for the year as a whole. There is obviously a bit of a journey in respect to the structural hedge. At this point in the year, I'm not going to kind of go through it on a quarterly basis. But it isn't all delivered on quarter 1. It isn't all delivered at quarter 4, and it won't be perfectly linear in between. But overall, that is the contribution of the structural hedge, i.e., GBP 6.9 billion in total, an incremental circa GBP 1.5 billion versus what we got over the course of '25 as we look forward. It is important to say in this content section that structural hedge then continues to build over the course of future years. And I would -- again, I won't give precise numbers on it. but you should expect continued build, most notably in '27 and then continue building the years thereafter '28, '29 and so forth, but at a slightly lower level. We'll talk more about that in the course of the year end, give you more specificity. In respect to strategy, Jonathan, our focus right now is very clearly on delivering '26. We set out some very explicit, some very clear and I think some very important commitments in respect to what we're going to do in '26. Cost-to-income ratio less than 50%, ROTE in excess of 15% and capital generation in excess of 200 basis points we are going to deliver on those '26 commitments. And so that is very much our focus. Now it's a very fair question for you to ask having said that, about where do we go from there? Our expectation is that we will also update in the course of next year as to '27 and beyond. It will probably be around the middle of next year when we come to market with that update. So that gives you a sense of timing. Then in terms of the look forward period, that's something which we'll probably discuss actually over the course of next year. But these things often end in round numbers, and maybe I'll leave it there. Operator: Our next caller is Aman Rakkar from Barclays. Aman Rakkar: I actually had 2, please. I wanted to query on nonbanking funding costs. I think that's actually [indiscernible] a touch lower than your commentary previously around up GBP 100 million year-on-year. So I was wondering if you can give us an update for that. And I don't know if that's contributed in any way to slightly firmer outturn for this year. But if you could just kind of update us on that particular line item within NII, that would be great. . Just another one on other operating income, actually. So obviously, the headline rate is good again. It's quite divergent trends within the division. So I think it looks like retail has kind of reaccelerated again in Q3. The insurance business is, it looks like it's actually tapering off, if I look at the year-on-year trends through the course of this year, and then commercial continues to be quite soft. So could you give us a bit of a kind of steer on how to think about these divisional trends going forward? I'm just trying to work out how we arrive at a similar kind of run rate next year. And if there's anything kind of episodic or lumpy that we should think about or one-off elements that might kind of unwind into next year, that would be very helpful. William Leon Chalmers: Thank you, Aman, both of those questions. The -- taking them in turn. In terms of NB NII, nonbanking net interest income. Q3 as we disclosed today, GBP 136 million, that is running at about 10% ahead of where it was last year. So year-to-date, I think it's about GBP 372 million thereabouts. That's about 10% up versus where it was -- and what's going on there, as you know, it is very much about the funding of the other operating income -- income streams insofar as they're not related to banking. So LDC is an example of that. Lloyd's living in is an example of that. Of course, Motor is an example of that, but so is the insurance pensions and Investments division. And so is commercial banking activity. It is probably running a little bit more slowly, i.e., slightly slower growth rates versus what we previously thought. That is, if anything, partly attributable to commercial banking activity, which has been a little bit less in that space, at least than we previously expected. I'll come back to that in a second. But overall, what's going on within the nonbanking net interest income that is most important is that we are seeing the takeover of volumes rather than rate rises driving it. So if you look at the trend last year in nonbanking net interest income, it was probably about half and half to do with volumes, number one, but also increased rates in refinancing number two. But if you look at it this year, it's more like 15% or thereabouts in terms of rates and 85% in terms of volumes. So volumes is really making the running in terms of the increases in nonbank net interest income that we see over the course of this year. And of course, looking forward, what that means, Aman, is that if you believe in other operating income growth, which we do, and I'll come back to in just a second, you should expect that nonbanking net interest income to continue to grow over the course of 2026 but continue to grow from very much a volume-driven perspective as opposed to a rate perspective. Rates won't be 0 because there is some term financing going on, in particular in relation to Motor, which has got about a 3.5-year average life. So it won't be 0, but it will be predominantly a volume-led story within long bank net interest income. Before moving on, it's worth just wrapping that up in the context of the net interest income guidance that we have given you and will give you for 2026 and beyond. That is including, obviously, nonbanking net interest income in all of that. So that is wrapped up in the guidance that we give you for net interest income, GBP 425 million this year, circa GBP 13.6 billion now. And indeed, for the guidance, we will give you next year of '26. In respect to other operating income, maybe just to start off with the core point that as you know, when Charlie and I launched the strategy in February 2022. It was very much focused upon trying to ensure that we diversified the business from an undue dependency on rates. Looking to avoid being, if you like, pressured by a downward trend in rates during the next cycle and also achieve the benefits of what is a strong and very highly present franchise right the way across the U.K., across the retail the commercial sector and indeed within insurance, pensions and investments. So the other income -- the other operating income strategy was a strategic diversification, which is intended to benefit from the strength of the Lloyds Banking Group franchise. It's that combination that led us to deploy significant strategic investments in this area. And then we've seen the benefits of customer activity, if you like, picking up on those strategic investments and helping us drive the operating income now for about 3 years of high single-digit growth. And that's again what we've seen during the quarter 3, whether you look at it year-to-date or whether you look at it year-on-year [indiscernible] introduction, Aman, but before getting into your question, I thought it's important to highlight those points. The individual business components within other operating income, as said, up 9% in total. What are we seeing year-to-date? We're seeing strength within retail. I've talked about transportation there, but it is also about PCA offering. It is also about protection offering increasingly to mortgage customers and it is also about cards year-to-date. So a retail offer that is growing significantly. It's transportation, but it's also those other factors. Within commercial, commercial has been a slightly slower pattern over the course of the year-to-date performance, and that is partly because low markets performance has been probably slower than we would have perhaps expected but it's been somewhat offset by things like cash management and payments, number one, it has been also the case that the comparative period benefited from valuation adjustments on a year-to-date basis, which, of course, inherently don't repeat during the course of '25 so there's a slight comparative issue there, which has meant that commercial has been slower year-to-date versus where you would normally expect it to be. And indeed, our expectation looking forward is that, that is going to change as those comparatives come out of the analysis. I'll come back to that in just a second. Insurance pension investments up about 5% year-to-date. That is off the back of long-standing strength. It is also off the back of GI strength and things like share dealing. But to be clear, if you look at it on a quarterly comparison basis, weather in respect of substance, the back of dry weather hits a little bit in the course of Q3. So insurance is still growing for sure. But the reason why you're seeing it at 5% in part at least, is because of that weather during the course of quarter three, which, of course, we wouldn't expect to be repeated on a BAU basis. And then finally, Aman, the strength in investments is clear to see. That is the living LDC has been a significant contributor to the business on a year-to-date basis and again, on a look-forward basis. When we put that together, Aman, first of all, we would expect those growth streams to continue to build over the course of the remainder of this year and certainly into next. And that is a combination of strategic investments landing, if you like, and increased customer takeup. Allied to that, we now are adding in previously -- that is going to contribute in Q4, and it's going to contribute during the course of 2026 more meaningfully. We haven't given precise numbers around that. Our expectation is that, that is going to boost other operating income for the course of 2026 at least, by around GBP 175 million or so beyond what you would have previously seen in the other operating income line. Now of course, our ambitions in respect of Lloyds Wealth go meaningfully beyond that. And so we would expect it to build in the years thereafter, but that gives you a sense to what we expect it to contribute in '26, which, of course, will be added to the contributions from the other income streams that I've just been highlighting. Hopefully, that's useful, Aman. Operator: Our next caller will be Sheel Shah from JPMorgan. Sheel Shah: The CIB business has been particularly strong this year. I want to stand out performance, I think, at least when I look at your balance sheet momentum, could you talk a little bit about this business? What's actually happening? How much of this is market driven? How much of this is an active strategy to maybe target share gains and what are the margins looking like in this business? And then secondly, to come back to your less than 50% cost-to-income ratio for 2026. Just looking at consensus, it sits at 51% at the moment. You've just mentioned GBP 175 million coming from the Schroders Wealth business into OOI. What do you think the market is missing either on the revenue line or the cost line to get to this cost-to-income ratio target? William Leon Chalmers: Thanks, Sheel. Two questions there. One relation to commercial bank in CIB in particular and one in relation to costs. Just before getting into CIB, just to step back, as you know, our commercial banking business consists of both business and commercial banking BCB and the CIB business. And we are engaged in quite a bit of transformation in respect of each of those 2. When I look at the BCB business, as I mentioned in my comments earlier on, we've seen some really constructive signs in terms of BAU lending growth, which is great to see. When you look at it externally, that is offset by the government repayments that have been going on in respect to bounce back loans. And so the net, if you like, is affected by that. But we are encouraged by some decent positive signs, if you like, our ongoing BAU growth. And that is alongside of creating a much broader digitalized proposition to our customers, which in turn is going to help us drive other operating income growth going forward. When we look at CIB, again, that is going through a significant period of transformation, but it is about product broadening and product deepening. There have been some areas that have probably been slower than we might like to have been, for example, the loan markets area. There have been some areas that have been successful, particularly successful over the course of this year. I mentioned cash management and payments, for example, capital markets have shown some strength alongside working capital. And actually, the indicators that we've got on an early Q4 basis have been really promising in respect of CIB. Now CIB comparatives, as I mentioned a second ago, have been a little bit weighed down by strong valuation adjustments in the course of '24. So kind of bear that in mind. But the underlying momentum in CIB we're really encouraged by. We think it's really positive, and it's really -- it's a big part of our transformation story going forward. In respect to your second question, Sheel, on costs, the cost shape for 2026, as said, remains very much a commitment to sub 50% cost income ratio. Within the cost/income ratio, it is clearly composed of 2 elements. One is to say income strength. We've talked a bit about that during the course of this call, so I shan't repeat those points. But your specific question is around the cost part of that equation. And how do we see that developing? I guess a couple of points, really. One is we spent quite a lot of money on various strategic initiatives, which in their orientation are cost focus. As we go into 2026, we see the full year run rate benefit of those investments take place. Whether those are around the business units are alternatively around the functions, including things like our systems and, of course, our various other risk, finance and other support functions, those strategic investments engineer rather help us engineer a lower cost base going forward and '26 represents a full year run rate for a number of those. At the same time, our cost growth in respect of OpEx is slowing somewhat. And that in part is because of some of the investments in things like the FTE reductions that we have made over the course of this year. You'll remember earlier on this year, we talked about our severance budget being higher for '25 than it had been previously. And that has been the case, said in turn, that helps us address OpEx growth over the course of '26. The result of that is that we expect 26 costs to be flatter than you have seen recently. I won't commit to absolutely 0, but nonetheless, you should expect to see them be flatter than they have been previously. And that, in turn, or rather in conjunction with the income developments that we talked about is what helped us deliver a cost/income ratio of sub-50%. Now to be clear, Sheel, it is not going to be sub-50% by much. And we've said that before, it's worth repeating. But nonetheless, it will be delivered and it will be sub-50%. Operator: Our next call is Chris Cant from Autonomous. Christopher Cant: I had one on stable coin and tokenized deposits and one on motor, please. So on the former topic, I mean, obviously, lots going on and you're involved in this U.K. finance initiative in terms of tokenized deposits. In terms of time scales and relative regulatory burdens, I guess the question is, can the industry move fast enough to deliver tokenized deposits ahead of stable coin providers potentially trying to get a foothold? And what sort of time lines do you think we're talking about to move beyond the use cases? I know there's a few things that are moving outside the sandbox in terms of remortgage, for instance, what sort of time line are we talking about to move beyond the use cases currently envisaged by the U.K. finance initiative. And on programmable money, could you give us an idea of the use cases that you see? I guess, it's corporate clients that are more interested in these options. Could you give us some examples of use cases that corporate clients are looking for? That would be interesting. And then on motor, the FCA consultation, obviously, you're going to feed into. One of the points from the FCA's perspective, I suppose, is that if we don't capture the majority of cases through a redress program, and it goes through the courts, then administrative costs would be potentially materially higher. Is that something that you agree with? i.e., you would be pushing for a narrower scheme potentially or for less redress and taking then some risk that the administrative burden of more cases remaining in the court system would push costs in that area. William Leon Chalmers: Yes. Thanks for those questions, Chris. First of all, on stable car and tokenized deposits. A couple of points to make there. What is about the path forward on that? And then the second is around use cases. Said earlier on, the rise of stable kind has obviously been notable in recent periods. And it's been particularly notable in the context of international payments where, as I said, there may be some advantages in terms of speed and cost. What we think in the U.K. is that the GB tokenized deposits, GTD that we are constructing together with the industry is effectively commercial bank money in its current form, which allows interchangeability between a digital point, if you like, an analog coin the current coin that is there in the market. And that has tremendous advantages. It has tremendous advantage from a customer point of view because it is basically one and the same, and they should be able to move freely between digital money and, if you like, analog money. And that makes it a much more kind of customer-friendly approach. It also means that we, as banks can offer that to customers as our money effectively together with all of the security and indeed, insurance benefits that are currently in place and of course, from a regulatory point of view, together with all of the KYC and so forth that we currently have in place. So it is -- it goes hand in hand with today's money in a way that is, as I say, very user-friendly from a customer point of view. And in that sense, has material benefits over what stable coin has to offer, which is clearly not interchangeable with commercial bank money. It is not one and the same thing. In terms of timetable, Chris, I think your point -- your question rather, is a good one. We need to move quickly on this. And indeed, use cases, as I said, landing in the first half of next year, we would expect off the back of that to be able to get something out in a workable customer proposition format, I hope by the first half of 2027, if not before. Now what we really need to fall into place in order to secure that progress, if you like, is a regulatory framework that is consistent with the ambitions of the industry and indeed is consistent with how the Bank of England would like to see this play out. As a form of digital money in the U.K., it is important that in place in a supportive manner. So that's really what we need. But if that is in place, then the speed of this is very much within the sex hands, and we would expect to play a leadership role in securing that, making progress and indeed getting to the customer benefits that we think are promising as a result of this. In terms of use cases, you mentioned hotel and for sure, there are wholesale use cases here, Chris, but I don't think it's just that. That is to say, digital money offers use cases, both in the wholesale and in the retail space. Wholesale, we've just started an example with Aberdeen using basically tokenized assets as collateral that offers meaningful efficiencies in the context of collateral management and need speed and pace and indeed cost of collateral alongside transactions. Likewise, the digital kill is an innovation that is being sponsored in terms of one of my use cases and again, offers meaningful speed, cost and efficiency benefits from a customer point of view. And then, of course, transacting with each other. I say corporates can transact with each other in digital asset format. Again, that is going to offer speed and transaction cost benefits. But as I said, these are also [indiscernible] benefits. So 2 out of 3 of our use cases are in the retail space, one being effectively cash on delivery to meaningfully cut fraud in the retail space and the other being effectively reengineering the home buying journey off the back of programmable money for just that journey. So I think there are meaningful retail benefits there, too, Chris. We've got a lot to do in this area in digital assets. But as I said, if we get it right, there's an awful lot of customer value to be created. On the second topic, Chris, on Motor. It is our view, as I mentioned earlier on, that the motor proposals as put forward by the FCA are currently disproportionate. And they're disproportionate as for 3 main reasons. One is because we believe the determination of unfairness is too broad who is because we build the judgments that are inherent in these proposals do not align to the Supreme Court clarity that was provided earlier on this year. And 3 is because we think the redress calculation as said, is at best tenuously linked to harm. Now what that all means, Chris, is that, indeed, if the proposals remain as broad as they are. In many respects, at least, we would expect to see better outcomes in the context of litigation because presumably, the courts will take into account the Supreme Court rulings in the way in which they were made. And presumably, the courts will take into account the linkage between address and harm. So in that sense lease, I would expect litigation outcomes to be better than much of what is in the FDA proposals right now. Now having said all of that, Chris, we clearly want to move on from this. We clearly want the business to move Ireland to focus on customer value creating propositions we have today just as we expect to be in the future. So as a result, that is why we've taken a GBP 1.95 billion best estimate for the provision which in turn is not far away from what it would be if the FDA were to enact their proposals in full. It's very much in the spirit of saying, okay, look, we don't agree with them. We're going to do what we can to change them and get them into a better place. But we are provisioning on the basis that a large part of them is going to stay in place, and we want to move on, and that's what this provision is designed to do. Operator: Our next caller is Guy Stebbings from BNP Paribas. Guy Stebbings: Had a couple of questions back on net interest income. The first one is around volumes. The interesting asset growth was quite strong in the quarter, a couple of billion ahead of consensus on average nearing assets and the end of period position at [indiscernible] Q4 in a good place. If you could talk about sort of broad expectations for the outlook from here, I made your contractor comments on mortgage volumes probably being out of our better-than-expected performance in Q2. So it sounds like we're talking to a positive trajectory, which given your Q4 NIM which takes quite a promising picture. And then related to this, on mortgage spreads. So interested in your comments in response to Perlie's questions and perhaps the market reacts to the headwind from mortgage spread shown on upcoming maturing cohorts by lifting new spreads. I wondered within that, your comment signal that maybe current spreads have drifted a little bit lower in recent months on new lending and perhaps you're getting to levels you're a little bit less comfortable [indiscernible] just reading too much into the remarks there. I guess I'm really trying to work out on the upside versus downside on your initial expectations. You had the visibility clearly on the maturing yields for quite a while, but where the new lending spreads are coming in better or worse than what you'd initially envisaged. William Leon Chalmers: In respect of AIA, first of all, the Q3 performance, as you know, saw a meaningful jump in terms of AIs off the back of what has been increased lending over the course of the year as a whole and continued into the third quarter. So maybe taking a step back before getting to AAAs. As you know, we've had GBP 18 billion growth within the lending book year-on-year, which, of course, contributes to meaningful IA growth on a kind of realized basis, if you like. And within that, we've had cards year-to-date up 7%. We've had personal loans up 13%. We've had Motor up 5% over the course of the year. We've had mortgages up GBP 8.7 billion or 3%. It's a really decent loan performance for the business. in total, GBP 18 billion, up 4% up on assets for the year. And as you say, that is now translating into AIA growth, 65.5% in the -- we're seeing continued growth in the course of quarter 4 across the asset. So of course, it is a slightly shorter period because of seasonal factors but [indiscernible] you should expect to see growth within assets within quarter 4 that will be perfectly respectable. And off the back of that, deliver continued strength in AIA for the remainder of this quarter and looking into '26 and it will be that combination, i.e., AIA growth, together with the step-up in the margin that I mentioned a second ago, which in turn sets the stage for 2026 and gives us a lot of confidence in our 2026 guidance. So that's a picture of AIA's guy, which I hope is helpful. On mortgage spreads, it's interesting. I mean, we've seen now 70 basis points Q1, Q2, Q3. It is fair to say that we've seen perhaps a basis point or 2 of erosion within that over the course of these successive quarters but we are still rounding to circa 70 basis points in the course of quarter 3 and comfortably rounding to circa 70 basis points in quarter 3 to be clear. A couple of points to make within that. One is -- when we look forward, my comment earlier on about whether there will be a bit of repricing of the back of 5-year charities and therefore, people feeling a bit more pressure in their mortgage books. We're not banking on that to be clear. When we put forward our guidance for in excess of 15% ROTE and the guidance we'll be giving you next year for the component of net interest income that will make up or contribute to that outcome. We have never been and are not banking on any uptick, if you like, in mortgage spreads that is driven by that 5-year maturity pattern that I talked about earlier on. So we're not banking on it. If it comes, so much the better, and you'll see that in the context of our interest income at the time. The second point I wanted to make is the business or rather the spreads at which we are writing business right now, contribute to ROE attractive mortgages for us. And that's certainly true on a stock -- on a marginal basis. It is also true, albeit at a lower level on a fully loaded basis. So you're seeing very attractive marginal returns even at the current spreads. You are seeing, if you like, fully loaded returns that are still above the cost of equity. So we're happy to write them. We're particularly happy to right and bearing in mind a couple of other factors. One is that we are increasingly able to contribute protection alongside the mortgage product as our insurance and our retail businesses work increasingly closely alongside of each other. We're now up to about 20% protection penetration for mortgage products and so this is a strengthening relationship that we're seeing, not just a one-off mortgage relationship. And then the second is that we see an increasing share of our mortgage coming through the direct channel. And that is a more profitable product for us to write. It is also one that more closely aligns us to the customers, to be clear. But at the moment, at least, we're seeing about 24% of our mortgages coming through the direct channel. That is, frankly, more than we've had for a long time, and it is a result of a very deliberate strategy that we are embarking on. So in that context as well, Guy, we were able to write mortgages which are attractive to us on a stand-alone basis. But off the back of the, if you like, relationship that we're developing and the channels through which we're distributing is a more attractive position. Operator: Our next caller is Ed Firth from KBW. Edward Hugo Firth: I had 2 questions actually. The first one was just the sort of -- I guess, I don't know what the right way is cadence, I guess, if you like, or the growth rate of NII. I mean if I look at your -- you're talking about around GBP 13.6 billion for the year. And year-to-date, it's 10.1%, which would suggest somewhere around 3.5 in Q4, even my analysis, I can do that. We suggest that to a slightly slower growth rate than you saw in Q3 rather than a higher growth rate. So I'm just trying to think -- is there something I'm missing there? Is it something about nonbanking income? Or is the GBP 13.6 billion really a number that we should take us up as a sort of very safe space that actually all other things being equal, we could see something better than that. So I guess that's my first question. And then the second one was, I think you were saying that we should put another GBP 175 million in for next year for the buyout in revenue, other income for the buyout of the SPW joint venture. Is there a cost offset on that? Or is that just like straight through the bottom line? I mean, obviously, you talk about modestly higher for the little bit for this year. I'm just wondering what sort of cost numbers might equate to that GBP 175 million or is that just a straight number we should just put in straight [indiscernible] William Leon Chalmers: Yes. Thanks, Ed. In respect to net interest income growth, first of all, the easiest way to explain it is I think the following. As you know, we've upgraded to circa GBP 13.6 billion from GBP 13.5 billion. That is intended to be, and I hope very clearly is a sign of confidence in terms of our net interest income trajectory. It is -- as you pointed out, hopefully, as is evident in the guidance, the circa word, the C is very deliberate. That is to say 13 points is not intended to be a cap. It is saying circa GBP 13.6 billion. So I'll kind of leave you to move around from that. But it is -- now that in how things develop will be around GBP 13.6 billion, including numbers that go above GBP 13.6 billion provided that they are within the circa range. . The -- stepping back, net interest income in quarter 3 was, what, GBP 3.45 billion. It's up about GBP 90 million growth versus Q2, which we, as you know, is about 3%. Some of that Q2 growth that we saw in Q3 is day count increase. And so a slightly lower amount of that is underlying increase. If you look forward into Q4, we expect to show continued progress in NII with to be clear, probably a similar absolute income growth in Q4 as we saw in Q3, a similar absolute income growth in Q4 as we saw in Q3. But to be clear, none of that will be daycount benefit. And that is to say the daycount in Q4 same as the daycount in Q3, which if you translate that, that means that growth is actually strengthening, not weakening. So growth is strengthening in Q4 rather than weakening, and that is off the back of the factors that we discussed before, which is the step-up in the margin, which is, as I said, more pronounced in Q4 and then the AIA progress that I was discussing with guidance just a second ago. And now it's coming off the back of the fire. So all of that, hopefully, helps can illustrate the point. And in turn, we have a lot of confidence in that number. So hopefully, that's helpful. On the SPW point, when we -- unfortunately, all good things come into price, I guess. So when we look at the GBP 175 million incremental That, in turn, comes with costs, which are probably going to be about GBP 120 million in excess of what you saw previously there. Now you didn't actually see them previously because they were all consolidated in the OI line. So it's probably about GBP 120 million adding costs to procure that circa GBP 200 million which, in turn, the OOI is about GBP 175 million ahead of what we'd have previously seen. So I hope that's clear. There's a couple of other points that maybe I should make in the context of the SPW transaction, [indiscernible] transaction, which are important to us, one is we did it at 0 capital cost. As you know, we had to give up our 20% share in [indiscernible] in order to get that. But the benefit that we're getting from that casino share was a modest annual dividend that you saw in Q4 and frankly, this feels to us like -- from our perspective at least, a really positive trade, but it was done at 0 capital cost. And then the second point is we'll have to work at it to make sure that it comes within our cost income ratio. But as I said, that's consistent with our sub-50% cost income ratio guidance. But at the same time, you can probably imagine, as with many of these wealth businesses, this is a materially RoTE positive transaction, and we'll deliver an RoTE that is well above not just our cost of capital, but probably well above the types of IoTs that we'll be delivering on a kind of group aggregated basis. This is a net positive contributor to the ROTE of the business. Most importantly, Ed, it's a very important strategic development and indeed, a very important part of our customer proposition. Operator: As you know, this call is scheduled for 1 hour, and we have now exceeded the end of the allotted time. So this is the last question we have time for this morning. If you have any further questions, please contact the Lloyd's Investor Relations team. With that, our final caller is Amit Goel from Mediobanca. Amit Goel: So 2 relatively quick questions from me. One, just on the deposits -- the real deposits. So some positive trends there on the back of the pricing decisions. Just curious whether that's largely done now or whether we could continue to see a little bit of that shift and whether or not that can benefit the hedge capacity. And then the second question, just curious how engagement with the government is going ahead of the budget and also whether or not they kind of recognize the motor costs when also thinking about banking sector taxation? William Leon Chalmers: Yes. Thanks, Amit. The -- in respect of each of those, as you say, deposit performance has been pretty good over the course of this year, GBP 14 billion up in total, 3% year-to-date increase. So a good performance in deposits. And within that, retail is up GBP 4 billion year-to-date. And what we saw within retail in the third quarter was a little bit of outflow within the U.K. retail savings area, and that was very much within the fixed-term product, off the back of effective pricing decisions that we had taken, given the fact that we performed so strongly in Q2, in particular, in the ISA season, which we highlighted at the time. So this was a kind of, I suppose, inevitable reaction to very deliberate pricing decisions that were taken in the course of quarter 3. It was good to see that it was offset by PCA performance in the course of we were up GBP 1.2 billion, which is a good performance. And as you know, leads us to a year-to-date performance within PCA is up around GBP 0.5 billion or so. I think a couple of things are happening there, Amit, which are pretty constructive on the whole. We're seeing continued wage inflation with respect to our customers. Importantly, we are also seeing reduced levels of churn out of the PCA product into savings products and into fixed term in particular. And so that falling churn is down about 33%, i.e., down about 1/3 in Q3 versus Q2. That's a material reduction in churn, and we expect to see that pattern more or less continue going forward. But it's good to see. As said, PCA is an incredibly important customer product from our point of view. It's an incredibly important product from a structural hedge point of view. And so the solidity of the PCA performance has been good to see. As we look forward, I think we do expect churn to continue to add Q3 was particularly marked, but nonetheless, we continue to see -- we continue to expect it to add going forward. PCAs, we are seeing other trends slowing government payments, for example, probably over time saying wage growth as well. And so PCA performance, I don't think we expect to see it be particularly exciting, maybe more or less static might be a reasonable way of looking at it. We'll see how it goes. Going into next year, I think that starts to change as things pick up perhaps a little bit more. Our expectation for the structural hedge to be clear and it insofar as it relates to this issue is we're not banking on significant increases in structural hedge balances. So all of our forecasts for you, the GBP 1.5 billion growth in structural hedge income, for example, going to next year, GBP 6.9 billion revenue in total from the structural hedge. That is built on a steady hedge. And so if we see performance within PCAs, instant access and other hedge eligible deposits, including NPCA within BCB, which has shown an uptick actually in Q3, if that performs more positively than we expect, that would represent structural hedge upside and opportunity. At the moment, we're expecting flat structural hedge performance. On your second question, Amit, in respect to budget, a couple of points to make, really. One is the business has been really only very modestly affected, if at all, by budget concerns. So I mentioned earlier on that we've seen mortgage performance being very strong. As you know, GBP 8.7 billion year-to-date, GBP 3.1 billion of that in the third quarter. We've seen applications up 19% over the course of the third quarter. We've seen completions up 23% over the course of the third quarter. And so no meaningful sign, if you like, of insertion because of budget in the third quarter mortgage performance. And then within the pensions business, another area that conceivably might be affected. We've seen a little bit of an increase in individual pension encashments, but no material change to be clear within Workplace. And in any case, any change in volumes that we have seen in the pensions area have been well below what we saw last year. So really nothing to report effectively in terms of the, I suppose, hesitation that might be induced by the budget overhang in respect to the business as usual. In respect to tax, I mean, I think those are really decisions for the government, obviously, and we'll leave them to make those decisions as and when they see fit. From our perspective, at least, the most critical thing is that we have a stable and a predictable tax regime and one that is competitive. That is to say, at the moment, we're a material taxpayer as you know, GBP 1.5 billion of corporate tax all in, including things like NII and BA and so forth about GBP 2.5 billion of total tax paid. We see ourselves a meaningful tax contributor. We see a stable and competitive tax regime and indeed a predictable tax regime as essential, frankly, to the continued prosperity in the financial services sector and by extension, all of the things that we can do for the U.K. economy as a whole. So I think that's really all we'd say on the tax front, Amit, which I hope is useful. Operator, we're going to call it a day for now on the questions. I just want to say thank you to everybody for joining the call today and your interest in the stock and the company is, as always, greatly appreciate it. Thanks very much, indeed. . Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's call. There will be a replay of the call and webcast available on the Lloyds Banking Group website shortly. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Welcome to the Icade 9-month Trading Update Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Now I will hand the conference over to Nicolas Joly, CEO. Please go ahead. Nicolas Joly: Good morning, Nicolas Joly speaking. Thank you all for being here today on this call. Along with Bruno Valentin, we are delighted to present this morning Icade 2025 9-month update. This presentation will be, of course, followed by a Q&A session. Let's move to Slide 5 for an overview of the main messages. To date, Icade has completed or signed preliminary agreements for EUR 430 million in disposals. This includes a reduction of the group exposure to healthcare activities by circa EUR 210 million and the sale of mature or non-strategic assets for EUR 220 million. The investment division reported a very good rental activity with circa 166,000 square meters signed or renewed to date. This volume was boosted in October by the renewal of 41,000 square meter in EQHO Building with KPMG. For several months, the financial occupancy rate has improved, notably for well-positioned offices and light industrial assets. On the property development front, H1 trends are continuing into H2. By the end of September, Icade recorded stable order volumes with a total value decrease of minus 5%. Lastly, we reaffirm today our 2025 group net current cash flow guidance between EUR 3.40 and EUR 3.60 per share. On Slides 6 and 7, we focus on the good progress made on disposals. Early August, Icade signed an agreement with BNPP REIM to sell its stake in a diversified portfolio of 23 health care assets, accounting for circa 15% of its exposure to the healthcare real estate sector. This transaction with one of France's leading real estate investment management firms confirms the quality of healthcare portfolio in Italy. These sales represent circa EUR 173 million for Icade, in line with the asset values included in the group NAV as of June 30, 2025. The proceeds from the sale will repay the shareholder loan from Icade to Icade Healthcare Europe almost in full. The deal is scheduled to close at the end of the year. In addition, year-to-date, Icade reduced its exposure to Praemia Healthcare by EUR 36 million through 2 smaller transactions completed in the first half of 2025. The property investment division also secured EUR 220 million in disposal of nonstrategic or mature assets. Since the last year results, preliminary agreements were signed on additional assets for EUR 115 million, namely an office asset covering 1,800 square meters on Charles de Gaulle for EUR 17 million, the remainder of the B&B Hotel portfolio for circa EUR 30 million and the entire Mauvin business park in the north of Paris, representing 21,000 square meters for EUR 69 million. This successful transaction is the direct result of the hard work of our asset management teams who managed to bring the occupancy rate of this park up to 100% by the end of June. All of these transactions represented an average yield of about 6.1% and were completed at prices above the net asset value as of the end of December 2024. Let's look now at the performance of investment division on Slide 9. Over the first 9 months of the year, the rental market remained challenging with take-up in the Greater of Paris region down 8% year-on-year. The subdued economic environment and French political instability continue to weigh on corporate real estate decisions. As we observed in the previous month, there has been still in Q3 2025, a lack of new leases signed for spaces over 5,000 square meters. In this environment, Icade teams delivered a very solid performance with around 125,000 square meters signed or renewed by the end of September. These agreements represent an annual rental income of EUR 29 million with a WALB of 6.8 years. This achievement demonstrates our ability to secure large leases over 5,000 square meters and to support our clients over many years like Club Méd, who has been our tenant within Pont de Flandre for 30 years. It also shows our expertise in creating spaces tailored to our client needs as we have done with Sopra Steria in the Orly-Rungis business park. The total financial occupancy rate stood at 84% as of September 30, 2025. In the well-positioned office segment, the financial occupancy rate stood at 88.8%, up plus 0.8 points compared to the end of December 2024, following, in particular, the leases signed for more than 3,000 square meters in the Hyfive building and nearly 2,000 square meters in the EQHO Tower. After including the [indiscernible] in the first building scheduled to start in Q4 2025, the financial occupancy rate of well-positioned offices stood at over 90%. In the light industrial segment, the occupancy rate stood at 90.4%, plus 1.5 points versus December 2024, thanks to leases signed in November, Port de Paris business park. In addition to the 125,000 square meter, we are very pleased to announce that we renewed in October the lease with KPMG for approximately 41,000 square meters. This lease has a firm commitment until 2031. In total, Icade has signed or renewed more than 60,000 square meters since the beginning of 2025 in the La Défense and Péri-Défense area, which offers significantly lower rents than Paris CBD, while still being very well served by public transport. Let's now move on to the operational performance of the development business line on Slide 11. The trends have remained consistent with the first half of the year. The development division recorded a stable orders volume with 2,815 units totaling EUR 722 million, down by 5%. Activity in the individual segment declined by 11% in volume, in line with the overall market. This decline occurred in an unfavorable tax environment marked by the end of the P&L tax scheme, which led to a sharp contraction in individual investor activity, i.e., minus 43% year-on-year. The momentum was more positive for our owner-occupier orders, which increased by 14%, supported by favorable measures promoting homeownership. Bulk orders showed an 11% increase in volume, but a 6% decrease in value. This discrepancy between volume and value changes is explained by a temporary shift in the product mix. Institutional investors continue to support business activity as they accounted for 51% of orders in volume terms year-to-date. It is also worth noting that institutional investor activity has historically been stronger in the second half of the year with circa 60% of bulk orders made in Q4 in both 2023 and 2024. I'll now turn the floor over to Bruno to present the change in revenues. Bruno Valentin: Thank you, Nicolas. Let's move to Slide 13, which we present the trend in consolidated revenue as of September 13, 2025. Icade's total IFRS revenue is down by 9% due to lower revenue from both the property investment and the development divisions. Let's dive into the financial performance and property investment division in Slide 14. In line with the figures reported in the first half of the year, gross income decreased by 6% to EUR 253 million, mainly due to tenant departures last year and the gradual crystallization of negative reversion of renewals. These effects were partially offset by the positive impact of indexation, which has gradually moderated but still contributed plus 3.2% and by early termination fees mainly related to the to-be repositioned offices. Move to Slide 15. On property development side, economic revenue amounted to EUR 729 million as of September 13, 2025, down by 12% year-on-year. This decline results firstly, from a drop in commercial segment with revenue down by 42% year-on-year due to the completion of major projects at the end of 2024, coupled with the low volume of new contracts signed in 2025. And secondly, from the progressive decline in residential backlog. I will hand over to Nicolas for the conclusion. Nicolas Joly: Many thanks, Bruno. So, let's move on Slide 17 for the 2025 guidance. We reaffirm our 2025 guidance of a group net current cash flow of between EUR 3.40 and EUR 3.60 per share. This includes net current cash flow from nonstrategic operations of approximately EUR 0.67 per share, excluding the impact of disposals. As of September 2025, the income already recorded by Icade represented 92% of annual net current cash flow from nonstrategic activities. Let me remind you that the contribution from nonstrategic activities does not include the payment of a potential interim dividend from Praemia Healthcare in 2025. Well, to conclude, in an environment that remains complex and uncertain, Icade teams achieved a number of successes during the quarter as illustrated by the continued execution of our disposal plan and a very strong leasing performance. We remain focused on implementing our strategy with priorities that include improving the occupancy rate of our assets, diversifying our portfolio and rigorously managing our balance sheet. And with that, let's start the question-and-answer session. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Florent Laroche-Joubert from ODDO BHF. Florent Laroche-Joubert: So 3 questions for me, if I can. So, my first question would be in offices. So, you have said that improving the occupancy rate is a high priority. So maybe could we say some words on your next challenges in offices for notably for the end of 2025 and 2026. So, what shall we expect? Maybe second question on healthcare assets. So, have you any comments to make for the other assets to be still sold in healthcare? And maybe last question on the 2933 Charles de Gaulle comment on your intention to dispose or not at the end of this asset? Nicolas Joly: Thanks for your question. Well, maybe start with the financial occupancy rate. Well, you saw that there were some recent improvements indeed in the occupancy rate for well-positioned and light industrial segment. As I said, including the positive effect of Pulse by the end of 2025, the occupancy rate will be above 90% for the well-positioned. Light industrial 90.4%. Well, of course, there will be a slight negative impact to be expected post disposal of the Mauvin business Park, but thing is getting better month after month. Once again, this remains and shall remain the first priority for the teams as for the Investment division. Maybe to give you a bit some visibility on the -- what to expect in 2026 regarding the expiries. I would say it's globally the same trend as in 2025, of course, with some expiries to be expected concerning the to-be repositioned assets. As more than half of the expiries will occur in H1 2026, we shall be in a position to give you some good visibility for the full year 2025 result presentation. And on the second question on the healthcare portfolio, well, clearly, given the political environment in France, which does not help and could discourage some international investors, our first priority is to focus on the international side. We've shared some good news with the Italian portfolio that shall be closed at the end of the year. We are also focusing a lot on the Portuguese assets, which are, as you know, high-quality assets that can attract unsolicited interest. And we are also marketing the small remaining part of the Italian portfolio, which constitutes of 5 assets, representing roughly EUR 20 million. On France, once again, on [indiscernible], there's no major news to share given the French context, but we are still exploring some additional routes, sale of noncore assets, additional swaps as we've done during the H1. And on the Charles de Gaulle asset, of course, we won't comment specifically on the asset or the process, but will keep being consistent with our DNA, which is to capture the maximum of the value creation. And once again, for this asset, in our view, a large part of the value has been already created through the eviction of tenants and the obtaining of the permit. And there's a good window because they have very strong liquidity on the investment market for core plus and value-add assets in Paris CBD. We saw a lot of transaction there with loads of cash. So clearly, with those 2, an opportunistic approach in our view shall be considered. Once again, the key decision will be made on value creation. Operator: The next question comes from Stéphane Afonso from Jefferies. Stéphane Afonso: First, on the EQHO Tower, could you please share the reversion rate reflected in this renewal? Second, on Icade's promotion, should we expect additional provisions or impairments since market parameters have changed? And finally, on asset values, market data points to further yield expansion. So, what should we expect in terms of asset value decline in H2? Or at least what assumptions are you using in your business plan? Nicolas Joly: Thanks for your question. Well, starting on the EQHO Tower, maybe just before sharing thoughts on the economics, let's take a minute to celebrate, which is really good news rewarding the hard work of the team that have been working on this for several months now. As we shared with you, we try to anticipate as much as possible the large break options we are facing and we have some strong relationship with our major tenants. So, we were really happy to succeed in that. Of course, we cannot share the detailed figure but maybe highlight the one thing is that as put in the PR, the signature rent is in line with the RV as we usually do. Of course, this crystallized a significant negative reversion. It was the highest negative reversion potential in the portfolio. That shall be captured after the end of the actual lease from October 2027. But I'm sure that if you put some raw figures, you can be able to estimate this roughly. As for the incentive, they are slightly above the market trend, but in my view, remain fully consistent with the very large surface that is considered. We are talking here about circa 41,000 square meters. So, this to conclude on the EQHO Tower is, in my view, an emblematic transaction, testifying once again the good dynamics of the area in La Défense district and the strong relationship we have with our tenants. Stéphane Afonso: Maybe jump in on your -- I have in mind that the reversionary potential was minus 11%. So, taking into account this renewal, where does it stand now? Nicolas Joly: Yes. This accounts for roughly 2 points out of those 11 on the average portfolio. Yes. But this once again will be captured at the end of the actual lease in 2027, because until then we are still on the current rate, okay? Is that clear? Stéphane Afonso: Okay. Yes. Thank you. Nicolas Joly: Jumping on your second question on Icade promotion. Of course, the market trend is still very tough. As you saw on the residential business, we've been deeply impacted by the end of the P&L tax scheme that had a negative impact on orders of individual investors were roughly minus 43%. As shared, there's better dynamic for owner occupier. The bulk sales still represent more than half of the total orders with a historical volume very strong in the Q4 and of course, very low activity in the commercial division, and that shall be the case in the years to come. So, we are still very selective in our operations. There may be 1 or 2 operations identified will be more difficult than expected. We've done the job on the whole portfolio in June 2024. So, there is no thing that is expected once again on that. And I would say that for the global activity, there are no recovery, in my view, expected before 2027, especially due to the political agenda. As you know, next year will be the local election on the town. So, this is usually years with very low level of building permits. Stéphane Afonso: So in your view, the provision and impairment that you recorded maybe 2 years ago are conservative enough at this stage? Nicolas Joly: Yes, we went through the whole portfolio on that. As I said, given the context, there still can be some operation selectively that can have some issues. But once again, on the whole portfolio, the job has been done. And on the last question on the evolution of the asset value, where you saw in H1 that there was a small deceleration of the asset value decline of minus 2.8%, if I remember well, in like-for-like, both from negative impact of residual yield decompression and to a lesser extent, lower expectation for indexation, clearly. Light industrial were more resilient, of course. But if we focus on offices, while it's still difficult to confirm the timing of value stabilization as there are still very few transactions on the market to assess properly the target cap rate. And on top of that, there are still some persistently high sovereign yields. But nevertheless, as you saw, we had a strong divestment activity during the first 9 months of the year and the sale of core assets completed year-to-date confirm the level of our actual NAV. Operator: The next question comes from Celine Soo-Huynh from Barclays. Unknown Analyst: I got 2 questions, please. The first one is about the guidance. In the press release, you said that the disposal of the Italian healthcare portfolio could impact the NCCF depending on the closing date. So, could you please give us a number around this? And the second one is around your outlook. You sound very cautious. I would almost say quite negative on your outlook for 2026. And we know your S&P credit rating currently is negative. Are you expecting a credit downgrade coming? Nicolas Joly: Maybe quickly on the first one, well, globally, the impact of the disposal of the Italian portfolio will be nonsignificant on the cash flows because it's expected to occur at the very end of the Q4, so not significant. On the outlook, well, cautious clearly because 2026 globally will remain very tough, in my view, on market conditions. Well, you get this political agenda in France that will definitely have an impact on the pace of recovery. We are facing persistently high sovereign yields that won't help. And thirdly, there's a lower positive indexation to be expected in 2026. On top of those macro effects, more specifically on Icade side, well, as I said, on the property development, given the political agenda, there is no expectation in our view of recovery in 2026. And on the investment side, I was mentioning a lower positive impact on indexation that we expect roughly at 1%, so much lower than expected some months ago. And as you know, there are still some negative reversions to be crystallized in the cash flow. Of course, this is already, as you know, in the NAV, but still to be crystallized lease after lease in the cash flows. And there are still some departures, mainly on the to-be repositioned assets that will still while on the like-for-like clearly. So not negative, but clearly, cautiousness in our view on both businesses and the macro is necessary. And maybe Bruno, you want to. Bruno Valentin: Yes. So, we remain highly focused on SAP, of course, the 3 points. First one, the disposal achieved over the last 9 months helped to keep the LTV ratio under control. Secondly, we have a limited committed level of CapEx in the pipeline. But nevertheless, we remain subject to variation in asset valuation. Nicolas Joly: And Celine, you were mentioning, I though the outlook, but the current outlook is stable. Bruno Valentin: It's not negative. Unknown Analyst: Sorry, I thought your outlook was negative. Nicolas Joly: No, no. This is stable. BBB stable. Operator: The next question comes from Michael Finn from Green Street. Michael Finn: Yes. I was just curious given the change in the sources of funds. Since it seems slightly better than it was, I'm curious if there is any change in the uses of those funds as well. Should I assume that the strategy is in line with the Investor Day from Feb of '24? Nicolas Joly: Yes, Michael. Well, we are still bang in line with ReShapE. As I shared in my conclusion, we are focused on our existing portfolio and the occupancy rate. We are also focusing on diversifying our exposure to additional asset classes such as PBSA or data centers, for example. There were no major news to be shared during this Q3. But clearly, we intend to reallocate into relative developments, the cash that comes from the divestment, but we are still bang in line with the main guidelines of the ReShapE strategic plan that we've shared in February 2024. Operator: The next question comes from Samuel King from BNP Paribas Exane. Samuel King: Just one clarification question on earnings guidance, please, and specifically on the contribution from nonstrategic operations. I understand that it excludes a potential interim dividend from Praemia Healthcare. But am I right in thinking it also excludes a potential dividend from IHE, which last year was around EUR 10 million? And if so, what is the decision made if IHE pays a dividend? Because in theory, the disposal and repayment of shareholder loans should improve the financial position of IHE and therefore, its ability to pay a dividend this year? Nicolas Joly: Yes. Thanks, Samuel for your question. Well, indeed, there was no assumption of an interim dividend on Praemia Healthcare and no dividend on IHE, but we don't expect dividend on IHE, most of the cash flows were drawn through the shareholder loan. So, nothing to expect on this regarding IHE. And as for Praemia Healthcare, we'll see there is an interim dividend before the year-end. And if this is the case, of course, we will be telling the market that it's the case. But indeed, you were right on the current guidance, the EUR 0.67 does not include any interim dividend on Praemia or any dividend on IHE. Operator: The next question comes from Valerie Jacob from Bernstein. Valerie Jacob Guezi: I just wanted to ask a follow-up question on your rating with S&P. My understanding was that S&P had assumed approximately EUR 700 million in order for your outlook not to be downgraded. I mean I know your outlook is stable, but I'm talking about an outlook downgrade. So, I was wondering you've only done EUR 400 million so far. If you don't sell Charles de Gaulle in 2025, is there a risk that your outlook can be downgraded? Or maybe if you can share some discussion you're having with S&P. Nicolas Joly: Well, today, once again, we are consistent with the trajectory we've shared. We've demonstrated our ability to sell assets, even sell assets at the right price. We said it was above NAV. There is a few opportunities in the pipeline that make us confident in being able to secure the debt on debt plus equity threshold at 50%. So, at this stage, nothing specific to worth sharing. Valerie Jacob Guezi: So if you don't sell anything until the end of the year, there is no risk in your view that your outlook is going to be downgraded. Is it what you're saying or? Nicolas Joly: Well, it's not for me to say. I mean it's S&P to say. But clearly, today, we've demonstrated that we are able to secure our debt on debt plus equity trajectory. And on top of that, the additional 2 KPIs are very comfortable headroom regarding the guidelines set by S&P. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So, I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Nicolas Joly: Okay. Thank you very much. Happy to share this part of the morning with you. Looking forward to talking to you. Have a nice day. Bye-bye.
Leszek Iwaszko: Good morning. Thank you for standing by and let me welcome you to Orange Polska Q3 2025 Results Conference Call. My name is Leszek Iwaszko, and I'm in charge of Investor Relations. The format of the call will be a presentation by the management team followed by a Q&A session. Unfortunately, our CEO, Liudmila Climoc, couldn't join us today due to urgent private matters. So, the sole speaker will be Jacek Kunicki, CFO. So, I'm passing now the floor to Jacek. Jacek Kunicki: Good morning. I'm pleased to say that the third quarter was very successful for Orange Polska. The success is rooted in our strong operating performance. We've achieved very good commercial growth, especially on the consumer market, where both the customer bases and the ARPOs have increased at a healthy pace. Our wholesale line of business has delivered more revenues and more margins. This comes as a result of new business, that is, monetizing our fiber infrastructure. It will generate more value over the course of the next few years, allowing us to compensate some large wholesale contracts that are due to end in 2026. This should remind us that wholesale is our strategic asset, complementing our retail operations and reducing our risk profile. Successful commercial activity is the anchor of the Lead the Future strategy and our value creation. After 9 months of 2025, we are pleased with the developments in this area as they lay a solid foundation for the strategy going forward. This performance has translated into strong financial results, and let's take a look at that -- these on the next slide. I'm pleased with the financial results of Q3. We have increased revenues, profit and cash generation. Revenues were up by a steep 9.3% year-over-year, including a spike in IT&IS sales and also a strong consistent contribution from the core telecom services business. This solid expansion of the core business, combined with cost discipline, drove the Q3 EBITDA almost 3% up year-over-year despite a demanding comparable base. We're really happy with this result. Our eCapEx has amounted to just over PLN 1.1 billion year-to-date. It is at a comparable level to the same period of last year, and it is in line with our full year plans. This quarterly evolution reflects different timing of CapEx between the 2 years. Following a stronger Q3, the year-to-date level of organic cash flows is also stable year-over-year. This reflects higher cash from operating activities, driven by the EBITDA expansion, which compensated for less proceeds from real estate disposal. My takeaway from this is that robust Q3 results give solid support to our full year prospects. After 9 months of the year, we're confident to deliver on our 2025 objectives and to create further value for shareholders. Let's now look -- take a look at the commercial activity in more detail on the next slide. It came very solid across all core telecom services. What particularly stands out this quarter is Mobile. The net customer additions have exceeded 100,000 and were at the highest in more than 4 years. As you may recall, our B2C strategy is focused on reaching new households not yet using Orange Polska services, in order to unlock the growth potential for the future. We're pleased that it is bearing fruit, and we are enlarging our customer footprint. The robust growth of the customer base was coupled with an increase of the Mobile ARPO, a slight improvement versus the trend observed a quarter ago. This comes due to a strong ARPO development in the main consumer brand, partly diluted by an increasing share of the B-brand customers in the overall customer base. Growth in convergence and fiber was solid, consistent with previous quarters and in line with our strategy. It was a combination of 5% and 13% growth of the respective customer bases and a solid 3% to 4% uplift of the average revenue per offer. In spite of fierce competition in fiber, we are successfully competing in the local battles and growing well by addressing our customers' need for higher speeds and for more content. Commercial growth is essential for future value creation, and these results demonstrate that we have the right commercial strategy to prevail in the core telecom offering. Let's now take a look at how these translated into revenues. Our Q3 top line dynamic was exceptional, above 9% growth year-over-year. It reflects 3 main developments: first, an exceptional hike of the IT&IS sales; second, a consistent growth of the core telecom services revenues. And 3 -- third, the accelerated dynamics of wholesale. Let's now review them one by one in a little bit more detail. The IT&IS revenues went up by an extraordinary 47% in quarter 3. The key driver of this performance was resale of software licenses. It is a tool to create future upsell potential. Hence, despite the large top line, its immediate contribution to profits was negligible. Nonetheless, looking at this development and also at other wins in our pipeline, we are now more optimistic about the future prospects for the growth in IT&IS revenues and profits. What is most important in our top line performance this quarter is that revenues from core telecom services grew by 6.5% year-over-year, repeating their strong and consistent dynamics. You've seen the drivers of this growth: robust increase of our customer bases and solid ARPO development. Finally, the third factor, wholesale. Its growth has accelerated on the back of fast revenues coming from the new fiber optics backhaul business that I mentioned earlier on. It is a multiyear business development, and it gives us a solid baseline also for 2026 and beyond. We anticipate to further grow the value of our wholesale line of business activity in the future. To sum up on revenues, after 9 months of the year, the top line growth exceeds 4%. Revenues from core telecom services are delivering a rock-solid performance this year, supported by robust net customer additions and ARPOs. And three, the new business in wholesale significantly boosts its future prospects, once again demonstrating the value-add of this activity to Orange Polska. Obviously, the profitable revenue growth is the main driver of the higher EBITDA. Let's look at the latter on Slide 7. EBITDA for Q3 has increased by almost 3% year-over-year. It benefited both from growth of the direct margin and from less indirect costs. Direct margin grew by PLN 21 million year-over-year and its underlying increase was even greater. Please note that last year's results included a positive one-off related to capitalization of PLN 53 million customer connectivity costs. Obviously, excluding this one-off, our direct margin for Q3 would have grown by 4% year-over-year. This outstanding growth was driven by high margin from core telecom services and by an increased contribution from wholesale. Indirect costs were PLN 4 million lower versus the third quarter of last year. We benefited from increased efficiency of network operations, including savings in field maintenance. The transformation of the network activity is an important part of our strategy, and we're pleased that we can already report its first tangible results. Q3 indirect costs have also reflected lower growth of labor costs and less advertising expenses versus the previous quarters. To sum up on EBITDA, we are very happy with its growth in quarter 3. It stems from a healthy combination of high margin from core business and cost discipline. And obviously, this is our main recipe to deliver consistent and sustainable EBITDA growth throughout the Lead the Future strategy period. With 3.4% growth for the 9 months of this year, for the year-to-date, we are obviously well on track to deliver on the full year objective in this area. Let's now turn to cash flow on Slide 8. Year-to-date, we generated nearly PLN 670 million of organic cash flow. This is almost exactly the same level as last year, helped by a very solid quarter 3. The OCF benefited primarily from a very healthy growth of cash from operating activity. It increased by almost PLN 200 million year-over-year due to a higher EBITDA and also due to less -- lower working capital requirement. It was offset by higher cash CapEx and also by PLN 80 million less proceeds from real estate disposal than in the comparable period of last year. We're satisfied with cash generation so far and with robust sources of growth coming from the operating activity. We plan for a peak of property sales in Q4, and we anticipate a solid organic cash flow in the last quarter of the year. Our leverage has increased very slightly following the acquisition of the 5G spectrum license and a payment of the dividend in July. However, our balance sheet structure remains very sound. Let's now summarize Q3 on the next slide. So, for us, the underlying message is our commercial and financial results in Q3 were very solid. We're pleased with the performance to date and in particular, with the commercial developments. We have a well-performing core telecom services business. The prospects for wholesale operations have improved substantially, and we see initial signs of recovery on the business market. These demonstrate our strong fundamentals. We're confident to achieve our 2025 objectives and also to create further shareholder value by implementing the Lead the Future strategy in subsequent years. That's all for me and we are now ready for your questions. Leszek Iwaszko: [Operator Instructions] First question is coming from the line of Marcin Nowak. Marcin Nowak: Three questions on -- rather, issues for me. The first one, regarding this new wholesale deal, could you provide more details regarding how much it contributed in the first quarter to both the top line and EBITDA, for how many years this contract is signed, and if you believe that there are similar deals possible in the future with other parties? The second issue, could you provide maybe an update on those provisions for significant risk that Orange has created last quarter? And the third issue, could you provide more detailed plans about the marketing spending and how -- by how it has been lower than in previous quarters? And what are the plans for the following quarters, especially with this lower spending, the commercial performance has been quite good. Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much, Marcin. I guess I will start with your last question. For the marketing or for the advertising and promotion spend that we were mentioning. When I look at quarter 3, the spending was roughly PLN 8 million lower than in the quarter 3 of the – of last year. And that is -- well, it is much different if we compare to the second quarter where advertising and promotional expenses have actually grown by PLN 12 million year-over-year. So, the difference to the Q1 was not that great. But obviously, quarter 3 was with a different timing of advertising campaigns and spendings versus last year. So that is regarding the costs. On the efficiency of those marketing spendings, I think it's fair to say we're very happy with those. Looking at the level of our net additions, both in postpaid and prepaid as well as in the convergence and fiber, we are very happy with the direction of the -- both advertising and overall the efficiency of the commercial period that we had for the back-to-school activity. And that is -- that has really delivered on our plans. So, we're now focusing definitely on the peak commercial season of Q4 and especially the second part of November and December to make sure that we are able to replicate a successful commercial activity. Then regarding your second question, well, I will not be able to help you much. We have created a provision for risks, claims and litigations of PLN 45 million in the second quarter of this year. And obviously, we've described as much as we can in the notes to the financial statements, but we are unable to provide you with the exact detail as this is commercially sensitive. We do not want to prejudice the outcome of any activities that are covered by the provision. And then regarding wholesale, well, it is a multiyear deal. Again, I will not be mentioning the specific commercial conditions because that is commercially sensitive. But definitely, we did see a much greater contribution of wholesale to the margin creation this quarter versus what we've seen in the previous quarters. I would say it's fair to say some of it was already -- so that was more than PLN 20 million better than in the previous quarters. Some of it was helped by the particular development that I have mentioned, and part was simply due to other business reasons because we do need to remind ourselves that wholesale is an important part of our activity, and it's not driven just by this one deal. And this is something that -- well, we've tried flagging for quite a long time. It enables us to monetize our infrastructure by selling data transmission, by selling FTTH access, by being an active player on all the interconnect market in Poland. It also enables us to decrease the risk profile of our retail activities because we are able to grasp some of the profits on the wholesale market. Getting back to this particular business development, it's obviously a long-term business development that we have, such as they usually are in wholesale. I would guess that the peak of the value will be the next 4 years. And I think we will see a more visible contribution of wholesale or of this business development already in quarter 4. And what I mentioned is when we take a look at 2026, we were aware, and we are aware that some important wholesale contracts are coming to an end and this particular business development should help us to offset the impact of those contracts ending. So, we're back to the state where we expect the contribution of wholesale towards our [ EBIT ] to actually be able to grow year after year. I think that is what I would mention regarding this particular activity. Thanks. Leszek Iwaszko: Our next question is coming from the line of Nora Nagy from Erste Bank. Nora Nagy: Two questions from my side, please. Firstly, could you give us, please, more update on the B2B segment? And what is your outlook for the coming period? And secondly, approximately when shall we expect the next Social Plan to be released? Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much, Nora. Very relevant questions. So, on the B2B line of business, I think it's fair to say that while this line of business has been extremely successful for us in the past, and the success of the previous strategy was -- B2B was a significant contributor towards that success, we did see the B2B under a greater pressure this year, both from the connectivity business and also from the slowdown on the IT&IS market. Some of it results from a very high comparable base of last year, where we benefited from some specific activity on the wholesale SMSs. Some of it results basically from a slower -- a softer IT market. I think it's fair to say that while we are not back to robust growth yet, so, the B2B trends, I would say, remain relatively fragile. If I'm comparing what we're seeing right now in terms of the amount of deals that we are able to win and the profit margins on the deals that we're able to win, we're getting, I would say, the first signals that could lead us to believe that we could be going back to growth in the next 2 or 3 quarters. That would be my outlook for the B2B. And that is something that we really need. You know that the Lead the Future strategy and generally, the value creation in Orange Polska, it starts with the top line and with a profitable top line, so with a direct margin. And we need the 3 engines of commercial activity to be delivering results. We see the B2C engine really going ahead full steam. We do see an acceleration in wholesale and improved prospects versus the ending contracts of 2026. So, between the last quarter and this quarter, we are more confident about the level of wholesale activity next year. And then I think the next step is we need B2B to get back to solid, consistent growth as it used to deliver in the past. And this is when we will be really happy with our ability to grow the EBITDA, to grow the cash flows on the back of a profitable expansion in the commercial activity. And then getting to your second question, before the year-end I would expect we will close the discussions with the social partners for the next round of Social Plan, which I anticipate it will cover 2026, 2027, and we should come back to you before the year-end with a current report whenever we do finalize it. And then probably this current report will also include some early estimate of the provisions that you would see in the income statement for the fourth quarter. Obviously, the final ones might be -- will be reported when we will report the quarter 4, but stay tuned for the next few months, and I'm sure that we will get back to you with the news on the Social Plan before the year-end. Leszek Iwaszko: Thank you. We have no more voice questions. Two questions that came online. First question, they cover topics we've already discussed, but maybe in a slightly different angle. So, a question from Pawel Puchalski from Santander. Wholesale segment, are you pleased with Q3 2025 Wholesale segment growth pace? And should we expect its further acceleration in coming quarters, years? What are wholesale margins? What is wholesale’s cash conversion? May we consider Q3 '25 wholesale pickup to represent likely driver of 2026 DPS increase? Jacek Kunicki: So, thank you, Pawel, for your questions. And you've rightly spotted wholesale as a point of focus. I think it's very relevant. Yes, we are pleased with the wholesale acceleration in Q3, definitely pleased. I do expect that we will have good value contribution from wholesale also in quarter 4. So that is something that will help us before the year-end, and it makes us even more confident in our ability to post a nice EBITDA growth this year. I think that is definitely a big help. When it comes to the next years, well, you are aware that we were previously anticipating that due to some contracts ending in 2026, wholesale might be under pressure in that year. I think that situation is much easier now, and we would be looking at ourselves actually getting a positive contribution from wholesale year-over-year because of this new business development. So that is definitely improving the prospects for wholesale going forward. And then in terms of margin and cash conversion, what I would say, it really depends on the level -- the margins really depend on the level of -- on the revenue line of wholesale because if you take some interconnect, the margin might be thin when we are looking at the interconnect coming in and going out, like some transit activities. But overall, the relation of revenues to margin is extremely high on those services where we are monetizing the existing infrastructure. And likewise, when we look at the cash conversion ratio, because we are treating wholesale as a way to monetize mostly existing infrastructure, then yes, the conversion of revenues to cash is extremely high, much, much higher than on the retail activity. It is because we are using and monetizing whatever infrastructure already exists. So obviously, wholesale has its limit when it comes to the size because by nature, it is filling up the needs of our competitors in this area. But the -- our ability to extract margin and cash from whatever revenues we get is extremely high. And that's why wholesale is a very important contributor to our results. On the DPS, I think it's -- stay tuned and we will talk about that in February because that is the moment that we make the decisions, and we are in a position to make some recommendations. What I keep on repeating throughout this year is that our primary focus with all the months except February, is to create conditions to allow us to be generating more profits and to be in a position to share more value creation with our stockholders, shareholders. And so, I do believe that the growth of profit and cash generation in quarter 3 is an important step in the direction of further value creation for the shareholders of Orange Polska. Leszek Iwaszko: We have another voice question coming from the line of Dawid Górzynski from PKO BP. Dawid Gorzynski: I have 2 questions actually. First on net customer additions in Mobile segment. It was particularly strong in the third quarter. And I wonder if there were some particular large clients that entered the base this quarter or it was like just a successful marketing activity from your side? So, this is the first question. And the second question is about organic cash flow outlook. Right now, we are flat after 9 months of the year, we are flattish, like organic cash flow is flat year-on-year. Last year was particularly strong. And I think that the expectation was that this year, CapEx -- sorry, organic cash flow should be lower. I wonder if you still think this is the true or maybe you see some upside potential? And you think that like exceeding PLN 1.1 billion of organic cash flow this year is at hand? Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much for your questions. I think starting from the net additions, yes, we did have a support of 2 large accounts in the Q3 numbers. And so, this was -- this is something that we are quite happy about. You could have read in the press that we took over 15,000 sim cards from the Polish Post. But this -- even if you were to take out those larger deals, it's still the best quarterly result in the last 3 years. So, I think -- I'm looking at the data right now for B2B, for B2C, for all the brands of both B2B and B2C, and it's -- across the board, we are very, very happy with all the results. If I take a look at the main Orange brands, the best results in a few years, new brands, new mobile, very good results, flex brands, very good results. It's across the board, good performance. And I would say both in postpaid and prepaid. So, this is particularly strengthening. And it reflects a good offering that we've had. It was supported by the family offer that we launched. It was supported by, I think, quite good advertising and a straightforward messaging for this commercial period. So, I know that my colleagues in marketing were happy with the results. And also, throughout this year, we do see simultaneously a good increase of the prepaid base. And when we take a look at, again, at the actions of this, it's about the quality of the promotions and the advertising. It is about us strengthening the position in some of the key distribution channels that we have had. And it enabled us to have a volume growth despite the fact that we've significantly increased the ARPO in prepaid and that we've gained a substantial amount of revenues and margin from prepaid as a result of that. So generally, mobile activity, very good in quarter 3, and I would not say it's a one-off driven activity. Obviously, everyone is now focused on the key period of November, December, where we need to be smart about the level of retentions that we make. But equally, we want to get as much as we can from the market when the availability comes in. So that is on the net additions. For the organic cash flow, I believe the PLN 1.1 billion that you mentioned was 2023. And last year was PLN 980-something million. I do agree this was quite a strong comparable base, which is something that we had mentioned. We are stable after 3 quarters. We are heading into quarter 3 with quite good operating performance dynamics, quite good from the perspective of the EBITDA and the ability to convert the EBITDA on to operating cash flow. So that is definitely supporting quarter 4. I think the main unknown today is how much real estate will we sell in Q4. Obviously, we're planning for a peak of real estate sales. That is directly helping our cash position. And so that remains, I think, the main uncertainty. But we are relatively confident about posting a good result, both in Q4 and for the full year. Leszek Iwaszko: And we have one more text question from Piotr Raciborski from Wood & Co. Congratulations on strong Q3 2024 results. Could you please again comment on strong ICT sales growth? Do you expect similar growth trends in the upcoming quarters? Do you see an increased demand on IT services from public institutions? Jacek Kunicki: Okay. Thanks a lot. Well, we don't expect that 47% year-over-year in quarter 4. It was quite an exceptional event. And I did mention it's -- it was driven by resale of licenses with a small margin. But it is important that we conduct these deals for the sake of the future upsell that we are able to do on the back of these deals. So, I would really not disregard the resale of licenses and our ability to then monetize on them over the next 4, 5 or 6 quarters. That is definitely worth doing, and we will continue doing that. Then regarding the future prospects, I think for us, it's not only a matter of Q4, but it's a matter of getting the right momentum to grow the revenues and margins from IT&IS or from ICT over the next years. I think when we take a look at the long-term potential, we are very optimistic. There is growth that is there to be had over the next years, both for revenues and for margin creation. And that is definitely the case. When it comes to IT, yes, it includes IT. I think that the IT market, while it was relatively soft this year, I do believe that it has still a lot of growth potential. And so, we definitely count on ICT revenues and margin growth in the next periods to come to help us to increase the EBITDA, increase cash generation and deliver value for shareholders. Leszek Iwaszko: Thank you. It appears we have no further questions. Thank you very much for participation. Please let us know if you'd like to meet us and then talk to you in February. Thank you. Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much. Bye-bye.